Secret History of Dianetics 1950 - L. Ron Hubbard and Thorvald Solberg - The McClaughry's Blog 1

Secret History of
Dianetics 1950: L.
Ron Hubbard and
Thorvald Solberg
This article both marks a World First reveal of the man whom L. Ron
Hubbard stated tried to force him to work at what was essentially the
Navy’s Project CHATTER and BLUEBIRD, and discussion of the
surrounds of this event plus the true sources of and reasons for the
retaliation/revenge campaign against Hubbard in 1950, one in particular
of which has never been revealed before. This is a very extensive
article with deep and ground-breaking research into Fredric Wertham
and his history, the power of the JAMA editor position and how that
relates, some early pulp and fan’s of pulps events that have been
overlooked, Hubbard’s conspiracy theories, and much, much, more.
There’s a little something for everyone. Enjoy.
~ Published December 2, 2019 ~
Dedicated to my honey, for our 35th Wedding Anniversary.

.
Thorvald A. Solberg
Rear Admiral and Chief of Office of Naval Research (Projects
BLUEBIRD/CHATTER)
he tried to force L. Ron Hubbard to work for him
.
Article “jump” points
About Thorvald.
Lead-up to the “event”.
What did L. Ron Hubbard say happened?..
Another World First reveal..
It was only after Hubbard said “No”..
Behind the scenes they sneaked..
Special section on Oliver Field
Special mini-section World First reveal – Leo Bartemeier
The Two Minds/Dual Spirit
More AMA documents
Hubbard’s challenge to Psychiatry
Hubbard and those “enemies”
The “commies”
Special stand-alone timeline of Hubbard’s propaganda about
who the “enemy” is
Oliver Field’s Pet Peeve – Orgone Therapy
Suppressing Cancer cures
Getting the media attack engine going now..
First, let’s take up Renfield Dr. Wertham.
That BIG FAT HOLE in Wertham’s history – World War II
Those Evil Comics
Both Firsts were Overholser mentees?
Side trip into the world of Pulps and Fanzines
Pulps and Fanzines Timeline
Back to the major media attacks now
Main MEDIA Timeline
Master Timeline – (all inclusive)
Chosen Black Propaganda and Black Public Relations Campaign
Preface
Footsteps in history
The body partner –
It is ONLY THAT BEINGwho

could change the physical
body states Hubbard had initial
success with in Dianetics.
Did L. Ron Hubbard ever recognise or even acknowledge the

importance of that?
No.
He didn’t want to because this was an equal being. Not a demon. Not
an “entity”. Not some lesser thing.
And that is the exact point where pretty much all of Dianetics and
Scientology went wrong. (see The True Nature of Man)
This article is meant to be a historical repository of sorts, a walking
through history in regards Dianetics and L. Ron Hubbard. Perhaps more
importantly, this article serves as a marker of a beginning.
A beginning of what?
You will find out when it is time, but until then please enjoy this offering
in the spirit it is given – the spirit of Truth.
Introduction
.
One thing first.
L. Ron Hubbard had actually incorporated an organization in New

Jersey in 1949. It was called The Institute of Advanced Therapy. There
is repeated erroneous information out there about this, mostly
generated by British intelligence shill Russell Miller. The correct
information was gathered in 2012, and the corporate record shows that
it was incorporated on August 1, 1949 with an address given of 42
Aberdeen Rd., Elizabeth, New Jersey. Hubbard specifically mentions
having formed this with Sara Northrup in a letter to the Attorney General
May 14, 1951 (FBI File, p. 96).
This shows his intention to form an organization around his engram

research that far back.
That said –
How I discovered this man Solberg and his connection to L. Ron

Hubbard is simple, and yet? No one has ever identified this man before.
It happened when I was going through lectures by Hubbard preparing to
assemble them into a video to go with various posts and articles here at
the blog – ones where we talk about what Hubbard says happened to
him in 1950.
Hubbard had stated in a number of lectures that the Navy tried to force
him to work for them in 1950. Since we have used these particular
lectures in a number of places, I was going through those first. In that
process, I suddenly knew who Hubbard was talking about, or rather
what position the person was. It’s not something Hubbard makes clear
– at all. He splits pieces of the story in like 4 or 5 lectures (probably
intentional) and only ONE of them had its own piece that wasn’t
anywhere else.
Let me show you what I mean as to the pieces related to the identity
only of who Hubbard says approached him, one Monday in the spring of
1950.
These are pieces from 3 different lectures spanning a 4-year period –

re-assembled.
The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology 31 December 1960

How We Have Addressed the Problem of the Mind 4 July 1957
A Postulate Out Of A Golden Age 6 December 1956
a very high-ranking officer, a very very very high-ranking

officer. You know brass, BRASS, brass…scrambled
eggs, you know, gilt on the cape edge, you know. … I
won’t announce this man’s rank or name, not in public.
…Secretary of the Navy says “OK” And that was an end
to the beautiful friendship with the American
government….this officer from the Office of Naval
Research…This admiral that had come to see me…
“You’re still in the service,” this admiral said. “I can put
you back on active duty at any time, so you’d better
volunteer.”
Ok. So it’s an ADMIRAL from the Office of Naval Research.
When I heard that bolded part the day I was working on that, CLICK. I
knew. This admiral wasn’t just from there, he was the head of the Office
of Naval Research – aka the ONR. So off I went to find him.
The ONR was established in August of 1946 to “maintain the successful
partnership of government, academia, and industry that had produced a
series of technological innovations during the war.” The Chief of Naval
Research is the senior military officer in charge of scientific research in
the United States Navy. The Chief of Naval Research has a rank of
Rear Admiral, and is in charge of the Office of Naval Research.
And there we have it.
As Hubbard put it:
this officer from the Office of Naval Research…This

admiral that had come to see me
Now all that was needed is to find out who that was during 1950.
That’s Rear Admiral Thorvald Arthur Solberg – the 3rd chief of the
ONR since its formation. He was the chief from 1949–1951.
From there?
Off we go into who and what this man was about and why would he
want Hubbard in the Office of Naval Research.
About Thorvald –
He’s the short guy 3rd from left.
Strangely enough, this guy was from my neck of the woods, Sandpoint,
Idaho, just a little north of the Post Falls-Coeur D’Alene Idaho corridor.
Even weirder, it was a young (and new) Senator Borah that originally
appointed him to the United States Naval Academy in Annapolis,
Maryland in 1912. I can tell you for a fact that if Borah knew what this
man eventually got up to? He’d be literally rolling over in his grave,
metaphorically speaking.
Why?
Well, we’ll get to that.
The other interesting thing that I found is that Thorvald also appears to
have been a member of the Explorer’s Club of New York City. I
say appears because the birth and death dates are a bit off. If that’s
true that’s him listed as one of their deceased members? Then that
would be another way Hubbard and Thorvald Solberg would have
known of each other.
As to DURING World War II, that’s another way Solberg and Hubbard
could have met/butted heads.
In around April of 1941, just after William Donovan came back from his
‘tour’ of British intelligence with William Stephenson in the
Mediterranean, Solberg was then sent to London as a “naval observer”,
a position that he held through February 1944. If you understand what a
“naval observer” was back then – it’s a Naval intelligence position. Just
like Hubbard was.
We need to keep in mind here that all sections of the Office of the
Naval Attache performed intelligence functions in relation to special
activities.
In the lead up to when Solberg goes to London, Captain Charles A.

Lockwood, Jr., U.S. Navy, assumed the duties or Naval Attache and
Naval Attache for Air on 6 March 1941, relieving Captain Kirk.
No, not that Captain Kirk, all you Trekkies out there. But yes, that really
was this guy’s name.
Something called The Technical Section of the London Naval Attache

office was organized on 1 January 1941. Solberg had reported for duty
on 25 June 1941 and was made the Head of the Material Section
of that section of the SPECNAVO (Special Naval Observer). His section
actually remained located at the Embassy, probably for security
reasons.
Reference: [NAVY REVIEWED 13-Mar-2007: DECLASSIFIED IN

FULL] OFFICE OF THE UNITED STATES NAVAL ATTACHE
AMERICAN EMBASSY LONDON ENGLAND 1939-1946)
Barely six months later? On 21 December 1941 he headed the entire
Technical section there.
Captain T.A. Solberg became head of Technical Section, Naval

Attache Office, and Maintenance officer for SPECNAVO. (NAVY
REVIEWED 13-Mar-2007: DECLASSIFIED IN FULL –
Administrative History United States Naval Forces in Europe
1940-46
Solberg was relieved 27 February 1944 and returned to the United

States in March 1944.
Whatever he was up to in 1942 got him promoted to the rank of Rear

Admiral in 1945, with his seniority backdated to December 1942. Now,
I know for a fact he was not justworking for the “Bureau of Ships” when
he returned to the U.S. in February 1944. In a way, although real, his
position there served as an intelligence cover.
His biggest priority?
He was working on the

Manhattan project with Leslie
Groves.
.
You know, the creation of the nuclear bomb project.
Let’s look at some sources about that. Oh, and by the way, before I
forget, there’s an interesting article featuring him in the Scientific
American back in 1949.
Let’s also keep in mind here that World War II didn’t officially end until
September 2, 1945, more than a year and a half away from when
Solberg bounced back across the “pond” (as the Atlantic ocean was
called).
Solberg jumped right in to the Manhattan Project, joining the Tolman
Committee in November 1944. Tolman – as in Richard C. Tolman.
Early in the war he had distinguished himself as a liaison officer

with British scientists and engineers in London. After he returned
to the Bureau of Ships in Washington as chief of the research and
standards branch in the shipbuilding division in February 1944, he
learned something of Abelson’s work on thermal diffusion at
Philadelphia. Of all the officers in the bureau at that time, Solberg
probably was the only one who had been exposed to any
details about the Manhattan project. Mills and Solberg joined
the Tolman committee early in November 1944 for a series of
interviews with scientists and engineers from all parts of the
Manhattan project. (Nuclear Navy 1946-1962 Richard G. Hewlett
and Francis Duncan; archived here.)
Front Row, left to right: Frank B. Jewett, Rear Adm. Julius A. Furer, James B.
Conant, Richard C. Tolman. Back Row, left to right: Karl T. Compton, Roger
Adams, Conway P. Coe, Irvin Stewart.
Source: “Scientists Against Time,” by James Phinney Baxter, 3rd. Boston: Little,
Brown & Co. 1946.
Solberg was appointed as a deputy member by Major General Leslie R.

Groves himself.
Admiral Solberg had been a deputy member of the “Tolman

Committee”, appointed by Major General Leslie R. Groves in the
fall of 1944, almost a year before the “Trinity Test” of the atomic
bomb at Alamogordo, New Mexico, to investigate further technical
developments in atomic energy for both civilian and military
purposes. This committee, under the chairmanship of Mr. R. C.
Tolman, had studied many suggestions from personnel connected
with the atomic energy projects concerning “the use of nuclear
energy for power and the use of radioactive by-products for
scientific, medical, and industrial purposes.” (An Administrative
History of the Bureau of Ships during World War II, Volume IV.)
LESLIE R. GROVES
The lead-up to the Tolman committee –
Scientists involved with the [Manhattan] project, nonetheless,

advocated for more openness and freedom of research, and
project contractors pushed for the Army to declassify reports
relating to their wartime work. As a result, Groves in early
November 1945 asked Richard C. Tolman, a Caltech chemist and
scientific adviser to Groves, to draft a declassification policy.
Tolman assembled a committee composed of Robert Bacher,
Ernest O. Lawrence, J. Robert Oppenheimer, Frank Spedding,
Harold Urey, and John Ruhoff. (Smyth and Tolman Committee
Reports)
What was one of the major results? Something us researchers still have
to deal with even now. CLASSIFIED redacted documents.
In its report, the Tolman Committee concluded that “in the interest
of national welfare it might seem that nearly all information should
be released at once.” But national welfare had to be considered in
light of national security. Still, “it is not the conviction of the
[Tolman] Committee that the concealment of scientific information
can in any long term contribute to the national security of the
United States.” […] Thus, the Tolman Committee concluded
that secrecy could be justified for reasons of national
security and then only if “there is a likelihood of war within the
next five or ten years.” Applying this general philosophy to the
question of secrecy in medical research, it recommended that “all
reports on medical research and all health studies” be immediately
declassified except for those reports that contained
information independently classified in the interest of short-
term national security. While the Tolman Committee report
generally advocated openness, it also set the precedent for
keeping declassification guides secret. (Smyth and Tolman
Committee Reports)
OK, so let me get this straight.
Documents from CHATTER, BLUEBIRD etc. etc are stillredacted and

it’s what…70 years later? So, by these rules, apparently every decade
for the last 70 years someone used the excuse to not declassify them
fully because WAR was expected within “the next five or ten years”.
Ergo, apparently WAR is still expected (more like planned) even now?
I wonder what war that would be…

That’s all just fricking peachy, but let’s skip forward now to when World
War II ends, because then came the disaster of the Bikini Atoll bomb
test.
Overall background –
…The division of special weapons was tied to General Groves

and the Manhattan District through Rear Admiral Solberg, who
had served as the Bureau of Ships liaison officer with the district
during the war, and through Commodore William S. Parsons, who
had worked at Los Alamos. In the new division Solberg was in
charge of the atomic power section, and Parsons led the sections
on guided missiles and atomic weapons. Both officers had seen
enough of the Manhattan project to sense some of the difficulties
the Navy would encounter in trying to transplant nuclear science
and technology from the war-time laboratories to the Navy. In late
1945 it was still common to regard atomic energy as something
which only physicists and chemists of Nobel prize stature could
master. It did not seem likely that a mere transfer of technical
reports could give the Navy an effective atomic energy laboratory
without at least some of the people who had worked in the
wartime project. Solberg and Parsons could see a role for nuclear
propulsion in the Navy eventually, but they were convinced it
would take time for the Navy to build proficiency in the new
technology. (Nuclear Navy 1946-1962 Richard G. Hewlett and
Francis Duncan; archived here.)
17, 22 and 24 January 1946 – Operation Crossroads.
The mission of Joint Task Force One was publicly announced by

its Commander on 24 January, when Vice Admiral Blandy told the
Senate Committee on Atomic Energy: “The mission of Joint Task
Force One is primarily to determine the effects of the atomic
bomb upon naval vessels in order to gain information of value to
the national defense. The ultimate results of the tests, so far as
the Navy is concerned, will be their translations into terms of
United States sea power. Secondary purposes are to afford
training for Army Air Forces personnel in attack with the atomic
bomb against ships and to determine the effect of the atomic
bomb upon military installations and equipment.” He also
announced that the atomic bomb tests had been assigned
the code name Operation Crossroads.
Around the middle of January, the Commander, Joint Task Force

One, requested that Admiral Cochrane designate an officer with
whom he could deal directly and personally on all matters
affecting the proposed tests, which by now were called
Operation Crossroads. As the Bureau of Ships had a paramount
interest in Operation Crossroads, Admiral Cochrane recognized
the great responsibility which would devolve upon the officer
selected to represent the Bureau and to carry out its extensive and
complex tasks. Accordingly, he decided to appoint Rear Admiral
T. A. Solberg, head of the Research Branch of the Bureau of
Ships, as the senior member of a large bureau group for
Operation Crossroads.
On 17 January, Admiral Cochrane appointed Admiral

Solberg to this position because it was desirable to have
someone of his rank and experience to coordinate all the varied
and extensive efforts of the Bureau of Ships and to insure the
success of the bureau’s work in the project.
He then instructed Admiral Solberg to prepare an administrative

order setting up a special section in the bureau to handle
Crossroads work. This order, dated 22 January, set up Code 180,
the Crossroads Section; and on the same day Admiral
Solberg was designated as head of the section and Captain
Kniskern as his senior assistant. A number of officers took up
duties in the section immediately, and others were added as
rapidly as they could be freed from current duties. (An
Administrative History of the Bureau of Ships during World War
II, Volume IV.)
An interesting Atlas Obscura article from 2016 explains the events that
came out of Operation Crossroads –
The most destructive part of the blast was the cloud of radioactive
water. U.S. Army Photographic Signal Corps
On July 26, 1946, the U.S. military tried a new type of nuclear
test. A joint Army/Navy task force had suspended a nuclear
device, oddly named Helen of Bikini, 90 feet below the surface of
the water, in the middle of Bikini Atoll, one of the isolated rings of
coral and land that make up the Marshall Islands. Arrayed around
the 21-kiloton bomb were dozens of target ships.
When Helen of Bikini exploded, it created a giant, underwater

bubble of hot gas. In seconds, the bubble hit the seafloor, where it
blasted a crater 30 feet deep and at least 1,800 feet wide. At the
same time, the surface of lagoon erupted into a giant column of
water, two million tons of it, which shot more than 5,000 feet
into the air, over an area a half-mile wide. In the seconds after
the blast hit the surface, a cloud of radioactive condensation
unfurled across the lagoon, hiding the column of water shooting
upwards. At the top, a mushroom cloud of gas bloomed against
the sky.
That first underwater test, the Baker event, instilled new awe for
the power of the bomb. The Navy had believed that many of the
target ships could survive the blast, be decontaminated, and sail
out of the lagoon. But within two weeks, Navy leaders had to admit
that the ships were so soaked in radiation that they couldn’t be
saved, and the Marshall Islands became a graveyard for irradiated
vessels. After that, even in the years that the United States and
the Soviet Union regularly tested nuclear bombs, only a few were
ever underwater.
The “Navy” actually being Thorvald Solberg.
This was NOT a feather in his cap. What the hell was that
man thinking? People died from radiation exposure. Some even years
later, including him!
Look at what his son John Buren said:
John Buren grew up in Montgomery County, the son of a career

Navy man. But any golden childhood he might have had didn’t last
long. His father, Rear Adm. Thorvald Arthur Solberg, took part in
the infamous Bikini Atoll nuclear bomb tests and was hospitalized
with radiation poisoning when John was 6.
And geez Louise. Thorvald and his “scientists” couldn’t even do a

simple damn volume displacement calculation to predict that this would
happen? I do NOT believe that. I think he wanted the ships/crew
irradiated for whatever sick reason that was.
Is it any surprise this man was then made the head of the Office of
Naval Research where all sorts of human experimentation was going on
under the guise of “innocent” research?
Yep. That’s what happened.
A little background first, using one of my research timelines.
1947 – the OSS became the CIA, and the newly named intelligence
agency was authorized for propaganda including psychological
operations for which it immediately began recruiting psychologists to
spread the belief, promoted by the CIA within America’s borders, that –
…the Communist regimes in the Soviet Union and China had invented
secret, sophisticated mind control techniques, although the agency
knew the contention was unfounded (McCoy, 2006, p.34).
They used this false idea both to gain funding from Congress but also to
generate approval within the DOD for human experimentation projects
along these very lines.
As discussed earlier, the Office of Naval Research (ONR) had been

established in 1946 “to plan, foster and encourage scientific
research.” The Chief of Naval Research is thesenior military officer in
charge of scientific research in the United States Navy. ONE of its
divisions was Psychologicalresearch.
All of ONR’s scientific work is performed under its Research Group

made up of seven operating units- the Earth, Material, Physical,
Mathematical, Biological, Psychological and Naval Sciences
Divisions. (November 1956 Navy magazine p.16 of PDF)
Note: The above is followed by rather overly innocent descriptions of

each one. Under Biological and Psychological we’ve got just a world of
secret projects going on there.
The one we’re mainly tracking though, it’s actual name is the
“Psychological Sciences” division.
1947 – The office of Naval Research had founded its “Psychological

Sciences” research program becoming the first extramural research
program of the DOD – the Department of Defense. “Within two years of
its initiation of the ONR research program, the Navy doled out 117
contracts at 58 universities under its newly founded Psychological
Sciences research program (Page, 1954). In the first five years of the
post-war period, the ONR provided $2million per year, or $16 million in
estimated equivalent [21 million in 2019 dollars], establishing this office
as the greatest single source of funding for psychological
research until the founding of the National Science Foundation (NSF)
in 1950 (Darley, 1957).” (2008 paper by psychologist Frank Summers.
(short title) Making Sense of the APA – some of the text can be found
here)
“During its tenth year, the Psychological Sciences Division of

ONR was supporting 143 separate contracts for research in
various fields of psychology.” Summary tables are presented of
financial support of contract research projects by the
Psychological Sciences Division, ONR from 1946 through
1956, areas of contract support by Psychological Sciences
Division 1946-1956 and the geographic distribution of 143 ONR
contracts active in the year 1956. Psychology’s place within ONR,
the substantive work of the branches of the Psychological
Sciences Division (Physiological Psychology Branch, Personnel
and Training Branch, Group Psychology Branch, Engineering
Psychology Branch, and the Manpower Branch), ONR’s impact on
psychology (in terms of publications, conferences and symposia,
and the training of graduate students), the evolution of psychology
in a government agency, and perspectives of the present and the
future are presented.(John G. Darley, “Psychology and the Office
of Naval Research: A Decade of Development,” American
Psychologist 12 (June 1957):305.
That also included SECRET projects.
End notes (17 and 18) from this publication were very helpful in
establishing WHEN and HOW SECRET it was that the Office of Naval
Research was funding such projects, and that people were not
permitted to say what they were really doing.
John G. Darley, “Psychology and the Office of Naval Research: A

Decade of Development,” American Psychologist 12 (June
1957):305.
Psychologists, such as McGill University’s Donald Hebb, whose

work on sensory deprivation for the Canadian Defense Research
Board emerged directly out of war-inspired concerns with
“brainwashing” were not permitted to say as much in their
published studies. See Gilgen, American Psychology Since World
War II, 122.
What kind of secret projects?
This kind –
1947 – Project CHATTER was instituted by the U.S. Navy in 1947. Dr.
Charles Savage was put in charge of that, experimenting on mental
patients (and animals) through the auspices of the Naval Medical
Research Institute in Bethesda, Maryland. The experiments were aimed
at trying to obtain information from people against their will
but without physical duress – as in they didn’t want to ‘leave a mark’ or
any evidence that they had done the procedure. —John
Marks details (archived here) – “a highly classified Navy program
called Project CHATTER… goal of weakening, if not eliminating,
free will in others. The Navy program,which had started in 1947, was
aimed at developing a truth drug that would force people to reveal
their innermost secrets.”
That was all I had about CHATTER when I first made this timeline, but
now I have found some additional documentation. I’ll show you but first
I’m going to jump ahead and pull out something from the Oliver Field
section which contains another World First reveal about a Catholic
jesuit-trained man and foot-soldier of Pope Pius XII – Leo
Bartemeier. Leo would become the head of the AMA’s created Council
on Mental Health in June of 1951 and all files concerning Hubbard and
Scientology were kept and monitored from there. BUT – during WWII
Leo and 4 other men had been sent on a mission to Europe by Dr.
Overholser. Two of those men happened to be ON the committee to find
the “truth drug” with Dr. Overholser, the third and fourth being also
connected in various ways, as well as Leo Bartemeier himself. All five
men would go on to help found the British-backed “Group for the
Advancement of Psychiatry” in 1946 – which featured a committee on
“therapy” with the very same Captain George Raines who Charles
Savage was working on Chatter with.
I thought it was important that you have in mind now just what the hell
Thorvald was trying to recruit L. Ron Hubbard into. You’ll have an even
better idea once you read the Special Oliver Field section.
Ok, so on to other documentation about CHATTER that I found –
Project CHATTER – Biological and Psychological Weapons.
In the above, Black Vault’s founder had received an answer to an FOIA

request about Project CHATTER from J. L. Roper of the Judge
Advocate General’s Corps by direction of the Chief, Bureau of Medicine
and Surgery.
The letter provides a link (which was malformed, too many “html” on it,
which I corrected) to a now defunct website. I corrected the link
and resurrected it. This is what it was –
94TH CONGRESS, 2d Session SENATE REPORT No. 94-755;

FOREIGN AND MILITARY INTELLIGENCE BOOK I, FINAL
REPORT OF THE SELECT COMMITTEE TO STUDY
GOVERNMENTAL OPERATIONS WITH RESPECT TO
INTELLIGENCE ACTIVITIES, XVII. TESTING AND USE OF
CHEMICAL AND BIOLOGICAL AGENTS BY THE
INTELLIGENCE COMMUNITY
This is what it said –
Project CHATTER was a Navy program that began in the fall of

1947. Responding to reports of “amazing results” achieved
by the Soviets in using “truth drugs,” the program focused on
the identification and testing of such drugs for use in interrogations
and in the recruitment of agents. The research included laboratory
experiments on animals and human subjects involving Anabasis
aphylla [anabasine], scopolamine, and mescaline in order to
determine their speech-inducing qualities. Overseas
experiments were conducted as part of the project. The project
expanded substantially during the Korean War, and ended shortly
after the war, in 1953.
So, it’s a continuation of the OSS truth drug committee which

was also mixed up with the Manhattan project.
The letter also specifically referenced the book Acid dreams: the CIA,
LSD, and the sixties rebellion. On p. 15 of the book PDF it says:
After the war, the CIA and the military picked up where the OSS
had left off in the secret search for a truth serum. The navy took
the lead when it initiated Project CHATTER in 1947, the same year
the CIA was formed. Described as an “offensive” program,
CHATTER was supposed to devise means of obtaining
information from people independent of their volition but
without physical duress. Toward this end Dr. Charles Savage
conducted experiments with mescaline (a semi-synthetic extract of
the peyote cactus that produces hallucinations similar to those
caused by LSD) at the Naval Medical Research Institute in
Bethesda, Maryland. But these studies, which involved animal as
well as human subjects, did not yield an effective truth serum, and
CHATTER was terminated in 1953.
The navy became interested in mescaline as an interrogation

agent when American investigators learned of mind control
experiments carried out by Nazi doctors at the Dachau
concentration camp during World War II. After administering
the hallucinogen to thirty prisoners, the Nazis concluded that it
was “impossible to impose one’s will on another person as in
hypnosis even when the strongest dose of mescaline had been
given.” But the drug still afforded certain advantages to SS
interrogators, who were consistently able to draw “even the
most intimate secrets from the (subject] when questions were
cleverly put.” Not surprisingly, “sentiments of hatred and revenge
were exposed in every case.”
Charles Savage papers show that he was a “Research Psychiatrist” at

the Naval Medical Research Institute and the National Naval Medical
Center, both Bethesda, Maryland.
The letter to Black Vault’s founder also included a report titled: Lysergic
Acid Diethyl Amide (LSD-25): A Clinical-Psychological Study by LT
Charles Savage, Medical Corps, Us, Navy dated September 9, 1951. It
starts on p. 5 of the PDF.
The abstract notes that LSD had “no specific therapeutic advantage in
depression” but that the “hallucinations may prove of value in
psychotherapy.” and on p. 14 that “LSD affords therapeutically valuable
insights into unconscious processes by the medium of the
hallucinations it produces.” on p. 10 he notes that “Hallucinations may
be induced by suggestion.”
Now, you might think that because the Naval Medical Research Institute
is separate from the Office of Naval Research, that that means this
didn’t involve them. It did, because remember, this is
PSYCHOLOGICAL science and it’s also BIOLOGICAL because of the
drug experimentation.
Two of their seven research divisions.
And may I remind you again, that The Chief of Naval Research
is the senior military officer in charge of scientific research in the United
States Navy.
I’d like to point out here, something that L. Ron Hubbard said in one of
his lectures that also talks about his adventures with founding the
Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation aka the HDRF. This is from my
Research and Discovery Series Volume 9 (re-released later and made
part of #10) Professional Course Lectures, Review of Progress of
Dianetics and Dianetics Business – February 25, 1952.
This engram was just a moment of unconsciousness. Its

existence was learned from soldiers who had been treated by
psychiatrists. And these soldiers would often go into a base
hospital, would be given drugs, and under drugs would be
returned back to the moment of battle when they were injured.
And the psychiatrist would go through it like this: he would say,
“Go to the moment when you’re just charging the enemy. Now
what are you thinking about? All right. Now — yeah, the bullet hit
you there. Well, we’ll just skip this next passage now, and we’ll
pick it up when you wake up. Now, where are you waking up from
this wound?”
What happened when he did that? That, by the way, is just
fabulous that they could keep doing this with
narcosynthesis and never see this point. Here he is going into
battle, there he goes unconscious and here he wakes up in the
base hospital. And what the psychiatrist had him run was
that assuming that all of this is just a blank period and it has
nothing in it.
Now, the facts of the matter are that the mind never stops
recording. And I was led into this by finding out that a good
percentage of the soldiers treated for battle neurosis by
narcosynthesis — a good percentage of those treated — went
mad in a very short space of time. They were made much
worse; awful things happened to them after they had been treated
by narcosynthesis. Why? Was it the drug? I tested people. I shot
them full of sodium pentothal and I ran them through locks
and nothing happened, which left this only variable: the area of
unconsciousness. So I began to explore areas of
unconsciousness. The reason they had never been recovered
before is because late areas of unconsciousness are tied down by
earlier areas.
There’s also this showing that Hubbard was doing this between 1948-
1950.
A Doctor’s Report On Dianetics by Joseph A. Winter, M.D. –
In July, 1949 I received a long letter from Mr. Campbell, in which

he told me of some investigations in which he thought I might be
interested. He told me that
“Here’s the sort of thing that happens: An amputee veteran,

with loss of one foot… is in a hopeless despondency
condition – just can’t adjust. The psychiatrist takes him
back to the war experience with sodium pentothal, back
to the time the mortar shell got him. They take him through,
to the period when he passed out, and pick up again when
he recovered consciousness in the aid station. Doesn’t seem
to clear him up. He still insists he’d be better off dead.
Hubbard took him through, through the shell burst, and
through the period of unconsciousness. That’s when it
happened.”
Note: Dr. Winter is John Campbell’s brother-in-law. (H-65 Thru H-110

Part 2 p. 27; FDA inspector Howard Niss notes re: interview with
Isaac Asimov)
.
THIS was the kind of research Hubbard had done that interested the
Office of Naval Research enough to try and “kidnap” him, as Hubbard
puts it.
Charles Savages 1951 report shows that this was of interest to Navy
secret projects like CHATTER, where he noted an interest in: valuable
insights into unconscious processes.
This interest in the very area Hubbard was intensively researching also
shows up in a later CIA document of 20 April 1950, when the CIA was
added to the “BLUEBIRD” network. In the proposal on page 3 –
“heightened activity and interest in subconscious
isolation techniques”.
I’d say Hubbard was rather perfectly on point with that.
.
Fast forward to 1948 –
1948 June 18 – the National Security Council directive NSC 10/1 went
into effect. Besides establishing a purely advisory panel called the “10/2
Panel,” this is when some of the dirtier activities were specifically
mandated to the CIA. Three other categories of covert activity were
added to the psychological warfare mission: political warfare,
economic warfare and preventive “direct action”.
It is very important that you understand that the last one, direct action,
is when support for FRONT organizations was mandated as well as
support for guerillas and sabotage and even ASSASSINATIONS.
So, things are getting aggressive as to PSYCHOLOGICAL warfare.
Lo and behold, exactly that same month –
June 1948 –
[…] in June, when the Navy appointed Solberg director of the

Office of Naval Research. The new assignment required Solberg
to resign from the Military Liaison Committee and to sever all his
ties with the nuclear project. (Nuclear Navy 1946-1962 Richard G.
Hewlett and Francis Duncan; archived here.)
This Idaho newspaper article (p. 4 “Views of Others”) confirms that, but
here’s a Navy mag called All Hands (p. 42, August 1948) also
confirming that Thorvald had became Chief of the Office of Naval
Research.
Rear Admiral Thorvald A. Solberg, USN, was detached as a

member of Military Liaison Committee to Atomic Energy
Commission, to report as Chief of Naval Research, Navy
Department.
Ah…but there was something else of interest in that magazine.
This –
It says that:
“[…] a regular feature of the Naval Reserve program when the first
scientific seminar for Reserve officers was held by the Office of
Naval Reserch in Washington, D.C. The initial group of 100
specially qualified and selected officers was placed on active
duty for a two-week period.
Put another way, they were FORCED to attend.

But also check this out –
Many of the officers attending the conferences are working as

civilians on Navy research projects in university and college
laboratories.”
These are both exactly what L. Ron Hubbard said he was pressed to
do.
Some examples from his lectures (don’t worry, I will show you the full
clips and titles in the next section).
They told me that I would be returned to active service to do

this research if I did not return to do so as – in a civilian
capacity at high pay…this officer from the Office of Naval
Research, came to see me right here in Washington and he
wanted me to go on as a civilian employee in order to use what
I knew of the mind to make men more suggestible….And I said,
“No.”…he said to me, “Well, all you have to do is say ‘No’ and I
will call you back to active duty because you still are an officer
of the United States Navy.”…he said, “you’ve decided to come into
the service as a civilian?“
Just exactly as is described in that Navy magazine. A sort of drafting of

people by Thorvald Solberg.
And what do we see Thorvald doing within the first six months that he is
now CHIEF of the ONR?
Solberg doubles the navy research budget – “in support of basic
research in civilian laboratories.”
Pittsburgh Press – 5 December 1948.

Yea well. We know what some of that “basic research” really also
included now, don’t we. Not a pretty subject.
Which brings me to my next point.
Also under Thorvald was the original Project BLUEBIRD which was
actually an army/navy concern before it became the CIA version.
Just after that December article that announced his doubling the
budget, was when the Office of Scientific Intelligence (OSI) formed in
January of 1949 to coordinate scientific research projects led in this
field – meaning interrogation, drugs, hypnosis, etc.
Harris Marshall Chadwell’s super-secret Division 19, as part of the

National Defense Research Committee’s Office of Scientific Research
and Development, was the precurser to the creation of the OSI – which
was still actually under the secretive Division 19 that Harris Marshall
Chadwell headed. Division 19 was part of the National Defense
Research Committee’s Office of Scientific Research and Development.
The original BLUEBIRD type efforts were under the OSI. That would
include the ONR efforts that began under Solberg in 1949 at
Bethesda Naval hospital (where CHATTER also happened to be).
Reads one April 1951 Bluebird Project report: ‘The Navy’s

research efforts in regards to Bluebird objectives had
actually begun at Bethesda Naval Hospital.
….Hardenburg, extensive experiments had been conducted
using both drugs and medical aids (polygraph machines,
surgical means, hypnotism).(A Secret Order, H.p. Albarelli, Jr.,
pgs. 168-169)
Initially code-named Pelican, and then Operation Boomer (before being

named Project Bluebird), this particular program specifically aimed
at ‘identifying and testing the effectiveness of suspected Soviet
Russians, or satellite countries, [sic] activity in the areas of physical,
psychological, mechanical and medical interrogation techniques.’ (A
Terrible Mistake, H.P. Albarelli, Jr., pg. 202)
These efforts were referred to euphemistically as a “method of

unconventional warfare.”
For Thorvald to personally approach L.Ron Hubbard to basically draft

him into doing research under his “Psychological Sciences” division?
Would mean that he felt the following requirements were being met:
Psychological Sciences Division programs are carried out under

contracts awarded in response to unsolicited proposals.They are
evaluated on the scientific merit of the proposed research, the
facilities available for its conduct, the competence of the
principal investigator,and relevance to Navy needs.[…]The
programs seek to involve innovative civilian scientistsin areas
of research relevant to Navy and Marine Corps interests
p. 7 of this PDF: Psychological Sciences Division 1985 Programs
Hubbard’s research at that point was Dianetics. The discovery of the

unconscious part of traumatic events, the engram, and that how
to recover that missing knowledge was to “unburden” the engram in
various ways that Hubbard had been experimenting with.
So, first of all, get what recover that missing knowledge from the
unconscious would mean, interest-wise to Thorvald both
offensively and defensively.
PDF CIA document 148374 1 Countermeasures against use of

Interrogation aids and techniques 12 May 1949
what defensive measures can be taken to combat them. […]

initiate a project to study the current information and intelligence
concerning these techniques and the possible defense against
them.
Hubbard was researching exactly that too, although he didn’t develop

“creative processing” until 1952, I believe.
…you can use Creative Processing. The process of using mock-

ups will flip out a PDH without ever touching it or addressing it.
You can knock a PDH [pain-drug-hypnosis] to pieces within 15
minutes of processing. And it takes longer than that to put one in.
A PDH could be so – a pain-drug-hypnosis – they knock the fellow
out, they drug him – could be laid in with great rapidity… And you
could get ahold of him and flip the PDH out. (Formative State
of Scientology, Philadelphia Doctorate Course (PDC #20) lecture
of 6 December 1952)
Second of all, as per the research requirements above, get that

Hubbard’s research was clearly considered to have merit, that Hubbard
was innovative and a competent investigator, and that his work had
relevance to Navy needs – for Thorvald to have wanted him the way he
did.
It was only after Hubbard

said “No”
that the wheels of discrediting and attacks against him and his research
began to turn.
Slavemasters are a jealous, vindictive lot even amongst themselves,

you know.
Note: For those new here, we use the term slavemastersto reflect
the action of viewing humanity as slaves who need a master,
from the heinous actions of Pope Nicholas V, and Queen
Elizabeth I – aka the Vatican and the British nobility.
So, you see, when Hubbard wrote this in 1951:
Science of Survival by L. Ron Hubbard –

This form of hypnotism has been a carefully guarded secret of
certain military and intelligence organizations. It is a vicious war
weapon and may be of more use in conquering a society than the
atom bomb. Pain-drug-hypnosis is a wicked extension of narco-
synthesis, the drug hypnosis used in America only during and
since the last war. But pain-drug-hypnosis, due mainly to the intent
of the operator, is a much more vicious procedure. The
Foundation undertook some tests with regard to the
effectiveness of pain-drug-hypnosis and found it so appallingly
destructive to the personality… Pain-drug-hypnosis is so
effectively destructive that the Foundation has ceased
experimentation along this line, having already learned
enough and refusing to endanger the sanity of individuals.
That was him hitting back at the Thorvald secret attack-pack for hitting
at him for saying “No” to them, even though he still did the research
anyway
Childish, really. But not non-understandable.
The thing is, Hubbard actually DID do the research that everybody was
interested in anyway. You can actually see that teasing out of the
above.
In fact, the goals of the HDRF from a bulletin are discussed, naming the
big three areas of research, Circuitry, Chemistry, Affinity – and the use
of chemical aids for reducing engrams and aiding normal erasure of
pain. The Ultimate Goal being a “one-shot clear”. (FDA declassified
documents; CD #1, Folder 3 PDF p. 300)
.
The bulletin mentioned, was by Donald H Rogers, and can be found on

p. 317 of that same PDF.
.
Note: Rogers is listed later as an “electronics engineer” – BUT – he is

also an FBI agent, as was Charles Parker Morgan at one time.
MORGAN also advised that DONALD H. ROGERS,

Director of Research and Assistant Treasurer of the
Foundation, is also a former Special Agent of this
Bureau.
– FBI files – L. Ron Hubbard
Really look at the description under 3-Chemical aids.
Means for gaining access to psychotics and exceptional cases, for

restimulating and reducing engrams, for aiding the normal erasure
of pain, “unconsciousness” and grief, for assisting the analytical
functions of analyzing and refiling data. (Ultimate goal is a one-
shot clear.)
Do you see how Hubbard’s research using drugs was exactlyalong the
lines of the secret projects Thorvald and the ONR, the Army and now
the CIA were all doing?
Not to mention he was looking for a way to “clear” man by just giving
him a drug. That’s really right up their alley.
L. Ron Hubbard had always been a Lone Wolf type agent, plus he
hated the military. I’m sure he really enjoyed saying “No” and sticking it
to Thorvald the way that he did, lots of pent-up anger over what he felt
were idiot “brass” he had to deal with during WWII.
But –
He didn’t hate the research ideas themselves and he didn’t hate the
CIA. Not at all. In fact, he went ahead and worked just fine with them
because they allowed him to be an off-the-books asset with no visible
controls on him.
Lead-up to the “event”

1950 February – the secret Division 19 head Harris Chadwell, fired
Machle as Assistant Director of the CIA’s OSI (Office of Scientific
Intelligence). Chadwell replaced him with Sheffield Edwards (Army
Colonel) and put himself in the “Assistant Director OSI” position where
he became involved in the whole UFO debacle – among other things. It
was Chadwell who would then oversee the start up Project
BLUEBIRD in the CIAnow, together with Colonel James H. Drum,
deputy chief of the Technical Services Staff, and Dr. Sidney Gottlieb of
later MKULTRA infamy. (A report on the OSI, 1972).
Meanwhile – the CIA instituted a more voluntary version of what

Thorvald did.
Much more up Hubbard’s ally, I might add.
A special unit was formed wherein Naval Reserve personnel worked

for the CIA in a civilian capacity. On 27 February 1950 CIA Director
Hillenkoetter attended the formal activation of the CIA Naval Reserve
Unit.( Hillenkoetter Diary/Log p. 95)
You can tell that there was a power struggle going on between the
Office of Scientific Intelligence (OSI) – really the military factions under
it – and the CIA’s Office of Security. Basically over who gets the
financing, the glory, who’s top dog kind of thing.
THAT SAME DAY…
Page 11 of Project Bluebird interrogation teams shows they were

having trouble finding what Chadwell wanted.
It’s noted that they are having trouble finding a psychiatrist on active
duty, and the reasons why. Note Reason 3: “His ethics might be such
that he might not care to cooperate in certain more revolutionary
phases of our project.” Quite the euphemistic language there. Notes
that they found a Navy (crossed out) employee noted as “third agency”
which is probably Charles Savage at the Naval Medical Research
Institute. (see CHATTER, Savage was there through 1953) This is the
document that ends with an odd characterization about “heightened
activity and interest in subconscious isolation techniques” which
sounds right up L. Ron Hubbard’s ally of research into engrams.
Please note: it is on p. 21 where we see them call what they are doing
in BLUEBIRD a “method of unconventional warfare.”
You can now see proof of Chadwell and his new choice Sheffield
Edwards to head the OSI working with the CIA on their particular form
of BLUEBIRD in an April 5 1950 document (p. 1 Project Bluebird
interrogation teams). You can you see Edwards name visible in full on
p. 8.
This newer “BLUEBIRD” established a behavioral control program

within the CIA in close collaboration with the Office of Scientific
Intelligence. Edwards immediately proposed to form interrogation teams
under the command of the Office of Security.
The proposal is on p. 2:
The purpose of this project is to provide for the immediate

establishment of interrogation teams…will utilize the polygraph,
drugs, and hypnotism to attain the greatest results in interrogation
techniques. […] A team is to be composed of three persons
consisting of a doctor — psychiatrist, a polygraph —
hypnotist, and a technician. […]It is further proposed that the
doctors- psychiatrists be set up in an office in Washington in
which serve as a cover for training, experimentation, and
indoctrination purposes in the use of drugs and hypnotism.
The document on p.1 shows that this was approved by Hillenkoetter

on 20 April 1950.
But note this on p. 20:
On 9 May a meeting was held in the office of Dr. Chadwell,

OSI…”
9 May.
The very day that Hubbard published Dianetics: The Modern Science
of Mental Health.
What was the point of that meeting?
They wanted to supplement BLUEBIRD with getting information about

drugs and police interrogation methods, Nuremburg Trials papers
request for info on drugs, narcoanalysis, and special interrogation
techniques, and information from other agencies about various things,
including narcoanalysis and hypnotism.
Right up Hubbard’s ally, and with no strings attached!
BLUEBIRD was approved, the interrogation team was put together and
voila!
1950 July –Three months after the Director approved BLUEBIRD, the
first team traveled to Japan to try out behavioral techniques on
human subjects –probably suspected double agents. The three men
arrived in Tokyo in July 1950, about a month after the start of the
Korean War. No one needed to impress upon them the importance of
their mission. The Security Office ordered them to conceal their true
purpose from even the U.S. military authorities with whom they worked
in Japan, using the cover that they would be performing ‘intensive
polygraph’ work. In stifling, debilitating heat and humidity, they tried out
combinations of the depressant sodium amytal with the stimulant
benzedrine on each of four subjects, the last two of whom also received
a second stimulant, picrotoxin. They also tried to induce amnesia. The
team considered the tests successful, but the CIA documents available
on the trip give only the sketchiest outline of what happened. Then
around October 1950, the BLUEBIRD team used ‘advanced’ techniques
on 25 subjects, apparently North Korean prisoners of war. (Manchurian
Candidate, Marks, pg. 25) Note: Possibly this may have been one
Samuel Thompson was sent on.
And just as Thorvald was losing his primacy over these types of secret
experiments to the CIA because much more senior man in the
Department of Defense Chadwell had said let it be so?
THAT is when this personal “kidnap” of L. Ron Hubbard in an attempt to

bring him into his organization happened.
What did L. Ron Hubbard say

happened?
Now I realize that there are people who don’t believe a word Hubbard
said, but that kind of black-and-white thinking is a mistake. The man did
lie and dissemble a lot. A really, reallylot. But that doesn’t mean he
NEVER told the truth about anything.
In this case, it’s kind of a mix.
He’s telling the truth about what happened but he is leaving

out what else happened plus funging up dates. He’s also giving a false
impression that he would never engage in such manipulative methods
regarding the minds of men. He did do that within the
Dianetics/Scientology millieu he created, he also allowed/encouraged
others to as well.
That said, before we look at these lectures where he talks about what
happened with the Navy in 1950, just a few other facts to keep in mind
here first –
Prior to April 1950 – Hubbard had published an article about Dianetics

called Terra Incognita:The Mind in The Explorers Journal – their first
issue of 1950.
Then on 27 April 1950 – The Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation
was incorporated.
THE HUBBARD DIANETIC RESEARCH FOUNDATION, INC.

nonprofit
Company Number 0900027169
Incorporation Date 27 April 1950
Company Type Domestic Non-Profit Corporation
Jurisdiction New Jersey (US)
And….Hubbard’s Navy documents show that Hubbard submitted his

resignation on 27 May 1950.
It took the Navy 5 months to officially file the documents of acceptance
of that resignation, document dated 30 October 1950.
And …
One source out there alleges that it was June 1950 that Hubbard
Dianetic Research Foundation opened. Doesn’t sound right to me, but
this is hard fact, former OSS Charles Parker Morgan was Secretary.
Last but not least – The Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation, and of
course Hubbard himself, actually conducted CIA mind control research
into Pain-Drug-Hypnosis. (See Scientology Roots Chapter 9-1)
Although I could just give you the conclusion of how I determined when
this all happened, I thought it might be helpful for others to show you
how I did it.
First I dug up a calendar from 1950 –
Using that, so far I had a mini-timeline of:
27 April 1950 Thursday – The Hubbard Dianetic Research

Foundation was incorporated
9 May Tuesday — Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental

Health Published
27 May 1950 Saturday — Hubbard’s Navy documents resignation
date. That being a rather unlikely day of the week for all this
business to occur on regular channels, so clearly something else
is causing this date to be assigned. Maybe a followup of the
events between the 22nd and the 25th.
June 1950 – Supposedly this is when the Hubbard Dianetic

Research Foundation opened. Charles Parker Morgan OSS
(predecessor of the CIA) is secretary and legal counsel.
30 October 1950 Monday — Hubbard’s Navy documents

acceptance of resignation date.
Now we go to the lectures themselves.
Here are the lectures where L. Ron Hubbard talks about what
happened with the Navy in 1950 plus the one talking about the remedy.
This is a video with all of the main clips in it (excepting some parts I
added to the transcripts below but didn’t add to the clips).
The remedy one is the earliest one of my “set” – which, by the way, is
the same lecture that I was the first to find and document on 13 October
2000 (Friday the 13th) that it had been edited to remove several key
sections by David Miscavige and Dan Koon. The section literally right
after where his clip ends, in fact.
Formative State of Scientology Philadelphia Doctorate Course (PDC

#20) lecture of 6 December 1952
…you can use Creative Processing. The process of using mock-

ups will flip out a PDH without ever touching it or addressing it.
Isn’t that fascinaing. You can knock a PDH to pieces within 15
minutes of processing. And it takes longer than that to put one in.
Another condition could exist, a PDH could be so – a pain-drug-

hypnosis – they knock the fellow out, they drug him – could be
laid in with great rapidity. But it could be laid in so strongly that the
individual is rendered dead. Or non compos mentis from there on
and thus out of communication. That individual is no menace to
anybody. He’s either complete ravingly gone, out of
communication, and look… or he’s dead, and a bullet does the
same thing. So it’s not a good weapon, really. Because if he’s
able… if he suddenly starts acting peculiarly or doing things which
completely alter any pattern he has had in the past, or if he is
doing things which look like they are vaguely bad, then how easy it
is. You can get ahold of him. You’ll find almost any preclear can be
given creative processing. And you could get ahold at him and flip
the PDH out. That’s interesting, isn’t it? In other words, you can
take ‘em out as fast as they lay ‘em down. Therefore we really do
have the remedy…
Here is our first one talking about the Navy drafting attempt but also
notice what else I found. Someone tried to draft Hubbard into the
NUCLEAR program earlier. which is interesting for a number of reasons
but not included in the below is his humorous discussion of who they
were calling “nuclear physicists” at this time. I believe this is where he
got the idea to refer to himself that way, not because he had a degree in
it or anything but because of this recruitment attempt. But, knowing as
he did what THEY called him, it becomes not exactly a lie as most
critics saw it, and not exactly a truth, as most scientologists saw it.
Very interesting.
Anyway, Hubbard starts out talking about that particular adventure and
then that led right into the later Navy one.
A Postulate Out Of A Golden Age an LRH lecture 6 December 1956
All of a sudden they see an electronics engineer and they say,

“You know, you’re supposed to be over there in that uh… behind
that barbed wire over there.” Well, the electronic engineers of the
country have not yet noticed that they’re inside barbed wire —
they are — that they go backwards and forwards past armed
guards to get to and from work.
I wouldn’t work under these conditions. A fellow offered me a job
one time. He said, “All you have to do is walk in here, leave your
gun at the gate, walk in here and you’re supposed to walk around
for eight hours a day, and do so-and-so and so-and-so.”
And I said, “In where?” He said, “In that enclosure there.” And I
said, “What’s the difference between that and a prison camp?”
“Oh,” he says, “you’re nonsense. You get paid in there.”
That was the first and only time the government offered me a
post as a nuclear physicist. That was the end of that. The
government offered me that post. They tried to kidnap me on
another one, by the way.
They said, “You know you’re still in the reserves and we can call
you back to active duty on research in the field of the mind.”
“You’re still in the service,” this admiral said. “Ha-ha. You change
your mind any time, you know, about coming in. You can
volunteer. Of course, I can put you back on active duty at any
time, so you’d better volunteer. You’d probably feel better in
there making seventy-five hundred dollars a year” — rather than
whatever officers get these days — twenty-five cents an hour or
something.
And I said, “Well,” I said, “if you put it that way,” I said, “I’m
overwhelmed.” I said, “There’s nothing much I can do.”
Here is actually a proposition of a person being seized because of

his own knowledge, just the way you might seize a fellow who
carved ivory well, back in the Dark Ages. He carved ivory well so
he was seized. He was taken away and put into a position that he
couldn’t object to and he was made to work at a trade that he
was good at but didn’t particularly like. What’s the difference?
What’s the difference? Not very much. Except maybe I walk with
faster feet sometimes.
Of course, it was impossible at that time to resign from the service.

A reserve officer had to continue as a reserve officer from there on
out. But I was down to the Potomac River Naval Command, and I
was through Bureau of Naval Personnel. It was Monday when he
came to see me, and he was going to come back and see
me Thursday. And when he came back and saw me Thursday he
said, “Well,” he said, “you’ve decided to come into the service as a
civilian?” And I said, “No, I haven’t. I decided not to.” And he said,
“Well,” he said, “I’ll have to call you back to active duty.” And I
says, “Try and do it,” and handed him my resignation, accepted.
He was crushed.
But do you know that immediately predated, by one week, the

opening of the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation of
Elizabeth, New Jersey. There would have been no Dianetics,
there would have been no Scientology, and there would have
been no publications on the subject anywhere had this
succeeded. Interesting, isn’t it?
They didn’t want to prevent Dianetics. They didn’t

want to prevent Scientology, the publications of books. All
they wanted to do was get a piece of research done which they
in their tyrannical fashion had decided was far more important
than any other research that could be done. They wanted ME
to work on a project to make men more suggestible. Can you
imagine me working on such a project? You can imagine me
working on admirals to make them more suggestible, but not on
people.
OK, let’s factor that Monday and Thursday business into our timeline –
with two possible Monday and Thursday event dates added.
The first set of added dates factored that plus I used the ideas of “There
would have been no Dianetics, there would have been no
Scientology, and there would have been no publications on the
subject anywhere” tending to indicate this was before Dianetics was
published; and “predated, by one week, the opening of” with the
opening being defined as the incorporation date.
The second set of added dates factoring that uses just the “predated,
by one week, the opening of” with the opening being defined as the
announce to the public, hold an open house date.
This is what we get now –
*17 April 1950 Monday — Thorvald meeting, rushing around to get

resignation approved.
*20 April 1950 Thursday — 1 week back from incorporation of the

HDRF. Thorvald meeting, Hubbard tells him “No” and that he can’t
draft him either.


Health Published
*22 May 1950 Monday — Thorvald meeting, rushing around to get

*25 May 1950 Thursday — Thorvald meeting, Hubbard tells him

“No” and that he can’t draft him either.

events between the 22nd and the 25th. Using the “predated, by
one week, the opening of” part – that gives us two possible
“opening” dates in June.
June 1 or 3 1950 Thursday or Saturday – Hubbard Dianetic

Research Foundation supposed opening date. Charles Parker
Morgan OSS (predecessor of the CIA) is secretary and legal
counsel.

Interesting.
Next lecture – NOW he gets more specific on when. He starts out
talking about the military, secrets, and thought police towers which I
have included in the transcript but not in the clip itself. Interesting that
he knows about electronic mind control experiments this early.
Note: there’s also some additional transcript at the end that I included
that isn’t in the clip itself.
How We Have Addressed the Problem of the Mind an LRH lecture 4

July 1957 –
No, truly enough, in a world where science and scientific secrets

are the stock in trade of the militarist, one has to be alert to the
fact that developed scientific information such as that in
Scientology continue to be free, continue to be available. It’s too
large a temptation for somebody to say, “Oh. hey! we can button
this up. We’ve got it made here. We’ve got it absolutely made. All
we’ve got to do is take all this technology, brainwash everybody
and put up thought police towers in all the towns and it’s all set,
we’ve got a government.”
No, they haven’t got a government as long as there are textbooks

out there showing how fast you can undo this same thing called
brainwashing and thought police. It’s discouraging, you know, to
brainwash somebody and then have his friend walk into the
nearest bookstore and buy a manual of how to unbrainwash. It
would seem sort of pointless, wouldn’t it?
So, as security measures increase and as security tightens across

the world on scientific matters, it is of great interest to us that the
information we have and which has been developed with your
help, your finance, your. interest, across a period of seven years,
is today free. That hasn’t been just a little bit of doing.
[…] You’re probably not aware of the fact that BEFORE the
incorporation papers of the HDRF were filed in 1950, the Office
of Naval Intelligence right here in Washington, DC, threatened
to call me to active duty to use what I knew about the mind. And
after that I made sure that the channels were so wide that they
were very uninviting.
Nobody wants something that isn’t a secret. There is nothing quite

as unwanted by a government as yesterday’s secret known today.
A very amusing story connected with that attempt to seize
Dianetics, a very amusing story from my standpoint anyway.
Months and months and months before I had decided that the
Navy and I had come to a crossroads and I had requested
permission from the secretary of the Navy to resign my
commission – my commission had been hanging fire since the end
of World War II – and he had granted permission. Now, that’s the
lengthiest amount of time consumed, trying to get a letter into a
government office and get an answer to it. See, that’s pretty long.
OK. We have to do an interjection here. What is Hubbard talking about

there?
This sequence of events in 1947-48.
14 November 1947 — Hubbard submitted a letter of resignation from

the Naval Reserve
18 December 1947 — Secretary of Navy directs Chief of Naval
Personnel to respond and hold Hubbard’s request in abeyance until he
has time to think about it. Hubbard uses this to get his resignation
pushed through fast in April 1950: “So I dived into my briefcase and
pulled forth the secretary’s permission.” (How We Have Addressed the
Problem of the Mind an LRH lecture 4 July 1957)
19 February 1948 — Hubbard withdraws his resignation but I have
found no indication in his file that it was ever received or
acknowledged either by Secretary of the Navy or the via of the Chief of
Naval Personnel. If there was a letter granting him permission per se,
as Hubbard says in this lecture, it is not in his file.
But…
Pay particular attention to the Secretary Navy/Chief of Naval Personnel

response point 1: showing how Hubbard was really viewed by the
Secretary of the Navy: “Your resignation from the Naval Reserve, in
which you have served so honorably, has been received with regret.”
Critics of Hubbard ought to take note of that one, because that’s the
truth about Hubbard’s war history. Veering away from that truth just to
suit other valid criticisms is disingenuous and should not be tolerated or
supported.
Now pay particular attention to these: point 3: “In the planned

peacetime Naval Reserve you will not be called to active duty except
at your own request or except in time of national emergency or
war…” and 4: “…will not be obligated for training, either in weekly
classes…” and 5 reminds Hubbard that if he does this it would “deprive
you from any further benefits under the jurisdiction of the Navy
Department.” Point 6: “The Navy does not wish to keep you in the
Naval Reserve if you sincerely desire to resign.” and the final point
says Hubbard’s request will be held in abeyance until an answer back
from Hubbard is received.
Alright, now let’s continue with this lecture –
And I already had that. So this fellow, this officer from the
Office of Naval Research, came to see me right here in
Washington and he wanted me to go on as a civilian employee
in order to use what I knew of the mind to make men more
suggestible.
You see Thorvald’s policy to use Naval Reserve officers as “civil”
employees showing clearly there.
And I smiled a feline smile. And I said, “No.”
And he smiled like something out of Faust [meaning like The

Devil] and he said to me, “Well, all you have to do is say ‘No’ and I
will call you back to active dutybecause you still are an officer of
the United States Navy.” And with that purr he exited.
That’s a direct violation of the peacetime Naval Reserve policy pointed

out to Hubbard by the Navy in 1947.
But that description…two men of the dark standing off against each
other –
Is absolutely perfect and you can totally see that happening between
these two.
So I dived into my briefcase and pulled forth the secretary’s

permission. I dashed down here and found out there was actually
a naval command in this area – it’s called the Potomac River
Naval Command, I don’t know what they run. Once I think they
tried to run the battleship Missouri. But there it sat down there, and
it had an admiral in charge of it and everything, and I found out
that my papers were resident in two places. People thought I
belonged in Washington, in Washington, and people in New York
thought I belonged in New York, and I had two sets of
papers. This admiral that had come to see me thought I was
totally out of New York.
So I went down here to the Washington Navy Yard, the Potomac

River Naval Command, and I got my resignation accepted. And
Thursday the admiral came back to see me, and he says, “Well?”
And I said, “Well?” Fastest resignation on record. There wasn’t
anything he could do about it then. And I went back up to
Elizabeth, New Jersey and the HDRF, the first research
foundation, was formed, and we went happily on our way just
throwing it all over the place.
The Bureau of Naval Personnel still has a form letter. If you want
to know what it says, write them sometime and say, “Why don’t
you use Dianetics or Scientology? What do you know about these
subjects?” They send you back a form letter, and it’s very polite,
and it’s personally written. It’s always the same letter: “We are
keeping full records on this and are learning more and more about
it. We do not know whether or not it’s applicable to our work at this
time. Sincerely yours, So-and-So, Chief of Naval Personnel.” But
they’ve got it on file! And meanwhile we go on and use it.
Let’s see what this does to our timeline now because of these two
statements “I went back up to Elizabeth, New Jerseyand the HDRF,
the first research foundation, was formed” and “BEFORE the
incorporation papers of the HDRF were filed in 1950″ really pin this
down in time.
That means the first two dates are clearly what Hubbard meant
happened, so we’ll make them solid now. Problem is why the actual
resignation ends up dated May 27, but that could just be some sort of
administrative snafu? Maybe the whole thing was handled by “telex” or
some such in April and not followed up by paper until May? We’ll leave
the other dates in and see where we are after the next lecture.
17 April 1950 Monday — Thorvald meeting, rushing around to get

20 April 1950 Thursday — 1 week back from incorporation of the

draft him either because he was officially resigned.


Health Published



events between the 22nd and the 25th. Using the “predated, by
one week, the opening of” part – that gives us two possible
“opening” dates in June.

counsel.

Let’s fill in some other items from Hubbard’s Navy record as evidence to
help narrow this even more.
27 February 1950 — A Physical Evaluation Board met and ruled
Hubbard fit for active duty – “(1) That Lieutenant LaFayette R. Hubbard,
U.S. Naval Reserve, be found fit to perform the duties of his rank as of
16 February 1946, the date of his release from active duty.” 1950 was a
big year for all this because of the Career Compensation Act of 1949.
(see Surgeon General Report) so what this is mostly really about is
MONEY. But still, this is odd timing. Then the whole thing sits until a
very key time in our timeline here.
26 April 1950 — After sitting for two months, the “Members of the
Physical Review Council” send a notification to the Secretary of the
Navy that it approved what the Physical Evaluation Board said but it
added something very important. It added that upon the Secretary’s
approval Hubbard will be“returned to duty”. Note very carefully the
next document because of what the Judge Advocate General E.E.
Woods says he is approving and ONLY what he is approving.
2 and 8 May 1950 — Judge Advocate General document. Note the date
in the upper left corner 5/2/50 – May 2 1950, and the day he stamped
his response May 8 1950. “The recommended finding of the board in
this case is as follows: “(1) That Lieutenant LaFayette R. Hubbard, U.S.
Naval Reserve, be found fit to perform the duties of his rank as of 16
February 1946, the date of his release from active duty.”. He approved
ONLY that Hubbard was fit since 1946. He DID NOT approve the 26
April recommendation that Hubbard be also returned to duty.
12 May 1950 – The Secretary of Navy approved ONLY that Hubbard

was fit since 1946. He DID NOT approve the 26 April recommendation
that Hubbard be also returned to duty. Again, that is interesting because
it seems to show that there is knowledge that Hubbard had already
resigned, and that there was simply a lag in the paperwork.
.
Let’s see what those do to our timeline plus we’re going to add the FBI
files etc. on the incorporation date for the The Hubbard Dianetic
Research Foundation or HDRF.
27 February 1950 — A Physical Evaluation Board met and ruled

Hubbard fit for active duty – “(1) That Lieutenant LaFayette R.
Hubbard, U.S. Naval Reserve, be found fit to perform the duties of
his rank as of 16 February 1946, the date of his release from
active duty.” 1950 was a big year for all this because of the Career
Compensation Act of 1949. (see Surgeon General Report) so
what this is mostly really about is MONEY. But still, this is odd
timing. Then the whole thing sits until a very key time in our
timeline here.
17 April 1950 Monday — Thorvald meeting, rushing around to get

17 to 20 April – Somewhere in here might be when the “Members

of the Physical Review Council” actually met?
20 April 1950 Thursday — 1 week back from incorporation of the

draft him either because he was officially resigned. Next entry
might be retaliation because Hubbard’s official paperwork isn’t in
yet?
26 April 1950 — This document has a stamped date, but that may
not necessarily when the “Members of the Physical Review
Council” met before this notification was sent. It was sent to the
Secretary of the Navy that it approved what the Physical
Evaluation Board said but it added something very important. It
added that upon the Secretary’s approval Hubbard will
be “returned to duty”.

Foundation was incorporated. Also validated by this FBI
document as well as this one – there’s also the letter to the NY
BBB in July 1950 directly from the HDRF.
2 and 8 May 1950 — Judge Advocate General document. Note

the date in the upper left corner 5/2/50 – May 2 1950, and the day
he stamped his response May 8 1950. “The recommended finding
of the board in this case is as follows: “(1) That Lieutenant
LaFayette R. Hubbard, U.S. Naval Reserve, be found fit to
perform the duties of his rank as of 16 February 1946, the date of
his release from active duty.”. He approved ONLY that Hubbard
was fit since 1946. He DID NOT approve the 26 April
recommendation that Hubbard be also returned to duty.This
seems to indicate that Hubbard’s resignatio is already known
about.

Health Published
12 May 1950 – The Secretary of Navy approved ONLY that

Hubbard was fit since 1946. He DID NOT approve the 26 April
recommendation that Hubbard be also returned to duty. Again,
that is interesting because it seems to show that there is
knowledge that Hubbard had already resigned, and that there was
simply a lag in the paperwork.


events between the 22nd and the 25th or the alternate April
events. Using the “predated, by one week, the opening of” part
– that gives us two possible “opening” dates in June.

counsel.
June 1 – The FBI files (p. 19) letter noting the date of incorporation
for the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation line up
with this sequence of events. Meaning the Thorvald adventure
was in May. However, it’s false. THIS FBI document gets it right.
(and again here) Then there’s also the letter to the NY BBB in July
1950 directly from the HDRF. You’ll see here in a minute. I think
that first FBI letter is where people got this wrong date of June 1.

Well…hmm.
It’s looking more and more from the evidence that the Thorvald
adventure was in April, not May. Let’s see what the next lecture adds to
the mix. Or not.
The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology an LRH lecture 31 December

1960 from the Anatomy of the Human Mind Congress –
WWII they called it. Well, this silly mess came along and a lot of us
went over and did various things, and after that, I had done quite a
bit of study in the last year of that war of the endocrine systems
and a bunch of things, and I did an enormous amount of work in
’46 and ’47 which finally culminated in the writing of the book,
Dianetics the Modern Science of Mental Health, published in
very early 1950. May, actually.
Well just about the time it hit the stands, I was in Washington DC,
this very same city. And a very high-ranking officer, a very very
very high-ranking officer. You know, brass, you know, brass,
brass…scrambled eggs, you know, gilt on the cape edge, you
know. Wow. You know. Just look at him, blinding. I was
teaching some of the psychiatrists here in Washington how to run
engrams, or trying to – the last effort we made, I think. We did
make a sincere effort, by the way, to give Dianetics to psychiatry,
to the medical profession, to teach them how to use it, and so forth
and we found out they didn’t know what they were doing and we
skipped it. That happened clear back THEN. So don’t think its
anything new when we claw up psychiatrists or something of the
sort. They started it. They kept asking me too many stupid
questions in lectures I was giving and I never forgave
them. Anyway, this bunch of scrambled eggs comes walking
up the steps, and it was on a Monday, and he said to me, “Well,
well, Hubbard, how are you? who who who…How are you
Hubbard?” What’s THIS guy want. “How would you like to work
for the office of Naval Research?” I said, “Doing what?” “Oh,
using what you know about the mind, you know, Ha ha ha ha,
ha ha ha ha, to make people more suggestible.” I won’t
announce this man’s rank or name, not in public.
But I said, “Well, sir,” there was an underscore and sir was in
italics, “Sir,” I said: “I’m not interested.” After all, the book had
just been published, the first foundation was just forming, we
were just kicking off, and this guy wants to drag me into the
Navy. He said, “Well. You’d better watch out, ha ha ha ha,
you’d better watch out, ha ha ha ha, because I can pull you
back into service at your old rank.” Oh, I said, here we go. So
he left feeling very complacent and I immediately got on
telephones. I had to find someplace in the United States, a naval
district that was stupid enough to let me resign, and I found them,
god bless ’em, right down here at the end of Pennsylvania
Avenue, the Potomac River Naval Command, which was set up
during the Civil War to patrol the Confederate states and was still
a full Naval district. That marvelous! It had admirals and
everything. I went in [coughing] I had a service record and I had
my health record and I had my resignation all written out and
factually, up until 1947, I was unable to walk without a cane, I
couldn’t see, I was blind, I got processing about that time however
and ruined my naval record. I showed the old Admiral down there
how I could never be of any use again to the Navy, showing him all
the casualties, you know, and sheets of paper. “Oh”, he says,
“You poor fellow.” and I said: [coughing] Yes, that’s right,
that’s right.” and he says: “You poor fellow. Yes. I’ll accept
your resignation.” They rushed it up, got a special assistant
to the Secretary of the Navy to OK it.
On Thursday when the high brass came back to see me

again, he says, “Well, have you decided?” “Yes,” I said, ” I’ve
decided not to go in.” He said, “Well,” he said, “I guess I have no
other choice but to draft you in at your old rank.” I said, “I’m
very sorry,” – omitting the sir, italicized – “I’m very sorry, but I am
no longer a member of the armed services.” Said “What’s this?” I
said “Yes. As a matter of fact here it is. Secretary of the Navy
says OK” And that was an end to the beautiful friendship with the
American government.
[…]It goes right back to that engram. Office of Naval Research.

Hubbard said no, to hell with him.Remember, they didn’t make
up their minds that we were no good and we were gips and
clips and stiffs and magees, UNTIL we had said No. That’s an
important point. That’s a very important point.
You can clearly see that reference to Thorvald Solberg there in the first
paragraph but we have some other interesting things as well. We now
have an explanation for why the obviously later than the event May 27
date for his resignation on the OFFICIAL paperwork.
“They rushed it up, got a special assistant to the Secretary of the

Navy to OK it.”
We know from the actual official paperwork acceptance by the

Secretary of the Navy, that wasn’t until way later – October 1950. Ergo,
clearly there was some other special rush paperwork that gave
Hubbard needed for that next meeting with “the high brass” – which he
again confirms as the Thursday after the Monday meeting.
Also, Hubbard had something in-hand to show Thorvald, something

sufficient to back him off trying to draft him. “… here it is. Secretary of
the Navy says OK.” That couldn’t possibly be the later official
paperwork because again, that wasn’t until October of 1950.
We also know that Hubbard has now, in 3 different lectures, repeatedly
said all this happened before the HDRF was incorporated.
SO…
That’s pretty definitive. April it is, then, and now when it happened is
fully pinned down. (See Master Timeline) And now we will eliminate the
confusion on the resignation official filing being way off in October 1950
and what the significance is of what Hubbard said there: “They rushed
it up, got a special assistant to the Secretary of the Navy to OK it.”
Another World First

reveal
As I was writing this article, I decided to take a moment to see if I could

figure out who THIS was that Hubbard was talking about when he said:
“They rushed it up, got a special assistant to the Secretary of the
Navy to OK it.”
That’s a very real position, and in 1950 there was only one of them.
(Sometimes there’s more than one).
The Official Congressional Directory for the 81st Congress, 2D

Session beginning January 3, 1950 (p. 381at Hathitrust) listed:
Special Assistant to the Secretary of the Navy – Captain

Richard P. Glass.
We also see there that Francis Patrick Mathews was the Secretary of
the Navy, and that’s whose name is on the official paperwork approval
in October 1950.
Who’s Captain Richard P. Glass?

I know he ended up being a Rear Admiral and in charge of the Ninth
District of the Navy in 1954, but more importantly, I can pretty much
guarantee you that he had some kismet with Hubbard, either knew him
or knew of him during WWII.
Why?
Because he was the chief of staff for Fleet Commander William

Halsey in the South Pacific. (Obituary; Rappahannock Record) Exactly
the area of the world where Hubbard had done some pretty heroic
things prior to Halsey’s arrival and I’m sure they were still talking about
him there.
Alright, now that we know who did this for Hubbard in April, the delayed
actual filing of his resignation becomes an understandable non-issue.
Oh! One other thing to keep in mind. The Chief of the Navy Bureau of
Medicine (BUMED) was over all physical evaluations. Thorvald was
thick as thieves with the Bureau of Medicine because they also “ran” the
hospitals, like Bethesda, where all that secret human experimentation to
“make people more suggestible” was going on.
You do the math on why the BUMED Physical Review Council added
that part about having Hubbard “returned to active duty” when they did.
All entries now in sync – see Master Timeline.
It was only after Hubbard said

“No”
that the wheels of discrediting and BOGUS attacks against him and his
research began to turn.
That SAME research that Thorvald was so hot to have Hubbard be

doing for him.
It was ego-drivenThorvaldthat
set the wheels in motion – NOT
the CIA.
THORVALD – FAUSTIAN
It began with shutting down Hubbard’s work with psychiatrists in the
D.C. area – Dr. Winifred Overholser was used as point man for that.
Reminder – that’s what Hubbard was doing in D.C. when Thorvald
approached him.
April 1950 – Hubbard at Bethesda/Overholser/Chestnut

Lodge/William Alanson White school – “I was teaching some of
the psychiatrists here in Washington how to run engrams, or
trying to – the last effort we made, I think. We did make a sincere
effort, by the way, to give Dianetics to psychiatry, to the medical
profession, to teach them how to use it,and so forth and we found
out they didn’t know what they were doing and we skipped it. That
happened clear back THEN. So don’t think its anything new when
we claw up psychiatrists or something of the sort. They started it.
They kept asking me too many stupid questions in lectures I was
giving and I never forgave them.” (The Genus of Dianetics and
Scientology an LRH lecture 31 December 1960 from the Anatomy
of the Human Mind Congress)
Then –
In creeps Overholser to the scene, like Dracula arriving in the night.

DR. WINFRED OVERHOLSER
On a slightly more serious note, Overholser’s Bio from Harvard (that I

recovered out of the internet archive) shows the different organizations
he was involved with.
Dr. Overholser served as the president of the American

Psychiatric Association (1947-1948). The organizations
with which he was affiliated included the New England
Society of Psychiatry, the Pan American Medical Society
of Washington, and the Academy of Medicine in
Washington.
Quite the connections.
See that APA President part? He was put in that position as an

outcropping of forming the WFMH. The WFMH (The World Federation
for Mental Health) was born in London in 1948.(See this PDF) Before
that Congress forming it, a group of people met to discuss how to
influence the 2,000 attendees in the direction of supporting the political
objective of forming a World government. Dr. Overholser was one of
them, at that meeting.
In fact, he was the head of the American delegation attending the

congress!
From the listing of Overholser papers held by the LOC(Library of

Congress) –
1937-1962 – Superintendent, St. Elizabeth’s Hospital,

Department of Health, Education and Welfare, Washington, D.C.
1948 – Chairman, United States delegation, International
Congress on Mental Health, London, England
1948-1954 – Member, National Board of Medical Examiners
1950 – Vice-president, First World Congress of Psychiatry, Paris,
France
Hubbard, as a protege’ of Lord Salisbury, was also supportive of World
Government. So you see, it isn’t that he and Overholser
are opposed per se, this is more of a power trip scrabbling that’s about
to go on here. One that Thorvald found a willing participant in
Overholser to do for him. Overholser was already cranky — read
jealous — about Hubbard, having clashed previously on more than one
occasion.
Hubbard asked people like him rather pointed and extremely relevant
questions that they couldn’t answer about schizophrenia with anything
resembling a intelligent answer. Most of them still can’t, for that matter.
You can hear Hubbard talk about this and his experience with Chestnut
Lodge, St. Elizabeth’s hospital (where Overholser was) in this video.
From 1948 to 1950 – Ron Hubbard had been allowed to practice

abreactive therapy at mainly two mental institutions – Chestnut Lodge
Sanitarium and Saint Elizabeths Hospital.
Harry Stack Sullivan was the leading psychiatrist at Chestnut Lodge

Sanitarium, he died in 1949, right in the middle of this period. Hubbard’s
antipathy against various psychiatric methods was already developing
at this point, and he had found willing agreement with Harry, who in
1940 had delivered a scathing portrayal of ECT and lobotomies.
These sundry procedures produce “beneficial” results

by reducing the patient’s capacity for being human. The
philosophy is something to the effect that it is better to
be a contented imbecile than a schizophrenic.
– HARRY STACK SULLIVAN (U.S. psychiatrist), referring to lobotomy
and shock treatment (in his phrase, psychiatry’s “decortication
treatments”), “Conceptions of Modern Psychiatry,” Psychiatry, February
1940 – as quoted in the The Electroshock Quotationary, Leonard Roy
Frank, Editor, Publication date: April 2006 – – – For more about Leonard
Roy Frank please see this post – section starting with “NAPA”. Leonard
founded NAPA (Network Against Psychiatric Assault in 1972 in San
Francisco. He tells a just horrifying story of being institutionalized, as an
adult mind you, by his parents, because he changed how and what he
was doing with his life, basically.
.
I think this was more of a kind of sales war with biological psychiatry
versus psycho-analysis than any real disagreement with the torture
aspect – because six years later in 1946 Harry, as later quoted in the
Psychiatry of Enduring Peace and Social Progress was perfectly happy
to bomb those he deemed enemies into oblivion with nuclear weapons
and hey, that’s all good for humanity but ECT wasn’t. You can see why I
say I don’t think he’s entirely sincere with this attack, it was probably
more of an attack of bitchiness on his part because right away, ECT
began being used as part of targeting homosexuals (which he was) in
order to ‘cure’ them. I imagine that idea didn’t exactly go over well with
him.
Both Hubbard and Harry Stack Sullivan were in a kind of ‘war’ with the
Biological Psychiatry covert eugenics boys even this far back. Even
though Hubbard tried to initially position himself with them by his use of
the term engrams which went way back to the 1800’s to a Darwinism
proponent named Semon. As a side note, it’s amazing how much of
that guys material Hubbard used.
With Harry dead though, Hubbard was left without a somewhat ally,
setting the stage for much more trouble with Overholser.
Winfred Overholser was the Superintendent at Saint Elizabeths

Hospital. He had worked for the OSS, doing research into drugs that
could be used in interrogation. A committee on that
was formed on October 31, 1942 – he was chairman
of the committee. A little later, the committee was
transferred under the Office of Strategic
Services. You see the connection to the Navy’s
later BLUEBIRD and CHATTER projects
here. (see timeline)
.
Overholser was also connected to the British slavemasters

and British intelligence through Willmott Lewis – the
Washington correspondent of the London Times. He also
wrote in Foreign Affairs, the publication of the Council on
Foreign Relations. Lewis also worked under William
Stephenson and the British Security Coordination – a
British intelligence organization.
Overholser was Biological Psychiatry all the way – ECT and all. He was
even involved with something called the Alaskan Bill (see this post)
where Hubbard basically attacked him calling it the “Siberia Bill” as if it’s
a Russian plot. As I said, now that we are straightening out this part of
history, we can see now that this is really about Hubbard saying “No” to
Thorvald and then Thorvald sics ravening dogs like Overholser (and
others) on Hubbard, and Hubbard is still trying to even the score by
attacking the Alaskan Bill.
Yep, Hubbard did not get along with Overholser at all, still complaining
about him almost 30 years later.
Brian Roubinek, at least in 1972, was the Deputy, Deputy Guardian
Intelligence for the U.S. (D/DGI Int US). With that particular post title,
Brian must have been Terry Milner’s direct junior. (Terry of the gun-
running and drug-smuggling with the Elusive Jerry McDonald, as well
as Stanford University CIA remote viewing contracts and telepathy
machines infamy.
L. Ron Hubbard had personally responded to Roubinek’s supposed

intelligence “find” concerning Dr. Overholser of St. Elizabeth’s federal
mental hospital in Washington D.C., a big long rant dated February
28th, 1972.
Note: The original 1974 Guardian’s Office Intelligence

Hat/Checksheet was part of the documents seized in the FBI Raid.
PDF – Intelligence Course Full Hat-Checksheet On Page 10 –
Section 4: Covert Data Collection; Part B: Covert Operations;
item 19: Desp. 28 Feb 72, Re: Oberholser (marked document
121 by the court) of the checksheet verifies that this document
was part of the hat pack.
I’m just going to excerpt this part about Overholser – misspelled by

typist as Oberholser –
Thank you for the excellent packaging of Oberholser

(the late and very unlamented).
The interest in this bad hat stems from the fact that he
blew the whistle on Dianetics when St. Elizabeth
psychiatrists were just beginning to use it and were for
the first time getting results on patients at the National
Asylum. He forbade them to use it but they disagreed
heavily and privately used it for many years under cover.
This broke up introducing Dianetics on regular channels
– May 1950.
Thereafter a violent and gory attack was mounted. It was

begun by Oberholser, went over to George Wash U.
Psychology Dept at once and there a student of the first
Dianetics class (Dolly Jones) also a psychology student
was hypnotized, beaten, told to go crazy, did so and we
had to hospitalize her. We handled it so fast and so well
no “Dianetics drove her crazy” could be campaigned
and wasn’t. This was the first hard flat out PR-
Intelligence operation in Dianetics. Her state was not
assisted by her husband, Col Jones of US Army
Intelligence, also a member of the first Dianetics Class.
From then on the NY Times Literary Section began an

attack […]
So you see why I am interested in this bad hat

Oberholser. He struck the first blow.
Actually, it was Thorvald who set the ravening Overholser loose upon
him. Hubbard knows that, but still won’t name Thorvald, probably due to
intelligence NDA’s and all that.
Regarding what Hubbard said about psychiatrists secretly using

Dianetics before Overholser went into attack mode, there’s a a
somewhat amusing anecdote, Hubbard describes hypnotising the
psychiatrists at St. Elizabeth’s.
“Now, actually, in handling groups and so forth, I, of course,
myself, am a little shy. I like to be amongst friends. I do. I like to be
amongst friends. I do not like to talk to hostile groups. I really do
not.
And I’m mean, too, when I do. You never saw such a change in a
man in your life as when I have to talk to a hostile group. I
immediately go off onto an entirely different line of stagecraft. It’s
tough! It’s tough! They’re there challengingly. They are willing to
listen, but they already have been told how bad it is. They’re sure
you’re not going to say anything interesting. But they’re going to
suffer through it somehow so that they can get on with the dessert
or something. I get mean about that time, and I do bad things. I
seldom give bad reports on myself, but that is actually an instance
when I do.
I hypnotized, one time, the staff of St. Elizabeth’s.Told them

they’d heard a good speech and left the stage. They all came
around afterwards saying, ‘What a good speech that was you
gave!’ That was a mean thing to do. That was certainly backing
out of it, wasn’t it? But it was in the early career of Dianetics and I
felt very much like backing out of it. I was preceded by someone
who told all of them how bad it was over ‘Ron-ward.’ They
might afterwards have suspected my knowledge of the mind, but
certainly not my knowledge of hypnotism. It’s very easy to
hypnotize groups.” (L. Ron Hubbard, “How to Handle Audiences”
lecture of November 1, 1956)
“Someone” was probably Overholser. This is another example though of

Hubbard not naming who he knows it was. You can listen to him saying
this live –
Despite their best efforts, Dianetics rocketed to the top of the New York
Times best-seller list (and stayed there for 28 weeks straight) which
didn’t exactly make Thorvald any happier with Hubbard.
And so…
Behind the scenes they sneaked

at first
Every once in a while, books that get many things wrong do get some
things very right. This is one of those times.
HOWEVER, it’s the details of sneaking around soliciting attacks the

author gets right. The author does not catch the true “who” behind any
of it (Thorvald Solberg, Winfred Overholser, Leo Bartemeier) and thinks
it’s just the American Medical Association doing all this all on their own
initiative.
Wrong.
Many of these Guardian Office intelligence-types don’t actually truly

investigate to see what is, they get hamstrung by either/both what
they want to see or what Hubbard tells them to see and he rarely tells
them the whole truth even if he does use an truth. It’s always skewed to
keep people off the real targets. Being him and his superiors like Lord
Salisbury etc. Hubbard always protected his handlers. You can see a
truly horrific example of him doing this kind of skewing and bald-faced
lying as to who the true “enslavers” of world were, in this video –
.
Hubbard falsely and oh so

Britishly blamed “The
Communists” for what was
going on in Africa.
.
See Oliver Stone’s history documentary recently added to Netflix to see

just how false that was.
That said, let’s look at the good details Garrison gave.
Omar Garrison, Hidden Story of Scientology, pg. 71 – 74
“In order to launch an effective attack on

Dianetics, its AMA adversaries needed
some authoritative statements by
prominent medical men, explaining to
the layman why Dianetics was not only
quackery, but very dangerous quackery.
Accordingly, Dr. Austin Smith, then

editor of the Journal of the American
Medical Association, on June 1,
1950sent letters to a number of doctors
and medical societies, asking their help.
Laymen not privy to the inside workings
of the AMA apparatus, will find them
enlightening, if somewhat wanting in factual accuracy. For
example, in a letter to Dr. Smith, dated June 5, 1950, Theodore
Wiprud, executive secretary of the Medical Society of the District
of Columbia wrote:
“Upon receipt of your letter of June 1, I got in touch with

several physicians who I thought would have some
information about L. Ron Hubbard and his book, Dianetics.
One of them was Captain George N. Raines, Chief of
Psychiatry, Naval Medical Center, Bethesda. He does not
want to be quoted but told me that Hubbard and Dr. Joseph
A. Winter, who, I understand, is a physician licensed in New
Jersey, are ‘phonies’.
“One of the bases for ‘Dianetics’ is the premise that the

individual, if prompted by semi-hypnosis, can recall
intrauterine experiences and conversations between father
and mother within three months after conception. That would
be enough to stop anyone but an ignoramus in his tracks, but
I am told that some psychiatrists have been intrigued by the
idea. At any rate, among the best psychiatrists this is nothing
but the bunk.”
In another letter replying to Dr. Smith’s initiative, Dr. H. Houston

Merritt, director of neurological service at New York’s Columbia
Presbyterian Medical Center, adopted the condescending, slightly
derisive tone to be expected of an AMA-member in dealing with
anything so “bizarre and unscientific” (his terms) as Dianetics.
“In reply to your letter of June 1,” he wrote, “first I beg to

advise that I have had no personal experience with
Dianetics. Information I have obtained, however, would
indicate that this term was coined to describe a ‘new’
development in the field of psychiatry which uses a
philosophical approach combining some of the principles of
psychoanalysis, philosophy of Will Durant and the
mathematics of the cybernetics school.”
“It is the impression,” he continued, “that Hubbard is the

ghost writer for Winter. My information in regard to Winter,
which may or may not be authentic, indicates that he lives in
New Jersey and that he does not have a licence to practice
in the State, nor is he a member of the American Medical
Association.”
Dr. Smith did not go at his undertaking half-heartedly, In addition to
writing to various eminent doctors of his acquaintance, he sent a
memorandum to Oliver Field, director of AMA’s Bureau of
Investigation. The note,dated June 5, 1950, suggested that the
medical CIA ought to “look into” Dianetics and concluded with the
statement that Hubbard “is alleged to be a ‘bad actor, a kind of
faker or even worse’, but this is not for quoting until more facts
are obtained”.
Dr. Smith also wrote to another AMA member, Dr. Erwin E.

Nelson, then director of the federal Food and Drug Administration.
At the time of Dr. Smith’s letter to FDA’s medical director,

Hubbard’s book had been in print only a month and the federal
agency had not yet heard of it. Replying to Dr. Smith, the FDA
official wrote that “We don’t seem to have any information on
L. Ron Hubbard or Joseph A. Winter or ‘Dianetics’. Further we
do not find such names in the local directory.”
That last one is actually very important, it shows that this is

a very limited little group here now. It shouldn’t be viewed as “the AMA”
did it. It’s particular PEOPLE. In order of seniority of slavemaster
pecking order, it would be Thorvald, Overholser, Smith.
THREE people.
That’s it.
Three people going about the business of preparing to make it look like
it was some kind of a “activist” “responsible” “independent” movement
that just happened and was not coordinated by these three hidden
people when it most definitely was.
I’m sorry, but that is just sickening. And it’s not because Hubbard was
such a “good” guy, that I say that. He wasn’t. But he did have something
in what he discovered about these supposedly “unconscious” periods
that weren’t really. He pretty much went off all over the place trying to
do his job for his secret handlers and in his quest to recover his
“importance” after the Thorvald incident, and he actually left the one
good thing he discovered to literally die on the vine. Even in today’s
Church of Scientology, Dianetic processing is ranked down at the
BOTTOM of the later created “bridge”.
How’s that for irony.
Not to mention the fact of how these letters and documents from the
AMA were, ahem, obtained. The Guardian Office intelligence bureau
had P. Joseph Lisa infiltrate the AMA and using a cover of being
opposed to Dianetics/Scientology and Hubbard, they bought his cover
and they gave him access to their files.
Yep. That happened.
See that name Theodore Wiprud? Years later, the new head of the
Church of Scientology, David Miscavige, tried to lay off “attacks” on
Hubbard and his subjects as being Wiprud and some secretary.
Short guy on the right is Wiprud
Taking from my post: Scientology Tax Exemption – What Really

Happened: The Kennedy List
In this post first I’m going to finish up going over the
main lies and misrepresentations by David Miscavige in
the October 1993, The War Is Over IAS* event. The entire
video is available now on the internet. Although poor
quality, it is still quite viewable. Don’t miss the huge
opening number but the meat of the video begins
here: 01:32:10.
*IAS = the International Association of

Scientologists, it was created by David Miscavige to
replace the allowed-to-go-defunct corporation of
the HASI = the Hubbard Association of
Scientologists, Inc.
[…] There are specific statements by David

Miscavige that we’re going to examine and I have made
individual video clips so that you can see them easier.
[…]I’m starting with the part where the initial criticisms

of Dianetics are discussed – one of which Miscavige
lays off on Theodore Wiprud, the Medical Association of
Washington D.C.
Here’s the video clip itself –
[…] David Miscavige just can’t seem to name or focus

on the real sources of all this….he picks out a pencil-
pushing administrative type (Wiprud), and a nebulous
“DC Medical Association”…
That’s the letter Omar Garrison talks about, and the screen flashes the
letter with George Raines’ name showing right there and Miscavige
doesn’t even mention it?
Major Kermit moment –

There’s one of the major “whos” right there flashing in front of the faces
of thousands of Scientologists and Miscavige doesn’t even mention
it.
Not only that, Miscavige never once questions WHO TOLD Austin
Smith/AMA to send these letters in the first place.
Speaking of which –
That same name, the one that Omar Garrison pointed out doesn’t want
to be quoted? – Captain George N. Raines, Chief of Psychiatry,
Naval Medical Center, Bethesda.
image from here
Guess who he has done more than one published paper together with?
(one 1948 example here)
Project CHATTER man Charles Savage.

Yep, the very same people and the very same research line of secret
projects Thorvald had his eye on Hubbbard for.
Can you say Thorvald toldCapt.

Raines what Hubbard did?
Hello? Captain Raines? Hubbard not only said fuck you No, he
managed to get an approved resignation in 4 days and now we can’t
draft him!
In case any doubting-Thomas’s want to misunderstand the connection
there that paper I linked to shows, let me clarify it a little more for you.
Robert Cohn, one of the names on that paper, said in an

interview when George Raines hired him with a million dollar budget in
1952 —
“We were interested in LSD, thinking it could create an

experimental psychosis, and at that time we believed it was safe
to take. Evarts and Charlie Savageorganized a series of studies
on LSD, not only clinically, with volunteers and patients, but with
animals as well.”
See? Still at ye ole secret drug testing ala CHATTER and BLUEBIRD.
I think we need to find out a little more about this Chatty-Kathy of our
story here though, Austin Smith. Who’s he? Clearly he doesn’t start
letter writing campaigns back-channel on his own. “Somebody” – read
Thorvald-Overholser-Gaines – told him to. They needed to see what
they had to work with in order to plan and launch a
revenge/discreditation attack on Hubbard for saying No.
They pulled his string, in other words, and he started “chatting” on cue.
“I would like to know what you know about Hubbard and Dianetics.”
Let’s start with Austin’s NY Times 1993 obituary – Oh hey, look at that!
He died the same year and only 5 days apart from when Scientology
finally obtained tax exemption. How ironic.
Dr. Austin E. Smith, the first president of the Pharmaceutical

Manufacturers Association, vice chairman of the Warner-
Lambert Company and editor of the Journal of the American
Medical Association, died on Oct. 9 at his home in Fort Myers, Fla.
He was 81. A graduate of the Queens University Faculty of
Medicine in Kingston, Ontario, Dr. Smith joined the A.M.A. staff
after completing his residency, becoming the organization’s
director of therapy and research. After writing “The Drugs You
Use,” (Revere, 1948,) a practical guide to the proper use of drugs,
he was made editor of the organization’s journal in 1949.
Oh, no.
I’ve landed into a Church of

Scientology/Mark Rathbun “Big
Pharma”conspiracy?
I hate it when that happens.
Crap. Well, unfortunately, or not, depending on how you look at it, there
does happen to be quite a bit of truth to the idea of a conspiracy here.
The very real conspiracy was not to ruin Dianetics, per se, Hubbard
even says that himself in one of the lectures we covered earlier. This is
about ruining Hubbard and something he wanted.
It’s a revenge conspiracy.
In the beginning here, it was actually only about one particular aspect of
Dianetics, not every damn thing Hubbard ever did or said. His success
in recovering data from unconscious periods. They were interested in
that and its possible reverse, installing suggestions in the unconscious
period. And of course the revenge is about that he thumbed his nose at
them and refused to put his mind to work for these particular people.
The rest was all personal ego

trips, ALL of them.
Including Hubbard.
It still doesn’t make it right what they did to Hubbard though, but it does
show you what really happens to any truly independent and halfway
decent research into Man, around here. It gets sucked up into the pack
of slavering wolves, by hook or by crook.
On the one hand, one could applaud Hubbard for escaping their
hoovering process, but on the other it wasn’t exactly the best idea to
piss off that particular pack of wolves, nor was Hubbard innocent of
quite a few of the same goals for humanity that these men had. He just
didn’t want to be controlled by those people. Lord Salisbury? No
problem. Robert Vansittart, spymaster? No Problem. The CIA? Again,
also no problem.
You see where I’m going here. ALL of those exercised (or needed to)
little or no control over Hubbard and trusted him to do what they
wanted, which he did.
OK. So WHEN was Austin this kingpin of the pharmaceutical industry?

Officially it was when he resigned in 1958 as JAMA editor. In 1959, 4
months after resigning, it was made public that he had become
the first full-time, salaried president of the Pharmaceutical
Manufacturers Association, Washington, DC. The Pharmaceutical
Manufacturers Association was the resultof a recent merging of the
American Drug Manufacturers Association and the American
Pharmaceutical Manufacturers’ Association. Austin served in that
position from 1959 until 1965, heading the association through the
period when Sen Estes Kefauver investigated the drug
industry. That, was a big mess, let me tell you.
It was later that he became chairman of the board of directors of Parke,

Davis & Company (now Parke-Davis, a division of Warner-Lambert
Company), and then the board vice chairmen of Warner-Lambert
Company, both in Morris Plains, NJ. He also chaired the board of Sonic
Electric Energy Corporation, Randolph, NJ – whatever that is.
So these are all after the time period when he was playing chatty-kathy
for Thorvald, Overholser and Raines. Great! No “Big Pharma”
conspiracy, right?.
Wrong.
Not that easy.
You see, how he even got that cushy job as JAMA editor was this.
(Note: he was assistant editor Feb. 1949 appointed full editor December
1949; replacing Dr. Morris Fishbein) Prior to being JAMA editor he
was the Secretary for the Council on Pharmacy and
Chemistry American Medical Association. (Science 20 Aug 1943) But
he was more than that.
In the first round of Senate Hearings, Austin appears (this one was
about having a National Health Plan in 1949) and testified about
“medical research”. He makes it quite clear in his testimony that he
has other functions in the AMA.
He was also the Director of the Division of Therapy and

Research besides being the Secretary, for the Council on Pharmacy
and Chemistry – both for the AMA, appointedapparently in February
1940 just as World War II was getting going.
Convenient, right? Especially considering things like the Truth Drug

Committee were going to start up “researching” in a little over two years
later.
Therapy and Research Division or Therapeutical Research as it

was called back in the 1920’s, had to do with MONEY for:
“…the Trustees’ make an appropriation each year. This

appropriation is used for investigations and laboratory research
in the actions of drugs and pharmaceutical products. The
results are published is various medical journals…”
You do realize that under “therapy and research” comes all manner of
horrific things. Anyhere from electro-shock and insulin shock therapies
to lobotomies and “thought reform” experiments to electromagnetic field
manipulation and genetic engineering which when combined with
drugs it then qualifies as “research”. So that’s bad enough all by itself –
this Therapy and Research division.
So what is this Council on Pharmacy and Chemistry? It was formed in

1905 to evaluate DRUGS and “various medicinal preparations”. On
February 23, 1957 they decided to be more blunt about it
and renamed the thing: The Council on Drugs. The original founding
rules noted that articles and research about new drugs etc. would be
submitted to the JAMA as the determination point. Powerful position.
You can just imagine how that selection process of who gets highlighted
and who doesn’t, went.
Want public promotion of your drug?
Gimme some scratch.

Oh and DO WE LIKE YOU?
cuz if we don’t…
Real scientific, is my point.
It looks scientific, but that’s not what goes on behind-the-scenes. Items

1 and 2 above must be A-ok or it ain’t appearing in JAMA.
You see, that Council had to accept the “new article” – as they also
called the drug or chemical. So this means, when all those nasty drugs
like Metrazol, Thorazine, etc. etc. came out? These guys had chosen
to accept it, then they promoted it, and then they get PAID for doing so.
One way or another. Here’s an example of new drugs “accepted” in
1955.
There was a LOT of money involved in what the JAMA editor did.
I mean literally mountains of it.

But what’s the deal with these people at the AMA? What’s driving this
train anyway.
Well, it’s like this.
In the early half of the 20th century, a coup was organized on the
medical research facilities, hospitals and universities. The Rockefeller
family, ye ole step-n-fetch-its of the actual slavemasters, sponsored
research and donated sums to universities and medical schools which
had drug based research.
Establishments and research which were were not drug based were
refused funding and soon dissolved in favor of the lucrative
pharmaceutical industry. In 1939 a “Drug Trust” alliance was formed by
the Rockefeller empire and the German chemical company I.G. Farben
(Bayer). After World War II, I.G. Farben was dismantled but later
emerged as separate corporations within the alliance. Since WWII, the
pharmaceutical industry has steadily netted increasing profits to
become the world’s second largest manufacturing industry; after the
arms industry.
The Rockefeller Institute for Medical Research was founded in 1901.

Simon Flexner headed the Rockefeller Institute of Medical Research.
Simon Flexner appointed his brother, Abraham Flexner, to survey
medical schools throughout America.
Abraham Flexner was empowered to investigate the quality of medical

education in all 161 medical schools that existed in 1910. He helped
destroy the credibility and funding sources for nearly all schools using
non-drug based medicine. 161 medical schools dwindled down to 81
by 1919 and medical graduates declined from 5,747 to 2,658.
“Overcrowding” of the profession became the public AMA theme for the
“opportunities of those already in the profession to acquire a livelihood.”
said one AMA President at the time.
The AMA also practiced severe discrimination against black medical

schools and black doctors. They did not apologize for this for over 150
years, until July 2008. (Exploring the AMA’s History of Discrimination,
2008)
[…] you find that in 1910, the American Medical

Association commissioned a report of all medical
schools. They were very interested in lowering the
number of physicians. They wanted to raise the
professional stature of physicians, and they wanted to
do that by exclusion. They commissioned Abraham
Flexner to go to every medical school in the U.S. and
Canada and make an assessment — basically which
medical schools should and should not be encouraged
to continue. When Flexner did this, he deemed every
black medical school substandard and recommended
they all be closed, except for two, Howard and Meharry.
And he also went beyond that to stipulate that black

physicians should only treat black patients, that black
physicians should have their roles curtailed. And he
warned that an essentially untrained Negro bearing an
MD label is dangerous. So he looked on all black
physicians with a jaundiced eye.
His recommendations were prophetic. All the black
schools except for Howard and Meharry closed — they
could not attract funding any longer because of the
damning indictment of them. And black physicians were
indeed kept from specialties like surgery. They were
kept from research.
In general, schools and doctors were asked if they would (or did)
practice “modern scientific medicine” – translation- Did they use
DRUGS.
So where does this special Bureau of Investigation come in?
It had been formed before the Flexner rape-and-pillage of American

medicine, by…a Brit. Why am I not surprised. Well, anyway, it was
formed in 1906, under the name “Propaganda Department”, headed by
Arthur J. Cramp, MD. “The department prepared abstracts of
government reports on the chemical composition of nostrums seized in
interstate commerce.” (JAMA article)
What the heck are nostrums?

1) a medicine, especially one that is not considered effective,
prepared by an unqualified person OR
2) a pet scheme or favorite remedy, especially one for bringing
about some social or political reform or improvement.
Clearly they started out meaning the first one, but later years brought
increased activity to the department, whose name was changed to the
Bureau of Investigation in 1925. Then the bureau added other forms of
“quackery” to its investigations.
Example of an actual quack claim. This is from a magazine called ONE,

Volume 2 issue 4 April 1 1954.
Right from the beginning that’s one of the main things that the JAMA
was used for – sort of a WHO IS IN and WHO IS OUT game.
As soon as Cramp was hired on as an editor of the Journal of the
American Medical Association, he began contributing regular
pieces about quackery to it….Cramp believed in what he once
called “public education through publicity” (Cramp 1920, 788), and
he believed that “the best that the medical profession can do in
protecting the public is to turn the light on the methods of the
faddist and the quack, so that his ignorance or fraud becomes
apparent” (Cramp 1927b, 727–728). This was the mission of the
Propaganda for Reform Department, which became the Bureau of
Investigation in 1925 and the Department of Investigation in 1958
(Hafner et al. 1992, viii). (Skeptic Enquirer article)
The AMA closed the Department of Investigation in 1975. The files that
Cramp and his successors had gathered over the decades became
known as the American Medical Association Health Fraud and
Alternative Medicine Collection, which is the only AMA archive that is
open to non-members, created in 1988.
Morris Fishbein took over for Cramp as JAMA editor in 1935. (Cramp
had a heart attack and couldn’t keep up with the work anymore)
Drugs, “quackery” and nostrums.
So.
L. Ron Hubbard off independently doing mind research that might a: be

a nostrum for bringing about some social or political reform or
improvement and b: keep people away from psychiatrists and doctors
and the ever-present DRUGS? That’s like a double-whammy in the
corrupt AMA playbook.
Had to be an easy sell to recruit Austin E. Smith into having his very
own Secret Mission To Destroy Hubbard and Save MANKIND!!!!! –
the exclamation and red is representing what I am positive was the
drama queen version in Austin’s mind.
It’s funny how nostrum and cult are the words the AMA slings at
movements that don’t fit into the DRUG model, considering
what they were doing all along.
The corruption that Austin and the AMA were part of became so
bad, so impossible to sweep under the rug-that-had-no-more-room, that
Senator Kefauver had to chair a Committee into the Drug Industry
Antitrust Act in 1961.
In the 1961 Kefauver hearings into the Drug Industry Anti-Trust Act,
Austin stuck his foot in his mouth and got caught. He had published a
statement in JAMA a few years earlier that said there are 140,000
different medicaments available for physicians to choose from.
When Time magazine reprinted it, Austin CHALLENGED the statement

as libel on the drug industry.
Um…if it was false, why did you publish it then, Austin?

Jeesh.
That should give you enough of an understanding of this guy to see

WHY he would be so hot to step-n-fetch it for the “big boys” and go after
Hubbard.
But hey, I just now finally found a picture of the guy from 1944 in the
“Queen’s Medical Journal” He’s British-Canadian, by the way. You’re
not gonna believe the uncanny similarity to the puppet one I picked to
represent him earlier.
Austin Edward Smith

OK, next is Austin’s “investigation” department guy – Oliver Field.
Dr. Smith did not go at his undertaking half-

heartedly, In addition to writing to various eminent
doctors of his acquaintance, he sent a
memorandum to Oliver Field, director of AMA’s
Bureau of Investigation. The note, dated June 5,
1950, suggested that the medical CIA ought to “look
into” Dianetics and concluded with the statement
that Hubbard “is alleged to be a ‘bad actor, a kind of
faker or even worse’, but this is not for quoting until
more facts are obtained”. (Omar Garrison, hidden Story of Scientology,
pg. 71 – 74)
Oh brother.
Who’s this guy.
In the archives of the University of Notre Dame (Vol. 34 No. 2 March-

April 1956; p. 57) Oliver is a featured Alumnus. It says he’s been
working at the AMA Bureau of Investigation (AMABI) for 8 years, so
that means he started in 1948, just a year before Austin was made
JAMA editor. It’s probably worth noting that this publication shows that
Notre Dame is run by Catholic priests, yet again indicating the Catholic
involvement(even in this peripheral way) in supporting the aggressive
monopoly of “scientific” medicine.
Oliver Field is referred to as the “J. Edgar Hoover of the American

Medical Association” where he: “protects standard and lawful medical
practices through the exposure of quacks, nostrums, cultists, faddists
and other forms of pseudo-medicine in the profession.”
Cultists?
What the hell does that have to do with “scientific” medicine.
Interesting.
What’s nostrums? It can be two things – a medicine, especially one that

is not considered effective, prepared by an unqualified person OR a pet
scheme or favorite remedy, especially one for bringing about some
social or political reform or improvement.
Now, don’t think that I believe that EVERY example that the AMA
exposes are therefore “good” because they were attacked.
NO.
I think they go out of their way, people like Oliver here, to find people
that actually are quacks, nostrums, cultists, faddists so that 1: They
can legitimize their supposed use and service to “society” and 2: They
have created a pool of real hucksters that they can now use to TAR
THE LEGITIMATE with, the ones that don’t subserve themselves to the
AMA.
Call the person or their research quackery, phony, dangerous, cult, etc.
etc. which immediately positions them public-relations wise with
ACTUAL quacks etc. This is why Oliver also “maintains an up-to-date
liaison with all societies, clubs and goups–medical, civic and
clerical—keeping the public well-informed on both the standard and
false methods and practices in medicine.”
For PR purposes to spread the “quackery” label – whether it’s false or

not, he doesn’t care.
He does what he is told.
But Oliver doesn’t just run media campaigns together with Austin Smith,
Fishbein,etc. The AMABI brings: “violations of law to the attention of
enforcement agencies and furnishes reports to the same.”
It is true, however, that the main stock-in-trade of people like these is

rumor-mongering “exposes” that are often full of blatant lies, or as
Jacques Ellul put it in Propaganda: the Formation of Men’s Attitudes —
First of all, the propagandist must insist on the purity of his own
intentions and, at the same time, hurl accusations at his enemy.
But the accusation is never made haphazardly or groundlessly.
The propagandist will not accuse the enemy of just any
misdeed; he will accuse him of the very intention that he
himself has and of trying to commit the very crime that he
himself is about to commit.
In other words, quite a bit (if not most) of what the AMA “approves
of” is itself quackery.
At this point, we need to dig into Oliver quite a bit more before I give
you a real world example of the hypocrisy of the AMA and the Oliver
Fields of the world. This is new research that I am just now adding to
this article, today, 10 December 2019.
Ya ready?
Ok, here we go…
.
Special section on Oliver Field
In a report dated 7 February 1963, FDA Inspector R.D. Sherman

detailed the extent of Oliver Field’s files on Hubbard and Scientology. It
took them more than SIX DAYS to copy it all for him.
On 1/30/63 Oliver Field, Director of the Bureau of

Investigation of the American Medical: Association, was
visited at their main headquarters at 534 N. Dearborn st.
He was told we desired to review his files for any
information concerning Ron Hubbard and
Scientology and associated organizations. As was
expected, Mr. Field was most cooperative, and although
he could not relinquish the files he instructed his
secretary to photocopy any and all material which I
desired. He refused payment for this service, although it
was very extensive. The amount of material was so
massive that even as I start to dictate this report they
have not finished copying all of it completely and it was
not until February 6th that I was able to obtain any of the
photocopies.
(Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents pp. 229-242, FDA Inspector R.D. Sherman
detailing AMA files on Hubbard, Scientology)
.
These AMA files comprise
the BULK of the 2015 FDA documents
release.
.
p. 242
SUMMARY – This voluminous mass of material was

selected from the files of the American Medical
Association and probably includes about 3/4 of their
entire files. …Highlights of the information and
suggested leads were presented in this summary for
such further follow-up indicated by DRM.
Exhibit 5 is where we get the false idea that Hubbard was in a mental
hospital, but we also find out that Inspector Sherman seems to be a
man right up Oliver Fields ally of sleaze-balls.
Sherman seems more excited about the embarrassmentvalue of

Hubbard being a bigamist, than he is about Sara Northrup’s allegation
that Hubbard was “confined in an incoherent state in a Cuban Military
Hospital” and that Hubbard was a “schizophrenic”. Perhaps because he
knows it’s total bullshit.
The declassified FDA documents release of 2015 has this tendency to

split records all over the place, so it can be a real challenge to FIND
these AMA files exhibits Sherman is going over. But at least I found this
one so far. It was over in Folder #4 on p. 5.
Dianetics Chief, Ill in Cuba, Defies Wife
“L. Ron Hubbard, 40-year-old leader of the Dianetics cult, is

paralyzed in a Cuban military hospital, a wild and incoherent letter
from indicated today…….dated April 15, Havana Cuba…to
support charges that her brilliant husband “is hopelessly insane”. It
was part of an affidavit….”Signed “Ron,” the letter boasted that
Hubbard, confined to a “Cuban military
hospital” is being “transferred to the United
States next week as a classified scientist
immune from interference of all kinds.” “My
right side is paralyzed and getting more
so,” the letter, addressed to Mrs. Hubbard
continued…” “Competent psychiatrists
have diagnosed her husband as suffering
from “a mental ailment known as paranoid
schizophrenia,” Mrs. Hubbard declared in
her divorce suit.”
Wikipedia details the full letter being referenced

was this, with the source given as a LA Daily News article from May 1,
1951 titled: “Letter indicates Dianetics founder, baby fled to Cuba”.
(available at newsbank.com)
Dear Sara,
I have been in the Cuban military hospital and I am being

transferred to the United States next week as a classified scientist
immune from interference of all kinds.
Though I will be hospitalized probably a long time, Alexis is getting

excellent care. I see her every day. She is all I have to live for.
My wits never gave way under all you did and let them do but my
body didn’t stand up. My right side is paralyzed and getting more
so. I hope my heart lasts. I may live a long time and again I may
not. But Dianetics will last 10,000 years – for the Army and Navy
have it now.
My Will is all changed. Alexis will get a fortune unless she goes to
you as she would then get nothing. Hope to see you once more.
Goodbye – I love you.
Ron
The Church of Scientology claims it is a forgery written by Northrup’s

attorney, Caryl Werner but still… those details are really something.
SOMEONE who knew about Hubbard’s adventures with Thorvald had
to have influenced the creation of that letter, and I wouldn’t put it past
Oliver Field to do something, or “help out” in exactly that way. Sara
would have known about it, I would imagine, so I suppose she could
have fed it to her attorney but that’s a dangerous game she was
playing. In any case, since that was all very SERIOUSLY top secret, I
do not think Hubbard wrote that letter. He would know better than that
as to what would happen to him if he broke security like that, but also
he would never write about “giving” Dianetics to the army/navy.
We should also factor in the role Sara may have played (and probably
did) in Hubbard’s black intelligence operation to ruin Jack Parsons by
literally driving him crazy – all in order to knock him out of the “rocket
science” arena. It seems a fitting kind of kismet that Hubbard found
himself in exactly the same situation as Jack, after he refused
Thorvald’s attempt to force him to do his research for the Navy behind
closed doors.
That’s even more of a lead towards that for exactly the reason of
revealed top secret details in that supposed letter from Hubbard,
however vague, I think that is what got Hubbard’s attention and got
him to contact Sara and get her the hell out of his life because of her
‘loose lips’, so to speak. (saying from WWII “loose lips sink
ships”) Hubbard had successfully pressured Sara into retracting
her statements barely a month later.
Inspector Sherman doesn’t seem to note that Sara Northrup retracted

her rather alarming statements about her husband, but it’s also
somewhat obvious that Hubbard composed this document, found in
folder #4 (p. 63) dated 11 June 1951, that he had Sara sign. It was
witnessed by John Maloney and Chas (Charles) Leonard.
The thing about this document, the premise of it, that Sara’s statements
about Hubbard were FALSE? That includes this probably bogus letter
about “giving Dianetics” to the Army and Navy etc.
Why would Hubbard write a letter like that providing such perfect
cannon fodder for Sara to use against him in a divorce proceeding?
He wouldn’t.
I, Sara Northrup Hubbard, do

hereby state that the things I
have said about L. Ron
Hubbard in courts and the
public prints have been
grossly exaggerated or entirely
false.
I have not at any time believed

otherwise than that L. Ron
Hubbard was a fine and brilliant
man.
I make this statement of my own free will for I have begun to

realize that what I have done may have injured the science of
dianetics, which in my studied opinion may be the only hope of
sanity in future generations.
I was under enormous stress and my advisers insisted it was

necessary for me to carry through an action as I have done.
There is no other reason for this statement than my own wish to

make atonement for the damage it may have done. In the future I
wish to lead a quiet and orderly existence with my little girl far
away from the enturbulating influences which have ruined my
marriage.
Signed Sara Northrup Hubbard

Witnessed John W. Maloney and Chas [Charles] Leonard.
Advisers?
I didn’t see anything about “communists” in there, so I wonder…could

Hubbard maybe be actually meaning who he KNOWS is attacking him?
Just a thought.
But, it’s a thought which I now just found a kind of proof as to just who
one of those “advisers” likely was. Oliver Field.
On page 96 of Volume 4 of 18 we see proof that Oliver Field and Sara
Northrup Hubbard’s attorney, Caryl Warner were working together to
“get” Hubbard. There’s even a handwritten note saying “interesting!”
routed directly to Oliver Field, with a nice big official stamp of the AMA
Investigation bureau at the bottom dated May 9, 1951. Nice timing,
given the Dianetics book publishing date of May 9, 1950, don’t you
think?
Many years later, Oliver Field was still using this whole divorce thing to
badmouth Hubbard.
In 1963, after a long conversation with a man named Kermit Miller,
Oliver sent him a letter with various attachments. The attachments were
from the AMA files that FDA inspector Sherman had copied, so it’s part
of the declassified FDA documents. The link takes you to the Vol 4 of 18
PDF from that release. One of the attachments was this Washington
Times-Herald article from 24 April 1951.
There’s some kind of handwritten note at the bottom, right under where
it says that Hubbard abducted Alexis on February 23 (1951) that Oliver
chopped off for some reason. The article is on page 410 of the same
PDF. The entire letter is actually quite interesting even just for the
reason that it shows which items of “bad press” are Oliver’s favorites 12
years later in 1963.
Look what else he says in that letter.
He says:
You may recall that around 1950 L. Ron Hubbard wrote a book
which he called “Dianetics.” He seems to be in the forefront of this
quasireligious group known as “Scientologists”, who apparently
seek to practice what Hubbard wrote about in his book. The file
on this subject was kept for several years in the office of
our Council on Mental Health. In answering inquiries on the
subject, that office advised that the Council itself had informally
considered and discussed information coming to it with relation to
the Scientologists organizations; that the Council had not
officially expressed an opinionabout such organizations, but
that the Council members seemed to be convinced that none of
these organizations or the treatment methods they employ are
based on a scientific medical background.
Err…what the ever living…is Oliver talking about? Dianetics

isn’t medicine. Scientology isn’t medicine. And what the hell is this
Council on Mental Health?
Ah. I see.
As per Dr. Plunkett’s testimony in Senate Hearings on Illicit Narcotics of

July 1955, in June of 1951 the AMA established the committee on
nervous and mental diseases. It was renamed the Council on Mental
Health in 1955.
A man named Leo Henry Bartemeier, a Roman Catholic educated at a

Jesuit center in Kansas – HE was its first chairman.
The other members were: Lauren H. Smith vice chairman, Richard J.

Plunkette secretary, Walter H. Baer, Hugh T. Carmichael, Francis M.
Forster, George E. Gardner, Francis J. Gerty (another Catholic) and M.
Ralph Kaufman.
Notes: Leo also listed himself as a member of the board of
directors of the WFMH and that the AMA Narcotics committee is
a SUB committee of Leo’s committee.
But, man.
A Catholic with Jesuit training on the board of the WFMH? And this
wasn’t just any old Catholic.
No, this was one who took direction from and obtained permission for
just about everything he did of importance professionally, from one of
the most vicious and duplicitous popes ever – Pope Pius XII.
That’s who was presiding over the files on Hubbard, Dianetics and
Scientology and the ATTACKS as well, obviously, and yet for 60 years
now? There has not been one word about this from ANY supposed
“researcher” out there.
Not even from black-opper into the AMA’s files for the Guardian Office,
Peter Joseph Lisa.
Well, you know, apparently they’re all too busy lying to their
followers/recruits and chasing down Fairy Tale “leads” about Watergate,
the Illuminati, Jewish Bankers, Two Ron’s and lord knows what else.
Very important stuff, you know.
I tease, but I’m actually quite serious about the importance of this
discovery of mine – that this Pope Pius XII foot soldier was leading
mental health “authority” positions in this country and was secretly in
league with trying to destroy L. Ron Hubbard and his nascent Dianetics.
It wasn’t to protect humanity, and you can take that to the bank. Not
with the monstrous Pius XII involved.
That is another World First reveal I just found.
So, now we’re going to need a special mini-section just for this guy,
because in a very real way he was a “boss” – if not THE boss – of both
Austin Smith and Oliver Field when it came to targets of mental health.
And boy, does this guy have a history. Not to mention connections.
.
Special Mini-Section on Leo Henry

Bartemeier.
another World First reveal re: the early history of Dianetics
found 8 December 2019
No, I am not against Catholics, per se, let’s get that out of the way right
now.
I am against corrupt motherfrackers who have secretly operated

for centuries to enforce a vicious, neurotic and sometimes downright
psychotic, hidden agenda that was and is the real reason for the
“christian” religion.
That I am 100 percent against and I always will be.
Pope Pius XII, Bartemeiers top mentor, is one of the ne plus

ultra epitomes of that agenda. Even as a young man, I can see it in him
already. Can you?
High-school Pacelli – later Pius XII
I’m not going to go into all the details here about who and what this man
was and what he did to humanity in his reign as Pope (and before).
That is already well-covered especially in the following book chapters:
The Reckoning, Chapter 9: Catholic Pope slavemasters

The Reckoning, Chapter 10: Down the
Mental Health Rabbit Hole
But, I will take some highlights from those and line up Leo Bartemeier’s
career accordingly –
Both Pius XI and XII (but especially XII – Pacelli) were not only
involved in fomenting WWII, they were involved in profiting from it.
Pius XI, is who had Pacelli negotiate the infamous Concordat with Hitler
and Nazi Germany. Hitler was so on-board with thatidea that it was
literally the first thing he did when he took power.
It was that same man, Pacelli’s mentor, who said that there is a
Spiritual Battle for the minds of men (Pius XI)
By the time we’re in the 20th century and Eugenio Pacelli was head of
the Vatican intelligence network under Pope Pius XI (and this is just
prior to Pacelli becoming Pope in 1939) this division, or at least the
“Kingdom of Satan” is now a spiritualorder – of spiritual power – being
ascribed onto Communism and not freemasonry now.
for the evil we must combat is at its origin primarily an evil of

the spiritual order. From this polluted source the monstrous
emanations of the communistic system flow with satanic logic.
– Pope Pius XI DIVINI REDEMPTORIS (On Atheistic

Communism) 19 March 1937
Another way of saying “spiritual” is mental – in the sense of you are
talking about the unseen realm of Man. His thoughts, his heart, his
mind, so to speak.
What this Pope is saying is that is what he wants the focus on. The
MINDS of man. His DECISIONS. Which also happens to be the realm
of (and the reason for) propaganda in the first place.
Jesuits (and the top Catholic leaders) are ALL about messing with
people’s minds. That’s their real goal actually.
…[The Jesuit Society] it seeks to rival the Divinity in its

knowledge of the human heart.
From the contemplation of this pious work, we will turn to the

famous Constitutions of the Society. The Institute of the Jesuits is
contained in fifteen distinct works; the book of the Constitutions
being the groundwork of the system: strongly, deeply built; with a
knowledge of mental architecture unsurpassed, except in the
Spiritual Exercises of the same cunning Builder. Subsequent
Rules, Decrees, Canons, &c., are stated to have ‘resulted from the
spirit of the Institute, which they are intended to uphold and
enforce.
The Novitiate written in 1846 by former ‘novice’ Jesuit Andrew

Steinmetz
What was Bartemeier’s masters dissertation at the Catholic University

of America? It was titled: Doctrine of Pleasure-Pain and Learning.
(Catholic University Bulletin Volumes 21-22; 1916) Note: In Freudian
psychoanalysis, the pleasure principle (German: Lustprinzip) is the
instinctive seeking of pleasure and avoiding of pain.
Right on cue with ye ole Jesuits goals.
It was Pius XI, with Pacelli right by his side, that gave the world ECT
as a “cure” for and a solidarity with using it on
people labeled “schizophrenic”.
Short story – Ugo Cerletti was the Roman Catholic inventor of Electro
Convulsive Therapy. Ugo used electroshock to provoke epileptic fits in
animals. Many of the animals died. Schizophrenic epileptics seemed
less schizophrenic after an epileptic fit. Cerletti thought producing
convulsions in humans by electro shock, might be useful as a treatment
for schizophrenia. (Later in time that idea was proven wrong.)
In 1935, Ugo was “called” – meaning by Pope Pius XI – and was

appointed to Chair of the Department of Mental and Neurological
Diseases at the University of Rome and director of its mental patient
clinic. The University of Rome has always been under the direct control
of the Popes. Lucio Bini was Ugo’s assistant.
In April 1938, Ugo Cerletti first used ECT on a human patient,

diagnosed as schizophrenic. Ugo used a patient he had previously
experimented on at Mombello Asylum – his name was Enrico.
Ferdinando Accornero was one of the students observing and he
provides an eyewitness account.
That same year (with Pius XII’s approval) our man Leo
Bartemeier here, became the first Catholic training analyst(in that
period analysis was not in favor in many Catholic clerical circles, and
Catholicism was not in particularly good order with the analysts).
Leo Bartemeier became the president of the American Psychoanalytic

Association 1944 -1945 (Leo’s papers)
Leo helped advance Pius’s psychiatric agenda in other ways.
During WWII, John Rawlings Rees and his Tavistock Clinic boys were
busily taking over psychiatry in the British Army in World War II. (The
Reckoning M. McClaughry) and on 18 June 1940 is when John Rees
gives an Address to the Annual Meeting of the National Council for
Mental Hygiene where he asks for everyone to be “fifth columnists”.
On 21 April 1945, a commission of American “experts” arrived to

Europe to study the reasons for the large number of psychiatric
casualties turning up in the various area commands. Bartemeier was
elected head of the commission, which included Karl Menninger,
Lawrence Kubie, John Romano and John Whitehorn. (Leo’s papers)
The commission had intended to proceed in pairs or individually to

different active fronts but the collapse of German resistance mitigated
against such a plan. Instead, they basically hung out with the British
neuropsychiatrists at the 130th General Hospital.
They would have worked very closely with John Rawlings Rees, Eric
Trist, and others of the British Tavistock group.
For some reason, in their after report they made a big deal of what, to
me, was their successful misleading of patients that they saw.
Misleading them as to that because they were civilians, they were no
danger to them. That’s about the biggest lie you could possibly imagine
when it comes to these guys, and what they gloated about is the
infiltration aspectthey got away with – my assessment of what they’re
saying. See for yourself –
Being civilians facilitated the obtaining of information from some

patients. It also enabled us to identify ourselves very readily with
either privates or officers . . . because we were not, in fact, in any
one of these positions ourselves . . . We were not under any
compulsion or obligation to find ways of getting men back to duty.
It was our function only to study the conditions without the
necessity of serving any utilitarian purpose by which Army doctors
are always bound and constrained.
(Office of Medical History; CHAPTER IV: European Theater of

Operations)
The four men –
Karl Menninger, being the brother of William Menninger andthe lovely

man (extreme sarcasm) who instructed in 1942 about Child Sexual
Abuse basically being “good” for their mental health. (See Man and
International Relations: Contributions of the Social Sciences to the
Study of Conflict and Integration by J. K. Zawodny, Volume II :
Integration, section A: Personality Integration, chapter 1 Love, pps. 10,
11.)
Click to enlarge –
. .
Notes – Lauretta Bender is about one of the worst possible people

to espouse as any kind of authority regarding children, given her
brutal and vicious treatment of them in the name of ‘curing’ their
so-called unacceptable behaviors. She is known for giving multiple
electric shock treatments to children under the age of 5, which
should give you some idea of her vindictive nuttiness. She was
also an MKUltra doctor – which means she happily participated in
some seriously nasty human experimentation.
John Romano – also Jesuit trained (at Marquette) was one of the
founding members of the Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry,
later part of its Committee on Medical Education together with Karl
Menninger and others. (GAP Report #8April 1949) If you can believe
the hypocrisy, this guy actually wrote an article on medical ethics not
long before he died. In 1945, Romano was offered and accepted the
Chair of Psychiatry at the University of Rochester Medical School
(established 1920) until 1971; he was a founding member of the
National Institute of Mental Health
John Whitehorn, having just gotten done helping out Dr. Overholser
with the Truth Drug Committee 1942-44 (later moving on to being part
of the board of the CIA front group for MKULTRA experiments,
the Society for the Investigation of Human Ecology in 1957;
Marks, Manchurian Candidate)
Lawrence Kubie, also having just gotten done helping out Dr.
Overholser with the Truth Drug Committee 1942-44 (he also shows
up mixed up with Cybernetics in 1953).
“On October 31, 1942, at the request or the Psychological Warfare

Branch of N.I.S., the National Research Council activated a
committee to investigate the feasibility of using drugs in the
interrogation of Prisoners of War. Responsibility for the facilitation
of the Committee’s efforts was transferred from N.I.S. to the Office
of Research and Development of the OSS, the precursor to the
CIA, on 1 January 1943.
The original committee consisted of Dr. Winfred Overholser

(chairman), Prof. of Psychiatry at George Wash. U. and
Director of St. Elizabeth’s Hospital, Wash., D.C.;
Dr. John Clare Whitehorn, Prof. of Psychiatry at Johns Hopkins;

Dr. Edward A. Strecker, [name misspelled as Stricker] Prof. of
Psychiat. at U. Pa.;
Dr. Lawrence S. Kubie, Assoc. in Neurol. at the Nurological
Institute N.Y.C.
(McClaughry, V., British Security Coordination Compendium II: The

Party Boys; Aug. 2014)
Bartemeier’s Commission
Look who else was later added to the committee – Karl Menninger’s
brother William.
Those Menningers, they sure get around.

Almost as much as Overholser.
Col. R.D. Halloran of the Surgeon General’s

Office, Director of and implemented the new
Neuropsychiatry Division in August 1942. Dr. Winfred
Overholser presented a
bronze plaque in memory of
him at the Walter Reed Army
Medical Center, in 1954,
crediting Colonel Halloran
with establishing the
groundwork for the Army’s
present-day psychiatric
program. He died at his desk
November 10 1943, William
C. Menninger replaced
him.Mentioned in
connection with “shell shock” and Fear studies
in Popular Science, August 1943.(click to enlarge)
Important Note – it just so happens that the Tavistock boys, right at the
time of the Truth Drug committee shifting under the OSS, were there in
the U.S. doing “tours” of American Hospitals. Note that particularly John
Rees, and Dr. Hargreaves were the poster-boys for these happy (I’m
being sarcastic) little gatherings.
Dr. Menninger, (Halloran’s replacement on the truth-drug committee) is
also pictured with some seriously scary looking people – including
Edward Strecker (another truth-drug committee member) and others
including Alan Gregg of the Rockefeller Institute.
OK.
What were these “psychiatric casualties” Bartemeier is the pied
piper leading them all to examine?
“They’re ALL schizophrenic.”
You can actually see it starting to be advertised in that Popular

Mechanic magazine above, but it was just exactly as as what happened
in WWI – People that didn’t want to kill for them any more.
Can’t have that, right? (these people are cowards, they never fight their
own wars directly and are very vindictive against people won’t fight for
them).
Only this time, instead of calling it shell shock, or battle neurosis – know
what Bartemeier and friends would call it now?
Combat Exhaustion.
Right.
That’s what it is.
Not that they are SANE to not want to kill anymore. Nope. Couldn’t be
that.
Just exactly how did they end up on this mission?
Well, they kind of elected themselves, in a manner of speaking. Two of

those four men (besides Bartemeier) were on the Committee on
Neuropsychiatry of the National Research Council – formed in October
1940. Guess who headed it?
Dr. Overholser.
Yep. That’s right, That gives us our Overholser tie-in to the AMA
through Bartemeier.
The other members were Drs. Franklin G. Ebaugh, Foster Kennedy,

Adolf Meyer, Tracy Putnam and Harry Steckel (who was also on the
Truth Drug committee) John Whitehorn and I believe Romano as well.
However, by the time this little mission was formed in 1945,

Overholser’s committee was actually under the new OSRD.
1941 June 28 – less than six months before Pearl Harbor, Roosevelt
signed the Executive Order creating the Office of Scientific Research
and Development (OSRD), with Vannevar Bush as Director, personally
responsible to the traitorous President Roosevelt. As Director of OSRD,
Bush was given “final responsibility for the entire program of civilian
scientific research and development, not only in the fields of
instrumentalities of warfare, but also in all fields of military
medicine.” The NDRC, itself transferred intact from the Council of
National Defense to the new OSRD…and a new Committee
on Medical Research (CMR) was established. —- Both Overholser
and Harry Stack Sullivan were known for their secretive human
experiments they did in the name of “mental healing. Overholser as
Superintendent at Saint Elizabeths Hospital and Harry Stack Sullivan as
the leading psychiatrist at Chestnut Lodge (an extremely creepy
place). They were hiding what they were doing to people under this
military “medical research” and “personnel selection”.
When the five men came back from Europe, they submitted a paper in
October 1946: Combat Exhaustion to the Journal of Nervous and
Mental Disease. (pps.104, 358–389; 489–
525. https://doi.org/10.1097/00005053-194610000-00002)
It was Pius XII who initiated the covert intelligence operation
against America’s youth under the guise of “anti-communism”. By
April 13, 1946, it was announced – the Vatican had officially entered the
American Student political fray. This change in church policy was
heralded by Father John Courtney Murray, a leading Jesuit and the
religion editor of the prominent Catholic journal America.
“To wrest the initiative from those who have for their goal the
destruction of Christian civilization.”
Pius XII and John Courtney Murray, “Operation
University,” America, issue 75 April 13, 1946, 34-35;
You can read Operation University here.
It was Pius XII that heralded the infiltration of America’s universities

for mind control purposes – 1946.
“What the Holy See wants in confronting the Soviet threat is an

‘Operation University…the intellectual penetration of the university
milieu—the winning of the universities, professors and students,
for the ideas that underlie peace and Christian world order.”
“Pius XII wants the Catholic international student movement to be

a strong ally in the mission upon which he has focused the eyes of
the universal church.”
That same year, what did Bartemeier do?
Helped establish THE group for the “Advancement of Psychiatry” (the

Society for Biological Psychiatry was also formed this year in January).
If you try to look up what that Group is, you get vague statements like
this: “GAP was founded in May 1946 by a group of young psychiatrists
who had served in World War II.” But really, all 5 of these men who
Overholser had approved going to Europe, were right there in the
beginning together with William C. Menninger. Keep that under your hat
for now, it’s going to come up a little later on here.
Then, Bartemeier became the President of the International

Psychoanalytic Association 1949-50 (Leo’s papers)
It was Pius XII who had his minions then oversee, from within, the CIA
running of his covert intelligence operation.
The CIA was working through NSA (National Student

Association) to carry out covert actions from 1950on
especially –
Over the next few years, the involvement of the NSA in CIA covert
actions would grow in many directions, far beyond what its
progenitors might have imagined. NSA covert operations would
span five continents and reflect numerous government-defined
objectives. The CIA would recruit and induct dozens of
American students into the secret relationship, administer
security oaths under the Espionage Act to ensure their
silence, and assign them CIA case officers to enforce their
fidelity to a covert agenda. (Paget, Patriotic Betrayal p. 94)
Leo Bartemeier became the 80th president of the American Psychiatric

Association (1951-1952). This third presidential election is billed
as: “the only psychiatrist to win the Triple Crown.“ (Leo’s papers)
It was Pius XII that gave approval (1952) for experimenting on

people with mind-affecting drugs.
And meanwhile, there’s the Vatican following suit with the other
“implant” happy slavemaster factions – Pope Pius XII is going to
basically give his approval of experimenting on those deemed
feeble-minded or lunatics as labelled by state approved
psychiatrists and exactly when both the British, the Vatican
(universities and mental hospitals) and Drug Company reps and
psychiatrists like William Long are going to start testing drugs
that affect the person’s mind. (McClaughry, George Hunter
White: Mkultra and UFO years 2018)
That same year, the American Medical Association established a

committee on mental health with Leo Bartemeier as the chairman, a
position he held for a decade.
From that position, he would help shepherd exactly what drugs etc.
would be “allowed” – and profited from – to fulfill the Vatican agenda as
well as that of the British faction of these slavemasters.
While doing all that, in 1954 LEO returned to Maryland, this time to
head the Seton Psychiatric Institute, one of the oldest of the nation’s
private mental hospitals.(Leo’s papers). And what was that place
about?
Oh, you know. Seton Psychiatric Institute was established in 1844 and
was the leading mental health facility in the United States for the
treatment of Catholic priests – the kind that sexually abused children.
It was one place where the Vatican HID people from prosecution for
their crimes of sexual abuse. Given that Bartemeier hung with people
like Karl Menninger who told the world that child sexual abuse was
actually good for their mental health, and given the unbelievably high
prevalence of homosexual proclivities among both the German
psychiatric immigrants and the Catholic priests.
“A native of Minnesota and a former monk and priest, Sipe had

pursued a career in counseling at the old Seton Psychiatric
Institute, where priests with problems were sent for treatment…
Sipe described the priesthood as a secretive world of
emotionally and sexually immature men “locked” in an
adolescent stage of development and poorly prepared in seminary
for the celibate life. […] In a letter to a bishop several years later,
Sipe added this warning: “When men in authority — cardinals,
bishops, rectors, abbots, confessors, professors — are having or
have had an unacknowledged-secret-active-sex life under the
guise of celibacy, an atmosphere of tolerance of behaviors within
the system is made operative.” Sipe was widely criticized by
church officials, who insisted, even as the sexual abuse scandal
grew and legal settlements mounted, that celibacy was not the
problem. […]The danger is, it will upset the power structure. The
resistance would come from the established male hierarchy;
they don’t want to give up power and entitlement.“
(Baltimore Sun, 18 August 2018)
A secretive world of emotionally and sexually immature men who are

obsessed with power and entitlement, who run and have always run
the Catholic church.
Still exactly the same as when they were kicked out of “heaven”, I see.
Well. Just a lovely place Seton was. And I’m absolutely positive that it
was Pius XII, virulently and secretly misogynistic and homosexual his
own self, who orderedasked Bartemeier to go there. Note: Richard
Sipe has a whole report on what he found when working for Leo
Bartemeier at Seton.
From all the above, you can see the level of infiltration of the “mental
health” aspect that Bartemeier was clearly being usedfor by the Vatican.
(and the British slavemasters, for that matter)
Despite attacking Hubbard on the basis of “hypnosis” and along the

lines of the secret interest in “making people more suggestible” these
people simultaneously felt that it had use and that there was a need for
more hypnotists. Because, like many things, it’s an art, and in order to
have a pool to choose from they needed to legitimize it.
And there was Catholic Bartemeier right in the thick of it. Again. It’s one
of the few areas where you can see the two factions of the
slavemasters align, is the area of MENTAL and SPIRITUAL control
issues.
The British led the way, starting with using their club-over-medicine, the
British Medical Association. In 1955 they endorsed hypnosis for “certain
purposes”. In their April 23 1955 British Medical Journal it was
recommended that ALL physicians and medical students receive
training in hypnosis. In 1958, Canada followed with urging “acceptance”
of the British Medical Association report, then Bartemeier, as head of
the AMA Council on Mental Health, endorsed hypnosis. (Report on
Medical Use of Hypnosis, Council on Mental Health, American Medical
Association , JAMA 168:186-189 ( (Sept. 13) ) 1958)
The initial approval by the Council on Mental Health of the American
Medical Association stated:
The surgeon, obstetrician, anesthesiologist, internist and general

practitioner may legitimately utilize these technics within the
framework of their own particular field of competence.1
Whereas the report stresses that all who use hypnosis should be
cognizant of its complex nature, it points out that controversy exists as
to the hazards of hypnosis. The A.M.A. was queried about their stand.
The question “Has the A.M.A. Committee on Hypnosis ever published
officially any statement defining or implying the dangers in the use of
hypnosis by physicians?” elicited the answer that it had not done so, nor
had it authorized one, and that a member of the committee who states
this is “expressing his own personal opinions.”
President of The American Board of Medical Hypnosis, Jerome

Schneck explained that the Board is sponsored by the Society for
Clinical and Experimental Hypnosis, the representative scientific
organization in this field since 1949. The board is affiliated with the
Institute for Research in Hypnosis, also incorporated in the state of New
York. Leading members of the Society for Clinical and Experimental
Hypnosis served individually as special consultants to the Council
on Mental Health in connection with the 1958 Report on Hypnosis.
Bartemeier’s allowing and approving of all the AMA-driven attacks on

Hubbard for “using hypnosis” was both spurious and hypocritical, to say
the least, and he (and they) knew it but did it anyway.
So.
We were looking at a 1963 letter with various attachments that Oliver

Field had sent to Kermit Miller.
Look at this part again now:

You may recall that around 1950 L. Ron Hubbard wrote a book
which he called “Dianetics.” He seems to be in the forefront of this
quasireligious group known as “Scientologists”, who apparently
seek to practice what Hubbard wrote about in his book. The file
on this subject was kept for several years in the office of our
Council on Mental Health. In answering inquiries on the subject,
that office advised that the Council itself had informally considered
and discussed information coming to it with relation to the
Scientologists organizations; that the Council had not officially
expressed an opinionabout such organizations, but that the
Council members seemed to be convinced that none of these
organizations or the treatment methods they employ are based on
a scientific medical background.
Now you know who “the council” is that kept the files on Hubbard,
Dianetics and Scientology.
Leo Bartemeier.
The man tightly connected to the Menningers, Overholser, the Tavistock

psychiatrists in England – that’s who was shepherding the files AND
presumably Oliver Field and Austin Smith as well. They didn’t have his
“rank”, so to speak.
It’s interesting how Oliver hid Leo’s identity though, don’t you think? It
also makes what I’m about to tell you take on a whole new depth.
Oliver, in his letter to Kermit, then trots out his main items that he wants
Kermit to look at. First on the list? Austin Smiths July 29, 1950 little
show. Followed by the two Time magazine articles, then spreads that
very happy with himself as to the WRECKED MARRIAGE of Hubbard,
tabloid propaganda, the Times-Herald for April 24, 1951 reporting the
divorce suit against Mr. Hubbard. A particularly salacious and vicious
article.
Particularly one of those Time magazine articles is one of Oliver’s
favorites – the “Of Two Minds” one.
Two Minds/Dual Spirit

In my research extensively detailing Hubbard and the degree a sham
university named Sequoia gave him, I documented just what that article
said, but perhaps a lesser known, more esoteric and deeper
understanding of that chosen title might surprise you. About that the two
“minds” are actually two BEINGS. Two people.
In fact, it is there that Hubbard

made his biggest mistake with
Dianetics.
.
He had literally tripped over that being, and had success

because however he did so, he somehow managed to treat it like a
being with respect and understanding and that being decided to
cooperate with this novel approach.
Whether Hubbard knew it or not, that’s what happened.
Hubbard didn’t want to realize that the “reactive mind” that he talked to
in his sessions (and called File Clerk) wasn’t just some thing, it was
what I call one’s body partner, what the ancients called the soul in the
soul/spirit doctrine.
Instead, he went off chasing the spirit and pretty much always, if he
even bothered to mention them, referred to the soul in highly derogatory
ways – beneath his notice.
And yet that is who he was addressing in Dianetics.

That is who can literally change the entire structure of the body, should
they choose to.
Any success he ever had in

Dianetics was because
of that being.
.
It’s funny how long this has been known, this Dual spirits doctrine, and
equally funny just how much it is SUPPRESSED from any real
exploration or use.
Hubbard was right on top of it, yet he missed it.
Oh, he knew there was another being there, alright, but within 2 years
of Dianetics he had turned to older propaganda which wants to have it
be MULTIPLE beings, and Hubbard was calling them, what was it…
entities and completely misunderstanding the true state of things.
It is ONLY THAT BEINGwho

could change the physical
body states Hubbard had initial
success with in Dianetics.
Veer away from that?
You got trouble.
Hubbard veered.
From there, things went from bad to worse, culminating in his OAHSPE-
based “advanced levels” OT 3 and later versions of OT 5-7 called NED
for OT’s.
This was picked up and expanded later, in the 1980’s, by Captain Bill
Robertson (Ron’s Org – Erica and Max Hauri) and Alan Walter
(Knowledgeism) – with Bill Robertson eventually seeing entities in every
speck of water and food and yet dying of a brain tumor, and Walter
“harnessing” entities as his personal spiritual teammates and yet dying
from gross obesity and complications of that.
BOTH of them completely ignored, degraded, and marginalized the

body partner, Both were initially in awe of the “world” going on beneath
the surface yet just like Hubbard could not conceive of the idea that
one being could be so utterly impressive.
It challenged THEIR egos, and rather than face that and find out what
was really going on around here, they flinched, ran away, and decided
that it couldn’t possibly be just one being. They both decided that its
FUNCTIONS were all differentbeings – if you can imagine the arrogant
absurdity of such an idea.
They were all duly infected with Catholic/British slavemaster disease

and pet peeve – That being doesn’t like them (for good reason) doesn’t
listen to them (also for good reason) so therefore they must be
“degraded” and should be gotten rid of.
Big mistake.
But –
Revenge is their watchword.
“revenge all disobedience.”
– IMMORTALE DEI, Pope Leo XIII, November 1, 1885
And they wonder why they just can’t seem to ever quite get there, when
it comes to mastering even their own bodies.
Disobedient to them and doing their own Reckoning on these people all
this time, body partners remain unrepentant. Good thing, I say. There
would literally be no human race left if they weren’t.
Here and there though, there have been men and women who did start
going in the right direction and they were always viciously attacked or at
the very least marginalized and/or forced OFF that particular course. I’ll
probably write more in-depth on this one day, but here’s an example.
Dr. George Calvin Pitzer.
He was born 1835 and died 1909 in Los Angeles. He helped found the
American Medical College. That was one of the schools that was
destroyed in Flexner’s rampage of hate against such things.
Flexner graded American along with several other Missouri

medical schools as “utterly wretched” following his visit in 1909.
– American Medical College, Barnes Medical College, and National

University of Arts and Sciences Collection
You can read the Flexner report here – Missouri starts on page 269.
Judging from its review of American Medical College (Eclectic) as
“utterly wretched” on p. 276, you’ll see that “eclectic” clearly wasn’t part
of the future planned program. And, you see, Pitzer was a Professor at
that exact school – Professor of the Principles and Practice of Medicine.
What do I think was the real reason for targeting Pitzer though?
Pitzer had written a book way back in 1898, called Suggestion– A

school was formed around Pitzer’s experiences with what he called the
‘subjective’ mind, called The St. Louis School of Suggestive
Therapeutics and Medical Electricity.
Flexners report didn’t exactly rate it, which, from what I understand, was
his way of having it be beneath rating. You can at least see it mentioned
in the list of Missouri schools evaluated though, in this Report of the
Missouri Medical Association July 1911 to June 1912, just after the
Flexner report came out in 1910. It mentions Pitzers school on p. 34.
Some of what Pitzer wrote is downright amazing in its prescience. He

walks right along the line of what I have just been telling you and that
would not do in the hands of the “commoners”, at all – from the
slavemasters perspective. If you like, you can check out this
course from 1899. Although not put together by Pitzer, if you look at
page 13 of the PDF you can get a pretty good idea, again, of why this
kind of thing was completely smashed down upon by the slavemasters.
Did you
know…
That union-of-the-two was actually the original
point of hypnosis back then?
Of course, as usual, coming from the arrogant I’m-better-than-you-and-

won’t-even-acknowledge-you-exist mentality, that didn’t always come
out quite like how some people planned.
But that union though, that was a very real desire.
…Is there for us also any possibility of a like resurrection into

reality and day? Is there for us any sleep so deep that waking from
it after the likeness of perfect man we shall be satisfied; and shall
see face to face; and shall know even as also we are known?
– The Human Personality and Its Survival of Bodily Death by

Frederic Myers Volume I – 1903
No, it is not SLEEP or some drugged up unaware state that is needed.
That much I’ll say for the moment.
Just like Hubbard, Robertson, Walter and I imagine a host of others

throughout history, watch British Society of Psychical Research man,
Fredric Myers, do the exact same flinch, the exact same running way to
a more “comfortable” theory.
First, let me show you how he recognizes there is someone else there.
From Fredric Myers 700+ pages book set published in February 1903 –
note: Beneath is a reference to what Fredric Myers called the subliminal
mind, what some call today the subconscious mind.
That some guess of a more continuous consciousness,

of an identity unmoved and stable beneath the tossing
of the psychic storm, must needs have been suggested
by all those strange interruptions?
Frederic Myers Volume I
An identity, ie: a PERSON.
One who is UNMOVED and stable – despite everything you do to it.
I think that’s beautiful.
A truly magnificent being to stay so true to their “job”, their selves, all
this time. Wouldn’t you say? Enough to make some people feel they
might not quite be living up to their end of the bargain.
.
In this example, he knows WHO is actually the important one recording

the “engrams” Hubbard tripped over.
…there are occasional indications that some memory of

the pain, say, of an operation, has persisted in some
stratum of the personality;—thus apparently indicating
that there wassomewhere an actual consciousness of
the pain when the operation was performed.
The Human Personality and Its Survival of Bodily Death by

Frederic Myers Volume I, Chapter 5
Here’s Myers talking about the ‘subliminal’ self, versus some other self,
you understand.
The subliminal (or ultra-marginal) mental life is

sufficiently complex and continuous to justify us in
speaking of a subliminal Self.
Frederic Myers Volume I
.
Now watch him flinch and run
away from that truth –
and invent the same wrong-headed theory about MULTIPLE beings that
L. Ron Hubbard did.
He starts pushing (fact-slipping) that this other ‘self’ is some kind

‘complex’ of lives – aka demons.
…each man is essentially a spirit,

controlling an organism which is itself a comp
lex of lower and smaller lives.
…the man of genius …effects a successful co-operation
of an unusually large number of elements of his
personality — reaching a stage of integration slightly in
advance of our own.
The Human Personality and Its Survival of Bodily Death by
Frederic Myers – Volume II
Oh it’s – the spirit – is the only one controlling that “organism” is it?
Explain cancer then. Pretty shitty control. But hey, what do they blame
the cancer on, even though they think they are in control? Oh yea, that
evil organism.
Sheesh. You can’t have it both ways, you idjiots.

And now instead of there being another self? Or person? It’s
an organism. And…it’s a COMPLEX of LOWER – see the arrogant
attitude – and SMALLER – more arrogance – lives.
OK.
So, I personally think this is all part of the reason for titling the
1950 Time attack article re Dianetics (which is unsourced, by the way)
as Of Two Minds.
–––
More AMA documents
Coming back to Oliver’s list of items he thought were best, that he send
to Kermit Miller, it’s interesting how Oliver does NOT mention Wertham
or Rollo May, the first two main attacks. Why not? I believe my article
proves why not, if investigated it would lead to places Field doesn’t want
people to look, connections that were STILL hidden 70 years later
before I dug them out.
Just as Leo Bartemeier was.
Ah! But there’s even more to this Oliver/Kermit story.

FDA Inspector Hailey interviewed Mr.Kermit V. Miller who lost his wife
and three children through a divorce. Kermit blames this on his wife’s
infatuation with Scientology, yet it was HIM that filed for divorce in the
first place. While trying to get everybody and their brother to investigate
Scientology for what were, essentially, his failings, there was Oliver
Field spending TWO HOURS talking to the guy.
Know what one of the things they talked about was? Oliver telling the
guy that a Scientologist was taking LSD.
1. 47 SW 11th Street – Mr. Miller does not know who operates this
establishment. However, he says that he has heard a rumor that a
redheaded individual called “Red” Thornton has some sort of
connection with this Chapter. He said he had heard that this
individual was taking some sort of drug to immunize himself
against radiation and possibly had given it to other members. Mr.
Miller says he described this drug to Oliver Fields of AMA and was
told that it was probably “Lysergic Acid”. This is a very dangerous
drug.
(Vol 6 of 18 p.151-153, FDA documents)

LSD?
Really Oliver?
Oh hey. Kermit…and Kermit.
Nope. Ain’t goin’ there.
Yeah. Ok. Anyways…
You’ll appreciate the irony, not to mention the STUPIDITY of Oliver Field
acting like LSD is only used by bad people and cults, given the Master
Timeline entry showing what some of the most powerful people in the
background that he is subordinate to were doing –
1950 – June 1 to 5 – George Raines, the Chief of Psychiatry at the

Naval Medical (research) center Bethesda tells Theodore Wiprud that
Hubbard is a PHONY. George Raines has more then one published
paper together with Robert Cohn and Project CHATTER man Charles
Savage. (one 1948 example here) —Robert Cohn said in an
interviewwhen George Raines hired him with a million dollar budget in
1952: “We were interested in LSD, thinking it could create an
experimental psychosis, and at that time we believed it was safe to
take. Evarts and Charlie Savage organized a series of studies on LSD,
not only clinically, with volunteers and patients, but with animals as
well.” See? All three were still at ye ole secret drug testing ala
CHATTER and BLUEBIRD in 1952. – These are all the
very same people and the very same research line of secret projects
Thorvald had his eye on Hubbbard for, yet NOW he’s a “phony”.
So yeah.
dunce cap for Oliver on that one.
Next topic –
The next document mentions from the AMA files show the hand
of Thorvald Solberg, Austin Smith and Oliver Field’s influence and
interest in shutting down the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation.
STATE OF NEW JERSEY AGAINST DIANETIC
RESEARCH FOUNDATION
Source: Exhibits 6 and 7.
Exhibit 6: AMA reply 3/19/51 to Dr. E.S. Hallinger,
Secretary of Board of
Medical Examiners, Trenton, New Jersey.
Exhibit 7: State of New Jersey letter, Department of Law
and Public Safety,
3/14/51 requesting information of the AMA to prepare a
case charging they were
conducting a school for teaching Dianetics at 275 Morris
Ave., Elizabeth, New
Jersey which violated the healing arts practices of this
state,
Exhibit 23: Denver, Colorado Better Business Bureau
information letter 12/10/51
indicates that Hubbard became involved in a Federal
Bankruptcy proceedings and
left the state before the New Jersey charges could be
heard against
(Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents pp. 229-242, FDA Inspector R.D. Sherman
detailing AMA files on Hubbard, Scientology)
I have not yet found which documents those are as yet, but I did find a
31 January 1963 summation as given by FDA inspector W. Remle
Grove in the H-2 PDF – p. 4.
The Board meeting of October 11, 1950 with Dr. David B.

Allman presiding and Dr. E. S. Hallinger, Secretary, made
the following mention of Hubbard Dianetics Foundation,
Inc.,
“The Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation of

Elizabeth, N. J. is conducting a medical school without a
license and practicing medicine. This Foundation
charges $500,’ for a course of one month and we have
been told upon completion of same they issue a
certificate or diploma with an ‘M.D.’ degree, meaning’
Master of Dianetics. These people treat by mental
means only.
See the AMA influence there? Heck, they can’t even keep their own lies
straight.
“MENTAL MEANS only” is not even under the purview of MEDICINE by

their own rules so…wow.
So desperate.
The Board of Medical Examiners didn’t want to be responsible for

doing anything other than having a record that the HDRF was under
investigation, apparently, because this is what happened next –
After some discussion Dr. Schaaf moved, ‘That the

Secretary be instructed to write a letter to the Attorney
General stating that this matter has been referred to us
and the Board is without jurisdiction
and request him to refer it to the proper authorities – in
our opinion it is a vital matter and we are deeply
interested in the disposition made of this case.’
Seconded by Dr. Corrigan and unanimously
carried.”
Did you notice how a big point was made about charging $500 for a
Dianetics course?
That was courtesy of Austin Smith and Oliver Field, who also made
sure that (plus a lot more) showed up in a “letter to the Editor” of
JAMA in January 1951 by a Camarillo State Hospital ghoul Dr. Ravitch,
no less.
Note: The address Ravitch lists is the address for Camarillo State
Hospital: Department of Mental Hygiene. Which, if you don’t know,
“mental hygiene” was kind of a code-name for Eugenics. Camarillo was
one of the main places in the U.S. for pharmaceutical drugs to be tested
on hapless mental patients, hence this obviously solicited attack letter
from a Camarillo psychiatrist. From one of my Camarillo series posts:
By 1957, Camarillo was jammed with more than 7,000 patients,

shock treatments were standard and lobotomies were also
performed, as well as sterilizations. The 5X increase was often
justified as reasoning to sterilize more patients in order to increase
“eugenic efficiency. (Stern, “From Legislation to Lived Experience”,
p. 104).
As if all of that wasn’t horrifying enough, during the 1950s and

1960s especially, the hospital was at the forefront of so-
called treatments of schizophrenia*and patients were being
used as “testing grounds”for unsavory drug and therapy
“procedures”!
Dr. Ravitch’s MD was gained at University of Minnesota in 1927, I don’t

know where he worked, yet, after that but he was first licensed in
California 6 June 1946. But man, that guys medical record is
a complete train wreck after that. Felonies, Misdemeanors, Probation
and finally – a cancelled medical license. The other interesting thing is
there is only ONE record in JAMA from this guy, no other papers.
Now for Ravitch’s letter –
To the Editor:— With considerable anxiety I have

watched the cult “dianetics” develop from the first
appearance of its principles in Science Fiction
Magazine. I am concerned about its growth and popular
acceptance, and I fear that the world has had dumped
on it a new therapy which will have the staying power of
chiropractic, with as little scientific background to
support it. It is a phenomenon of some sort, and full of
meaning, that over 500,000 copies of the book are
supposed to have been sold. Countless persons,
without proper background and without understanding
of basic human motives and drives, are “auditing” each
other, and as a result mental hospitals may receive as
patients many whose first psychotic breakdown
occurred during such “auditing.” The “auditors” simply
do not know how to handle the material elicited. The
dangers inherent in such amateurish “auditing” are
readily apparent. Since these persons cannot recognize
an incipient psychosis, adequate treatment my be
delayed, and delay, as pointed out in Bellak’s book,
“Dementia Precox,” definitely reduces the chances for
recovery or improvement.
In a short time there has developed a demand on the

part of thousands of persons for training as
professional “auditors.” To meet this demand, I am
informed, there have been established two training
centers in the United States, in Elizabeth, N.J., and in
Los Angeles. The course lasts one month, and tuition is
said to be $500. The initial Los Angeles enrollment was
1,000 persons, many having been turned away. An
income of $500,000 for the Dianetic Foundation in one
month is certainly not bad. This, however, is only the
beginning. There is being projected a Dianetic College
or University with a two year course, which will no doubt
give graduates greater prestige.
Devotees of dianetics, like the devotees of cults, are not

moved by unfavorable statements made by men of
recognized scientific background. These fanatics
support the new cult with a religious fervor. In vain have
I shown them comments by scientific critics. One gets
the same answers that have so often been heard from
enthusiasts for other cults. For one thing, one hears that
the medical profession is really a medical trust that is
trying to keep out all forms of treatment but its own. The
new cult is growing by the vigorous exploitation of
testimonials. I have already listened to a testimonial of a
cure of agoraphobia. Another person has reported that
since he has been “audited” he is a better
conversationalist. One woman I know is about to start
being “audited” after listening to a testimonial by
someone who had gotten rid of many “engrams”
through dianetics. This dianeticized person claimed that
her thinking had improved and hence her abilities as a
stock market trader had become markedly sharper, the
whole process resulting in her taking profits of $13,000
within a few days. And so the testimonials go.
In Los Angeles the dianetics enthusiasts meet every

Sunday morning in a theater to hear about the latest
procedures and to listen to exegeses of the great book.
As one would expect, the spirit of these meetings has
the coloring that goes with religious zeal. At one of
these meetings I saw one man get up and call attention
to some contradictory phases of the teachings of the
book. He was booed and hooted down, to the relief of
the moderator. Professional “auditors” are setting up
offices throughout the country and advertising for
patients in the good old chiropractic way. Something
should be done to expose irrefutably this nonsensical
tomfoolery. – Samuel J. Ravitch, M.D. Box A, Camarillo,
Calif.
(JAMA; January 13, 1951, Vol 145, No. 2, “Dianetics” letter to editor
Austin Smith by Camarillo State Hospital ghoul Dr. Samuel J. Ravitch.
Note: the article listing for this journal pulls this one letter out as a
separate listing just to highlight it!)
Here’s the letter image –

Notice how Ravitch says: “tuition is said to be $500″ – He got that from
Austin Smith/Oliver Field.
Notice this part: “An income of $500,000 for the Dianetic Foundation in
one month…” Well, now. Seems that Sara Northrup’s statements about
the amount of money coming into the HDRF weren’t too far off after all.
In Cd #1, Folder #5 PDF p. 156 of the Declassified FDA documents,
Sara, as part of her divorce papers from Hubbard, said that the HDRF
received over one million
dollars in 1950. To give you
an idea, in today’s dollars
that’s close to ten million
dollars. That’s another
reason why the AMA is
concerned –
MONEY. Notice this
part: “There is being projected a Dianetic College or University with a
two year course, which will no doubt give graduates greater
prestige.” That’s more than likely a reference to Joseph Hough’s
diploma mill Sequoia University and its Department of Scientology. My
extensive research about all that showed that giving Hubbard a
“degree” from Sequoia seemed to be part of a rather involved attempt to
set him up.
Since Joseph Hough is known to have promoted chiropractic medicine,

a long (really long) term pet attack project of the AMA’s Morris
Fishbein, Austin Smith and Oliver Field?
It wouldn’t be much of a stretch to have one or more of those

three using Hough to pull Hubbard into that Sequoia University mess.
Perhaps in exchange for mercy?
Because it sure doesn’t seem like they ever attacked him(after 1950) in
nearly the same vicious ways they were going after other people.
Including Hubbard.
Deal made?
Maybe so.
Backing up a little, another interesting thing about that meeting of the

Board of Examiners is the timing. October 1950 happens to be when
Hubbard kind of suddenly takes off for Palm Springs.
I think one of his CIA buddies warned him of what was coming from the
unhappy loser department in the April 1950 who-gets-Hubbard
contest between the Navy and the CIA.
The Navy was the –

– in that scenario.
And Thorvald (Navy) was still majorly steamed about it. Vindictive
even. I don’t think he ever let go of it, and certainly neither did
his directed vicious little chihuahuas – Austin and Oliver. Those two
were so fricking clueless as to the BIG picture, it’s a wonder they even
managed to fit their hats on their hugely self-deluded heads.
Hubbard talks about the scene starting in one of his 1952 lectures, and
this is where find another reference to starting a college (which we saw
mentioned in Dr. Ravitch’s letter). It was Hubbard himself who said he
was talking about that in the Fall of 1950.
And I found out something very horrible in October of

1950. We had taken in hundreds of thousands of dollars,
all told, and it was running on an accounting system of
dumping it all in a barrel outside the door and hauling
the barrel down to a bank every once in a while — just
grim: The accounting was just horrible!
More important to me was the fact that by October of

1950 I had not written a second book bringing anyone
up-to-date, I had not done any broad writing of the
subject and my advance work in research was suffering.
What I was doing was a lot of business management.
It was obviously leading nowhere because nobody

could keep track of it anyhow, and everybody was trying
like mad to keep everything on the straight and narrow
but everybody was riding off in all different directions. It
was a scramble; it was grim. And I simply pulled out of
the Foundations, and I began to research and work as
best I could.
My first effort at this was in Palm Springs. I went down

to Palm Springs, I got a modest little house down on the
edge of the desert and I sat down there and I figured out
and wrote down the chart notes on the Hubbard Chart of
Human Evaluation. I severed connections actually,
actively with the Foundations, and using some royalty
money and so forth, worked out the chart you find in
Science of Survival.
Then a great many sorrowful things happened to me in a

rapid-fire order — I had neglected everything,
everywhere practically — a lot of unfortunate incidents
of one sort or another.
Finally, to get some peace and quiet, I went down to

Cuba. And I sat down in Cuba with a recording Sound
scriber and I dictated in a space of three weeks the book
Science of Survival, which brought up the techniques
and gave the evaluation of human behavior and so on,
and then came back up here to Wichita. I was pretty
tired by that time. I hadn’t been getting much
processing; a lot of things had been happening to
me. And when I got here to Wichita, on April 15, 1951, a
man here very kindly took it upon himself to arrange the
affairs of Dianetics and square them around in some
fashion so that Dianetics could go on as a foundation.
The affairs of the old Foundations were not cleaned up,

however, and this local Foundation, while perfectly
solvent and carrying on as best it could, was
nevertheless being consistently and continually hit by
slopovers from the old Foundations, where the
bookkeeping was bad. To this day I don’t know if there
is a set of books for the old Foundations.
There are some bank accounts and canceled checks.

Accountants will go round and round for a week or two,
and then they will suddenly come out and say, “I can’t
do anything about it.” People will look at those books
and they just practically faint. The U.S. government
looks at it and says, “Hm, it would be very interesting if .
. .” but they can’t even make enough sense out of it to
get a suit on their hands. It is very grim.
These affairs were not wound up, and the windup of

them kicked back this last August[1951] into this local
Foundation here. A $189 bill was leveled at the local
Foundation and a receivership for this local Foundation
was demanded. It was not prepared or contested in
court by the officers of the current Foundation. And the
receivership was planted just like that, and then this
Foundation had to give a bond.
They appealed it. January 7, 1952, an appeal was

supposed to be filed at the Court of Appeals in Topeka.
There was ample time to prepare it — clear from August
to January — but it was not prepared and it was not
filed. I did not even know it was the closing date until
the eighth of January. It was too late. As a consequence,
a receivership on this Foundation was confirmed. A
bond was posted again. And several lawyers around
town, evidently fed suits by Dun and Bradstreet(which
interested itself in collecting suits against the
Foundation, according to a report I get from one of Dun
and Bradstreet’s lawyers), evidently did this very
interesting trick: they leveled at this Foundation all the
eastern Foundation debts.
One man came through very nobly and he paid off all
those debts; there was some $11,000 outstanding, I
think. When he had them all paid and they had a journal
entry ready to go into court dismissing the receivership
— the Foundation was going to be in the clear — this
Dun and Bradstreet lawyer, without any turning around
on his agreement, reportedly said, “We have another
suit here for $5,000, and you have to pay up or shut up.
Now, we’ve held up the journal entry.” Having already
pulled $11,000 out, he mysteriously thought that the
Foundation could produce another $5,000. And so it
went by the boards, because it was obvious that he
would keep finding debts here and there where debts
had never been listed and just keep knocking this
Foundation to pieces.
However, watching the operation of the local Foundation

and seeing that it was terribly enturbulated most of the
time about its indebtednesses, and finding out that I
could not put an adequate school into existence there,
on February 12 I resigned from this Foundation. I sold
them back my stock in this Foundation and severed
connections with it completely. And then just a few days
ago — this was quite surprising to me — the local
Foundation filed voluntary bankruptcy in order to shut
off this line of suits that were continuing to come in. I
don’t know whether the local Foundation is going to
continue to operate under its own name or not. This I
don’t know. I no longer have any interest in this local
Foundation at all.
But when I resigned February the twelfth, it was to

establish Hubbard College, a graduate school for
auditors. And the plan of Hubbard College is to teach
Dianetics the best that it can be taught and issue
degrees in the subject, which we have a perfect right to
do. It is a plan to make a film school, so that a Bachelor
of Dianetics will be able to view some fifty hours of
lectures and demonstrations on sixteen-millimeter
sound film. And as you can see, this would be quite a
course of instruction.
Now, this organization has several associates out

across the country that it is enfranchising, and its
business is going along very happily and very
cheerfully. As a matter of fact, it is not even vaguely
influenced or impinged upon by Foundation affairs, for
an excellent reason: Nobody ever challenged my right to
teach Dianetics.
The Foundation control was in my hands for, I think,

three minutes once. That was the estimated time that it
took for me to sign six stock certificates as having
received them and sign them as having given them back
to the local Foundation on February 12 this year. They
had not issued me any stock, and in order for me to
resign I had to accept my stock and turn it back. So I
had never even owned any stock in the Foundation until
that moment.
Well, nobody has ever challenged my right to teach

Dianetics; it exists in the minute books of all the old
Foundations. And I have often talked to groups about
someday putting together a university. Someday,
somehow, on whatever shoestring or whatever ten
billion dollars — it didn’t matter — someday there was
going to be a university of Dianetics. Only it was going
to be more than a university of Dianetics: it was going to
be a university of arts and science, whereby we were
going to try to coordinate and correlate science and get
it out of its specialized categories into a correlated
category.
This goal goes back to 1950. In the fall of 1950 I was

talking about this. I have had projects on with the army,
for instance, trying to get old campsites from them and
so forth, in order to form this university.
Well, it is formed; it is here in Wichita. It is just on its

trembling, stumbling small feet right now, but it
undoubtedly can progress. One of the things it will do is
make widely available instruction in Dianetics as has not
been made available before — probably make available
correspondence courses and so forth, in it.
Now, I only did this at a time when Dianetics became a

complete package.
This school down here, for instance — the university,

the college — is going to teach an extended course, a
nightly course. That is, a person can go five nights a
week, and they emerge at the other end of this with a
certification and so on.
Hubbard Professional Course Lectures, Review of Progress of Dianetics
and Dianetics Business – February 25, 1952
See that part that says: “One man came through very nobly…”?
That’s Don Purcell.
And…well. Let’s just say that the 2 years later John Galusha version of
all this is rather different.
John Galusha writes to the BBB of Phoenix on 12 May 1954 (folder 4 p.

77-79):
“In November 1950 Hubbard became convinced that the

corporation was not sound and that it could not attain to its
professed goal of helping people. He attempted to withdraw his
name from it and was variously inveighed against. He had only
one vote in seven. forced to leave it in possession and continued
use of his name, he retired in December to Palm Springs
California where he set up a modest research laboratory.”
…Van Vogt, the principle mover in the Los Angeles Foundation

and others were intensely provoked at Hubbard’s withdrawl.
Hubbards wife…threatened Hubbard with public scandal if he did
not support the Foundations. Hubbard, busy writing a new book,
refused to lend any credence to these threats or those of the
Elizabeth board and went to Cuba where he completed a 125,000
book…As their young child had always been under his, not her
mother’s care, the child accompanied him. […[Hubbard made no
statements of any kind during all this period and when he became
aware that they had been made, ordered his separated wife to
him, had her sign a confession to perjury…[…]Meanwhile the
Elizabeth Foundation over which Hubbard had never had power
beyond his personality, sold itself to one Don G. Purcell, an
oilman of Kansas.”
The letter also details what happened, theoretically, with Purcell that led
to the falling out resulting in Hubbard resigning in early 1952 whereupon
he moved to Phoenix.
Also, if it was known that Hubbard had withdrawn, as Galusha seems to

imply that it was, why is Van Vogt still being supportive of Dianetics in
1951? Oh wait, I get it, because he’s running one of the Foundations.
What am I referring to? This, that I found in the AMA files given to the
FDA.
A.E. Van Vogt had responded to JAMA and Camarillo ghoulDr.

Ravitch’s letter 11 days later on 24 January 1951, with letterhead
showing a HDRF inc. of California. It’s interesting that one of the first
things that he wanted to address was this statement by Ravitch: “The
initial Los Angeles enrollment was 1,000 persons, many having been
turned away. An income of $500,000 for the Dianetic Foundation in one
month is certainly not bad.” Van Vogt responding with “However, there
were not as Dr. Ravitch states a thousand people enrolled for the first
course in Dianetics offered in Los Angeles. The number was just over a
hundred.” It seems odd to me that was such a concern of Van Vogt’s
but I’d like to point out that he DOES NOT actually specifically counter
that monthly income amountwhich is very interesting to me.
**Reference: (folder 3 FDA documents p. 240-42, letter to Jama by A.E. Van

Vogt; part of the AMA documents from Oliver Field; Exhibit 22 (Vol 4 of
18 FDA documents pp. 229-242)
Are we hiding how much money was really coming in?

Van Vogt then proceeds to answer some of the main chosen
propaganda campaign ideas: that Dianetics first appeared in a Science
Fiction magazine, the cult label, pointing out that term is normally
applied to religions, mysticisms etc and that “A mere belief cannot be
investigated.A technique can be.” He then spends some time talking
about what an engram is in his understanding, and that a “lunatic fringe”
has gathered around dianetics – which is odd considering Ravitch didn’t
actually use those words, but oh well. He finishes with mentioning the
validation pamphlet that will “come out in February” – which was also
part of Oliver Field’s JAMA files. You can read about that here.
Next item –
A 10 November 1968 report from Inspector Edward R. Atkins to the

Director, Dallas district about a woman named Velma Johanson who
had been committed to Taub Hospital in Houston Texas for psychiatric
care.
Velma had been getting auditing with an E-meter and her family thought
that “Scientology had caused her mental breakdown” and that she had
told her daughter that “she was a god”. The long and short of it is that
Velma was tricked into being taken to the psychiatric ward and: “Dr.
Walter J. DeFoy, a resident psychiatrist, was interviewed. Dr. DeFoy
said that he had been treating Mrs. Johanson since her arrival. He said
that Mrs. Johanson is acutely psychotic, that she is presently under a
religious delusion that she is a god. His prognosis is that she is
a paranoid schizophrenic. He stated that she may have been
schizophrenic most of her life.” (B-1, h-68 p. 34-43 FDA declassified
documents; letter from Atkins to Dallas Director)
Interestingly enough, Dr. DeFoy was unwilling to say that

Scientology was the cause. My guess is because that would derail
their whole schizophrenia is genetic kick they were forever going on
about, so he said; “Dr. DeFoy said that he did not believe that the E-
Meter or the Scientology Center had caused her problems.”
So, what is interesting to me here, is that the AMA apparently approves

of that anyone who thinks they are a “God”, or in other parlance, an
immortal spiritual being, therefore thusly they are schizophrenic.
Given the strong influence of displaced Jesuits in German

society starting back in the 1800’s, one can see the strongly Catholic
influence of challenges to the “One God”paradigm clearly influencing
the whole idea of “dementia praecox” – which was later re-named
as schizophrenia.
The other very interesting point that shouldn’t go un-noticed in this

report, is this part: “Mr. Johanson said that he has spent over $2,000 at
the center and showed this inspector several cancelled checks. It
should be noted that two of the checks were deposited in a
Switzerland bank account.”
We’ll just file that under follow the money for future reference shall we?
This report also goes on for what I consider to be WAY to long about
what the hell vitamins Velma was taking. Vitamins. It’s as if the
AMA/FDA are acting like they are live grenades or some kind of
weapons or something.
These people are just so…well, the word weird comes to mind.
The only reason to be scared or obsessive about vitamins are

imbalances by improper usage, is what they say, but I think it’s obvious
that it’s the fact that these are not CONTROLLEDSUBSTANCES. AKA
not CONTROLLED PROFIT. The fear that vitamins or natural
supplements might actually work and seriously cut into drug-profits can’t
be disallowed as a more hidden, but definitely there, motivation.
Hubbard’s Challenge to
Psychiatry
Hubbard brings out HIS dark side
Exhibit 9 (starting p. 237 folder 3) is from the AMA files that Oliver Field
gave to Mr. Sherman of the FDA (see (Vol 4 of 18 p. 231). It is a 12
February 1951 announcement by Charles Leonard of the HDRF that L.
Ron Hubbard is “tired of turning the other cheek” and has issued a
challenge to psychiatry, especially to the Dr.s Menninger. The document
is stamped 2 days later by the AMA Bureau of Investigation. The full
announcement can be found uploaded separately here – here’s an
image of the first page of it.
Let’s look at this a bit closer, yeah?
Long aware that organized opposition, unduly alarmed by the

phenomenal spread of dianetics, has been flailing at
him “from behind the scenes and from behind the armor of their
professional immunity,” even inciting to legal action against the
furthering of dianetic knowledge, Hubbard has authorized the
following letter to the Menninger Clinic at Topeka, Kansas, the
American Psychiatric Association, and the New York Psychiatric
Advancement Committee…
Look at that last item named.
First of all, the correct name is: The Group for the Advancement of
Psychiatry (GAP) but I understand the somewhat shorhanded and
geographically located way Hubbard referred to it.
But hey, we know what that is now, right?
That’s Leo Bartemeier and Dr. Overholser’s guys who went and hung
out with the Tavistock psychiatrists in 1945. They came back and
helped establish the group for the “Advancement of Psychiatry” in May
of 1946. It was a direct outcropping of John Rawlings Rees “5th
columnist” suggestion to psychiatrists to infiltrate society, and that the
two areas of society most difficult to infiltrate were law and medicine.
(Rees, 18 June 1940, Address)
William Menninger wrote: ” the founding group was seeking a way in

which American psychiatry could give more forceful leadership,
both medically and socially.”
GAP’s later formulated way of doing this, or one way, was to

deliberately target and discuss “controversial” psycho-social issues,
evident in the 1950 Committee on Social Issues’ Report “The Social
Responsibility of Psychiatry, A Statement of Orientation” published out
of New York.
Here’s an example of a report coming out of New York. The thing

practically reads like a manifesto of what John Rawlings Rees and the
British wanted to see happen.
BUT if we look earlier, we see that GAP’s very first report was by the
Committee on Therapy on the subject of “promiscuous and
indiscriminate use of electro-shock therapy.” (Menninger, Notices and
Bulletins. Psychosomatic medicine Vol. 10 #1, January 1948)
Look whose name is on the Committee of Therapy – why, it’s George

Raines!
He’s still listed on it in that January 1950 Report #8 –
By the way – part of Sherman’s summary document that we opened
this Oliver Field section with verifies Omar Garrison’s quoting of a letter
from Theodore Wiprud to Austin E. Smith evincing George N.
Raines supposed attitude towards Hubbard and Dianetics.(Vol 4 of
18 p. 242 ) Notice that it says: “Captain George N. Raines Navl Medical
Center, Bethesda, Maryland knew both Winter and Hubbard as
“phonies.”.”
GEORGE NEELY RAINES
And oh look! Who else is on that committee with George? Why,

it’s Lawrence Kubie of Leo Bartemeier’s special little WWII team, who
also was on the original Truth Drug committee with Overholser.
Such a small world.

All right there in 1950, the same year that they all wanted to kidnap
Hubbard and his research to be just as out of view as George Raines
and Charles Savage Project CHATTER work.
As you now know, Wikipedia’s description of the 1946 founders as

“psychiatrists who had served in WWII” is quite the blandly euphemistic
way to describe who some of these people were and who they hired
and associated with.
As another example, take Gardner Murphy, the Director of Research at

the Menninger Foundation. He was chosen by Elmo Roper to be part of
a secret “troika” – group of 3 – psychologists to perform psychological
warfare just before the COI became the OSS – the precursor to the
CIA. So that would have been in 1942 approximately during WWII.
Before WWII (also during and after) Gardner Murphy was very active
in telepathy research for the ASPR (American Society of Psychical
Research). My research on William Dudley Pelley, who was part of the
“spiritual” propaganda campaign the British were running back then,
uncovered Murphy’s connections into all that. In addition, my research
into the distinct science-fiction parallels between Ron’s Org’s Captain
Bill Robertson, the Unification Church and the Church of Scientology
revealed Murphy’s role in tandem with, or rather maybe “picking up the
torch” by Britisher Anthony Brooke. He was helping to proselytize
Americans into believing that Reverend Moon was connected with alien
intelligences from Ashtar command.
Yep, it’s really that kooky.
Here’s an example telepathy experiment Murphy was involved with in

1937 –
1937 – Before leaving on a search for a missing plane

near the North Pole, arctic explorer and friend Sir Hubert
Wilkins agreed to help Sherman with an experiment in
mind-to-mind communication. Each day at a pre-
arranged time, Wilkins attempted to send thoughts of
what had transpired that day to Sherman 3400 miles
away in New York City. Sherman recorded his
impressions and immediately mailed the transcripts to
Gardner Murphy, head of the parapsychology
department at Columbia university, who registered and
filed them. When later compared to a diary Wilkins had
kept, Sherman’s impressions proved to be 70%
accurate. The full story is told in the book Sherman and
Wilkins co-authored, Thoughts Through Space [Creative
Age Press,1942].
– Harold Sherman chronology.

Gardner was also involved with essentially supporting all these weird
spin-off organizations to help the CIA spread LSD among American
youth – a subversion operation not an “awakening” as so many dupes
liked to think it was. This was while he was working at the Menninger
Foundation, which he started working at in 1952, and as part of this
“Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry.”
BIO – From 1952, he worked as director of research for

the Menninger Foundation in Topeka, Kansas. He was elected to
the presidency of the American Psychological Association in 1944.
He subsequently served as the President of the British Society
for Psychical Research in 1949 (which he had joined in 1917),
and was Director of the Parapsychology Foundation in 1951.
Again, as noted earlier, Karl Menninger, being the brother of William

Menninger and the lovely man (extreme sarcasm) who instructed about
child sexual abuse essentially being “good” for their mental health.
GAP Report #8 sows that Bartemeier was there right in the beginning,
starting out as chairman of the Committee on Psychiatry in Industry
while he was in Detroit. He was even made president of the Group
during 1963-65. You can see him still shilling John Rees infilration of
Society aspect, for GAP, with his book Psychiatry and Public Affairs.
That same report #8 also shows that Daniel Blain, President of the
American Psychiatric Association during the initial attacks period
against Hubbard, was on the Group’s Committee on Therapy.
The fact that Hubbard targeted the Group for the Advancement of
Psychiatry in his challenge was a really unique and I must say,
ingenious, way of bringing into the limelight the men he knew were
essentially behind targeting him, without specifically naming Thorvald,
Overholser and the Bartemeier crew.
He was also calling their bluff at the same time, since he

knew they knew…
That what he had found out about unconscious memory recording was
TRUE.
What was Hubbard’s challenge to psychiatry?
“If two impartial judges will select two neurotic persons,

without advice from either psychiatrists or dianeticists,
our Foundation will be happy to give them into the
hands of psychiatrists for one week, with before and
after psychometries of the most rigorous nature.
Thereafter our Foundation will give them dianetic
processing for one week, with comparative
psychometries. If the resultant psychometries prove that
dianetics had not done uniformly more for these
persons than psychiatry, Mr. Hubbard will be perfectly
willing to withdraw his book, “Dianetics,” and admit that
dianetics is not better than psychotherapy.”
The silence was deafening.

Why would psychiatry not take up Hubbard in this challenge (if it was
indeed by Hubbard) – it was the perfect opportunity to shoot him down
once and for all.
Unless…yeah. You guessed it. They already knew it worked. They

didn’t want anyone else to know, officially, that it worked. But also,
there were a few other minor problems, sarcastically speaking. Hubbard
refused to HIDE it and it being so public and easily available? Undercut
the entire psychotherapy/psychiatry DRUG-fueled industry.
Can’t have that, right?
Hubbard had repeatedly entreated psychiatrists, psychologists and

psychoanalysts, both in-person and otherwise to inspect and try
Dianetics for themselves and that he would be happy to help in any
serious study of Dianetics. Besides the fact that Dr. Winfred Overholser
shut him down after he refused Thorvald Solberg’s “offer”, not a single
one of these authoritative psychiatric types had ever actually
investigated the subject.
Instead, you get squirrelly gossipy jesuit-style sub-understanding

statements like this from the American Psychiatric Association – I refer
to the official letter of Daniel Blain to Diana Bennett of the National
Better Business Bureau dated 1 August 1950. (Folder 3 FDA
Declassified documents p. 320)
Daniel, do recall, was also part of the Group for the Advancement of
Psychiatry and on the same Committee on Therapy with Lawrence
Kubie and George N. Raines (Bethesd Naval Hospital, Project
CHATTER).
Daniel is responding to her letter of 17 July 1950 (p. 322). Daniel refers
to a vague source then referring to a hodgepodge of equally vague
sources, who he then refers to all-inclusively as “their” opinion on
Dianetics being:
“Hubbard’s approach is unscientific and unrealistic. His

presentation is flamboyant and full of contradictions. His technique
is that used by hypnotists; his appeal is to the hysterical, as is the
appeal of most faith-healers, fortune-tellers, astrologers and
cultists. He refuses scientific and specific questioning, referring all
questioners to his book. His emphasis on sensational publicity is
not in keeping with the behavior or conduct of a professional man
whose chief interest is in his patients’ welfare. His encouragement
of lay practitioners of his system can lead only to widespread
quackery.”
Now after ALL that? Daniel says: “To date, this Association has not
formulated an official opinion on the subject of dianetics.”
Also, do you see how Daniel says: “He refuses scientific and specific
questioning…”?
THAT is what Hubbard is calling their bluff on in this 12 February 1951

challenge.
The sad thing to me is that Hubbard, due to his anglophilic blindness,

never saw the forest-for-the-trees here. Ever.
He was so blinded to that he was essentially working FOR the very

people he hated, because they were in alignment withthe British on this
whole crazy “advancement of psychiatry” thing, that he never correctly
targeted what he would call “the real WHO’s” – a WHO being the actual
sources of the trouble, the original and HIGHEST sources.
He invariably fell for what was both the Vatican and British favorite
misdirection line had been for two centuries – that it’s “the communists”
who are enslaving the world.
He actually says that in a 1960 lecture.

He also told the FBI that’s what happened to the HDRF – which, in light
of this challenge, means he’s indirectly accusing the Group for the
Advancement of Psychiatry of being communist – which is total
horseshit, of course.
The “Commies”
In the FBI files on L. Ron Hubbard, there’s a letter from agent

Baumgardner (7 March 1951) describing an interview with L. Ron
Hubbard where he alleges various communist influences in the HDRF –
Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation.
There’s other examples of Hubbard talking about communists in the FBI

files, you can easily find them, but in that March 1951 interview,
Hubbard provided Baumgardner with two flyers from the HDRF from
1950, both of which I have pulled out by themselves, re-arranged the
images to be more in order and easier to read. They are now uploaded
to the internet archive. Flyer #1 Dianetics: A Brief Discussion and Flyer
#2 Dianetics and Psychoanalysis. Both of them have some interesting
early details you may want to peruse.
–––
Oliver was targeting any doctor who became involved in Dianetics, as

this response letter from January 31, 1953 from F. R. Crowgey of the
Columbiana County Medical Society shows – about a doctor named
Paul H. Beaver of Leetonia, Ohio. (Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents p. 353)
Apparently Oliver was trying (he hoped) to get the guy positioned as a
quack, but this letter kind of killed THAT idea.
He is a man of unquestionable integrity with high standing in the

community and well liked by his associates. He became interested
in Dianetics while visiting in California abuot 3 years ago and has
literally fallen for its teachings “hook, line and sinker.” I know that
he, his wife and son have been “audited” themselves. He carries
on a legitimate practice and practices in our two local hospitals
without Dianetics.[…] I am some that most of we associates have
pretty much the same feeling toward Dr. Beaver which is that we
like him very much and trust him implicitedly, but that we do get a
little bored with his Dianetic enthusiam.”
Then there’s this odd statement after telling Oliver to contact a Dr. Louis
J. Karnosh who was the head of Neuro-psychiatry at Cleveland Clinic,
he says: “I do not wish to imply that Dr. Karnosh is interested in
Dianetics nor that Dr. Beaver is psychic, but they were schoolmate…”
Psychic?? What’s that all about…I have no idea. Yet.
It ends with something that is very spooky to me, look at the almost
begging to Oliver and the AMA to wit that this is ok, right????
“…would like to ask if we are right in assuming that no harm is

being done since Dr. Beaver does not use Dianetics in our
hospitals.”
That Oliver, he’s such a busy boy –
In that same file, there is an earlier letter (March 1953) from Else
Kohede of the Wayne County Medical Society, telling Oliver Field that
the Police Department there is secretly attempting to prove that the
members of the Dianetic Associate in Detroit are practicing medicine
without a license, and that to do this they must first prove that one of the
members charged has “guilty knowledge”. Else wants to know from
Oliver if any Dianetic Association in the U.S. has been prosecuted or
even warned, as that would be “very helpful to their case”. (Vol 4 of 18
FDA documents p. 356)
Oliver USES this investigation 10 years later in a letter to Kermit Miller,

24 January 1963 (Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents p. 405) It’s a followup of
their long phone conversation, but it’s what he says about it that I think
is interesting. He kind of leaves out HIS involvement with the whole
thing.
According to the Detroit (Mich.) News for March 26, 1353. two
operators, Mrs. Refa Postel and Earl Cunard were charged with
practicing medicine without a license. We enclose a photocopy of
the newspaper item and photograph. Our files do not contain
reference to any disposition of this one.
For those that haven’t caught on yet, it seems that the Better Business
Bureaus since like Day One starting with the National office out of New
York, is in cahoots with the AMA/Oliver Field. One example, Sherman’s
Exhibit 16 from the AMA files shows that the BBB of Spokane
Washington, of all places (my neck of the woods) sent a letter to the
Los Angeles BBB dated October 22, 1953 talking about Volney and the
e-meter – with a CC to Oliver Field!!! (Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents p.
358)
It’s also another nice example of a “stamped” document by Oliver Field.
An interesting side note is Exhibit 41: which is this odd truncated letter
from Oliver Field defining Scientology as “L, Ron Hubbard’s later
version of “Dianetics”, which had such a widespread interest shortly
after his book was published…”(Vol 4 of 18 FDA documents p. 368)
There is also a report presented by Hubbard’s HASI (Hubbard

Association of Scientologists) Report titled: Washington Office Report
on Congress of Quackery by Harold Edwards – after the FDA raid in
1963. (Vol 6 of 18 p.228-236, FDA documents) It looks as though this is
Exhibit 57 of Sherman’s exhibits, but the report is actually from within
scientology’s Ability magazine #48. Who is Harold Edwards? No clue.
Yet.
An important historical oddity is that within that publication, it looks as

though they had started advertising Hubbards created-for-the-
CIA Brainwashing Manual again? (also see this) Not sure what that’s all
about, at the moment, but the address given though? That’s the
address for the HASI.
As verified in the July 1957 issue of

Galaxy Science Fiction (p. 90) in
which an ad for Hubbard’s
book Fundamentals of
Thoughtactually refers to that box
242 etc. address as the HASI,
although it does have an Sa added.
Perhaps standing for Scientology
Ads? The ad itself says – The mind
technology that was developed for
use in Space.
It forms a very good early example of how internal scientology staff
were being misled as to WHO was really behind all this. Both then and
the later scientology espionage division, the Guardian Office, followed
in the footsteps of Hubbard’s blindness as to who the REAL leaders
of the attacks on Dianetics/Scientology were.
Hubbard and those “enemies”
In the 4th page of the Report titled: Washington Office Report on

Congress of Quackery by Harold Edwards – after the FDA raid in
1963. (Vol 6 of 18 p.228-236, FDA documents) it says:
Leader in so indefensible, and lamentable an attack on a long

established, honorable healing profession was the individual
bearing the interesting title – Director, Department of Investigation,
American Medical Association – by name, Oliver Field. Curious
that a privately owned business should have a competition control
tool like this secret police arm. Adding volume and authoritative
approval to a modern brand of medical despotism was the voice of
Mr. C. Joseph Stetler, legal counsel for the A.M.A. These men
expressed themselves most feelingly for the state of health of
Americans, and the towering menace to the well-being and future
of this nation from the smooth talking, morally degenerated
“quacks” who “blandly” offer false hope where no hope exists.
The AMA was the obvious source but again, you will notice how “Harold
Edwards” doesn’t seem to know what’s really behind that.
Again, though, it was Hubbard that was leading that particular focus. He
had issued a policy letter called Scientology Five: Press
Policies. This policy was issued on August 14, 1963, a little over
seven months after the FDA raid. (Note: The AD13 part on it means 13
years After Dianetics)
As an interesting historical aspect, this policy letter was issued a little

over a week after Hubbard had first started really going to town
lecturing about “Marcabians” (aliens) and began focusing on
that they are who is doing the Between Livesimplants that are screwing
us all up (as opposed to earlier statements).
That was Saint Hill Special Briefing Course Lecture Auditing Comm
Cycles, given on 6 August. Note: He had previously mentioned a
Marcabian “intelligence report” in 1961, leture of 7 June titled: Points in
Assessing.
In Scientology Five (found in older OEC volume #7 p. 510) –

Now Hubbard starts saying the AMA (American Medical Association)
is the “who” (the bad guys).
Certain vested interests, mainly the American Medical

Association, a private healing monopoly, wish to all
possible harm to the Scientology movement over the
world in order to protect their huge medical-psychiatric
income and desired monopoly which runs into tens of
billions annually. In their congresses they complain that
we and people like us cost them 1.1 billion dollars a year
that they don’t receive. Their sole interest is income.
Reference: Minutes of various AMA conferences.
Almost all our bad publicity and attacks is authored by

two men, one named Keaton, the AMA press man, and
one named Field, their head of “investigation”. These
men flood bad tales about Scientology into press,
magazines, radio, TV. Their sole interest is a medical-
psychiatrist monopoly for the AMA. Their publicity goes
overseas. The FDA is used by these people and FDA
releases are sent overseas.
Hitler and Stalin held power through medical psychiatry.

They associate themselves chiefly with the rich and
powerful.
To me, this is pretty hilarious as yet another example where Hubbard

doesn’t quite tell everyone the WHOLE truth, just bits and pieces of it.
What you may not know, is that it’s also strongly on the hypocritical side
as well because in about 4 years he’s going to expand (while still
leaving out HIS actual handlers) and change this “who”.
Our enemies on this planet are less than 12 men. They

are members of the Bank of England and other higher
financial circles. They own and control newspaper
chains, and they are, oddly enough, directors in all the
mental health groups in the world which have sprung
up.
(taped lecture nicknamed RJ67, given on 20 September

1967 – Hubbard at mark 09:03)
RJ67 –
00:00 00:00
Video for those who prefer it that way –
First it’s “less than twelve”.
Then, a year later, now it’s an even “dozen men” – Executive Directive
from L. Ron Hubbard 29 November 1968 titled: The War
You may not realize it staff member but there is only one
small group that has hammered Dianetics and
Scientology for 18 years.
[…] For eighteen years it has poured lies and slander

into the press and government agencies. For eighteen
years it has poured lies and slander into the press and
government agencies. Last year we isolated a dozen
men at the top.
The “Commies”?
There’s something else you need to notice here in that particular

Executive Directive..
Executive Directive from L. Ron Hubbard 29 November 1968 titled: The

War
Last year we isolated a dozen men at the top.This

year we found the organization these used and all its
connections over the world.
They are as red as paint. Their former president was

a card carrying Communist and they have four on their
Board of Directors. Yet they reach into International
Finance, Health Ministries, Schools, the press. They
even control immigration in many lands.”
I think most people got all electrified over the whole implied
illuminati/jews/world bankers controlled opposition conspiracy theory
idea and completely missed the fact that Hubbard is calling these
“enemies” of Scientology, these “dozen” – COMMUNISTS.
This isn’t the only time Hubbard would spew the approved of by ALL
slavemaster intelligence factions misdirecting propaganda idea that it’s
“the communists” who are the slavemasters/enslavers, he’d been doing
it for a LONG time already by this point in time.
It is FOR WHO that is really interesting.
Robert Vansittart – the hidden head of British intelligence at all levels

until well into the 1950’s. One of only two people to know who EVERY
spy was in any capacity, anywhere, in the British intelligence network.
Before WWII even ended, his first moves

were covert (indirect, using others overtly). Marking
the beginning of what would become dubbed the Cold
War, press starts to appear. Like this about Stalin and
communism in the Washington Times-Herald of
March 10, 1944. (Brezhnev FBI file p. 72)
.
Five years later, Vansittart goes overt (direct and as himself).
Lord Vansittart’s demand that Great Britain create a new and

more active diplomacy “to cope with our adversary behind
the iron curtain” was expected today to arouse a flurry of
controversy in England. The Communists, of course will
accuse him of warmongering and the extreme right will
applaud.
– J.C Oestreicher, INS Foreign Director; In View of News of the World;

New Castle News, 11 March, 1949
Besides being involved with also positioning the new enemy with the
OLD enemy (Nazis, Germans) Vansittart was covertly pushing behind-
the-scenes this ‘threat’ of communism and advocating persecution of
“anti-communist” activities. He actually even headed what was called
the British form of “McCarthyism”.
They called him Lord VanWitchhunt.
Ref: We Know All About You: The Story of Surveillance in Britain and
America by Rhodri Jeffreys-Jones
Next –
Miles Copeland, former British Special Operations Executive asset

during WWII (Vansittart was directly involved in both creating and
running that organization) and then CIA when it was created.
12 March 1947 – literally almost 3 years to the day after Vansittart

inaugurated the planting in the press of targeting Russia and
communism, President Truman comes out publicly warning about the
“advances of the Soviets”. Miles, in his
book The Game Player, details on page 71 how
only now the CIA was tasked to take
intelligence actions concerning this new “threat”
of Russia and communism.
“Before President Truman publicly took a stand

against Soviet advances in his “Truman
Doctine” speech of 12 March 1947, there was
no mention at all of the Soviets in the various
directives and planning papers that guided our
activities..”
Next –
L. Ron Hubbard as one of the propagandist fiction writers under the

Vansittart and Round Table network of authors before, during, and after
WWII.
August 1947 – Just five months after
the new ‘enemy’ was now
announced by President Truman,
Hubbard provides a spy story along
these very lines in Astounding
Science Fiction titled: The End Is
Not Yet, a 3-part series about: “a
few men against a
dictatorship.”
Segment #1 ends
with character
Professor Haus
trying to recruit character Charles Martel who is
loosely patterned on Hubbard. As Vansittart was doing then currently,
Hubbard then positions Nazi Germany as having something to do with
creating a war conditions between Russia and the United States: “You
really have the evidence that Fabrecken means to let the war between
the United States and Russia go through?”
Quote from the 2nd in the series continues the same PR positioning:
“The essential trouble with belligerent people is that they’re sure they’re
right, their ends are good, and they’ll do anything to prove it. Murder
and mayhem and war, for instance”
Hubbard’s following right along in lockstep blaming the “commies”

continued into the very beginning of Dianetics.
Commensurate with spreading the Great Fear of the Enemy that British
spymaster Vansittart had begun, Hubbard stated that it was the
Communist Party who had “cost him” this [Dianetics] peration
(FBI file p. 96) and that this began shortly after August 1950 when
Hubbard’s chemical memory-erasing experiments at the HDRF was
stated to have revealed “the method that the Russians use” (FBI file p.
100).
At this time Hubbard was calling this secret method “psychological

warfare”. It wasn’t until a later letter in 1955 that he referred to it
as “brainwashing”.
“This is data: in August 1950 I found out a method the Russians use on
such people as Vogeler, Mindzenty and others to obtain confessions. I
could undo that method. My second book was to have shown how the
Communists used narcosynthesis and physical torture and why it
worked as it did. Further, I was working on a technology of
psychological warfare to present it to the Defense Department. …I’m
applying to the Department of Defense for permission to deliver to them
my work on psychological warfare.” – Hubbard 1951 (FBI file p. 100)
“To the best of my recollection the accountant “Jerry” Rahn appeared in

the Organization (March 1951) about three days after the first despatch
was sent to the Department of Defense, by wire, concerning a solution
to brain-washing. I can establish this more accurately when I obtain, if I
can, possession of my files and accounts.” – Hubbard 1955 (FBI file p.
179)
Parker Morgan, former OSS and now involved with the Hubbard
Dianetic Research Foundation, utilized all his investigation skills learned
in the OSS and FBI to ascertain, in his words, that there was evidence
of Communist infiltration and that Communist Party publications were
also “attacking” the HDRF and the Dianetic techniques. (see FBI file).
Fingerprints were taken of all members and staff and submitted to the
FBI, Oaths of Loyalty to America were solicited, with Hubbard and
others also conducting Lie-Detector checks with the
electrometer. (note that this is the real purpose of the meter, and is
referred to as such before Hubbard and others changed the term to
“security checking” to hide that aspect.)
Hubbard himself mentions that his proof regarding communist

infiltration of the HDRF was slight but that initiation of the use of a lie-
detector check ceased the previous “turbulence”.
Lie detector use mentioned in May 1951 letter to Attorney General p.

100 –
Lie detector use mentioned in July 11, 1955 letter to FBI p. 179 –
There is strong evidence that both the reason for the ‘backing’ of
forming the HDRF and the type of research Hubbard was predominantly
engaged in was directly tied to Vansittart and Operation Gladio interests
in combatting
communism by research into “the most through spiritual cure in history“,

as Vansittart referred to what was necessary for the enemy to be
subjected to.
Vansittart, p. 15 of Black Record: Germans Past and Present– 1941
“…undergo the most thorough spiritual cure in history; and part at

least of that cure will have to be self-administered. It will have to
comprise a complete change of heart, mind and soul; of taste and
temperament and habit; a new set of morals and values, a new, a
brand-new way of looking at life.”
Hubbard on 28 April 1959, in a lecture called: Theory of Processes –
“When you do this, you have

somebody who can confront… he
is more social, he is more capable,
he is a better asset of the
society, he’s somebody to know, he’s
somebody to talk to. Now, there are
the exact end goals of processing.”
The following month after that lecture,

on May 1 of 1959, Hubbard stated
that he wants to create Homo Novis –
New Man with his spiritual “cure”
techniques, providing a curious
throwback to a previous declamatio (fakely old) text called the Lurian
Kabala wherein it was claimed that practice of Kabala techniques could
create the New Adam.
…we are at a change point in the history of Dianetics

and Scientology. We are at that change point which is –
changing Homo sap to Homo Novis, and that is the only
change point we are arrived at.
– End Of Course Lecture, an LRH lecture 1 May 1959
In Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health, Hubbard wrote
that: “The provision of a remedy for unsocial conduct by members of the
group is of more than passing interest to a government for a
continuance of its own corporal practices” (Chapter 8) and that
“antisocial activity is the result of engrams which dictate it. The patient
is not responsible for what he himself has done.”
This interest in a spiritual “cure” was described by Vansittart as needing

to evolve the soul of man through the introduction of new religions.
“And all this the numskulls have done in the name of Darwinism, the
“struggle for existence,” the “survival of the fittest,” which was already
the basis of German aggression in 1914. What scientific credit is left to
a country that has applied evolution to the body, but not the soul, of
man…In watching public life for forty years, I have seen not only a
sagin the validity of dogmatic religion but an even more marked and
disastrous slump in the connected fields of ordinary decency,
honesty…The loss of faith both in the supernatural and in ourselves—
there has been a connection between the two—has not made anyone
any happier. …Not one man in a thousand is strong enough to dispense
with the support of a belief…”A man must have a religion” I would
therefore wish for the coming generations—with luck we mostly live
through two—a revival…” (Lessons of My Life 1943 Vansittart)
Hubbard in 1951 –
“It is an empirical observation that men without a strong and lasting

faith in a Supreme Being are less capable, less ethical, and less
valuable to themselves and society. The abandonment of the
admission of a Supreme Being as a reality, intimate to the life of man,
makes prostitution the ideal conduct of a woman; perfidy and betrayal
the highest ethic level attainable by a man; and obliteration by
treachery, bomb, and gun the highest goal attainable by a culture. …
there is no great argument about the reality of a Supreme Being, since
one sees, in the failure to countenance that reality, a slimy and
loathsome trail, downward into the most vicious depths.” (Science
of Survival)
Hubbard clearly has the same goal as Vanisittart with his Dianetic and
Scientology techniques – performing a spiritual “cure” and creating a
new spiritually evolved man. This “cure” happened to be aimed towards
the same threats against society that Vansittart (and others) had long
elucidated. The kind of people that Hubbard was dedicated to attracting
right from the beginning, the rebels, the non-conformists, the non-
mainstream religious, the anti-social/society, the “communists”.
According to an FBI memo dated March 7th, 1951 Hubbard told the FBI
that “Dianetics can be used to combat Communism” but would not
reveal what those means were. (FBI file page 2)
Just one day earlier, one of the Trustees of the HDRF, John Campbell,
had written a six-page letter to Robert Heinlein discussing a number of
topics including the matter described above as “Communist activities.”
He wrote of the appearance of an attack on Dianetics by a “communist
group that was not playing for marbles.” Campbell claimed there was
“definite evidence” that six people suspected of being communists were
“seeking to disrupt the business, and to disqualify Ron.” Campbell then
described how “some serious investigation was done, including desk-
prying, wastebasket studying, and all the means Parker Morgan, ex-
Special Agent of the FBI, could think of.” Campbell said that Sara was
“the point of attack” and that she was “drugged, and beaten” three
times. Apparently Campbell or others had tried to recover the
information from these engramic memories, but that “it’s very difficult to
get information,” because “commands planted included, of course, a
wild aversion to Dianetic processing.” [Heinlein archives: CORR306-07].
We also see in this letter that Campbell claimed that Dianetics was the
“counter-weapon” to mind control.
–––
It is important that you understand that the term “communist” was not
just used to represent card-carrying members of the Communist Party.
It is an old, old, OLD slur that the slavemasters use to tar anyone who
rebels against their rule. See M. McClaughry, The Reckoning, Chapter
Fifteen British Slavemasters Instigated Communism.
As it had been for over a century by this time, it was used as a catch-all
“enemy” label to define and villify anyone not in agreement with the
British and Vatican policy of hegemony over the world. Both popes and
leaders of the Round Table and British foreign intelligence used the
term to define “communists” as having some sort of mental defect
or illness causing their unnatural rebellion against what they referred to
as “the natural order”. This “order” is often cloaked in the term society.
In a similar time-honored tradition of attacking Thomas Jefferson with all
manner of ludicrous insults and invented conspiracies, this accusation
of communist! even was used by the head of the FBI in 1955 to portray
a pamphlet which included the Jeffersonian Bill of Rights as “literature
favorable to Russia and in opposition to the U.S. foreign policy”. (FBI
file p. 13) image right – Hoover at Un-American “McCarthy” Committee
talking about Communists. According to the FBI, this also gets cross-
related as part of case number 61-443, serial number 1226. The prefix
number of 61 indicates that it was filed under “treason.” Yes, you heard
that right. The Bill of Rights was being positioned as TREASONOUS
(and communist) material.
Commies EVERYWHERE!!!
As you can see, this Executive Directive from L. Ron Hubbard in
1968 titled: The War follows perfectly in the time-honored propagandic
tradition of the slavemasters.
It also forms a perfect example in contradiction with where Hubbard

would say one thing for posterity and yet his orders TO scientologists
were 180 degrees opposite it.
I refer to that on 10 January 1968 Hubbard had issued a Policy Letter

titled: Politics, Freedom From. The interesting thing is that is actually a
re-issue of a Secretarial Executive Directive from June 14, 1965.
(Reissued from LRH SECED 56 INT June 14, 1965)
This thing is a real exercise of mindfuck. Take the first line –
1. I hereby declare Scientology to be non-political and

non-ideological.
Now look at this part of point 3 –
3. This does not change any policy relating to

suppressive persons. It does delete any words in any
form which seek to bring about a statement of political
allegiance or antagonism.
And yet despite this obvious PRETEND posturing on Hubbard’s part –

just one year later?
10 days after Hubbard had founded the Guardian Office (a very political
organization) on March 11 he wrote a very, very important document.
Secretarial Executive Directive from the Office of LRH, by L. Ron

Hubbard dated 11 March 1966, found at the WhyweProtest forum in a
posting from February 3, 2013. (archived here.)
Look at the top closely –

Oh, hey! What’s that?
It’s specifically routing a copy to his top spymaster.
Lord Salisbury.
As such, it is rather extremely political.
Backing up a little now, we have Hubbard reissuing that 1965 SECED

as a policy letter on 10 January 1968 saying he wants deleted “any
words” which “seek to bring about a statement of political
allegiance or antagonism” – and yet later that same year he’s
targeting the “dozen” enemies as being communists and telling
scientologists that is the view to have.
Very political.
Doesn’t get much more political than that.
Then, the following month, December 1968, he writes this –
Executive Directive From L. Ron Hubbard 20 December 1968 Western

Countries
Western governments and peoples are under ceaseless

and unrelenting attack from the Communist forces in the
“cold war”. The enemyhas for a long time been inside,
getting laws passed, degrading the society, seizing
persons in the name of psychiatry, pushing up taxes,
inflating money…..
The orders the governments followed in attacking us

were originated by REDS, by the usually foreign
psychiatrist, operating as per Communist instructions to
destroy all Churches and Scientology in particular.
More political statements drummed into scientologists heads despite his

“Politics, Freedom From” so-called policy.
So now –
What’s with this twelve or “dozen” fixation by Hubbard?
In a research post I once did calledThe Twelve, I documented that a

British intelligence asset named Boris Brasol started presenting
propaganda of the type that Winston Churchill was particularly fond of
using.
Let’s put Boris’s 1919 propaganda in here for comparison –
He wrote that its twelve leaders were

all Jews. He named Trotsky, U.S.
banker Jacob Schiff, and his German
friend and co-religionist Max Warburg.
Brasol concludes in a snarky joke
where he says: “It is, of course, just a
coincidence, that the dozen happen to
be a Jewish dozen.“
(MID, File 10110-920, Brasol Report

#8, December 9, 1919 as documented
by Virginia McClaughry in L. Ron Hubbard’s Twelve Men “Enemies”
Conspiracy Theory – Just a Reboot of The Protocols of Zion;
January 2018)
.
I doubt you will be surprised to learn that 3 years later, in Guardian

Office Order 060571 (6 May 1971) Titled: Working Theory Hubbard now
actually names ONE “jew” but only one. Otto Neimayer. And now he’s
going to say the “who” is his niece.
A secretary.
So far we have been using an Intelligence Hypothesis I

developed in 1965.
…the Intelligence Hypothesis I formed was that it would

have to be a member of the World Bankwith psychiatric
connections or who planned usages of psychiatry as
part of world control.
It led us to WFMH and the NAMH. But it did not lead all
the way until this year.
We found the central handler (one who orders

operatives and operations) and proved it by numerous
correspondences we were given. The person is “Mary
Appleby” Secretary of the National Association of
Mental Health of England. It is she who writes and
phones her contacts to start attacks on Scientology.
Her uncle (just now deceased) was Otto Niemeyer of the

World Bank.
So that finally ends off the 1965 Intelligence Hypothesis

as totally correct.
A secretary.
That’s Hubbard’s big “who” now?

.
Well, given that Hubbard was still trying desperately to be “useful” to the
very people he is supposedly “trying” to expose since 1965 and had
been working for the CIA as an off-the-books asset since 1954, and
with British intelligence before, during, and after WWII, including
working with a Cecil, Lord Salisbury to support Appartheid in South
Africa right during the period he’s writing these “hypothesis” – what
would we expect other than completely intentional misdirection onto
and revivification of a previous British intelligence operation planted
conspiracy theory from Hubbard?
Yet another way he was consistent in doing what British intelligence

wanted.
Pointing the finger everywhere but where it goes.
And totally veered off now from

that tiny bit of truth he had in
Dianetics
from way back in the beginning – 1950.
Here’s a little timeline for you showing what Hubbard is up to here in his
“enemies” identification and that it ALWAYS utilizes source propaganda
from British and Vatican slavemasters.
A Special Stand-Alone Timeline of Hubbard’s Propaganda about

Who the “Enemy” is.
This is a stand-alone timeline about Hubbard and the “enemies” of

Scientology and his familiar British/Vatican propaganda on the topic
which also incorporates a few elements from the World Domination
Conspiracy Deflectionstimeline. I don’t plan to incorporate this stand-
alone timeline into the Master Timeline, at the moment.
1919 December 19 – British intelligence asset named Boris Brasol

started presenting propaganda about “the enemy” of the type that
Winston Churchill was particularly fond of using. He wrote that its
twelve leaders were all Jews. He named Trotsky, U.S. banker Jacob
Schiff, and his German friend and co-religionist Max Warburg. Brasol
concludes in a snarky joke where he says: “It is, of course, just a
coincidence, that the dozen happen to be a Jewish dozen.” (MID, File
10110-920, Brasol Report #8, December 9, 1919 as documented by
Virginia McClaughry in L. Ron Hubbard’s Twelve Men “Enemies”
Conspiracy Theory – Just a Reboot of The Protocols of Zion; January
2018)
1944 March 10 – Robert Vansittart – the hidden head of British

intelligence at all levels until well into the 1950’s, one of only two people
to know who EVERY spy was in any capacity, anywhere, in the British
intelligence network, starts propagandizing for the
next planned war. Before WWII even ended, his first moves
were covert (indirect, using others overtly). Marking the beginning of
what would become dubbed the Cold War, press starts to appear. Like
this about Stalin and communism in the Washington
Times-Herald of March 10, 1944. (Brezhnev FBI file p.
72)
1947 March 12 – Miles Copeland, former British

Special Operations Executive asset during WWII
(Vansittart was directly involved in both creating and
running that organization) and then CIA when it was created. Literally
almost 3 years to the day after Vansittart
inaugurated the planting in the press of
targeting Russia and communism, President
Truman comes out publicly warning about the
“advances of the Soviets”.
Miles, in his book The Game Player, page 71

details how now the CIA was tasked to take
intelligence actions concerning this new “threat”
with Russia and Communism chosen as
the new enemy.
1947 August – L. Ron Hubbard as one of the propagandist fiction
writers under the Vansittart and Round Table network of authors before,
during, and after WWII. – Just five months after the new ‘enemy’ was
now announced by President Truman, Hubbard provides a spy story
along these very lines in Astounding Science Fiction titled: The End Is
Not Yet, a 3-part series about: “a few men against a
dictatorship.” Segment #1 ends with character
Professor Haus trying to recruit character Charles
Martel who is loosely patterned on Hubbard. As
Vansittart was doing then currently, Hubbard then
positions Nazi Germany as having something to do
with creating a war conditions between Russia and
the United States: “You really have the evidence that Fabrecken
means to let the war between the United States and Russia go
through?”
Quote from the 2nd in the series continues the same PR positioning:
“The essential trouble with belligerent people is that they’re sure they’re
right, their ends are good, and they’ll do anything to prove it. Murder
and mayhem and war, for instance”
1949 March 11 – British Spymaster Lord Vansittart goes overt (direct

and as himself).
“Lord Vansittart’s demand that Great Britain create a new

and more active diplomacy “to cope with our adversary
behind the iron curtain” was expected today to arouse a
flurry of controversy in England. The Communists, of course
will accuse him of warmongering and the extreme right will
applaud.”
– J.C Oestreicher, INS Foreign Director; In View of News of the World;

New Castle News, 11 March, 1949
Besides being involved with also positioning the new enemy with the
OLD enemy (Nazis, Germans) Vansittart was covertly pushing behind-
the-scenes this ‘threat’ of communism and advocating persecution of
“anti-communist” activities. He actually even headed what was called
the British form of “McCarthyism”. They called him Lord
VanWitchhunt. Ref: We Know All About You: The Story of Surveillance
in Britain and America by Rhodri Jeffreys-Jones
1950 February 9 – Senator McCarthy’s communists-in-government

speech to the Republican Women’s Club of Wheeling, West Virginia.
1950 March 29 – British spymaster Robert Vansittart rose to speak in

the House of Lords: ‘I have full particulars of sixteen Communists and
100 percent fellow travellers who have got themselves into good jobs in
the department of Inland Revenue.‘ Distancing himself from what was
portrayed as McCarthy’s guesswork, he added ‘I am not talking from
gossip or hearsay. In some cases I have actually seen the Communist
Party cards.’ Vansittart was creating the British form of Great Fear of
the Enemy, which was successful. The British operated a kind of ‘silent’
McCarthyism where they took action behind closed doors and did not
release information to the press except for on rare occasions.
Vansittart’s British method was far worse, and far more frightening than
American McCarthyism, simply because of its Nazi-like
behavior. People simply disappeared, information was
suppressed. In fact, prompting the author of 1984, George Orwell to
confide in his diary (1940) that: ‘The police are the very people who
would go over to Hitler once they were certain he had won.’ The British
Foreign Office at this time, was all-out engaged in having to suppress
rebellions in what one author called ‘the remnants of its empire’. They
suppressed news of the absolutely ruthless undercover tactics they
were using against ‘rebellious’ colonies – utilizing American and
Vatican co-operation through Operation Gladio. In fact, British
intelligence was engaging, in tandem with the CIA and the Vatican, in
operations all around the world to suppress any rebellions – whom
they called communists – to British East and British West (American
anglophilic sycophants in power) as I call them. Anywhere from Central
and South America to Africa to India, to even America itself.
1950 – Hubbard’s HDRF and Operation GLADIO. There is strong
evidence that both the reason for the ‘backing’ of forming the HDRF and
the type of research Hubbard was predominantly engaged in was
directly tied to Vansittart and Operation Gladio interests in combatting
communism by research into “the most through spiritual cure in
history“, as Vansittart referred to what was necessary for the enemy to
be subjected to. Vansittart, p. 15 of Black Record: Germans Past and
Present – 1941 “…undergo the most thorough spiritual cure in
history; and part at least of that cure will have to be self-administered.
It will have to comprise a complete change of heart, mind and soul; of
taste and temperament and habit; a new set of morals and values, a
new, a brand-new way of looking at life.” Hubbard on 28 April 1959,
in a lecture called: Theory of Processes – “When you do this, you have
somebody who can confront… he is more social, he is more capable,
he is a better asset of the society, he’s somebody to know, he’s
somebody to talk to. Now, there are the exact end goals of
processing.” The following month after that lecture, on May 1 of 1959
(End of Course Lecture) Hubbard stated that he wants to create Homo
Novis – New Man with his spiritual “cure” techniques, providing a
curious throwback to a previous declamatio (fakely old) text called the
Lurian Kabala wherein it was claimed that practice of Kabala techniques
could create the New Adam. “…we are at a change point in the history
of Dianetics and Scientology. We are at that change point which is –
changing Homo sap to Homo Novis, and that is the only change point
we are arrived at.” In Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health,
Hubbard wrote that: “The provision of a remedy for unsocial conduct by
members of the group is of more than passing interest to a government
for a continuance of its own corporal practices” (Chapter 8) and
that “antisocial activity is the result of engrams which dictate it. The
patient is not responsible for what he himself has done.” This interest in
a spiritual “cure” was described by Vansittart as needing to evolve the
soul of man through the introduction of new religions. “And all this the
numskulls have done in the name of Darwinism, the “struggle for
existence,” the “survival of the fittest,” which was already the basis of
German aggression in 1914. What scientific credit is left to a country
that has applied evolution to the body, but not the soul, of man…In
watching public life for forty years, I have seen not only a sagin the
validity of dogmatic religion but an even more marked and disastrous
slump in the connected fields of ordinary decency, honesty…The loss
of faith both in the supernatural and in ourselves—there has been a
connection between the two—has not made anyone any happier. …Not
one man in a thousand is strong enough to dispense with the support of
a belief…”A man must have a religion” I would therefore wish for the
coming generations—with luck we mostly live through two—a
revival…” (Lessons of My Life 1943 Vansittart) Hubbard in 1951 – “It is
an empirical observation that men without a strong and lasting faith
in a Supreme Being are less capable, less ethical, and less
valuable to themselves and society. The abandonment of the
admission of a Supreme Being as a reality, intimate to the life of man,
makes prostitution the ideal conduct of a woman; perfidy and betrayal
the highest ethic level attainable by a man; and obliteration by
treachery, bomb, and gun the highest goal attainable by a culture. …
there is no great argument about the reality of a Supreme Being, since
one sees, in the failure to countenance that reality, a slimy and
loathsome trail, downward into the most vicious depths.” (Science
of Survival) Hubbard clearly has the same goal as Vanisittart with his
Dianetic and Scientology techniques – performing a spiritual “cure” and
creating a new spiritually evolved man. This “cure” happened to be
aimed towards the same threats against society that Vansittart (and
others) had long elucidated. The kind of people that Hubbard was
dedicated to attracting right from the beginning, the rebels, the non-
conformists, the non-mainstream religious, the anti-social/society, the
“communists”.
1950 September – Hubbard stated that it was in this area of time

that the Communist Party who had “cost him” this [Dianetics]
operation (FBI file p. 96) and that this began shortly after August 1950
when Hubbard’s chemical memory-erasing experiments at the HDRF
was stated to have revealed “the method that the Russians use”
(FBI file p. 100).
1951 – Parker Morgan, former OSS and now involved with the Hubbard
Dianetic Research Foundation, utilized all his investigation skills learned
in the OSS and FBI to ascertain, in his words, that there was evidence
of Communist infiltration and that Communist Party
publications were also “attacking” the HDRF and the Dianetic
techniques. (see FBI file). Fingerprints were taken of all members and
staff and submitted to the FBI, Oaths of Loyalty to America were
solicited, with Hubbard and others also conducting Lie-Detector
checks with the electrometer. (note that this is the real purpose of the
meter, and is referred to as such before Hubbard and others changed
the term to “security checking” to hide that aspect.)
1951 March – “To the best of my recollection the accountant “Jerry”

Rahn appeared in the Organization (March 1951) about three days after
the first despatch was sent to the Department of Defense, by wire,
concerning a solution to brain-washing. I can establish this more
accurately when I obtain, if I can, possession of my files and
accounts.” – Hubbard 1955 (FBI file p. 179)
1951 March 6 – One of the Trustees of the HDRF, John Campbell, had
written a six-page letter to Robert Heinlein discussing a number of
topics including the matter described above as “Communist
activities.” He wrote of the appearance of an attack on Dianetics by
a “communist group that was not playing for marbles.” Campbell
claimed there was “definite evidence” that six people suspected of
being communists were “seeking to disrupt the business, and to
disqualify Ron.” Campbell then described how “some serious
investigation was done, including desk-prying, wastebasket studying,
and all the means Parker Morgan, ex-Special Agent of the FBI, could
think of.” Campchapterbell said that Sara was “the point of attack” and
that she was “drugged, and beaten” three times. Apparently Campbell
or others had tried to recover the information from these engramic
memories, but that “it’s very difficult to get
information,” because “commands planted included, of course, a wild
aversion to Dianetic processing.” [Heinlein archives: CORR306-07]. We
also see in this letter that Campbell claimed that Dianetics was the
“counter-weapon” to mind control.
1951 March 7 – FBI memo states that Hubbard told the FBI
that “Dianetics can be used to combat Communism” but would not
reveal what those means were. (FBI file page 2).
1951 May 14 – Hubbard letter to attorney general stating that it was the
Communist Party who had “cost him” this [Dianetics] operation
(FBI file p. 96) and that this began shortly after August 1950 when
Hubbard’s chemical memory-erasing experiments at the HDRF was
stated to have revealed “the method that the Russians use” (FBI file p.
100). At this time Hubbard was calling this secret method “psychological
warfare”. It wasn’t until a later letter in 1955 that he referred to it as
“brainwashing”. “This is data: in August 1950 I found out a method the
Russians use on such people as Vogeler, Mindzenty and others to
obtain confessions. I could undo that method. My second book was to
have shown how the Communists used narcosynthesis and
physical torture and why it worked as it did. Further, I was working
on a technology of psychological warfare to present it to the Defense
Department. …I’m applying to the Department of Defense for
permission to deliver to them my work on psychological warfare.” –
Hubbard 1951 (FBI file p. 100) Hubbard himself mentions that his proof
regarding communist infiltration of the HDRF was slight but that
initiation of the use of a lie-detector check ceased the previous
“turbulence”. Lie detector use mentioned in May 1951 letter to Attorney
General p. 100 – Lie detector use mentioned in July 11, 1955 letter to
FBI p. 179 – stating that a D.H. Rogers “registered positive on
Communist leanings.”
1953 October 3- Illuminati Conspiracy Theory Reboot by L. Ron

Hubbard – lecturing about “What is a Scientologist” Hubbard used a
VERY particular term “money aristocracy”. The lecture is titled: USES
AND FUTURE OF SCIENTOLOGY (p. 155 of PDF) “There are two
parasitic groups in the world today…one of them is communism, the
other is capitalism. Communism is a military aristocracy which depends
upon the worker, and capitalism is a money aristocracy which
depends upon the worker…” It gets promoted again in Auditormagazine
#115 in 1975, and touted in 2013 on some Scientologist’s site as “words
of wisdom”. It ain’t wisdom, as you’re about to find out. It’s propaganda.
No, it’s not wisdom. It’s Hubbard regurgitating a very specific
phrase created in Russian/British/Vatican Illuminati propaganda. It’s
from an ILLUMINATI Conspiracy Theory REBOOT from a British and
Russian intelligence created propaganda piece called The
Protocols (of Zion) and World Revolution, using agents Boris Brasol,
Casimir Pilenas and Natalie De Bogory (see 1920 for more). It’s a 1920
Boston publication and it was the first to use that term “On the ruins
of natural and hereditary aristocracy we built an aristocracy of our
intellectual class—the money aristocracy. We have established this
new aristocracy on the qualification of wealth, which is dependent upon
us, and also upon science, which is promoted by our wise
men.” (Protocol I)
1955 – In a similar time-honored tradition of attacking Thomas Jefferson

with all manner of ludicrous insults and invented conspiracies, this
accusation of communist! even was used by the head of the FBI in
1955 to portray a pamphlet which included the Jeffersonian Bill of
Rights as “literature favorable to Russia and in opposition to the U.S.
foreign policy”. (FBI file p. 13) According to the FBI, this also gets cross-
related as part of case number 61-443, serial number 1226. The prefix
number of 61 indicates that it was filed under “treason.” Yes, you heard
that right. The Bill of Rights was being positioned as TREASONOUS
(and communist) material.
1960 January 3 – “Democracy is not the best political philosophy in the

world; and nearly everyone will agree that a benevolent
monarchy is….But actually it’s the best form of government...” (L.
Ron Hubbard lecture entitled Zones of Control and Responsibility of
Government, 3 January 1960, SHSBC) What is the number one thing
that both factions of the slavemasters (Vatican and British
nobility/monarchy) have promoted as ideal for centuries? Priests and
Kings rule the world. As symbolized by the ancient Nesilim symbol –
the double-headed eagle – which was the symbol of the Catholic
Church/Holy Roman Empire, no less. Here’s a Pope promoting it – “No
of Chartres wrote to Pope Paschal II: “When kingdom and priesthood
are as one, in complete accord, the world is well ruled…”–
IMMORTALE DEI, Pope Leo XIII, November 1, 1885. And that’s what
L. Ron Hubbard promotes.
1960 December 31 – Communism label Reboot – L. Ron Hubbard,

just back from an intelligence mission to South Africa for Lord Salisbury
(yes, one of THOSE Salisbury’s – the Cecils) gives Afrikaan
Scientologys a lecture called “A Talk on South Africa” – part of the
Anatomy of the Human Mind Congress. This lecture is one of the most
amazing collection of lies and manipulation by Hubbard that we think
we have ever seen. It is truly mind-
twisting. Reminder: The communist label was used to position any
rebellion against the “unseen hand” rule. The Illuminati conspiracy
theory etc. was used to mislead would-be rebels as to WHO is the
“unseen hand”. (see Jefferson 1774 entry) Slavemasters trying to rule
African natives, particularly SOUTH African natives, goes all the way
back to the very first “mission” of the Jesuits – the whole reason
they were formed initially. (see intro to World Domination Conspiracy
Deflectionstimeline 1702, Loyola’s document #3) Hubbard sounds
exactly like British agent Vinberg (1920 May entry) promoting the
fabricated Protocols of Zion in Germany. “Vinberg accordingly demands
that the natural leaders of the nations shall once and for all recognize
the political incompetence of the masses, turn their backs on
democratic politics, seize power and impose their dictatorship on
these ‘anthropoid herds’.”Then the time will be ripe to unite the
nations in a common front against the world-conspiracy of the
Jews. (Cohn, chapter 6) —-Substitute “communists” for Jews,
and “anthropoid herds” for the native Africans and that’s Hubbard in
this lecture.
1963 August 14 – a little over seven months after the FDA raid.,
Hubbard issued a policy letter called Scientology Five: Press
Policies saying the AMA (American Medical Association) is the “who”
(the bad guys). “Certain vested interests, mainly the American
Medical Association, a private healing monopoly, wish to all possible
harm to the Scientology movement over the world in order to protect
their huge medical-psychiatric income and desired monopoly which
runs into tens of billions annually.” Apparently, now per Hubbard those
“commies” are running the AMA.
1965 February 7 – In a signature issue within the subject of Scientology

called Keeping Scientology Working (that is put at the beginning of
every course of study in Scientology materials) Hubbard pushes the
same old derogatory idea of “the people” – as separate from the
“special” people aka the slavemasters and their sycophants.
Some key quotes from this issue, my notes in [..].
First category: What L. Ron Hubbard thinks of “the people” –
the not-too-bright have a bad point on the button Self-Importance.

The lower the IQ, the more the individual is shut off from the fruits of
observation.
I once had the idea that a group could evolve truth. A third of a
century has thoroughly disabused me of that idea.
the group left to its own devices …with wild dramatizations of the
bank called “new ideas”…
The common denominator of a group is the reactive bank.
[People] …only have their banks in common.
They agree then only on bank principles.
Person to person the bank is identical.
It is only the aberrated group, the mob, [the people] that is
destructive.
Second category: What L. Ron Hubbard thinks of Democracy –

I don’t see that … democracy have done anything for man but push
him further into the mud.
…democracy has given us inflation and income tax.
Democracy gave us income tax? No. That was one hundred percent
because of the British/Vatican slavemasters who BOUGHT and
POSITIONED people the first time using Lincoln in 1862, and then after
it got overturned, they did it a second time by sticking that little gem
buried in the fine print of a banana tax bill the same year, even the
same month that they pushed through the Federal Reserve – all of
which was the culmination of an almost 50 year campaign to get
themselves back where they started before President Jackson
destroyed their last financial control attempt – the Bank of the United
states. L. Ron Hubbard positioning income tax as a result of democracy
is an absolutely horrible misdirectionand an attack on Jefferson and
the Founding Fathers of America.
1965 February 13 – Highly racist and anti-democracy Policy Letter by L

Ron Hubbard titled: Politics. Now and then you hear me speak
derisively of governments and ideologies–including democracy. If, by
seeing I criticize an ideology, anyone seeks to believe I embrace its
opposite, he has failed to get the point. What political system could
work amongst very aberrated people? A democracy or a Communism
would be a huge joke in an insane asylum. Well, isn’t it?…No political
system applied to a colony of monkeys would have anything to govern
but monkeys. That’s plain, certainly. …The collective think of apes is
ape-think….Every human has in common with every other human the
same reactive bank. This is the most they have in
common. Therefore a democracy is a collective-think of reactive
banks.” –Again, Hubbard is sounding exactly like British
agent Vinberg(1920 May entry) promoting the fabricated Protocols of
Zion in Germany. “Vinberg accordingly demands that the natural
leaders of the nations shall once and for all recognize the political
incompetence of the masses, turn their backs on democratic politics,
seize power and impose their dictatorship on these ‘anthropoid
herds’.” Then the time will be ripe to unite the nations in a common
front against the world-conspiracy of the Jews. (Cohn, chapter 6)
1965 – Hubbard “intelligence hypothesis” — “an Intelligence Hypothesis
I developed in 1965…the Intelligence Hypothesis I formed was that it
would have to be a member of the World Bank with psychiatric
connections or who planned usages of psychiatry as part of world
control.” Hubbard Guardian Office Order 060571 (6 May
1971) Titled: Working Theory
1965 June 14 – Hubbard issues Secretarial Executive Directive from

June 14, 1965 as a policy letter titled: Politics, Freedom From. “1. I
hereby declare Scientology to be non-political and non-ideological.” “3.
This does not change any policy relating to suppressive persons. It
does delete any words in any form which seek to bring about a
statement of political allegiance or antagonism.” —And yet Hubbard
would continue to do exactly what he said not to do.
1966 March 1 – Hubbard founds the Guardian office, a verypolitical

organization.
1966 March 11 – Hubbard wrote a very, very important document –

Secretarial Executive Directive 70. It specifically routed a copy to his top
spymaster, Lord Salisbury. As such, it is rather
extremely political. Found at the WhyweProtest forum in a posting from
February 3, 2013. (archived here.)
1966 July 19 – L. Ron Hubbard – “Political systems only exist

because no one has solved the problem of succession of a good
ruler. That’s the problem a political system is trying to solve. You talk to
a whole bunch of people and you say, “A benevolent monarch is a
fine form of government if he is brilliant and runs his country well.”
And you’ll find every political ideologist will agree with you, no matter
what he is. And they’ll say, “That’s true,” and then they’ll come right in
on the back of it, “but how would you succeed him?” And then we get a
political system. So they can’t guarantee that they can succeed him,
you know, he can’t have a successor. So the answer to it is don’t have
successors; Clear him.” (About Rhodesia lecture, SHSBC) What is the
number one thing that both factions of the slavemasters (Vatican and
British nobility/monarchy) have promoted as ideal for centuries? Priests
and Kings rule the world. As symbolized by the ancient Nesilim
symbol – the double-headed eagle – which was the symbol of the
Catholic Church/Holy Roman Empire, no less. Here’s a Pope promoting
it – “No of Chartres wrote to Pope Paschal II: “When kingdom and
priesthood are as one, in complete accord, the world is well ruled…”–
IMMORTALE DEI, Pope Leo XIII, November 1, 1885. And that’s what
L. Ron Hubbard promotes.
1967 September 20 – Hubbard gives a taped lecture called Rons

Journal 1967. Now the “enemies” are financial men but less than
twelve. “Our enemies on this planet are less than 12 men. They are
members of the Bank of England and other higher financial
circles. They own and control newspaper chains, and they are, oddly
enough, directors in all the mental health groups in the world which
have sprung up.”(taped lecture nicknamed RJ67, given on 20
September 1967 – at mark 09:03)
1968 January 10 – Hubbard reissues Secretarial Executive Directive

from June 14, 1965 as a policy letter titled: Politics, Freedom From. “1. I
hereby declare Scientology to be non-political and non-ideological.” “3.
This does not change any policy relating to suppressive persons. It
does delete any words in any form which seek to bring about a
statement of political allegiance or antagonism.” —And yet Hubbard
continues to do exactly what he said not to do.
1968 November 29 – Now it’s an even “dozen men” and they are
“communist” – Executive Directive from L. Ron Hubbard 29 November
1968 titled: The War—“You may not realize it staff member but there is
only one small group that has hammered Dianetics and Scientology for
18 years. […] For eighteen years it has poured lies and slander into the
press and government agencies. For eighteen years it has poured lies
and slander into the press and government agencies. Last year we
isolated a dozen men at the top. This year we found the
organization these used and all its connections over the world. They
are as red as paint. Their former president was a card carrying
Communist and they have four on their Board of Directors. Yet they
reach into International Finance, Health Ministries, Schools, the press.
They even control immigration in many lands.”
1968 20 December – Executive Directive From L. Ron Hubbard
titled: Western Countries “Western governments and peoples are under
ceaseless and unrelenting attack from the Communist forces in the
“cold war”. The enemy has for a long time been inside, getting laws
passed, degrading the society, seizing persons in the name of
psychiatry, pushing up taxes, inflating money…..The orders the
governments followed in attacking us were originated by REDS, by the
usually foreign psychiatrist, operating as per Communist instructions to
destroy all Churches and Scientology in particular.” More political
statements drummed into scientologists heads despite his “Politics,
Freedom From” so-called policy.
1971 May 6 –Hubbard Guardian Office Order 060571 (6 May

1971) Titled: Working Theory Hubbard now actually namesONE
“jew” but only one. Otto Neimayer. And now he’s going to say the
“who” is his niece. A secretary. “So far we have been using an
Intelligence Hypothesis I developed in 1965.…the Intelligence
Hypothesis I formed was that it would have to be a member of the
World Bank with psychiatric connections or who planned usages of
psychiatry as part of world control. It led us to WFMH and the NAMH.
But it did not lead all the way until this year.We found the central
handler (one who orders operatives and operations) and proved it by
numerous correspondences we were given. The person is “Mary
Appleby” Secretary of the National Association of Mental Health of
England. It is she who writes and phones her contacts to start attacks
on Scientology.Her uncle (just now deceased) was Otto Niemeyer of the
World Bank.So that finally ends off the 1965 Intelligence Hypothesis as
totally correct.”
1977 July 9 – Church of Scientology Guardian Office (which housed

their Intelligence division) is raided by the FBI.
1977 December 31 (date found here) – IlluminatiConspiracy Theory

Reboot – Robert Anton Wilson publishes (hardback) Cosmic Trigger
Volume I: Final Secret of the Illuminati (backup
version here Issuuversion here) with Forewords by Timothy Learywho
strangely chose to discuss a subject that L. Ron Hubbard had taught
his
raided Intelligencedivision –
The Guardian Office. A
subject called flair.—
Remember, Tom Tripodi
(CIA Operation Chaos, see
1967 entry) said they (the
CIA) were very concerned
with protecting their
RECRUITING pools.—
Backstory: L. Ron
Hubbard’s mentor
Commander Joseph
Cheesman “Snake”
Thompson, a naval
intelligence agent, once
discussed with a fellow
agent how important a
person with an Intelligence
“sense” is. Apparently a more specific term came to be used to describe
this type of person that they called a “natural”, Seoane called it
an Intelligence Impulse.* This basically is a different wording for the
same concept as this “sense” that Thompson was teaching Seoane
originally back in the early 1900′s. One could probably rightfully
conclude that Thompson was acting as a mentor to Seoane at that time.
(*Beyond the Ranges, by Colonel Seoane as told to Robert l Neimann.)
This “sense”, as Seoane described it, was: An Intelligence Impulse,
the faculty for instantly recognizing what was valuable information, and
what was not. And, most importantly of all, how to interpret and
evaluate it. This particular way of referring to this quality as
an Intelligence Impulse appears to have first been used by another ONI
(Office of Naval Intelligence) man – Sidney F. Mashbir* about 7 years
prior to Seoane’s book. (*I Was an American Spy, Mashbir, Vantage
Press,New York, 1953, p. 34,35) Sidney went into quite a bit of detail
concerning just what this quality was, as he saw it. He believed that
intelligence officers were born, not made. “You can send a candidate
for Intelligence work to every school of every service, in every army and
country in the world, but if that “inner spark” that baffles definition is
lacking he will always be a dud. …You could study Intelligence,
Cryptanalysis, Photo-Interpretation, Battle Order, Terrain, and Prisoner
Interrogation all your life, but you’d never be worth a damn as a real
Intelligence officer if you didn’t have that Intelligence impulse.” “You
must be able to see the invisible, hear the inaudible, feel the intangible,
taste what is tasteless, and smell what is odorless.” This “evaluation”
quality is described well (or rather hinted at) in a 1951 quote by General
Walter Bedell Smith – he calls people that can do this the “inspired
class“. “You can never really become an Intelligence Officer of the
inspired class unless you happen to be born with that delicate touch
which produces a reasonable and measurable evaluation without full
knowledge of all the facts…” L. Ron Hubbard, after much experience
with British Intelligence, brought in a further description of this “ability”
they so desire in the slavemaster spy-camps. In 1973, to his Guardian
Office Staff, Hubbard referred to it as “flair“. This is just 4 years before
Leary’s Forewords to Wilson’s Cosmic Trigger book. —We have the
Intelligence “hat pack” of the former Guardian’s Office and current
Office of Special Affairs – which basically contains
the materials for training Hubbard’s in-house
intelligence personnel. One of the issues (which
you can just see where the file is open above) is
called Intelligence, Its Role, dated June 8, 1973.
On the first page of the issue – is where it starts
talking about this quality called “flair”. — “The
most precious and infinitely valued characteristic in an Intelligence post
is “FLAIR”, “a keen natural discernment; an aptitude, a knack”. This is
so rare that in governments and armies there may be only one such
person in a whole generation or even in two or three generations, so
do not underestimate the skill or value of the characteristic.” —–What’s
of real interest here, is the disturbing similarity to the Forewords written
by CIA agent Timothy Leary to Cosmic Trigger. Leary presents the
same idea that this Guardian Office issue does – the “only one” per
generation or so. —In each of the 100 generations since Buddha, a few
Intelligence Agents are born…
Did Leary do this because Hubbard’s Intelligence organization just go
nailed? I say yes, because Cosmic Trigger even mentions L. Ron
Hubbard – did you know that? In a rather interesting way too.
—“According to “Sirius Rising,” the Illuminati are preparing Earth, in
an occult manner, for extraterrestrial contact. Part of the magical
preparation, which only Illuminated Ones can understand, included: (a)
The founding of Cal Tech at 33° of latitude. (This was actually partially
the work of aerospace engineer and occultist Jack Parsons, who was
indeed a disciple of Crowley, as we have seen. In fact, so many of the
scientists at Cal Tech were involved in Crowleyan magick, according to
some reports, that the government grew concerned and sent in agents
to infiltrate the O.T.O. and find out how subversive it might be. L. Ron
Hubbard, founder of Scientology, was admittedly a member of that
lodge of the O.T.O. at that time, and later claimed he had infiltrated
it for Naval Intelligence.)—-Err, No. Hubbard didn’t claim that himself,
he wouldn’t break secrecy like that. The Church of Scientology
Guardian Office – yes, the very same intelligence organization that just
got raided – that said that. On 5 October, 1969, the London
Times Spectrumpublished an article titled: “The odd
beginning of L. Ron Hubbard’s Career” in which Hubbard’s
connection to Jack Parson’s ‘Babylon Working’ rituals was
‘exposed’. Read the text here. On 28 December 1969, the
‘Church of Scientology’ – which really meant the PR or
Public Relations department of the Guardian Office –
issued a statement that the London Times printed and
titled: Scientology: New Light on Crowley. You’ll note they didn’t even
get the dang address of Parson’s place right, it was 1003 not 100. The
Church of Scientology has sent us the following
information. “Hubbard broke up black magic in
America…L. Ron Hubbard was still an officer of
the US Navy …he was sent in to handle the
situation. He went to live at the house and
investigated the black magic rites and the general situation and found
them very bad….. Hubbard’s mission was successful far beyond
anyone’s expectations. The house was torn down. Hubbard rescued a
girl they were using. The black magic group was dispersed and
destroyed and has never recovered. The physicists included many of
the 64 top US scientists who were later declared insecure and
dismissed from government service with so much publicity.” —Note that
it is written in the 3rd person. — Hubbard wasn’t there to do “occult”,
he was there to drive Parsons crazy and wreck his
business using Parson’s obsession with the occult against him. Both of
which he did. Why? Because he was considered an insecure threat to
the U.S. intelligence community – NOT because he was farting around
with “black magic”. Robert Anton Wilson did get it right that it was a
black intelligence operation for the Office of Naval Intelligence – a
mindfuck operation. Just like Wilson is doing right here. There is
only one person besides myself, that I know of, that had the temerity
and clarity of mind to even try to observe what actually happened with
L. Ron Hubbard and Jack Parsons concerning all the so-called black
magic goings-on. Author George Pendle. Look at what he wrote on p.
262 of Strange Angel – Were these really spirits speaking to him,
conjured up by his rituals, or was someone else providing Parsons
with the phenomena he so desperately
wanted? Hubbard had taken over Smith’s
old bedroom across the hall, so he and
Betty would have been ideally positioned
to stage “supernatural occurrences,”
especially with the help of the house’s
secret passageways. If Hubbard was
using his imaginative skills to give
Parsons satisfaction, then Parsons was all
too willing to accept the gift.
But hey, all that about the

Illuminati preparing for ET contact? The
part that said “the Illuminati are preparing Earth, in an occult manner, for
extraterrestrial contact.“ Now that’s rather an odd thing for Wilson the
CIA propagandist to throw in there. —Note: Two years later, Leary’s
idea given in the Forewords about those “intelligence agents” shows up
in another book in 1979 (see 1979 entry) —To give you an idea of what
else is in Cosmic Trigger – ‘In researching occult conspiracies, one
eventually faces a crossroad of mythic proportions (called Chapel
Perilous in the trade).’ ‘Everything you fear is waiting with slavering jaws
– but if you are armed with the wand of intuition, the cup of sympathy,
the sword of reason and the pentacle of valor, you will find there (the
legends say) the Medicine of Metals, the Elixir of Life, the Philosopher’s
Stone, True Wisdom and Perfect Happiness.’ ‘You come out the other
side either a stone paranoid or an agnostic; there is no third way. I
came out an agnostic.’ There are ‘those without the pentacle of valor
who stand outside the door of Chapel Perilous, trembling and warning
all who would enter that the chapel is really an insect Horror Machine
programmed by Death Demons and dripping fetidly with green goo.’—
Colorful. Sounds like a video game. Do note that he IS rather snarkily
making fun of anyone actually trying to penetrate their conspiracy
THEORIES to find the actual conspiracy. I doubt that’s an accident. A
better overview of all the rambling topics that Wilson discusses are:
Freemasons, Discordianism, Sufism, the Illuminati, Futurology, Zen
Buddhism, Dennis and Terence McKenna, Jack Parsons, the occult
practices of Aleister Crowley and G.I. Gurdjieff, Yoga, and many other
esoteric or counterculture philosophies, personalities, and occurrences.
–––
So basically…the Illuminati Conspiracy Theory Reboot “enemies” of

Scientology, per Hubbard, are a conspiracy of 12 Communists including
a Jewish Banker, (with some alien Marcabians thrown in there
somewhere) all bent on taking over the world using psychiatry and
psychological warfare methods.
Minor problem with that theory, it was the British and the Vatican who
were spearheading the rise of the use of psychiatry, not the communists
– and it was THEM that was bent on controlling the world. The very
same people Hubbard was working for.
Not too original as a misdirection, now is it.
Scientology-related people carrying on in Hubbard’s tradition of

misleading others
with British-Vatican 200 year old Conspiracy Theories
1980 April 19-20 – Robert Anton Wilson starts showing up

with Scientology Guardian Office lawyer John J. Matonis at Future of
Freedom Conferences (this was the second one). Matonis, the
Guardian’s Office, and the formation of Scientology’s intelligence front
group called CCHR – Citizen’s Commission on Human Rights, his
adventures helping get the Catholic cult, the Society of St. Pius X (the
SSPX) off the ground and with CCHR trying to rescue a famous wealthy
son (Otto Koehler Jr.) who was locked up in a mental hospital and
showing up in AFRICA to speak before the South African Commission
of Inquiry into scientology (Garrison, ch. 10) are just some of the bizarre
cross-connections going on with thatguy. He’s even featured in an
old Auditor magazine of the Church of Scientology. Auditor #127 1976.
Matonis, in 1972, had started appearing in a known-to-be infested
with CIA disinformation writers propaganda magazine
called Liberty billed as ‘a Magazine for Religious Freedom’. (Volume 7,
#2,March-April 1972) You can see him pushing the Hubbardian “Wundt
did it” disinformation. Considering that this magazine often carried total
propaganda designed to ‘attract’ so-called communists by, sadly, using
quite a bit of truth about the things wrong in the world today, I’d say that
all by itself becomes rather enlightening in a whole different way about
what Ron Hubbard was doing by pushing that same crap on (or
rather through) his followers.
Matonis was a scientologist, and not just any old

scientologist. He’s listed as a CLEAR in the
2006 From Clear to
Eternity Newsletter. In 1968, Matonis
spoke at the American Trial Lawyers
convention concerning the ‘troubles’
scientology (not named) had been
having gaining FOIA documents. Salt Lake Tribune,
August 7, 1968.
2008 – Illuminati Conspiracy Theory REBOOT of 1800’s attacks on

Thomas Jefferson. Rons Org/Ex-Guardian Office/Church of
Scientology Operation Save Scientology Aka The Religious Liberty
League – Randy McDonald and his many pen names, including Ashton
Gray creates a website. The internet archive first captured it all the way
back in 2008 – exactly when the concurrent Karen de la Carriere/Jeffrey
Augustine “Anonymous” PR control operation got going initially. If you
look at the archived version you’ll see that a book called Created
Equal: The Biggest Lie was planned that far back. This book is
carrying on L. Ron Hubbard’s tradition of trashing democracy and
blaming the body partner, an equal spiritual being, as “the cause” for
everything bad basically – aka “the reactive mind”. Quotes advertising
the book: “When Thomas Jefferson penned the famous folly that
“all men are created equal,” …Jefferson simply plagiarized Locke,
word for word. But why would Jefferson bother to steal such a naive
and patently absurd sentiment? And how could the same bizarre
philosophy that became a cornerstone of American democracy turn up
a world away as core elements of Marxism?” – See how he positioned
democracy with communism? “… the feverish ravings of a
lunatic. Created Equal: the Greatest Lie exposes for the first time—and
offers an antidote for—the toxic concepts that have poisoned the
very groundwater of rational thought around the world. An absolute
must-read coming soon.” –Bizarre philosophy, feverish ravings, toxic
concepts. Randy McDonald sounds exactly like Catholic Popes foaming
at the mouth about the Revolutinists. For example, Opium cartel
financier Braschi, Pope Pius VI in our 1791 April 13 entry, talking about
people that agree with the Revolutionists. enemies of religion …
vicious plans ..appealing to his ambition or his stupidity… a few
wretched…silence the enemies ..elected by a low mob…evil
deeds …seduced by treacherous deceit…the way to perdition…We
will anathematize them …the mud of his own foolishness…it is the
one true religion [substitute Scientology for “religion” and you’ll have
Randy McDonald’s current attitude] beware of lending your ears to
the treacherous speech of the philosophy of this age which leads
to death.—Or how about Pope Gregory XVI railing against Thomas
Jefferson, Democracy and the American Revolution “…
a pestilencemore deadly to the state than any other. […] cities …
perished as a result of this single evil, namely immoderate
freedom of opinion, license of free speech …” – see how Randy
sounds just like him? All those picturesque adjectives. This was all later
rebooted and positioned AGAIN with “communism” in 1937 by Pope
Pius XI, saying how bad “absolute equality” was. Gregory XVI and Pius
XI also held all these listed items to be “insanity” – “…liberty of
conscience and worship is each man’s personal right, which ought to be
legally proclaimed and asserted in every rightly constituted society;
and that a right resides in the citizens to an absolute liberty, which
should be restrained by no authority whether ecclesiastical or civil,
whereby they may be able openly and publicly to manifest and declare
any of their ideas whatever, either by word of mouth, by the press, or in
any other way.” As Mike McClaughry said about this in his book: “So,
American ideas of liberty and the right to state any idea in public – the
Pope called that insanity! “ And that’s exactly what new covert
Catholicism operatives like Randy McDonald are doing.
2010 – Rons Org/Ex-Guardian Office/Church of
League begins more overtly. Merrell Vannier, one time ‘volunteer’
intelligence agent for scientology’s Guardian Office revealed that he
was the creator and author of the Save Scientology site on 2 March,
2015. (screenshot here). Because the Internet Archive’s Wayback
Machine has somehow been prevented from archiving his post, I
have created a PDF of this page for researchers use in case the ‘live’
version goes missing.
2013 September 23 – The gross betrayal of Thomas Jefferson by

Merrell Vannier was first revealed in a post here done on 13 January
2014. Since I did that post, he has taken his post down. In my original
2014 post about Merrell’s adventures in false Jefferson quotes, I had
said: “Now that I have completelyshredded the Save Scientology sock-
puppets demagoguery, watch them and see if they correct their vicious
attacks against Jefferson.” Merrell didn’t correct it in any accountable
kind of way. He simply removed it from view. The link was thisand if you
try it you will get a “Page not found”. He took it down sometime after 29
May 2016, as that was the last time that the Wayback Machine archived
it. Here is a PDF of that post and its comments as last archived by
the Wayback Machine. Posting as admin (of the Save Scientology blog)
in a comment of September 23, 2013 Merrell wrote a big comment
responding to Independent Scientologist Dani Lemberger from
Israel. “The history of democracy is abysmal. Thomas Jefferson,
one of America’s Founding Fathers, wrote: (1) “A democracy is nothing
more than mob rule, where fifty-one percent of the people may take
away the rights of the other forty-nine.” (2) “The best argument against
democracy is a five minute conversation with the average voter.” LRH
also expressed his negative opinion of, and experiences with,
democracies, mentioning that the only thing in common with all people
is the reactive mind, and therefore, that group think is reactive
think.” Those “Jefferson” quotes Vannier is using? THEY ARE FALSE
QUOTES. The first quote is disproven by the good people at the
Monticello website that track such spurious Jefferson quotes The
second one is even worse. Not only is the second quote NOT Jefferson,
it is a quote most often attributed to the
absolutely horrible man Winston Churchill. Clearly Merrell LIKED
these false quotes because they supported his misguided and self-
serving views about democracy, and by he also revealed that he and
his Religious Liberty League buddies are supportive of L. Ron
Hubbard’s subversive intelligence campaign against Americans. He
also revealed, probably unintentionally, who their HANDLERS are. And
yet they claim they are the religious liberty league. So,
Religious Liberty League? No. It’s The Good and
Ethical Slave League.
2014 – November – By this time, Virginia McClaughry’s research work

postings here at the blog were causing the operatives of the Rons
Org/Ex-Guardian Office/Church of
League – a lot of trouble. At an obscure Rons Org dominated forum (Bill
Ryan) a poster calling themselves Cuitlahuac point-blank lies (post #10)
and accuses Mike McClaughry of working for the government to take
overScientology. “an infiltrated agent named Mike McClaughry, one of
the architects of the takeover of Scientology by the government of
the US and its extraterrestrial rulers.” Which means THAT is what the
McDonald/Rons Org/OSA contingent told him and what they have been
telling other people for years now.
2016 – Chalet Reports website shows up to start advertising

for Watergate: The Hoax book. The site was first archivedApril 2, 2016.
(see 2008 – Chalet Books)
2016 February 11 – Rons Org/Ex-Guardian Office/Church of

League – Robin Adair aka remoteviewed – currently posting at Mark
Rathbun’s blog – shows himself aligned with Religious Liberty League,
leaves a comment promoting Randy McDonald book: Watergate the
Hoax and a website supposedly fixing Hubbard’s War History which is
obviously one of their Operations as well – The “margaret”
website.Note: Randy McDonald, in particular, has a long history
of pretending to be a woman posting, going all the way back to the
newsgroup posts of “The Librarian”. …Others from our friends in the so
called “Intelligence” Community and State Department when they were
accusing us of running guns, selling drugs and having orgies (the
latter I somehow missed and was the main reason I got into
Scientology….just kidding) and various other assorted “crimes”. “Take a
look at how Margaret has pretty much deconstructed the myths
perpetrated by Cooper, Russell and later plagiarized by Wright and later
promoted in that shoddy “doc” by
Gibney….http://www.chaletbooks.com/chaletreports/ like the writer of
this series of posts says: “Only fiction doesn’t leave a paper trail.” And
much of what Tony writes is nothing but fiction.” (Robin Adair February
11, 2016 at 12:40 am; comments section of Dani Lemberger Nails
Ortega as a Religious Bigot posted by Merrell Vannier 07 Feb 2016) –
Note the “sore point” regarding Hubbard’s intelligence operations
where he was involved and supporting running guns etc. That’s
Robin/Randy etc. being pissed at Virginia’s research work proving
all that – which Mike incorporated into his Scientology Roots book and
trying to position us as being part of the U.S. Intelligence community
covertly. Much like their mouthpiece “Cuitlahuac” started doing at an
obscure Rons Org connected forum called Project Avalon in 2014. (see
2014) Note: How do I know Robin is behind the screen
name remoteviewed? Robin Adair’s blog –
remoteviewed.wordpress.com – look at his about page from 2013.
Robin also posted as RJ at Mark Rathbun’s blog for a number of years
until Marty began “changing” and then Robin exited stage left. How do I
know RJ is a posting identity of Robin Adair? Because Robin revealed
that himself in 2010.You can see another example of Robin Adair in
action over at the Religious Liberty League site (Savescientology.com)
in the comments of the same post I just mentioned about Dani
Lemberger. He was talking with Merrell Vannier and trying to deny any
scientologist involvement in running guns and selling drugs. Of
course, there’s just one minor problem with that denial – several top
Guardian’s office persons (and Hubbard himself) were involved in both
of those things. As just one example – see Scientology Roots Chapter
Nine – 2 Hubbard’s Lifelong Intelligence Career; Scientology’s Elusive
Jerry McDonald – Drugs, Guns, and The Brotherhood, V. McClaughry –
2015. Merrell had done a posting lauding the attack of Dani Lemberger
on Tony Ortega, and Robin Adair had responded to which Merrell then
does the strutting rooster routine about a ‘piece’ he has written about
Tony Ortega’s background that he will only run if Ortega doesn’t stop
attacking ‘the religion’ of scientology. “Thank you for the post. Good
points. Dani Lemberger actually did a better job than I exposing him; I
just reported on it. I’m saving my piece for a later time, but will only
run it if Ortega continues to attack the religion of Scientology and
people who practice the religion for the purpose of bettering their lives
and others’ — in their estimation, which is the only valid measuring
stick. Ortega has an interesting history, especially for a person who
likes to judge and attack others. I’ll leave it at that for now.” (comments
section of Dani Lemberger Nails Ortega as a Religious Bigot posted by
Merrell Vannier 07 Feb 2016)
2017 December 1 – Illuminati Reboot – Scientology operation –

Randy McDonald’s book Created Equal: The Greatest Lie” trashing
Democracy and Equality etc., is published at Amazon under a
pseudonym of “Ashton Gray”.
Finally, let’s close with this out the whole “enemies” section with this.
Oliver Field’s Pet Peeve – Orgone Therapy
Oliver Field was kind of obsessed with Wilhelm Reich and his orgone
therapy, to put it in the mildest possible terms. During the FDA case
against Scientology and it’s e-meter, it’s like he saw Reich everywhere.
There was even a note in the FDA files saying: “Is United Research
connected with Wilhelm Reich? Oliver Field thinks it is
possible.” (Vol 4 of 18 p. 238 FDA documents)
Why is Sherman asking about United Research?
Well, that’s actually one of my favorite parts about this.
Why?
Because it shows that AMA clubfooted “investigators” are definitely kept

out of the loop as to CIA and OSS secret projects. They wouldn’t
KNOW WHY Hubbard was supposed to be attacked – there is no way
in hell Thorvald would have told such lowly and no security clearance
desk-jockeys, so the irony meter goes on serious overload here as to
why Hubbard keeps “escaping” what I’m sure were Oliver’s best efforts.
Hubbard had OSS/CIA British intelligence protection. Oliver had to have
been literally tearing his hair out for decadeswondering why Hubbard
keeps escaping his desperately clutching grasp.
United Research comes up because of Mr. Moshier’s son. Mr. Moshier

is featured in quite a few of the AMA/FDA files.
His son had been recruited for auditing in 1961 by Dr. Dwight Wayne
Batteau, the director of United Research, Cambridge Mass. (His son
was working there). It’s listed in Industrial Research Laboratories of the
United States. It also comes up in combined Defense Department and
Office of Naval Research (ONR) documents, such as this one.
You know, Thorvald’s neck-of-the-woods (or it was, anyway)
United Research appears to have had some kind of role with the
covert experiments of Project Bluebird, initiated first by the Navy in
1947, then joined by the CIA April 20, 1950. That’s kind of a double-
whammy as far as secrecy goes.
It just shows how utterly DUMB Oliver Field was that he thinks United
Research is some kind of quacky outfit that is connected with Wilhelm
Reich.
Oliver definitely gets another dunce cap for that one.

There’s much more my research found out was really going on at
United Research but suffice it to say Oliver was probably more
obsessed with Wilhelm Reich than he was with Hubbard, and that’s
saying something.
It’s like the guy saw Reich everywhere.
He even suspected the dang museum erected after Reich’s death. Look
at this –
[1961] the FDA received a letter from Oliver Field, the director of
the American Medical Association, in which the Wilhelm Reich
Museum established in Orgonon is described:
“The museum shows some of his paintings, but his scientific

equipment is limited to a very small laboratory with a few
glass slides (as he left it) , with photographs, scales,
oscilloscope, Geiger counter and telescope. The impression
one receives is that this man, in the prime of a possible
medical discovery, was clamped into prison. The library is
apparently stocked with recent editions referring to his work.
His body lies in a sarcophagus next to his home, and the
trustees are raising money for a monument to be erected on
the premises.
I believe an investigation should be instituted to

determine for what purposes the money is being collected
through the public sale of tickets. While I realize no medical
problem is now involved, there could be a possibility of a
renewal of Reich’s former teachings on Orgonomy.”
(Wilhelm Reich vs. the USA by Jerome Greenfield, p. 274)
A possibility. Jesus. Could this guy be any more obsessed?
He should have said: “While I realize that anyone reading this will think
I’m behaving like a crazy person because even the tiniest possibility
that ANY one might use these teachings just sends me into paroxysms
of red-faced anger. I just can’t help myself.”
He’s dead and someone might be interested anyway?
Jerome wrote about this:
This letter is one of the most explicit expressions of what was

only implicit in all the legal proceedings: that the main purpose of
the FDA action was not the concern for the health of
people using the accumulator, but the spread of Reich’s
“teachings on Orgonomy.”
Right.
What was it that Austin Smith’s best buddy, Camarillo ghoulDr. Ravitch
said again:
“[…] one hears that the medical profession is really a

medical trust that is trying to keep outall forms of
treatment but its own.”
Hear. Hear.
That was very Jacques Ellul of Dr. Ravitch to try and level thatas a
“crazy” accusation towards Dianeticians that said that at a meeting
Ravitch covertly attended (hiding his real reason for being there)
because…
There is quite a bit of evidence now that is true in far too many cases
than it should be, for such an “innocent” and “goodly” thing as Oliver
Field and Austin Smith were supposedly doing.
Or as Jacques Ellul put it in Propaganda: the Formation of Men’s

Attitudes —
First of all, the propagandist must insist on the purity of his own
intentions and, at the same time, hurl accusations at his enemy.
But the accusation is never made haphazardly or groundlessly.
The propagandist will not accuse the enemy of just any
misdeed; he will accuse him of the very intention that he
himself hasand of trying to commit the very crime that he
himself is about to commit.
Suppressing Cancer Cures

Now.
With all that in mind, let’s have a look at Oliver in action.
“Crackdown on Quackery” – Life Magazine

“Experts Sound Off on Menace”
November 1, 1963
“A doctor is a quack when he claims to be able to cure obviously

incurable diseases, and when he uses discredited or
unestablished methods of treatment and makes great claims for
them.”
Really look at this part of that statement. “cure obviously
incurable diseases”
Incurable.
Like cancer?
So…cancer is INCURABLE? And what the frickin’ hell is the
word obviously doing in there? obvious to whom…ah, the AMA, of
course. They have decreed it is obviously incurable.
Then why, may I ask, is there such a HUGE AMA-driven

industry TO CURE CANCER using…their approved of drugs and
“therapy” methods that DAMAGE the body more than it helps.
It’s kind of like this picture that I use to show the psychiatrist types of
ridiculous “cures” for people hearing voices.
Death.
“Well, at least the voices are gone.”

BILLIONS of dollars are made in profits in their attempts to cure
cancer that doesn’t actually cure it. That makes THEM quacks by
the very definition Oliver Field gave!
A doctor is a quack when he claims to be able to cure obviously

incurable diseases.
If the doctor adds the word MIGHT in front of it, does that kind of
chicken-livered Jesuit style sub-understanding word-parsing addition
make that doctor NOT a quack? That’s a rhetorical question, kids,
meaning it isn’t even a question, it’s a fact. That is exactly why they
stick that big “maybe” in front of their so-called cancer treatments.
So, what are we really dealing with here? Saving humanity from
quacks?
Or…saving humanity from some quacks and suppressing REAL

RESEARCH and hiding it under the “quack” label. (while, in many
cases, keeping actual cures for themselves).
Guilty.
It’s why you can’t just assume it’s an either/or logic that should be
applied when dealing with people like this. THEY DO NOT WANT TO
BE CAUGHT so have become quite sophisticated at mixing things in
the hopes of making detection and exposure difficult or impossible
even.
It’s not impossible for me, I always catch them. Always. It shouldn’t be
for you either, if you stop letting it be. It takes excellent use of one’s
perception and work to find what they’re up to. It is never impossible to
do so.
But it is DIFFICULT.
Don’t just sit there and go, well, if the AMA says its quackery, a cult (or
whatever) well then. Automatically the truth is that it is not. No. You’d
come out wrong probably more than you’re right if you take that lazy-
ass route of decision making.
Look at Oliver Field in action on exactly this point of curingcancer. I’m

not saying the Hoxy Cancer Cure is or isn’t a cure, I’m saying watch
what Oliver does and says, with the understanding that Oliver
was still attacking this person even when he’s old and about to die.
They mount LIFELONG campaigns against people, and in L. Ron
Hubbard’s case, even beyond the grave.
It’s as if Oliver thinks he’s battling the devil himself in what he does –
and I’m not actually joking about that. For him to be attacking whoever
this Hoxy Cure person is, he is saying that they are
quacks because they have made: “claims to be able to cure obviously
incurable diseases.”
I’ll say it again, THEY claim that cancer is INCURABLE.
You getting what this is really saying yet?
THEY DON’T WANT TO CURE

CANCER FOR EVERYONE
Think of all the people that wouldn’t die – can’t have that. Too many
people.
Think of all the people who wouldn’t suffer – can’t have that. Won’t
be as stressed, might get “ideas”
Think of all the freedom people would have not having to WORRY
ABOUT getting cancer – can’t have that. Might start focusing on us.
Think of all the MONEY and POWER we would lose – definitely can’t
have that.
They NEED death.

.
Now who’s the devil in this scenario. The quack. The cultist. The
charlatan.
They are.
The other reasons they have for this abominable behavior is
DISRUPTION of their agenda, the portion of that agenda that deals with
“planned” release of things in such a way as to maximize profits and
control. You see where JAMA fits into that and what they do to stop or
control the speed of both research and cures.
Let me show you how they treat people who offer ANY way of
alleviating cancer and other life-threatening diseases that are not
controllable. This first one has to do with the man who used
methotrexate – chemotherapy, in other words. Dr. Min Chiu Li in 1958.
After the first two patients went into remission using Li’s treatment, they
were presented at NCI Grand Rounds at the Clinical Center. The
subject of the rounds was “the spontaneous regression of cancer”. Li
was told that if he persisted in using his radical treatment, he would be
fired. He persisted, he was fired.
FOURTEEN YEARS later, when they had created the monopolized

drug patents off of HIS research, they gave Dr. Li the Lasker prize.
How many people died who didn’t have to because of thatdelay? Too
many.
Since then, there was, I believe it was a Japanese scientist who actually
perfected chemotherapy based on the large molecule targeting system
idea. What that means is this. The cancer cells have big “mouths” or
holes that they suck up nutrition from. Bigger than normal cells. This
scientist created a large molecule poison or chemotherapy that only the
cancer cells could “eat” with their big hogging “mouths”. He had
something like a 98 percent success rate on brain tumor patients, one
of the hardest to cure. The tumors shrunk dramatically because they
were literally being starved. More than TWENTY YEARS later,
they’re still dragging their feet on this type of chemotherapy. Here’s
another example article.
How many people died who didn’t have to because of that still
ongoing delay? Probably tens of thousands of people at least. How
much money is being poured into their coffers from the current inferior
form of chemotherapy? Billions and Billions of dollars.
WHY are they dragging their

feet?
In favor of even MORE expensive genetic engineering – gene “therapy”,
that’s why.
Let me give you an example that is near and dear to my

heart. Lorenzo’s oil.
Lorenzo had Adrenoleukodystrophy – a rare genetic (inherited) disorder

characterized by the breakdown or loss of the myelin sheath
surrounding nerve cells in the brain and progressive dysfunction of the
adrenal gland.
Think of it like an electric wire whose protective rubber or plastic

sheathing is being destroyed. You get unprotected “current” spilling out,
not arriving at full strength where it should while also spreading where it
shouldn’t.
But what was breaking down the sheathing? Why was the body doing
this? That was the question that Lorenzo’s parents set themselves the
task to figure out, to save their son’s life. They studied all the available
medical data themselves and at one particular low point for the father,
he gets told in a dream what the problem is. He figures it out, then
contacted over 100 firms around the world until they find an elderly
British chemist, Don Suddaby, willing distill the proper formula. The oil,
erucic acid, proves successful in normalizing the accumulation of the
very long chain fatty acids in the brain that had been causing their son’s
steady decline. Lorenzo’s Oil is a combination of a 4:1 mix of oleic acid
(olive oil) and that erucic acid.
They found a kind of cure that slowed down the disease and even
restored some of Lorenzo’s body-damage. An oil. A natural oil – not
some patented drug. They were understandably excited to share their
find that was restoring their son to them. What happened?
The very same kinds of people, like Oliver Field, Austin Smith of the
AMA and the FDA not only tried to stop them from researching it in the
first place, they refused to help them and even when they
found Lorenzo’s Oil – refused to approve it!. Those that sucked up to
the Great Gods of the AMA and FDA, were just as bad, as this scene
from the Lorenzo’s Oil movie shows.
There’s an absolutely wonderful part of this scene @2:31 where the

father was told he was arrogant for thinking he could do better than the
“doctors”, and he passionately explains the actual real meaning of the
word. It’s from the Latin Arrogare – To claim for oneself. Lorenzo’s
father says that yes, he IS arrogant because:
“I claim the RIGHT to fight for my kids life, and no doctor […] has
the RIGHT to stop me from asking questions which might help me
save him!”
Hear, Hear.
The FDA refused to approve it for… what is it now? THIRTY FIVE

years. Even as late as 2013 the foundation that distributed the oil was
still trying to get FDA approval for mass distribution etc., and today even
though they are still disributing it, the FDA won’t let them even ship it to
anyone but a physician.
And in the meantime in 2018?
The FDA is GRANTING the big business engineered gene-

therapy company Bluebird BIO – Breakthrough Therapyapproval
designation for Lenti-D™ testing of gene therapy for the disease
Lorenzo had. What do they call this study? Starbeam.
What can we expect the price tag for this to be? We can use the price
tag for Bluebird Bio is currently charging. $1.8 million dollars PER
PATIENT. Think I’m kidding? Read this June 2019 article. Bluebird’s
CEO tries to justify this out-of-reach for EVERYONE BUT THE
RICH price tag, by saying: “the one-time treatment is a game changer
for patients, giving them a “lifelong benefit””
Think that’s the only one? It’s not. Spark Therapeutics’ Luxturna gene
therapy treatment for a hereditary eye disease is running about
$425,000—per eye! Novartis’ cancer cell therapy, Kymriah, runs
$475,000!
Their ever-so generous solution to this extraordinarily high price tag? A

five year payment plan.
Yea. Great. I’ll take three.

Do you know what they’re USING to do this gene therapy study on
Lorenzo’s disease? The HIV virus!!!
“For the gene therapy, the children had their own stem cells
harvested from their blood rather than bone marrow. Then,
scientists used a unique tool to infuse the cells in a lab with the
healthy ABCD1 gene: a lentivirus made from a disabled form of
HIV. The lentivirus acts as a “vector,” carrying and inserting the
healthy gene into the stem cell DNA.
“These vectors are kind of like living medicines,” said Dr. David
Williams, the chief scientific officer at Boston Children’s Hospital
and the senior author of the study. Once in the body, these altered
blood stem cells constantly regenerate to keep treating the
patient’s disease. The advantage of using disabled HIV over
other viral carriers is that HIV actually delivers the healthy gene
more safely, without apparently altering any neighboring DNA,
Williams told Live Science.”
An ENGINEERED virus works better to deliver ENGINEERED genes?

Gee. Who woulda thunk it. Seems a bit dangerous to be using the HIV
virus at all, if you ask me.
So, now you know what the AMA and its attack dogs primary function is
– to protect the slavemasters plan, their power, and their fortunes – and
of course, THEIR health.
Now that you know all this, take a look again at this video of clips of
Morris Fishbein, the editor of JAMA, in action.
And what was that Oliver’s buddy Dr. Ravitch said again?
“…one hears that the medical profession is really a

medical trust that is trying to keep out all forms of
treatment but its own.”
(JAMA; January 13, 1951, Vol 145, No. 2, “Dianetics” letter to editor
Austin Smith by Camarillo ghoul Dr. Samuel J. Ravitch. Note: the article
listing for this journal pulls this one letter out as a separate listing just to
highlight it!; Note: The address Ravitch lists is the address for Camarillo
State Hospital: Department of Mental Hygiene. Which, if you don’t know,
“mental hygiene” was kind of a code-name for Eugenics.)
Need I say more?

Didn’t think so.
Getting the media attack engine

going now –
Notice how the first visible attack is just 12 days after Austin E. Smith
told Oliver Field to get busy, then there’s a 15 day delay before the Main
Event – the big media outlets attack.
Publisher’s Weekly Vol. 158 June 17, 1950, page 2627: At American
Bookseller’s Association convention, New York (Harvard) psychiatrist
Fredric Wertham denounces Dianetics as “neither a good book nor a
hoax,” but a “harmful mixture of science and science fiction“. His
papers also mention this. (reference originally found here) This duo
split kind of attack is repeated in two pulp/fanzine attacks. Boggs:
Dianetics: Fad or Science, Silverberg: Dianetics: Fact or Fantasy.
New York Times Book Review July 2, 1950, page 9: How to
Backtrack and Get Ahead; “Dianetics” reviewed (unfavorably) by Dr.
Rollo May (this site has wrong date) Punchline: “the absurdity of
trying to view man as a machine.“
Note: Many years ago, the late Arnie Lerma had put together the
internet’s most extensive collection of news items re: Dianetics
and Scientology. You can view his collection listing here. There are
some he missed though, some very key early ones that I have
now documented.
Right in here, is where another line of attack gets activated by the self-
styled Dynamic Duo of health and welfare, Austin and Oliver, that
should be mentioned – The National Better Business Bureau out of
NYC, NY. On July 17th, Diana Bennett of the NBBB suddenly! – yea,
we know why – decided to send out a wave of letters, including one to
the American Psychiatric Association that same day. (see same
reference below p. 320). It is not known who ELSE she sent out out
letters to, but she did also send one to the Hubbard Dianetic Research
Foundation – the HDRF itself.
As Secretary of the HDRF, Charles Parker Morgan responded to Diana

on 22 July 1950, stating he was a Trustee of the HDRF and he had
worked for the OSS. (FDA declassified documents; CD #1, Folder 3
PDF p. 324)
One week after this second letter campaign was spawned by Austin
and Oliver – the next wave of media attacks begin. Notice the
introduction of one of Oliver’s favorite attack points – the derogatory
term cult.
Of Two Minds July 24, 1950, TIME Magazine editorial; Punchlines: “A

new cult is smoldering through the U.S. underbrush. it’s name:
dianetics. Last week its bible was steadily climbing the U.S.
bestseller lists. […]unveiled dianetics in the magazine
Astounding Science-Fiction. As a result, its earliest devotees
were science fiction fans.” “touch of Coueism” “mild resemblance
to Buchmanite confession“—Suspect that part of the reason for the
title name choice of this article (which is unsourced, by the way) and
the choice of targeting it as “coueism” – a fancy way of calling it a
form of hypnosis or auto-suggestion- is actually related to
Myers/Pitzer two minds/two beings idea which was attacked
heavily by the AMA in the early 1900’s.
JAMA July 29, 1950 QUERIES AND MINOR NOTESsection. Editor
Austin E. Smith sets up a “question” then has two unnamed
authorities answer it. Punchlines: Answer 1: “a long article appeared
recently in a science-fictionmagazine. The author, L. Ron Hubbard,
is best known as ascience-fiction writer.” Answer 2: “Apparently the
author thinks […]of man as a machine.
1950 August — President of American Psychiatric Association (APA)
Daniel Blain to Diana Bennett of the National Better Business Bureau
dated 1 August 1950. (Folder 3 FDA Declassified documents p. 320)
Daniel was also part of the Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry,
on the same Committee on Therapy that George N. Raines and
Lawrence Kubie were on. See Menninger, Notices and Bulletins.
Psychosomatic medicine Vol. 10 #1, January 1948 and January
1950 Report #8 —–Daniel is responding to her letter of 17 July 1950
(p. 322). Points: unscientific…unrealistic….flamboyant…full of
contradictions…hypnotists… appeal is to the hysterical…faith-
healers…fortune-tellers…astrologers… and cultists…refuses
scientific and specific questioning…sensational publicity…not
in keeping with the behavior or conduct of a professional man
…lay practitioners…widespread quackery.”
Letters to the Editor; Re: Rollo May 2 July book review, NY Times
August 6, 1950; FREDERICK L. SCHUMAN letter/review. L. Ron
Hubbard answers, Rollo May answers Hubbard.
So there’s our first four, ok six items not counting the Time article. I also
added to that list a behind-the-scenes attack by the President of the
American Psychiatric Association himself – Daniel Blain. (full entry is in
the Master Timeline)
Before we really get going here, I think it’s important that we take a
moment and notice a few things from a December 9, 1949 letter from
Hubbard to Campbell, with it’s attached bogus critique of Dianetics
under the pen-name Irving Kutzman. What’s interesting is the points
that stand out that the sicced-on Hubbard critics would later use, but
also the one thing NONE of them would talk about. It’s funny, because
that’s one that I already caught as OMITTED before I even looked at
this letter again.
Hubbard’s Attack points –
approached with extreme caution

Spirit of caution
upstart fad
the mind is too complex
The concept of the mind [note that it does not say “man”] as an
electronic computing machine, as espoused by Professor McCulloch,
as written about by Dr. Werner in another new idea, Cybernetics, is
an interesting idea but of no real use. Electronics and engineering
cannot solve the problems of the human mind. That is very solidly
and unarguably the province of psychiatry.
The one thing no critic EVER talked about –

The only new things in Dianetics are few. The discovery of the
actual nature of unconsciousness and that the brain records
continually has some validity and possibly some use to
psychiatry. That these memories can be recovered was
demonstrated by Mr. Hubbard.
And chew on this in relation to Thorvald’s “kidnap” attempt of Hubbard

four months later –
That these unconscious areas alone contain aberrative data is

open to question in view of the sexual basis of classical Freudian
psychology. That this data is probably aberrative, there is no real
doubt. I have many times found them with narco-synthesis
and I am glad to discover a technique which will penetrate
these hitherto questionable blanks as that experience would
assist in filling out a case.
Now look at these initial entries again, in relation to that –
NBBB July 17, 1950 – courtesy of the self-styled Dynamic Duo of
health and welfare, Austin and Oliver, The National Better Business
Bureau out of NYC, NY. tasks Diana Bennett of the NBBB to send
out a wave of letters, including one to the American Psychiatric
Association that same day. (see same reference below p. 320). It is
not known who ELSE she sent out out letters to, but she did also
send one to the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation – the HDRF
itself. As Secretary of the HDRF, Charles Parker Morgan responded
to Diana on 22 July 1950, stating he was a Trustee of the HDRF and
he had worked for the OSS. (FDA declassified documents; CD
#1, Folder 3 PDF p. 324)
Behind-the-scenes-attack – President of American Psychiatric
Association (APA) Daniel Blain to Diana Bennett of the National
Declassified documents p. 320) Daniel was also part of the Group for
the Advancement of Psychiatry, on the same Committee on Therapy
that George N. Raines and Lawrence Kubie were on. See
Menninger, Notices and Bulletins. Psychosomatic medicine Vol. 10
#1, January 1948 and January 1950 Report #8 —–Daniel is
responding to her letter of 17 July 1950 (p. 322).
Points: unscientific…unrealistic….flamboyant…full of
So, that’s what we have within one month of the first move by Dr.
Wertham.
I pondered about how I wanted to lay this out, and I decided to first:
especially single out our first three main attacks, Wertham, May and
Smith (not including the Time article right now) because these literally
set the stage for all the rest. I am also going to provide the
documentation for these and quite a few others, including some really
important ones which apparently no one has bothered to do for
decades, including all forms of critics or scientologists.
Why not?
Umm…well. We’ll just politely call it lazy research, for now.
After we take up these first three guys, then we’ll need to take a side
trip into the world of Pulps and Fanzines as to what’s going on there re
Dianetics. We’ll make a timeline of those, then we’ll come back around
and I’ll show you the other major media attacks, shorthand but
documented, then combine the two timelines and finish with the chosen
Black PR slogans analysis.
Sound good?
Then away we go –
First, let’s take up Renfield Dr. Wertham. My initial research into him
(once I got past the logjam of Google results that kept talking about
comic books) landed me in an obscure 1950 letter from James Blish to
Red Boggs, in two equally obscure (to most of us these days)
fanzine/newsletters.
That’s where I came across the indication of just how muchFredric

Wertham was invested into targeting Dianetics. I’ll document this fully in
our side trip section, but I’ll tell you one thing that Blish said now. He
was taking Boggs to task for his rather overstated and vicious review of
Dianetics in July 1950, literally just two weeks after Dr. Wertham
decided – read, was asked – to specifically target Dianetics. In the part
where Blish is challenging Boggs on the use of “reputation” as an
indicator of anything, he says: “The reputation of Dr. Frederick
Wertham, also damned good, is also no guarantee, whether he’s
for or agin dianetics (he’s violently agin.)”
Violently, eh?
Well, says me at the time, that sounds like something to dig into, hard.
And so…I did. You know what happens then.
If there’s anything to find, I’m going to find it.
I liked the MAD magazine #24 portrayal of “doctor” Fredric Wertham

(born Friedrich Ignatz Wertheimer) reading a horror comic like it’s a
dang lab experiment or something. Frederic had launched a crusade to
save young Americans from the “invidious influence” of lurid comic
books in the late 1940s.
Note: You can read Wertham’s book here.
Quoted website – “Matters reached a head in 1954 with the publication

of psychiatrist Fredric Wertham’s Seduction of the Innocent (Rinehart &
Co, 1954), which led to a wave of censorship and a stigma against
the art form that lingers to this day. Wertham asserted, among other
claims, that Batman and Robin were romantically involved, that Wonder
Woman’s strength and independence gave little girls the wrong idea
about women’s place in society, and that crime
comics taught children how to commit
crimes.” Note: You can read Wertham’s
book here.
Trivia: Wertham appeared on the Mike Douglas Show (Week of April

10, 1967; Episode 156) shilling his book about the involvment of
medical professionals in the Holocast A Sign for Cain, arguing with
Barbara Feldon and Vincent Price about it. I would have loved to see
that one. (you know me and Vincent Price, I love his range of
expressions)
This guy Wertham was what is politely called a poser.
After Wertham’s manuscript collection at the Library of Congress was

unsealed in 2010, Carol Tilley, a University of Illinois librarian and
information science professor, investigated his research and found his
conclusions to be largely baseless. In a 2012 study, Tilley
wrote “Wertham manipulated, overstated, compromised, and
fabricated evidence—especially that evidence he attributed to
personal clinical research with young people—for rhetorical gain.”
(wikipedia cite: Tilley, Carol (2012). “Seducing the Innocent: Fredric
Wertham and the Falsifications that Helped Condemn
Comics”. Information & Culture. 47 (4): 383–413. )
Yep. Sounds about right.
I’d like to dive into Wertham’s backgound a bit more extensively

because of two reasons. One, I think he is a complicated man who
deserves a bit of “airing” to fill in the picture about him and Two,
because it is actually quite relevant to our Hubbard story here. I don’t
know how to explain it more than that really, I just know that it just IS the
right thing to do here.
I gave you the basics already, now I’m going to bump up the
documentation and history a lot more than that. There are some fairly
big shoulders of others that I’m going to be standing on here, and I want
to thank them before-hand for everything they have done to bring
pieces about this man to the Age of Internet.
This is practically a whole article in and of itself and though I might

normally have separated it out, I think in this case it’s more important
that it be here in this story of what was going on in and around L. Ron
Hubbard and Dianetics, because of just how many connections
Wertham turns out to have. Connections that most people don’t even
know existed.
There are a number of things I have done ground-breaking research on

and are a World’s first reveal regarding Dr. Wertham.
Without further ado, come with me and see.

Let’s start with 1929, when Dr. Fredric Wertham received what he said
is the first ever grant by the NRC – the National Research Council of
the United States.
Adolf Meyer
pretentious to the end
This document by Gabriel Mendes details what actually happened with
this NRC grant in 1929, starting on p. 105. Wertham
was refused initially but his mentor, Adolf Meyer(Phipps clinic; John
Hopkins Hospial) wrote letters to every member of the Committee
appealing the decline. A month later, Wertham was granted his
scholarship which sent him to Munich, Germany to study “the brain as
an organ” at a time when Ernst Rudin’s racial hygiene plans were in full
swing. The author finds this move difficult to understand (as would
anyone) because:
“While his research project would be conducted solely in the

neurological laboratories of the Munich Institute, he must have
been aware of the overarching program of the institute, which
aligned psychiatric research with the broad project of German
racial hygiene. …Emil Kraepelin, who had overseen the
establishment of the Munich Institute, and his student Ernst
Rudin, director of the Department of Genealogical Demographics,
were central to the infusion of eugenic thought into German
psychiatric research. Rudin was the key figure in establishing a
wide-ranging investigation of the genetic basis of psychiatric
diseases. “The results of [Rudin’s] psychiatric genetics,” explain
two German medical historians, “would provide knowledge and
techniques with the help of which Nature’s ‘remorseless weeding
out’ could be replaced by a policy of preventive selection, carried
out by scientifically-based political measures directed against the
transmission of defective hereditary dispositions.” “Preventive
selection” would provide the scientific sanction for Nazi eugenic
campaigns. …by 1930 being a Jewish medical scientist in Munich,
irrespective of name changes and Americanization, could prove
quite dangerous for Wertham, as the “positive” eugenics program
of improving the populace had turned toward targeting Jews as
the greatest stain on the purity of the “Aryan” race.”
ERNST RUDIN
Kraepelin’s new Munich Institute that Wertham was so hot to go and

supposedly only study “spriochetes” and brain syphilis, had only just
opened in 1928 at 2 Kraepelinstrasse.
GERMAN INSTITUTE FOR PSYCHIATRIC RESEARCH IN MUNICH CIRCA
1930
The building was financed primarily by a donation of $325,000 from the

Rockefeller Foundation. Department heads were Walther
Spielmeyer, Ernst Rüdin, Felix Plaut, Kurt Schneider and Franz Jahnel.
Rudin, a student of Kraepelin’s, took over the directorship of the
Institute in 1931, while also remaining head of genetics.
That is the same year that Wertham was still there, but soon to return
to the U.S.
Also while Wertham was here, because Kraepelin had believed that
faulty genetic heredity was the root of most psychiatric problems, there
was strong support for surgical sterilization of all schizophrenic, manic-
depressive and “feeble-minded” patients – this was going on LONG
BEFORE Hitler made it a “law” in 1933.
The world was literally going Schizophrenic! crazy.

In 1880, before Kraepelin’s dementia praecox idea, Germany had had
47,228 patients in public asylums, but by 1913, this number
had increased five times that to 239,583, even though the total
population had not quite doubled. The percentage of patients diagnosed
with schizophrenia increased from 42% to 56%, and two-thirds of all
new admissions were given that diagnosis. A massive increase of
psychiatric patients, especially those diagnosed with schizophrenia,
was also being observed in England, the United States, and other
countries during these same years. (Psychiatric Genocide: Nazi
Attempts to Eradicate Schizophrenia 2010)
Of course, many people diagnosed “schizophrenic” weren’t but were

sterilized anyway. One example was a man who objected to his role in
WWI and had decided he wouldn’t agree with killing others anymore.
Though cogent, no signs whatsoever of any mental problems, he was
still diagnosed schizophrenic by the institute and sterilized against his
will.
Ernst Rudin had a special interest in schizophrenia, which he believed

was caused by a Mendelian recessive gene, and advocated that
“people who are themselves mentally ill …should not have children.”
People with those views werent just in Nazi Germany, for example
Rudin’s student Franz Kallmann, a Berlin psychiatrist, gave a speech in
1935 where he advocated the examination of all relatives of individuals
with schizophrenia to identify nonaffected carriers, which he believed
could be done by noting “minor anomalies,” and then the compulsory
sterilization of such individuals.
A year later, Kallmann emigrated to New York, where he continued his
twin research and later became one of the founders of the American
Society of Human Genetics. You see what that is really cloaking.
I probably should note here that in World Within (p.18) Fredric was quite
clear in his support of labelling people schizophrenic but it is what he
said that Kraepelin meant by that, that is particularly chilling.
Fredric doesn’t realize what he’s revealing here, but I do. He said that
schizophrenia does NOT mean split personality, that Kraepelin was
referring to a “coming-apart of special psychological reactions” and that
it’s called schizophrenia because “the division of the most various
psychic functions is one of its most important attributes.” Here’s the key
part – he says it means a “definitely pathological emotional
withdrawal from the environment with a progressive blunting of the
personality.”
To illustrate just how chilling this is, if we take the example of the man
who objected to his role in WWI and had decided he wouldn’t agree
with killing others anymore – you see just exactly what people like
Wertham, Kraepelin, etc. meant by “environment”. They mean rebelling
against THEIR SOCIETY, not agreeing to do THEIR AGENDA. And
even though the man had no signs whatsoever of any mental
problems? He is classified as schizophrenic because he disagrees
with the slavemasters and their war-mongering agenda.
Now we know what is REALLY going on with this damn “schizophrenic”

label.
What has always been going on with it.
Also right when Wertham was there, the Munich Institute had started
studies on the prevalence of Schizophrenia in Germany, by Carl
Brugger. Considering it especially important to identify individuals with
schizophrenia (because he too believed it was carried by a recessive
gene), he used key informants, hospital records, and interviews of
community residents to identify them. Citing Rüdin’s work, Brugger said
that “only sterilization ensures that the genes do not spread all over the
nation.” (Psychiatric Genocide: Nazi Attempts to Eradicate
Schizophrenia 2010)
So, Wertham was right in the middle of all that and I can guaran-damn-
ty you that he wasn’t in disagreement with any of it. On that note: I like
what Gabriel Mendes said:
“The impact of Wertham’s perceived unprofessional behavior—his

duplicity, “aggressiveness,” and self-deception—is crucial for
understanding the path he followed…”
I’ll say.
I think later in his life he became even more deeply conflicted, hence his
publication of Sign for Cain in 1966, but even then, you can still see that
psychiatric “final solution” still showing through. The book talks about
how he was against hyper-nationalism and hyper-individualism which
he considered “both of which seek satisfaction for themselves as the
cost of others.”
Oh, jesus christ. So sayeth the hypocrite – because so does

psychiatry with its insane ideas and dictatorial treatment of others.
His eugenics underpinnings really shine through when he says

that “elimination of these would create a civilization without
violence” and that “nobody will have to be afraid any longer of violent
interference with his life or that of his children.” And who decides who
has these things that needelimination? Psychiatrists like Wertham.
Doesn’t sound much different, I’m sorry to say, than Hitler’s need to
ELIMINATE jewish people or schizophrenic people and their
“unacceptable” ideas.
Wertham’s hypocritical and duplicitous attitude there explains a LOT

about the way he behaved in life. I’ll repeat what Gabriel Mendes said
again:
“The impact of Wertham’s perceived unprofessional behavior—his

duplicity, “aggressiveness,” and self-deception—is crucial for
understanding the path he followed…”
The really scary-weird coinciding thing, to me, is that within 2 years of
his return from that rats nest in Munich, he published a
paper on mescaline, the very drug the Nazis would later experiment
with on prisoners in Dachau.
An encyclopedia entry on the internet portrayed Wertham as

having “published the first study on the effects of mescaline”.
That is not true as worded.
In the United States, yes, but what

is left out here is that he already
knew a LOT about mescaline from
having been at the Munich
Institute in 1921 working directly
with Kraepelin, Wertham’s hero.
He most certainly would have
heard of Kurt Beringer’s
mescaline study going on at
Kraepelin’s old stomping grounds,
the Heidelberg University
psychiatric clinic.
Karl Jaspers was teaching BERINGER

psychology in the psychiatric clinic
at Heidelberg, in what had
previously been Emil Kraepelin’s department. Between 1914 to 1921 he
developed what he called the “biographical method” where patients
were carefully studied as to their personalities, life situations and
emotional states. Working right alongside was Kurt Beringer, who in
1921 began a programmed series of mescaline experiments that ran for
several years utilizing over sixty mostly male doctors or medical
students, and using doses of 200mg on up to even 600
mg. Beringer described the effects of mescalinein detail in the 1927
“The Mescaline Intoxication” (Der Meskalinrausch) which established
the groundwork for the experimental psychosis.
Meanwhile, just before WWI, Wertham spent quite a bit of time in
England taking medical courses at King’s College, London University.
He liked to read Fabian Society writings and Karl Marx in his spare
time and worked wth the British on treating soldiers “mentally scarred”
from battle. (shell shock)
Interestingly enough, he would have run into Dr. Winfred Overholser

during this time period, because that’s exactly what HE was doing
during WWI. Overholser was in France“treating soldiers mentally
scarred in battle…as Lieutenant in the Neuro-psychiatric Section of the
U.S. Army Medical Corps from February 1918 to June 1919…”
Both Overholser and Wertham would have also become well aquainted
with British psychiatrist (called alienists sometimes back then) John
Rawlings Rees who was brought into the British Army to treat soldiers
suffering from shell shock. They called it battle neurosis when the
soldiers did not want to kill and be killed.
Notice the corollary to diagnosing that man schizophrenic because he

didn’t want to kill any more people. (The German man we talked about
earlier)
What were they doing with these supposedly insane soldiers? They
were using abreactive therapy on the soldiers who had developed
“battle neurosis”. (Freud Encyclopaedia edited by Edward Erwin)
They also used electric shock on the soldiers to “cure” their lack of
desire to kill other men, women and children. They attached electrodes
to the ‘patients’ body and then delivered electric shocks of up to 20,000
volts for one second each, repeated ten to twenty times daily.
(Madhouse: A Tragic Tale of Megalomania and Modern Medicine by
Andrew T. Scull)
The Shaping of Psychiatry by War by John Rawlings Reese, 1945 –
In World War I the British army had a “consulting psychologist” and

a number of neurologists. Many of them, in fact, were
psychiatrists. They were brought into the army’s machinery in
response to the critical situation created by the wave of battle
neurosis at first called “shell shock.”
… Doctor Thomas Salmon came over to England in 1917… The

main concern of psychiatrists in the last war was with treatment
and they were very successful in treating battle neurosis just
behind the lines and in tackling the more resistant cases in base
hospitals.
…the best results with the war neuroses are obtained when they
have active treatment.
“Psychosurgery” in the shape of abreaction followed by simple re-

education should as a rule precede a period of rest
under narcosis. [That euphemistic description is hiding that
means they DRUGGED them into a coma]
There is, however, no question that the general method of

abreaction followed by sedation is applicable to many cases in
civilian life, particularly in psychosomatic conditions, and it is well
worth further experiment.
That means, psychotherapy WITH DRUGS and “shock” therapies.
Exactly what Wertham would be a major proponent of later on, as was

Dr. Overholser. Everybody just changed the order of which was done
first, is all.
Cementing the British connection to these two here, after WWI, my

husband’s The Reckoning chapter Down the Mental Health Rabbit hole,
documents that in 1920 John Rees and pals formed the Tavistock
Institute of Medical Psychology (aka Tavistock Clinic). The plan
was that the treatment used on soldiers was going to be used on
society – social psychiatry was born. 3, 75, 76
And, just as in 1954 when Wertham would use as hisinfiltration point of

children as a publicly “acceptable” victim for the “evils of comics”,
according to John Rawlings Rees it was child psychiatry that they
started with at the Tavistock Clinic.
A think of the poor children routine, you understand.
It should be kept very clear in your mind that this BRITISH plan was
literally the blueprint for what both Wertham and Overholser would later
champion in the U.S.
By 1935, Rees had this plan well begun. In 1934 William Sargant was
committed to a mental hospital. Lord Moran encouraged Sargant to take
up psychiatry, so in 1935, William Sargant (another ghoulish monster
psychiatrist) went to work at Maudsley Hospital, where he worked along
with psychiatrist John Rawlings Rees. Sargant used abreactive
therapy in conjunction with drugs and electroshock, just like John
Rees was doing during World War I.
All this with WWI wasn’t the first time that Wertham and Overholser
would be on directly parallel paths.
For example –
Dr. Winfred Overholser was appointed director of the Division for the
Examination of Prisoners of the Massachusetts Department of Mental
Diseases from 1925 to 1930. He was commissioner of the
Massachusetts Department of Mental Diseases, 1934-1936, where
he helped enact the Briggs Law which “provided for the prompt
recognition of defendants who should be in hospitals, thus preventing
trial of mentally ill persons.” (Overholser, Briggs Law 1935). He was
removed by Governor James M. Curley for abuses in the hospitals
being exposed. Instead of being prosecuted, in 1937 he was rewarded
with an even bigger position as superintendent of the government-run
Saint Elizabeth’s Hospital, Washington, D.C., where he remained until
1962. (Overholser Papers)
Following directly in Overholser’s footsteps of work on forensic

psychiatry and helping get psychiatry into the U.S. court systems, the
1954 Senate Hearings (p. 80) show that from 1932-52 Wertham was
the senior psychiatrist of the New York City Department of Hospitals,
and that right away upon that appointment, he organized and became
director of the Psychiatric Clinic of the Court of General Sessions in
New York. The first clinic of its kind in the United States, where
he examined prisoners regarding competency for standing trial. At
the same time, from 1933-36 he was made the assistant to the director
of Bellevue Hospital; in charge of prison ward; in charge of children’s
psychiatric ward; in charge of alcoholic ward.
Along this “forensic psychiatry” interest that Overholser and Wertham

shared, it should be noted that after WWII, Overholser would be backed
to use the case of Ezra Poundto get psychiatry fully into the American
justice system, allowing the “mentally unfit to stand trial” defense to be a
valid one which resulted in Pound getting out of treason charges. Pound
was given a private room at St Elizabeth’s and according to some, was
treated like royalty by the psychiatrist. It is now widely considered that
Overholser’s conclusions on Pound’s mental state were not only
wrong, but deliberately so. In yet another example of the
Overholser/Wertham duo, sometimes “looking” opposed, other times
not, Fredric played “bad cop” in this case and was quite vocal in his
supposed criticism of the Ezra Pound case findings.
So far, Wertham is closely paralleling Overholser in two of the main

excuses used by the British and the Vatican to get Wundtian psychiatry
into power positions – “mentally scarred from battle soldiers” who
wouldn’t fight their wars for them, and finding ways to get psychiatry into
our LEGAL system.
You see what I mean.
Not only that, take a closer look at Wertham’s background as detailed in

the 1954 Senate Hearings (p. 80)
1922-29 Psychiatrist at Adolf Meyer Phipps Psychiatric Clinic, Johns

Hopkins Hospital and University.
1926-28 chief resident psychiatrist, Johns Hopkins Hospital.
1926-29 assistant in charge of the Menal Hygiene clinic, Johns
Hopkins Hospital, taught psychiatry, psychotherapy and brain
anatomy at Johns Hopkins Medical School.
Do you know what the fact that he was in those positions at that
time means? It means Wertham was involved with training the
ghoulish Dr. Donald Ewen Cameron, who was an
absolute monster after this.
Cameron left London for Baltimore, Maryland, in 1926, to

become assistant psychiatrist at the Phipps Clinic at Johns
Hopkins Hospital…. Continuing his climb through the academic
ranks, he became an instructor in psychiatry there within two
years, holding a Henderson Research Scholarship. In Baltimore
Cameron worked under Adolf Meyer, perhaps his greatest
influence… a pragmatist who worked to improve the lot of mental
patients, using any approach that seemed to him sensible and
practical. (I Swear By Apollo; Gillmor p. 7-9)
There is a third area the two of them were in tandem on. Using drugs
to induce psychosis and manipulate the mind of another to some pre-
established agenda.
Picking up again with Wertham’s WWI time period, after the war ended
he returned to school and then went to work directly with Kraepelin in
1921 – the same year that Berringer began his mescaline study.
Wertham, over 11 years later, suddenly chose to bring up the mescaline

psychosis “biographical” method in a study published July 1932
titled: Inconstancy of the Formal Structure of the Personality –
Experimental Study of the Infleunce of Mescaline on the Rorschach
test; together with Manfred Blueler. THAT was the “first study on the
effects of mescaline” published in the U.S.
“Behind every twisted thought lies a

twisted molecule.”
– 1994 interview, psychiatrist Leo Hollister
quoted a line by Ralph Gerard from the 1950’s, saying it was the moral
for all of biological psychiatry.
Note that Wertham is discussing the breakdown of personality using

mescaline, ergo trying to twist thought by introducing a “twisted
molecule” – mescaline – and let’s fast forward to April 1942
when Wertham joined the WWII effort in what was called the Fourth
Registration, often called the “Old Man’s Draft,” because it registered
men who were 45 to 64 years old at the time. The men had to fill out an
extensive questionnaire allegedly just to collect information on the
industrial capacity and skills of these older men, not to draft them.
And what was one of Wertham’s skills from 1932? Working with
personality-changing, psychosis inducing drugs like
mescaline. Twisting thought.
Overholser was “consultant” to the Office of Scientific Research and
Development, the OSRD, where he would head up the truth drug
committee that was coordinated under Chadwell’s Division 19 together
with the OSS (precursor to the CIA) psychological assessment unit. At
the same time, Overholser was also CHAIRMAN of the National
Research Council’s Committee on Neuropsychiatry which worked to
secure military status for civilian occupational therapists. He chaired the
first meeting, the Conference on Occupational Therapy on 15 May
1942, barely 2 weeks after Fredric’s draft questionnaire had been
submitted. (Army WWII Medical history)
I think it’s a good possibility that Fredric helped out the OSS Truth Drug
Committee in some way, and perhaps even with the Manhattan Project
testing of the drug chosen in the end, a variant of marijuana. But what
did they try first? Mescaline.
And only six months after Wertham had done his draft documents.
This is a condensed timeline entry I made for my (ACIM) A Course in

Miracles article –
1942 October – At the request of the Psychological Warfare Branch of

N.I.S, Division 19, of the NDRC (which now came under the OSRD) a
committee was “activated” to investigate the feasibility of using drugs in
the interrogation of Prisoners of War, that was just the “acceptable”
shore story. Responsibility for the facilitation of the Committee’s efforts
was transferred from N.I.S. to the Office of Research and Development
of the OSS on January 1, 1943. —This was the truth drug committee
headed by Overholser.— In my research into the activities about the
British Security Coordination – I tracked down details and photos of
every single member of it. But who else was “over” this, and quite
secretly too, was Division 19.
Division 19, formed in June 1940, was a highly

secretive combined OSS and National Defense Research Committee
(OS-RDB) organization headed by the equally little known Dr. H.
Marshall Chadwell. The now newly re-named Division 19’s first project
was the ‘special weapons project’ which included obtaining and field
testing drugs like LSD, concentrated marijuana, etc., but it also included
the “Mafia Plan” or Operation Underworld – both of which were headed
by Chadwell recruit and now OSS man George Hunter White. Why any
of that is relevant is because of the first end result of that infamous
Truth Drug Committee. (see 1943 September 25 entry of ACIM
timeline)
Definitely very possible Wertham had some kind of involvement with

that.
There is another time when Wertham would parallel CIA and military
intelligence interests (including the Office of Naval Research) that
Overholser also worked closely with both, doing the SAME twisting of
thought and personality research using mescaline, again.
As to the Navy side of it, you would know this as Project CHATTER
which had began in 1947.
1947 – Project CHATTER was instituted by the U.S. Navy in 1947. Dr.
Charles Savage was put in charge of that, experimenting on mental
patients (and animals) through the auspices of the Naval Medical
Research Institute in Bethesda, Maryland. The experiments were aimed
at trying to obtain information from people against their will
but without physical duress – as in they didn’t want to ‘leave a mark’ or
any evidence that they had done the procedure. Charles
Savage papers show that he was a “Research Psychiatrist” at the Naval
Medical Research Institute and the National Naval Medical Center, both
Bethesda, Maryland.—John Marks details (archived here) – “a highly
classified Navy program called Project CHATTER… goal of
weakening, if not eliminating, free will in others. The Navy
program,which had started in 1947, was aimed at developing a truth
drug that would force people to reveal their innermost
secrets.” Project CHATTER – Biological and Psychological Weapons
===Notice those two are two of the ONR’s research divisions
===Senate Report: ‘…the program focused on the identification and
testing of such drugs for use in interrogations and in the recruitment of
agents. The research included laboratory experiments on animals and
human subjects involving Anabasis aphylla [anabasine], scopolamine,
and mescaline in order to determine their speech-inducing
qualities.” ===Essentially a continuation of the OSS truth drug
committee, which was also mixed up with the Manhattan
project.===“After the war, the CIA and the military picked up where the
OSS had left off in the secret search for a truth serum. The navy took
the lead when it initiated Project CHATTER in 1947, the same year the
CIA was formed. Described as an “offensive” program, CHATTER
was supposed to devise means of obtaining information from people
independent of their volition but without physical duress. Toward
this end Dr. Charles Savage conducted experiments with mescaline (a
semi-synthetic extract of the peyote cactus that produces hallucinations
similar to those caused by LSD) at the Naval Medical Research Institute
in Bethesda, Maryland. But these studies, which involved animal as well
as human subjects, did not yield an effective truth serum, and
CHATTER was terminated in 1953. The navy became interested
in mescaline as an interrogation agent when American investigators
learned of mind control experiments carried out by Nazi doctors at the
Dachau concentration camp during World War II. After administering
the hallucinogen to thirty prisoners, the Nazis concluded that it
was “impossible to impose one’s will on another personas in
hypnosis even when the strongest dose of mescaline had been
given.” But the drug still afforded certain advantages to SS
interrogators, who were consistently able to draw “even the most
intimate secrets from the (subject] when questions were cleverly
put.” Not surprisingly, “sentiments of hatred and revenge were exposed
in every case.”” Acid dreams. p. 15 of the book PDF)===Charles
Savage’s abstract notes that LSD had “no specific therapeutic
advantage in depression” but that the “hallucinations may prove of
value in psychotherapy.” and on p. 14 that “LSD affords
therapeutically valuable insights into unconscious processes by the
medium of the hallucinations it produces.” on p. 10 he notes
that “Hallucinations may be induced by suggestion.” (a report titled:
Lysergic Acid Diethyl Amide (LSD-25): A Clinical-Psychological Study
by LT Charles Savage, Medical Corps, Us, Navy dated September 9,
1951. It starts on p. 5 of the PDF.) See Hubbard’s research 1948
entry.
That program was still running, and the CIA was just about to roll over
their secret BLUEBIRD program into a continuation called ARTICHOKE
that followed along these same lines as CHATTER – when in March
1952, Wertham suddenly re-activates and this time publicizes in Joe-
average media, the value of mescaline.
In the Atlantic Monthly #189 of March 1952 (pp. 52–55) Wertham takes
an excerpt of a segment titled: “A psychosomatic study of my–self.” that
was included in a soon to be
published book called When
Doctors Are Patients and retitles
it: A study of pain. In that segment,
its notable that he
discusses mescalineand its effect
on his pain.
In the opening of the article, you

can see that there is some
CURRENT study of subjects
having experimentally induced
psychosisthat is referred to only in
the vaguest possible way.
Dr. Fredric Wertham, Director of the Psychiatric division at Queens

General Hospial in New York, was obliged to undergo a series
of painful operations without general anaesthetics. In a sense
he was his own guinea pig, and the notes he made on pain have
proved of professional interest. His article is drawn from the book:
When Doctors are Patients… Such a contrast between euphoria
and anxiey occurs in experimentally induced mescaline
psychosis, as shown by the retrospective accounts of subjects.
The timing is a bit too coincidental here for my tastes, and I would have
to say that it sounds like Wertham may have had at
least some involvement with the CIA/Navy interest in TESTING
mescaline again for torture/brainwashing purposes. Having surgery
while under mescaline certainly fits that area of interest. Wertham
seems to be used to be a “public face” for much higher people’s areas
that they want to influence the general public on, in this case, TAKING
HALLUCINOGENIC DRUGS and how THEY HELP.*
*Interestingly enough, jumping ahead a little here, Harry Warner

Jr. specifically noted that “success” stories about LSD had been
being tested in the fanzines in 1951.
And then, two years later, we have Wertham spearheading and being
the public face yet again, this time in yet another psychiatry should rule
the world! rather obvious move. One both promoting psychiatry’s role in
policing what is and isn’t “criminal” behavior ,as well as now entering
our governing process (the Senate) with a none too thinly veiled attack
on Jeffersonian democracy – the Ban the Comics event.
WERTHAM EXAMINING COMICS
That began when Wertham published his book Seduction of the

Innocent on April 19, 1954 – said to be a day that has “lived in infamy”
for comics fans.
But just BEFORE that was the Monte Durham incident.
I wrote a series once covering a document from 1946 called: The

Psychiatry of Enduring Peace and Social Progress – and one of my
segments was about Sullivan, Fortas, Chapman and Southard, all
featured in that document one way or another. Attorney (and judge) Abe
Fortas was known in Washington circles to have a serious interest in
psychiatry, still a controversial science at the time, and was considered
an “expert” in it as well.
In 1953 this expertise led to his appointment to represent the indigent

Monte W. Durham, whose insanity defense had been rejected at trial
two years earlier, before the United States Court of Appeals for the
District of Columbia Circuit. Durham’s defense had been denied
because the District Court had applied the M’Naghten Rules, requiring
that the defense prove the accused didn’t know the difference between
right and wrong for an insanity plea to be accepted. Adopted by the
British House of Lords in 1843, generations before modern psychiatry,
this test was still in near universal use in U.S. jurisprudence over a
century later. The effect of this standard was to exclude psychiatric
and psychological testimony almost entirely from the legal
process. In a critical turning point for U.S. criminal law, the Court of
Appeals accepted Fortas’ call to abandon the M’Naghten Rule and
allow for testimony and evidence regarding defendants’ mental state. A
precedent setting case indeed, and one that Overholser was intimately
involved with, as well as peripherally Fredric Wertham.
So, see, bringing out Wertham in this particular public way, was no
accident.
It was another fifth column action of psychiatry. As one of Wertham’s

oldest British colleagues John Rawlings Rees put it – Let us all,
therefore, very secretly be “fifth columnists”[…]long term planning …the
right kind of propaganda.”
fifth column – a group of secret supporters of an enemy that

engage in espionage, sabotage, and other subversive activities
within the borders of a nation.
Rees also had said: we have done much to infiltrate …a number of

professions. …the two most difficult are law and medicine.
That is what Wertham is doing with our U.S. Senate now – our law-
making body.
One other important element here is the “opposition” in this case –
Lauretta Bender. Yes, the very same Lauretta Bender that “pioneered”
BRUTAL treatment of children, using ECT, metrazol, insulin shock
therapy on children as young as three years old, while Wertham is
heading up the child psychiatry unit at Bellevue.
Per his own words and submitted

C.V. to the Senate Hearing – from
1933-36 he was made the assistant
to the director of Bellevue Hospital;
in charge of prison ward; in charge
of children’s psychiatric ward; in
charge of alcoholic ward.
That means that Lauretta was

working and learningunder
him when she was made a director
of the children’s inpatient ward at
LAURETTA BENDER
Bellevue in 1934. Under Wertham,
Bender merrily began her brutal
treatments of children, starting with insulin shock therapy that she was
particularly fond of doing to those diagnosed as “childhood
schizophrenia”, which today we call autism. Lauretta herself had to
repeat third-grade 3 times in her home town of Butte,Montana, perhaps
lending clarity to the source of her truly insane treatment of other slow
children.
They would administer massive doses of insulin to induce a coma in the

children, six days a week for one-two months usually, but in some
cases Wertham and Bender did much longer courses, years in fact.
Before or during the coma, seizures sometimes occurred.
Children would toss, roll about, moan, and twitch spasmodically, even
vomit. Some of these children died from this “therapy”. This
is DEATH therapy, and just as the child was coming out of it, finding out
he isn’t dead, vulnerable, scared out of their minds, and desperate for
any kindness, there would be the twin Doctors of Death, Wertham and
Bender, ready to deliver their “lessons” they called psychotherapy.
When Overholser and others led the way in shifting from insulin and
metrazol shock to ECT in the early 1940’s, Bender administered ECT to
the children, maintaining that it was safe and effective in “eliciting more
appropriate behavior from children.” By the mid-1950s, Bender
estimated that more than 500 children at Bellevue had received ECT,
typically daily for a period of 20 days. When LSD, other hallucinogenics
and Thorazine came out, she used those too on her victims.
So, Bellevue wasn’t exactly a Bluebird of Happiness kind of place, as

this unfortunate vintage positioning of it tried to portray, especially under
doctors Wertham and Bender.
How does this sick twinship relate to the 1954 Senate Hearings?
I’ll tell you. It relates because Dr. Rees had just given his address
entreating his fellow psychiatrists and psychologists) to be a “fifth
columnist” and infiltrate novels (which included comics) and other
sources of fiction read by Joe Average.
What does one do to infiltrate? One pretends to be supportive of

something. Right on cue, just one year later, together with Reginald S.
Lourie, M.D., she published an article in the American Journal of
Orthopsyhiatry XI titled “The Effect of Comic Books on the Ideaology of
Chidren” discussing the therapeutic effects of comics on children.
(reprinted in Alter Ego #87 & #88) and…
Voila!
Shortly after her article appeared, in 1942 DC comics hired Dr. Bender
to head their Editorial Advisory Board.
Well, that’s about perfect, right? Infiltration complete. For the next 10+
years, her name could be seen in virtually every DC comic.
But, don’t forget the timing here, because we’re right in the middle of
World War II and what was the forerunner to the OSS (itself
predecessor to the CIA) the COI or Coordinator of Information was
planned to be split into two organizations. The Office of War
Information, the OWI – which was led by a totally British controlled
Round Table man Elmer Davis handled all media propaganda, and the
OSS, the spy organization, also led by a totally British and Vatican
controlled man – William Donovan.
Both of which were covertly controlled by the British Security

Coordination – a spy organization established to make sure
American got in and stayed in the war the British Round Table men
wanted fought.
The OWI would take a keen interest in comics and fanzines because
they offered a cover (intelligence cover) means of spreading
propaganda to a HUGE audience. Nearly half of all U.S. servicemen
were regular comic and fanzine readers. Comics were also uncensored,
so propagandists could use levels of violence, racism, and sexuality to
create totally racist propaganda against the “enemies” in WWII. And
because its comics, hey, “we” (the U.S. government) don’t look like we
did it. Perfect deniability.
The Writers’ War Board was created January 1942 in New York City.
The President was Rex Stout. It was already secretly controlled by the
British of course, but
it looked like it was
independent. Stout
was even one of the
people that the BSC
spy organization
used to help
legitimize their front
group called
“Friends of
Democracy”, he was
even made its
President (NY
Times article Nov.
1942) but Stout
was also involved in
sponsoring the
BSC’s founded in
1941 Fight for Freedom front group that had a membership of
practically the Who’s Who in intelligence.
So, his Writers War Board was a completely controlled INTELLIGENCE

operation.
The outer story was that the WWB was staffed by “volunteers”
committed to the creation of anti-fascist, pro-American culture, but in
reality it would soon receive both funding (pay) and direction from the
OWI via Mr. Sherwood (you can watch him dissemble about it
and leave out the British intelligence connection to the Senate in
1944 here) . Sherwood made sure that Stout’s writers would weave
images and stories in various comics and fanzines for civilians and
servicemen, all designed to fuel a hatred of “fascism”. Some obvious
examples can be found here.
An interesting side note is that by 1943, Robert Rosen was shown as

the Chairman of the War Writer’s Board or WWB. (Variety 1943) I don’t
know what that was about, but another Variety article showed just how
much power this Board actually wielded, including on Hollywood,
uilizing a “five bombs” rating for ignorance, indifference or
shortsighedness against a film called “Mission to Moscow”. Teachers in
Illinois were even directed to instruct students not to watch the film.
So, now.
Consider the timing of Lauretta Bender hired by DC comics to head
their Editorial Advisory Board this very same year.
Yea, you got it now.
Every good controlled opposition* needs an opponent, someone to

demonize/champion right?
Enter Fredric Wertham.
*Controlled Opposition definition – a strategy in which an

individual, organization, or movement is covertly controlled or
influenced by a 3rd party and the controlled entity’s true purpose
is something other than its publicly stated purpose. The
controlled entity serves a role of mass deception, surveillance or
political/social manipulation. The controlled party is portrayed as
being in opposition to the interests of the controlling party.
It is at this point that I am going to introduce ground-breaking research

addressing what the heck was Fredric doing during WWII – besides the
Truth Drug committee.
–––––
That BIG FAT HOLE in Wertham’s history – World

War II
We’re going to call this area of time Wertham’s Fifth Column
Activities (as requested by british psychiatrist John Rawlings Rees in
1940)
There are two areas here:
Censorship work
Drug research and human experimentation
First area – Drug research and human experimentation; subsection

we’ll call shock therapies combined with psychoanalysis – soldiers with
shell shock.
From the 1954 Senate hearings (p. 80) we see:
1936-39, director of the Mental Hygiene Clinic of Bellevue Hospital.
1936 happens to be the exact same year that Dr. Sakel moved to New
York and promoted the use of insulin coma treatment in US psychiatric
hospitals.
Wertham is listed in the encyclopedia as doing pioneering work

combing insulin with psychotherapy.
It so happens that Wertham’s one-time student and junior psychiatrist
Ewen Cameron billed himself as the first psychiatrist in North
America to use insulin coma therapyon schizophrenic patients in
March of 1936 – according toCameron and Worcester State Hospital in
Massachusetts year-end report.
Meanwhile, immediately upon becoming superintendent of St.

Elizabeths, Wertham’s tandem partner Dr. Overholser instituted insulin
shock therapy which promised “50 percent remissions”. (it was a lie, by
1941 the results were so abysmal he had to stop).
Perhaps a more graphic example of just what that “pioneering” by

Cameron, Wertham and Overholser was really about is in order.
In each type of shock therapy, the patient was induced into a state of
shock/coma and then brought back to consciousness. When slowly
brought out of the insulin coma with glucose injections, they said that
“his or her personality would be temporarily “readjusted” (what a
euphemism) and Doctors would then discuss problems with the patient
in an attempt to “banish his delusions”. That’s what they called this
good heart-to-heart psychotherapy.
Remember what we learned that Therapy and Research Division of

the AMA did? It gave MONEY for: “ investigations and laboratory
research in the actions of drugs and pharmaceutical products.” Like
insulin shock therapy. So what Wertham and Bender were doing to
these children (and adults, for that matter) was AMA-backed and at this
time the Director would have been Morris Fishbein (whom L. Ron
Hubbard likes to call “Fishcake”)
This whole procedure (including using other similar shock or coma-

inducing procedures) has a nick name – DEATH “therapy” – otherwise
known as the core demonic belief of Catholicism. “The baptized one
‘dies’ to all sin and is ‘reborn’ in Christ. Aka artificially brought mentally
to amentia(retardation).
They would all do this to soldiers returned from the war with “shell
shock” who weren’t recovering fast enough (meaning wanting to go kill
some more)
Next, we have –
Marijuana research and George Hunter White/Harry Anslinger.
1939-52 Consulting psychiatrist, Triboro Hospital, New York City.

1939-1952 Director, Psychiatric Services and Mental Hygiene Clinic,
Queens General Hospital.
A few years later, in 1939, Wertham had a fight with his boss at
Bellevue and gets transferred to Queens General Hospital Mental
Hygiene Clinic. At first, Wertham appeared rather demoralized and
forlorn. He wrote to his Phipps Clinic mentor Dr. Meyer: “I am longing
for a position where I could use my gradually acquired facility for
organizing, teaching and research and clinical work…give up psychiatry
altogether.”(Under the Strain of Color, Mendes)
Ah, but never fear. George White is about to show up literally almost
right on top of him, plus, he would soon hire and strike up a friendship
with child psychiatrist Hilde L. Mosse, who was a character unto herself.
Mosse was only in her late 20s when she emigrated to the U.S. from
Germany and completed her medical interneship at Schenectady, and
then Wertham took her under his wing as her mentor. It is unknown to
what degree their relationship may have gone beyond that, but Mosse
was an admirable woman in my opinion. She later tirelessly
campaigned against the ridiculous over-diagnosing of children as
schizophrenic, going straight into the teeth of crazy-woman Lauretta
Bender. Still, she had to have seen some pretty terrible things being
done under Wertham’s watch there at Queens, as well.
HILDE L. MOSS
A couple of years later, a 2015 NY Times article indirectly spills the

beans about what Wertham would have been doing with psychiatric
patients at Queens General.
The article is talking about how in October 1941, the Times had
reported on the opening of several new buildings at Hillside Hospital in
Queens (today called Zucker Hillside Hospital). As was the wont in
those days, hospitals that used insulin treatments referred to
themselves as having “pioneered” that and other shock
treatments. “The hospital has pioneered in the use of insulin and
metrazol, and also in the electric shock treatment, which has proved
useful in shortening the average stay of patients,” the article read.
You probably don’t know that Oxygen pressures were also

being experimented with by the US Navy revealing that pressure at four
atmospheres could be a treatment for Schizophrenia because it
mimicked the effects of insulin shock therapy (NY Times 2 April 1940)
Right exactly at this time – John Rawlings Rees and his Tavistock Clinic
boys are taking over psychiatry in the British Army in World War II. (The
Reckoning M. McClaughry) and on 18 June 1940 is when John Rees
gives an Address to the Annual Meeting of the National Council for
Mental Hygiene where he asks for everyone (like Wertham) to be “fifth
columnists”.
Speaking of Fifth Column –
Marijuana with George White

Truth Drug Committee as well
Personality testing, OSS
Dr. Fishbein/Harry Anslinger/George Hunter White/Truth Drug

committee –
Wertham’s papers show that he had two folders categorized under

“Research files” on the topic of marijuana starting in 1939 and going
well into the 1970’s.
Why would that be?
I would surmise that it had to have been related to Harry Anslinger’s

Federal Narcotics Bureau/Treasury Department crusade to get revenue
from marijuana by taxing it, starting in 1937. That was NOT an innocent
situation, as I discovered in my research into George Hunter White’s
early years.
But, what that also shows is a connection right to the AMA in helping
that organization squash or control for hidden nefarious purposes, any
drugs that the AMA doesn’t control. For example, in my article I tracked
down the Senate hearings on the marijuana tax, and keeping in mind
the very powerful position of EDITOR of JAMA, look what Anslinger
points out here:
The evidence that they are largely true is contained in this recent
statement in the Journal of the American Medical Association:
The problems of greatest menace in the United States seem to be

the rise in the use of Indian hemp (marihuana) with inadequate
control laws, and the oversupply of narcotic drugs available in the
Far East threatens to inundate the western world.
Mr. Vinson: Whose article is that? That was in the American

medical Association Journal?
Dr. Woodward: That is from an editorial that appeared in the

issue of the Journal of the American Medical Association for
January 23, 1937, on page 3, in the nature of a review of the
report on the Traffic in Opium and Other Dangerous Drugs in the
United States of America for the year ending December 31, 1935,
and published by the Bureau of Narcotics of the Treasury
Department.
– Hearings on TAXATION OF MARIHUANA H.R. 6385, Tuesday, May 4, 1937,

House of Representatives Committee on Ways and Means, Washington,
D.C. The committee met at 10:30 a.m., Hon. Robert L. Doughton (chairman)
presiding.
It’s probably worth reminding you just how powerful that editor of Jama
position is, and that at this time its Dr. Morris Fishbein writing that
editorial. Fishbein was editor of JAMA from 1924 to December 1949,
when he appoined Austin E. Smith, his protege’ since 1940, to replace
him.
The same man who would call upon Wertham to be the first “authority”
attack on L. Ron Hubbard’s Dianetics book, plus, remember at that
time,1950, Wertham was still the President of the Association for the
Advancement of Psychotherapy and the co-editor of the American
Journal of Psychotherapy (1943-1951, Senate Hearings (p. 80), so he
definitely had his ownvested interest in damning Dianetics.
Dr. Fishbein’s JAMA editorial of 23 January titled: Opium Traffic in the

United States 1937 – as quoted in Hearings on TAXATION OF
MARIHUANA H.R. 6385 – specifically positions marijuana as an
equal menace to opium –
Closely allied with the opium traffic is the present situation with
regard to Indian hemp, or marihuana.
….The two problems of greatest menace at the present time seem

to be the rise in use of Indian hemp with inadequate control laws
and the oversupply of narcotic drugs available in the Far East,
which threatens to inundate the western world.
Fishbein approves of the medical use of marijuana in psychotherapy in

his editorial, as evidenced by his representative, Dr. Woodward at the
hearings:
[AMA guy] Dr. Woodward: I know of none. That use, by the way,
was recognized by John Stuart Mill in his work on psychology,
where he referred to the ability of Cannabis or Indian hemp to
revive old memories, and psychoanalysis depends on
revivification of hidden memories.
By the way, the discussions between Woodward and Congressional

Representative Mr. Vinson are particularly entertaining, here’s one
example.
Mr. Vinson: How long has it been that the American Medical
Association has been critical of the Federal Government in the
matter of enacting legislation looking toward the control of the
marihuana habit?
Dr. Woodward: It is not a habit that is connected with the medical
profession and the medical profession knows very little of it.
Mr. Vinson: I did not ask you that, doctor.
Dr. Woodward: It arises outside of the medical profession, and the
American Medical Association has no more evidence concerning it
or the extent of the marihuana habit than this committee has.
Mr. Vinson: My question was this. has the American Medical
Association taken cognizance of the marihuana habit and the
need for its control?
Dr. Woodward: Only in connection with the development of a
uniform State narcotics act.
Mr. Vinson: Let us see, doctor—-
The funny part if you continue reading it, is watching Woodward try to
get out of that the AMA editorial was critical of the government and that
it did appear to any reader that the AMA was making those conclusions.
Woodward tries to blame it on Anslinger, which Vinson and others
wouldn’t go for at all.
A few month after these hearings, George White’s boss Anslinger went
even further in this crusade he was tasked to do. He wrote an article for
the American Magazine in July of 1937.
[marijuana is] …as dangerous as a coiled rattlesnake.
How many murders, suicides, robberies, criminal assaults,

holdups, burglaries, and deeds of maniacal insanity it causes each
year, especially among the young, can be only conjectured.
…No one knows, when he places a marijuana cigarette to his lips,

whether he will become a philosopher, a joyous reveler in a
musical heaven, a mad insensate, a calm philosopher, or a
murderer.
… They were not told that addicts may often develop a delirious
rage during which they are temporarily and violently insane; that
this insanity may take the form of a desire for self-destruction or a
persecution complex to be satisfied only by the commission of
some heinous crime.
– Marijuana: Assassin of Youth The American Magazine Volume 124, July

1937
I’m sure that you recognize the exact same grandstandingand even
along the exact same lines that Wertham did regarding comic books
later. This connection between Anslinger, George White, and Wertham
and comics goes even further though. George White had spun this
whole tale of capturing an alleged Chinese Opium-trafficer who George
portrayed right exactly on the same lines as the comic image of
Chinese pioneered in March of 1937 (Detective comics). George said
his imaginary bustee was a: “wrinkled, cadaverous Tong man with a
drooping white mustache.”
My point being that these people USED comics to suit their agenda,
whatever it was, and changed towards them for the same reason.
Shortly after the Hip Sing Tong bust in December of 1937, George
found himself promoted to the Federal Bureau of Narcotics (the FBN)
New York City office – a ‘plum’ job.
Gee. You know, right where Wertham is.
George’s FBI file (p. 1) details his addresses in New York starting in
1937 through 1941. One of his address is in Queens, the one for 1939-
40 that says 65th Avenue Forest Hills New York.
That’s practically a hop, skip and a jump from where Wertham was.
This map I made from Wikipedias list of hospitals addressesshows you

–
This is where Triboro Hospital was – that other one Wertham was
working at then. Basically right in the same building set.
What could George and Fredric be doing together? Unclear. But

what is clear, is that within a few years that Truth Drug committee is
going to get going, and Wertham is kind of an authority on mescaline
and apparently also marijuana.
Fifth Column – and right in the middle of WWII –
1943-1951 President of the Association for the Advancement of

Psychotherapy; co-editor of the American Journal of Psychotherapy.
Why was this done right in the middle of World War II? It was created to
advance methods of psychotherapy among members of
the medical profession and to familiarize members with progress in
the field.
JAMA August 1943 #122 p. 1267 Wertham Psychoanalysis and the

scientific method
Now here’s something else I don’t think pretty much anyone ever
understood the significance of….
Censorship work, fifth column.
Interestingly enough, the C.V. that Wertham prepared for the 1954
Senate Hearings (p. 80) specifically mentions: Psychiatric
consultant to the Chief Censor of the United States Treasury
Department.
That is NOT in his LOC papers listing. Odd, don’t you think?
Here’s what I found.
Report on the Office of Censorship (WWII) shows that Byron Price, a

newspaperman, was made the Director of Censorship in December
1941 under the newly created Office of Censorship. So that tells
us when Wertham would have been doing this AND that it was during
WWII.
This ties directly to the War Writers Board and the Office of War
Information (OWI) because in 1942 the Advertising Research
Foundation released a study that determined that the comics
section of the newspaper was the most readsection of the paper by
adults (excluding the advertisements). A later study, performed by the
Market Research Company of America found that roughly half of the
U.S. population(about 70 million Americans), read comic
books. (Tales from the Code Sergi 2012)
Although the author I took the above from fails to realize the connection
of all this to the Writers War board, the outet the OWI used to change
ALL comics content (and fanzines, and a whole lot else), it’s still a great
history of the surrounding events, so I am going to excerpt it directly –
In response, the Bureau of Intelligence (the predecessor to today’s

FBI and successor to much of the CPI) created a series of
intelligence reports analyzing the content of comics at the time for
use by the Office of War Information (the OWI).
The OWI did not like what they saw in these intelligence reports.
First, two thirds of the comics surveyed had nothing to do with the
war effort and the ones that did were not concerned with fighting
or winning the war and the themes of the books were inconsistent
with the goals of the OWI. As Richard L. Graham states in his
book, Government Issue, Comics for the People, 1940s-2000s:
Perhaps it was the comics’ portrayal of the enemy during this time
that was most troubling to the OWI. The Bureau of Intelligence
observed that mainstream comic strips at the time had no trouble
using exaggerated physical stereotypes, depicting Nazis as
Teutonic buffoons and the Japanese as blood-drooling torturers.
While these characterizations of the enemy as “the other” provided
an impetus for hatred and stirred strong emotional reactions at
home and abroad, they were often accompanied by portrayals o(
the enemy as lazy and posing little threat. The OWl felt these
depictions were too simplistic and misleading and could lead to
overconfidence (although this didn’t necessarily stop the OWl from
using similar depictions in its own materials).
As a result, the OWI created their own media divisionto

distribute comics that would promote its own messages about
civilian sacrifice and the importance of the war effort. This
division also assisted other agencies to get their messages out.
These organizations included: the Department of the Treasury, the
Federal Security Agency, and the branches of the United States
Military.
Government comics were re-born.
Interesting, eh? You might also want to peruse this article, it gives some
great historic examples about how wartime censorship actually
continued after WWII, covertly. It was called by President Eisenhower
“News Management”.
That same article points out something very important, that the Office of
Censorship was CLOSED on August 15, 1945, the day after the
Japanese surrender after having nuclear bombs dropped on their
heads. (verified in Report on Office of Censorship p. 17,18)
Thus, Wertham’s consultancy also ended. Therefore this tells us

another thing he was doing in this giant hole in his history during WWII
– Censoring.
I think it bears mentioning that given Wertham’s involvement with the

Office of Censorship during WWII, I think that he became big-headed
about the power he could wield through it as “consultant”. In fact, one of
the targets during the War was one of Wertham’s later favorite targets
to villify – Superman. But, it’s what it was censored on (a connection
the author fails to note), it was about atom-smashing aka the highly top
secret Manhattan Project was in a comic!
Even fiction was censored. A typical incident occurred on April 14,

1945, when the “Superman” comic strip published in most daily
newspapers showed the Man of Steel in a university physics lab,
where an evil professor told him, “The strange object before you is
the cyclotron-popularly known as an ‘atom smasher.’ Are you still
prepared to face this test, Mr. Superman?” When the Man of Steel
accepted the professor’s challenge, the assembled guests
shouted in horror, “No, Superman, wait! Even you can’t do
it!” (“Superman,” Washington Post, April 14, 1945, B7)
The Office of Censorship complained to the syndicate that distributed

the comic strip, and the Superman plot was promptly rewritten to
eliminate any future reference to atom smashing.
The year before, 1944, Byron Price’s Office of Censorship had the FBI
investigate John W. Campbell’s Astounding Science-Fiction magazine
because of the story Deadline by Cleve Cartmill, that it had in its March
issue. Why? Because it had a detailed description of an atomic bomb
(Berger) and they were worried that the then top secret Manhattan
Project had a “leak”.
Another thing that most historians seem to have overlooked is the
highly CATHOLIC involvement with Wertham and censoring
comics. This article details that starting on p. 26.
Overall, I think I’m beginning to see another reason for keeping his files
“locked” unil 2010. (Tilley, Seducing the Innocent 2012)
How about you?
Because, man, these kind of connections are not something the

government would have wanted to be known. I don’t blame the Library
of Congress for that, they had to have been ordered to keep these files
unavailable.
––––
Those Evil Comics
Literally as soon as WWII was over, per Senate testimony Fredric

started an investigation into comics in the winter of 1945/46, helped by
a “group of associates”. (listen to him say that live at around 5:57) He
said it was a “sober, painstaking, laborious study.” (8:02 in the live
testimony) Carol Tilley’s scholarly article kind of shoots that all to hell
and gone, because it turns out he literally just made things up in this
study of his.
Wertham’s public attacks on comic books began with an article in a

publication he was the co-editor of, the American Journal of
Psychotherapy Vol II No. 3 1948 pp. 472-490 – Psychopathology of
comic books March 19, 1948 – which he had presented at a symposium
held by the Assocation for the Advancement of Psychotherapy (which
he was President of). He explained his belief that comic book readers
were sexually aggressive and that this led to them committing crimes.
Wertham’s remarks in extended form then appeared in the Saturday
Review of Literature, March 29, 1948, as well as simultaneously in
Collier’s Magazine in a piece called “Horror in the Nursery”
In that same Journal of Psychotherapy issue, Paula Elkisch Ph.D on

February 2, 1948 wrote The Child’s Conflict about Comic Books, about
how Wertham had asked her to join the “Psychopathology of Comic
Books.”
From there, Wertham continued to work to PR-position comic books

with violence. For example, the Friday, March 2, 1949
issue announced that Werthams’s symposium for that year would be
“Psychopathology of Violence” and would be held on April 29. I’m sure
he worked the evils of comic books into thattoo.
Coming back around now to when he published his coup de grace book
in April of 1954 –
Comic book fans were none too please with Wertham’s antics. A 14-
year-old boy actually created his own comics lampooning Wertham.
Even Jerry Lewis movies got in on the fun –

Let’s examine some of the testimony at these hearings.
Wertham opens (listen at 2:29) by saying that he was the first

psychiatrist given a grant by the NRC to do research on the brain, and
that what he did in Germany was supposedly just studying spirochetes
and brain syphilis. Then he says; “It came in good stead when I later
researched comic books.”
Of course, now that we know what was really going on there in

Germany, the VIOLENCE Wertham was learning from his mentors,
sterilization, etc., that statement makes a kind of twisted macabre sense
now.
There’s some other really priceless statements you can listento, like
these: at around 16:19 the Senator from Missouri asks “that anyone
who could draw that sort of thing would have to have some singular
twist or abnormality in his mind or am I wrong in that?” Wertham’s
answer is they found that assumption to be wrong. Portrays the comic
creators as “these people have to make it this way or else”.
You vill draw ze strangulation or ELSE!

Wertham has Hitler on the brain, I think.
Actually, that was lampooned too in the movies.
Another tidbit is that Wertham is clearly taking Rees’s fifth column

instructions to heart, weaving psychiatry into all kinds of literature, for
example, listen at around 18:30. The man actually had the gall to
portray a declamatio* fictional character named St. Augustine as the
“first modern scientific psychologist” because as a young man in Rome
he saw these “very bloody sophistic spectacles” and he didn’t like it.
Wertham then works in his particular angle into an already fictional
character (see this – the section on Blaise Pascal) and says that St.
Augustine “became unconsciously delighted with it and he kept on
going. In other words, he was tempted, he was seduced by this mass
appeal and he went. And I think it’s exactly the same thing with
children…” (meaning comics).
* Declamatio is a rhetorical device (a technique) wherein a writer

or speaker invents a character of the past (otherwise known as
BACKDATING) and further invents things said and done by the
ancient fictitious character. In my research into backdated
overpopulation myths and the forging of the bible, I came across
much evidence that every single supposed source or author are
actually all declamatios. Not one exception.
If you borrow the 1947 book In The World Within: Fiction Illuminating
Neuroses of our Time, from the internet archive, you’ll see that there is
an extensive introduction by Fredric where he just rambles on and on
inserting more of these kind of
ridiculous “ancient” psychiatry
precedents into history and literature.
Truly painful to read, I must say, but
Fredric’s intense anglophilia shows
through loud and clear, he’s following
Rawlings-Rees’s 1940 instructions to
the letter.
And how about this

one, listen starting around 26:38 “one
other comic that we have found to be
particular injurious to the ethical
development of children and those are the Superman comic books.
They arouse in children fantasies of sadistic joy in seeing people
punished….we call this the Superman complex and in these the crime
is always REAL. Superman’s crimes are GOOD…show complete
contempt for the police…”
Sadistic joy in seeing people punished…
You mean like the joy and sadistic pleasure that Bender and Wertham
had torturing patients with DEATH “therapies” and how their crimes in
so doing were GOOD for them, and how psychiatrists consider
themselves the SUPERMEN of modern society?
That what you mean, Dr. Wertham?

You can also listen at around 51:12, where Wertham even tries ye old
crying children (in basements) routine to shore up his “evil comics”
routine, and how he’s really “not after [unintelligible] censorship” and
tries to portray himself as heroic because “ I have been followed…
threatened…its a miracle my book was published.”
I don’t know about that, but I do know he was lampooned and even
positioned as a communnist.
My personal favorite though is this one – listen at 1:04:02 where one of
the senators says “Hitlers theory of telling the same story over and over
again” and another senator says “the big lie”. Wertham says “yeah well I
hate to say that, Senator, but Hitler was a beginner compared to the
comic book industry.They get the children much YOUNGER.”
Comic Books = worse than Hitler?

Bill Gaines, the publisher for EC Comics (horror comics) and the man
just positioned as Hitler by Wertham, his testimony followed Wertham
and it did not go well, to put it mildly. He said some really stupid and
self-incriminating things.
If you listen at around 1:12:36 Gaines starts off trying to create an

atmosphere of sympathy and good fame because his dead father was
intrumental in starting the comic book industry, then he quotes an
1800’s legal decision by Judge Woolsey, “It is only with the NORMAL
person that the law is concerned.” – which is like… What? What the hell
does that have to do with anything?… and if you jump to around
1:31:20 or so you are going to see where he just kills his credibility, just
tanks himself completely.
One of the Senators sets him up by showing him one of his comics
about a story about a little girl in a bad situation who emerges
triumphant as a result of murder and torture. Gaines says: “That’s right.
But, it’s fiction.” The Senator asks him if he thinks this does any good
for children and Gaines says: “I don’t think it does them a bit of
good, sir, but I don’t think it does them a bit of harm either.”
Yep, that about killed it right there.
You can read his full testimony in the official Senate Hearings
publication, starting on page 78.
As to Wertham’s twin in this controlled opposition extravaganza,

Bender, her testimony was on April 22, 1954. You can see a nice
plaintext outline of the various testimonies here, and see hers in the
official Senate Publication here.
EC went out of business as a result of these hearings and the Comic

book “industry” instituting a self-policing policy as a defense against
government regulation, like the movie industry had done decades
earlier. The Comics Magazine Association of America’s (CMAA) was
established with its Comics Code Authority (CCA) whose motto was
“Good shall triumph over evil.” Horror and other comics literally
disappeared overnight, and new ones came out bearing the official
stamp of the CCA.
But, Gaines went right out and founded Mad magazine which became
even more of an icon for lampooning cartoonists to thumb their noses at
authority.
Kefauver’s Senate hearing was about power, about shifting money

away from EC comics, controlling the remaining rest, and more
importantly creating a “need” for children to watch television which
was also, just as John Rawlings Rees had said in 1940, an infiltrated
medium of propaganda sending the “right” messages.
I learned about Wertham’s later attempts to re-PR position himself

through writing another book, “World of Fanzines” in 1973, through a
McGill university thesis (All our InnocencesBeaty 1999 McGill) where
Wertham is particularly focused on science fiction and its fandom. Page
271 demonstrates to me that Wertham is actually trying to reverse his
negative image by going overboard praising fanzines – such as L. Ron
Hubbard wrote for.
Finally, I’d like to remind everyone of the HIDING of Wertham’s papers
for so many years.
“Although Wertham’s wife, Hesketh, transferred ownership of his

extensive personal archive to the Library of Congress soon after
his death in the early 1980s, Wertham’s papers there remained
under an embargo until the late spring of 2010. “ (Carol
Tilley, Seducing the Innocent: Fredric Wertham and the
Falsifications that Helped Condemn Comics, 2012)
Coming back into our main L. Ron Hubbard and Dianetics history now –
The other really interesting thing about Wertham – well, besides the fact
that he was clearly tasked to “attack” Dianetics by Thorvald and
Overholser along the blurring-the-truth lines of his already existing
job of attacking fanzine/comic authors (like Hubbard was) – is that he
himself inadvertently proves the power of command during what was
literally an engramic incidents – his own. Which all put together makes
his “book review” of Dianetics about as dubious as they come.
No one ever said the ancient Cecil Method (which is what this is) of
trying to control public opinion was ever honest, let alone moral. And
this guy was definitely neither.
Wertham was a real Renfield to Overholser’s Dracula. He even looks

like a Renfield.
Shall I attack Hubbard for you, Master?
Renfield, Bram Stoker’s Dracula
I have now documented just how close the paths together were of Dr.
Winfred Overholser and Fredric Wertham, but in relation to this 1954
Comic Book hearings? There is yet another example of the support of
Wertham by Overholser.
Overholser submitted a review of Wertham’s book.
Big thanks to lotsoti.org for putting this very important document

online.
That is from the Saturday Review April 24, 1954 issue. Winfred is
basically PROMOTING Fredric’s book “The Seduction of the Innocent”
and trying to give it credibility.
As we have already discussed in-depth, Fredric had launched this

crusade against comics back in the late 1940’s, that it was this book
which caused a wave of censorship eventually and a stigma that still
exists to this day, and that it was this book that was also later exposed
by his papers as being essentially completely fabricated.
And yet? There’s Overholser helping spearhead promotion of this

blatant Psychological Warfare operation ala the little known and
secretive Psychological Strategy Board.
The very first public attack on

Dianetics came from a Dr.
Overholser Igor.
Fredric Wertham
We touched on this topic a little bit in the Office of Censorship are of
Wertham’s history, but I’d like to expand on that a little more specifically.
I suspect another actual reason (rather than just the one Wertham
blathers on about) for the attack on comics had more to do with things
getting revealed in them, however cheesily, that they didn’t want getting
revealed. Wings #15 from 1941 is one example. The issue depicts black
cannibal native-looking people being brainwashed by Mein Kampf (p.
61) but the last page showed this:
Here’s another example talking about Brainwashing in Hong Kong –
Headline #74 February 1956. That’s probably a little too close for
comfort on what people like Harold G. Wolff were up to, hence the
“approved” positioning with supposed Asianbrainwashing of people.
Notice that it sports the Comics Code Authority (CCA) seal.

It’s pretty obvious that Wertham is definitely forwarding someone else’s
actual agenda with all this about comics, but as I said earlier I think his
status with the Office of Censorship went to his head and he’s still trying
to be at the forefront of carrying on in the tradition of that kind of clout –
which in this era of Wertham’s history is now called “News
Management”.
For Wertham, that might as well read “Comics Management”, the way
he’s going about i.
Next –
We’re going to take up the first major media attack on Hubbard and
Dianetics, it’s from another Overholser Igor.
Both Firsts were Overholser

mentees?
Yep.
And no, I’m not going to type out the text on this one (Oh, ok fine, I did –
ha). The internet archive description page where the article PDF is has
the full text. Image follows.
I’m sorry, but ex-scientologist or not, I simply have to draw attention to a
hugely glaring omission in this first major public media attack.
Sometimes you need to look for what ISN’T there, not just what is.
What ISN’T there?
There is not ONE word about what Hubbard actually discovered, the
period of UNCONSCIOUSNESS is the engram. Not one word.
Why?
Because THAT was considered a secret and is what the Thorvald,

the ONR and the Navy were still actively researching DOING things to
man in that state.
They didn’t want to draw attention to the true (and probably only)
innovative discovery that Hubbard had actually made – the
“unconscious” part of trauma that he called engram could be brought
back into consciousness. And the flip side,commands could be laid
in during the unconscious part that carried a lot of effect.
Think they wanted Joe average to know that shit was REAL?
Oh, no, no, no.

Just take a look at my fully documented ACIM (A Course in
Miracles) timeline and you’ll see just all kinds of secret projects going
right along exactly that line. Also, take a look again at this that Hubbard
said back in December of 1949 when he was
parenthetically proposing criticism againstDianetics from the Overholser
psychiatric types. The one that I had notated as: – The one thing no
critic EVER talked about –
The only new things in Dianetics are few. The discovery of the
actual nature of unconsciousness and that the brain records
continually has some validity and possibly some use to
psychiatry. That these memories can be recovered was
demonstrated by Mr. Hubbard.
See? Rollo May is completely avoiding that.
There is also this very interesting, intentionally chosen buttonbeing

used, driven by a carefully chosen misconstruing of what Hubbard said
in Dianetics. The last paragraph punchline:“the absurdity of trying to
view man as a machine.”
Hubbard did not say MAN was a machine, he was referring to the MIND
and it’s COMPUTATIONS that can get “jammed” like a machine. The
book is riddled with comparisons along that line, but not as a
mind=machine period, idea.
Rollo May knew that his characterization would “jam” the minds of the
readers who, correctly, would view and react to “Man as a machine” as
a wrong idea – that’s what he wanted to leave them with. That wrong
EQUALS Dianetics wrong. Classic propaganda maneuvering.
Why Rollo May?
That’s a good question.
Let’s just have a look as to whether he’s connected to Overholser – of

course he is.
A 1958 Publication by the Joint Commission on Mental Illness and

Health Monograph Series 1 titled: “Current Concepts of Positive Mental
Health” features Rollo May on p. 57 as having a correct and
approved view, and guess who’s on this Commission? Oh, that’s right.
Winfred Overholser.(p. 128)
Ministering to Deeply Troubled People, with a foreword especially by

Winfred Overholser, the author cites Rollo on p. 98. The author also
specifically acknowledges Overholser “helping” him in 1944. (p. 22)
Then, when the very first Handbook of Psychiatry came out in 1959,
Winfred not only reviewed it, (Psychoanalytic Quarterly 1960 29:266-
267) but again promotes who’s “in” – and mentions “The
Psychotherapies chapters”, Muncie, Goldstein, Rollo May…“ Also, see
this? “Here at last is a compilation in the tradition of the German
Handbücher: a comprehensive presentation of the best in modern
psychiatric thought by acknowledged authorities in their respective
fields. Dr. Arieti is assisted by a distinguished editorial board: Kenneth
E. Appel…” He fails to mention that Appel is the PRESIDENT of that
same Joint Commission on Mental Illness and Health that featured
Rollo May as having a correct and approved view.
That Overholser, he sure does get around, doesn’t he?
Last, but not least, located in California’s Big Sur area, the Esalen
Institute “helped mid-wife much of what came to be known as the human-
potential movement. Seminar leaders in Esalen’s first three
years included Gerald Heard, Alan Watts, Arnold Toynbee, Linus Pauling,
Norman O. Brown, Carl Rogers, Paul Tillich, Rollo May, and a young
graduate student named Carlos Castaneda,”(The Aquarian Conspiracy, p.
137).
He helped get Esalen going? That’s just great.
I debated on whether to put this before or after this section we’re in, but
I decided it should go here.
The 6 August 1950 Letters to the Editor following Rollo’s missive should
also be viewed for historical interest, which I have typed the text of and
you can see it in full at the link. Please note, there’s a whole lot of
editing of these letters, who knows what got left out.
I’ll include an image of the exchanges –
The points I want to bring out have to do with the original chosen
punchline (2 July) employed by Dr. May, which was:“the absurdity of
Schuman comes along and sort of catches that and says: “…our
reviewer here misses the central point: “Man is intended to be a self-
determined organism.” Not really an answer, in my book. He misses
that Dr. May characterized Hubbard as viewing MAN as a machine, and
Schuman doesn’t really deal with that as directly as should have been
done.
But then Hubbard comes along and sort of both clarifies and somewhat
confuses the issue by saying: “The most glaring evidence that May did
not study his subject before he wrote his review lies in his confusion of
dianetics with a mechanical conception of the human
mind. Nowhere in the handbook of dianetics does anyone label the
human mind a machine. “ That was Hubbard’s way of trying to handle
Rollo’s “MAN as a machine” jibe, I guess.
Rollo replies and takes off from that but says he’s answering Schuman,
reiterates his original chosen jobe and — “With regard to Professor
Schuman’s contention that dianetics does not view man as a
machine, let me simply quote a few from the scores of such references
in the book: “Consider the analytical mind as a computing machine” (p.
43); apropros of the auditors practicing on cases, “there is nothing
which develops an understanding of a machine like handling it in action”
(p. 173); the “auditor can turn somatics on and off in a patient like an
engineer handles switches” (p. 291).”
Crikey!
Look at these guys. Could we please have a debate that actually stays
on topic and doesn’t practice perfect examples of Jesuit sub-
understanding? Particularly Rollo and Hubbard.
Rollo rather conveniently forgets to comprehend the meaing of the

words consider, like and “a machine” while citing examples of what
were metaphors about the MIND. Not MAN. Although his last example
quote, to be fair, does make “a patient” sound like a machine. Sound
like is not the same as “view man as a machine” and Rollo knows it. It’s
why he doesn’t address Hubbard’s statement of “Nowhere in the
handbook of dianetics does anyone label the human mind a machine.”
because he knows thats true, Hubbard didn’t. But Rollo wants his
propaganda line to stand in the readers minds, so that’s why he
responds the way he did on that point. And it’s also why, in an obvious
snit, Rollo ends his reply with the other part of the two main chosen
slogans. He positions Hubbard’s work as only worthy of a science
fiction fanzine, ie: “Dianetics first appeared in the magazine Astounding
Science Fiction and it is in this magazine that you can learn, if you wish,
about Mr. Hubbard and his work.”
Rollo’s equivalent of a child saying:
So THERE.
It’s worthy of note that at the time Rollo said the above, it was literally
just a week after Austin E. Smith had published his attack (jumping a
little ahead here) and one of his “experts” had said: “Articles on
dianetics have not appeared in national psychiatric journals, but a long
article appeared recently in a science-fiction magazine.The author, L.
Ron Hubbard, is best known as a science-fiction writer.” The negative
implications there are obvious, it’s just as obvious as it is to see Rollo
now doing the same PR-positioning in his snitty reply to Hubbard.
But Hubbard doesn’t actually answer Rollo’s original statement and

answers something else instead when he says: “Nowhere in the
handbook of dianetics does anyone label the human mind a machine.”
Also, Hubbard doesn’t even catch the big one, although, who knows,
maybe he did because we don’t know what he said that the Editor
“edited” out of his reply. I refer to my point about that Rollo May steers
clear of the area of secret projects, the UNCONSCIOUS parts of trauma
that Hubbard was having success recovering details from. We don’t
see that discussed in any of these replies.
We also see Rollo reveal that it is his JOB. Which means someone told
him to do it. “[…] my job was to review a book, not to set up an
experimental laboratory”
You mean like the laboratory that head of the ONR Thorvald wanted to
set up Hubbard in? Just thought I’d throw that in there…
JAMA editor Austin E. Smith’s contribution to the melee’ –

Firstly, just about every single person out there is citing this one
wrong. They keep misleading people that it’s in a “Book Reviews”
section. Here’s just one example, reference 2569 in this book. That’s
not where it was, at all.
It took some doing, but I found it. I finally found this and went through it
and there it was. It was in the QUERIES AND MINOR NOTES section.
Here’s a PDF of it.
Putting it in the QUERIES AND MINOR NOTES section was a whole

“hit” in itself positioning Dianetics as “minor”, but it’s also positioned up
against questions about Toxic Products Used In Cleaning
Clothes and Chronic Ulcers on Leg and Fenestration for
Otosclerosis (whatever the hell that means).
Nice. Real nice.
So petty these guys are.
Here’s the image for you – plain text below.

The “set up” by Austin E. Smith, the editor: An anonymous “M.D.” says:
“Patients are beginning to request medical opinion on “dianetic

treatment,” and I am at a loss as to what they should be told. What
is the attitude of leading psychiatrists toward the method as
recommended in the book on “dianetic therapy” by L. Ron
Hubbard?”
The intro “spike” comes next – Just helpin’ out, you know – “This
inquiry was referred to two authorities, whose replies follow.—Ed.”
Followed by authorities with no names that I could see on this page:
ANSWER — Dianetic treatment cannot be considered a “form of

psychiatry.” It does not take cognizance of the observations and
views of psychiatrists. Articles on dianetics have not appeared in
national psychiatric journals, but a long article appeared recently
in a science-fiction magazine. The author, L. Ron Hubbard, is best
known as a science-fiction writer. The author of the recently
published “Handbook on Dianetics” makes fantastic claims as to
the efficacy of his therapy, completely brushes aside current
medical psychiatric understanding of mental disturbances and of
psychotherapy. Because it promises so much to the reader, the
book and the views of the author will probably attract attention.
The book will be confusing to readers and cannot be
recommended by responsible physicians.
ANSWER–The 400 page “Dianetics: The Modern Science of

Mental Health,” by L. Ron Hubbard, is the only material available
on this subject known to the writer. Although a preface is written
by a physician, the subject is not presented as being related to
medicine. Psychiatry would certainly not claim it. The author is a
layman and describes in his system of “treatment” a method
whereby one layman can help another overcome a psychologic
illness. Apparently the author thinks in terms of mathematics and
of man as a machine. His theory is that psychologic difficulties are
caused by “blocked engrams,” memory images which are
confused or distorted in the body cells of the subject. Once these
are “recalled” and “cleared” the subject gets well and remains well.
The author makes gross errors in his oversimplification of the
personality structure and function. His elaborate claims in the
“treatment” results are unsupported.
Notice anything?
I did.
It’s a tag team. One keeps commenting on Hubbard’s background as a
science-fiction writer, the other does the deliberate mischaractization of
Hubbard’s words and premises to mean man as a machine.
I feel like I’m looking at sock-puppets JAMA-style.
And again, neither of them speak of the real point-of-interest that all the
secret projects had right then – that “unconscious” part of the
engram, the power of it.
On that note, now it’s time for us to take that side trip.
Side trip into the world of Pulps and Fanzines

with items concerning Hubbard and Dianetics or Scientology
that have been either completely overlooked (not even known about)
or not correctly documented and cross-referenced
JOHN W. CAMPBELL JR. ASTOUNDING SCIENCE FICTION DECEMBER 1949 (P. 80)
Right in here, literally one day before the Main Event of mass-media
exposure, we get another interesting (and little known to other
researchers) point of attack.
This time from something (found here) called the Science Fiction
Newsletter #16 July 1, 1950 (previously named Bloomington News
Letter unil the April 1950 issue). It doesn’t say much, but you can still
see the main chosen slogans and “positioning” of Hubbard’s work
showing up. Boggs is referring to the May 1950 issue
of Astounding where Hubbard’s article Dianetics: Evolution of a
Science was published – at the same time the book Dianetics: The
Modern Science of Mental Health came out.
Back history – The December 1949 issue of Astoundingcarried the

first hint of Dianetics (p.80). This is the exact same month
Austin Smith replaced Fishbein as editor of JAMA. The March
1950 issue carried another teaser about the upcoming artice by
Hubbard about dianetics, an intro by Campbell. (p. 4) titled: “Of
Human Memory”. The April 1950 issue of announces the 16,000
word article is ready and will come out next month (p. 132)
Campbell believes it will cause “one full-scale explosion across the
country.” It says the title will be Dianetics: An Introduction to a New
Science. Perhaps overlooked by most amidst the claims for
Dianetics being laid out by Campbell is this one “Evidence that
insanity is contagious and IS NOT HEREDITARY.” which flies
straight into the teeth of eugenics psychiatrists like Dr. Wertham
and Overholser. Important: Just after thisissue came out is when
Thorvald Solberg tried to draft Hubbard into secret projects in the
Office of Naval Research.
Discussing John Campbell Jr., on the first page Dean Walter “Redd”
Boggs is talking about that Campbell has “resorted” to the formula relied
on by Sunday supplements—the Sensation, the Eye-opener, then refers
to “hoaxes” such as “The Aphrodite Project” following that formula.
So, he has positioned the ideas of “sensation” “eye-openers” with
“hoaxes” in the reader’s mind, and THEN –
“While “project” and its brethern somewhat weakened ASF’s

repuation, as is indicated by Campbell’s frequent assertion that
this article or that one is “definitely not a hoax,” these attempts
were relatively harmless compared to his latest Eye-
Opener: “Dianetics.” In publishing this brainstorm by L. Ron
Hubbard, Campbell has produced a Sensation by adopting the
READER’S DIGEST method–seeking the verdict of the
uninformed public before submitting the work to the psychology
experts for the “ruthless criticism and cross-checking that is the
very life-blood of science.” That a hack writer‘s “new science,”
presented full-blown to the world in atwo-bit pulp, will
revolutionalize psychotherapy is as wild a dream as the one
entertained by the fanzine editor who advertised an article
purporting to reveal solar-origin hypothesis guaranteed to put
Lplace in his place and make Buffon a buffoon.”
Note: Arthur Levine wrote responding to Red Boggs attack/review from

July 1950, his response appears in October 1950 Science Fiction
Newsletter #17.
Next –
This is an odd one. Renascence, v. 1, issue 1, August 1950; Dianetics
Review wih Reservations a long article by Kenneth MacNichol pages
4-5. The issue is dated August 1950 and yet the article specifically
states: “The book is not yet published at the date of this writing. One
long article by Hubbard has appeared in Science Fiction with two
editorials by JWC who also contributed a long article in a day-old issue
of the fanzine Rhodomagnetic Digest.”
So, whoever this is waited three months to publish this? Somethings

fishy.
Especially considering what’s on page 4. “Man is not a machine; not
a robot.”
Say what?
Yea. Hmm. And this is being published AFTER Rollo May brought that
idea out. Note to self: I don’ think I buy the backdating of this so I am
going to file it based on the publishing date itself.
p. 5 Now here is something I found particularly interesting –
“The most hopeful thing to be found here is Hubbard’s own

warning, bluntly expressed and accepted, that dianetics is a
method of procedure that, properly conducted, yields useful
results. After that, says Hubbard, let the theory go, because it
may or may not be valid. It is a starting place. No matter if the
theory is altogether false assumption if practice works. Wih
more and more data, theory can be corrected.” Excellent
advice– Let it be well remembered by all future students of
dianetics. Then, whatever dianetics may be at this moment, the
time must arrive when, sufficiently corrected—and corrected,
possibly, almost beyond recognition, both theory and practice
will be altogether sound.”
Yep. So there’s that.
Now for some more high weirdness, this time from a 14-year-old-kid.
All Our Yesterdays 31: Spaceship by Harry Warner Jr. talks about the
very young Robert Silverberg from Brooklyn and his Spaceship fanzine
he started in 1949. Well, in #6 (3 December 1949), he’s very happily
outing people’s real identities under pen names One of them was L.
Ron Hubbard.
Note: all Spaceship magazines that I am examining were originally

found here.
Would it surprise you to know that this little fanzine newsletter was one
of the first outlets to demonize Hubbard and Dianetics? I thought it
might.
One wonders just how connected to Red Boggs this Saul Diskin
character (that you’re about to see) may have been. Why? Because
now that Silverberg is under Diskin’s “co” editorship influence, later on
we see him supposedly do a fully fleshed out attack on Dianetics that is
titled rather similarly to Boggs July attack. Boggs’ title: Dianetics: Fad or
Science, Silverberg’ title: Dianetics: Fact or Fantasy.
Odd.
We also might want to note the possibility that someone had rifled
Campbell’s files (Oliver Field perhaps) and found the December 9, 1949
letter from Hubbard with it’s attached bogus critique of Dianetics under
the pen-name Irving Kutzman, because one part of it has a psychiatrist
having a Dianetics session for “stomach pains”. It’s a rather crazed sort
of session too, on the psychiatrists part.
With all that in mind, read this by Diskin.

It was Spaceship #9, July 1950. Page 12
carries an attack story disguised as fiction by
mystery man Saul Diskin called “Cancelled,
a dianetic fantasy”. Saul was born in New
York City on Aug. 22, 1934, and raised in
Brooklyn, so he was only 15 when he wrote
this story. (about to turn 16). In 1951 he goes
off to Vermont to go to college, at age 17.
His obituary doesn’t have one word about
SAUL, LATER IN LIFE.
this writing career of his.
Saul details a rather odd story about Thomas Portune, Dianetic Auditor
who audits Dudley Farnham (who has shooting pains in his stomach).
During this “session” Saul makes it look like Dianetics is doing straight
hypnotism, installing a “canceller”. The “incident” run is Dudley’s
having read a Superman story. The session is interrupted, meanwhile
Dudley is mumbling about being Superman, jumps out a 3 story
window landing standing without injury, with the auditor screaming
out the window “Cancelled! Cancelled!”.
A Superman story?
Well, if that isn’t practically a verbatim black propaganda idea along the
lines of what Dr. Wertham was saying about Superman comics,
about how they gave people delusions of power and such and how
DANGEROUS that is. So, with this ridiculously out of place
and time story by Saul Diskin (remember, the first major media attack,
the Rollo May New York Times article hadn’t even come out yet) it looks
to me that Wertham may have “tapped” Saul Diskin just after Wertham
did his attack at the Book fair. So…
Everyone say hello Fredric.
Over in the Wild West, we have –
The Western Star #3 August 26, 1950 Hubbard announces sure cure
for atheism then on actual article page it says: FLASH!! Ron Hubbard
says in effect: Dianetics will cure atheism and is being adopted by many
churches. Chew that one good. This little cult is getting up steam now.
Swank HDQ in Jersey and offices in NYC $500 per month for the
“master”…” And this is interesting. Hubbard’s display in Los Angeles of
a Clear – “brought a clear all the way from Boston but the
demonstration fizzled when stage-fright prevented the girl from really
performing. All she could say was that she felt better every day since
“taking the cure” however she was toally unable at the time to
demonstrate any feats of memory. But Ron was a capable enough
showman to keep most of the audience from feeling let down.”
Bet you haven’t seen a review of it like that before.
Note the positioning of Saint Hubbard and the dragon, that the Church
of Scientology would later use to promote its “Bridge to Freedom”.
This is from Scientology’s Advance Magazine #53 1978. See what I

mean?
Wow.
So anyway, the Western Star article finished with this at the end – very
subtle.
$$$$ % dianetics % $$$$
Next –
In the fanzine Orb, v. 2, issue 1, 1950, “Report from up yonder” insert by
Bob Johnson, he talks about a trip to a sci-fi convention in Portland,
during which he had a “dianetic session” presumably from Harry B.
Moore on August 27th. “The first night, we stayed at the Commercial
Hotel in Vernal, Utah. I went through my first Dianetics session,
then…… and didn’t quite know what to think of it…… It’s sorta hard to
get used to ‘living through an experience’ instead of remembering little
patches.”
Then on p. 20 in where it looks like this was either September 1 or 2 in
Portland Oregon – Theodore (Ted) Sturgeon and Forrest “Forrie”
Ackerman began to speak about Dianetics.
“After this, Forrie Ackerman and Ted Sturgeon gave talks on

Dianetics. The hall had filled steadily, and by now was at its
bulgingest. I expect about 250 or 275 people attended
this. Unfortunately Forrie and Ted both beat round the bush,
without really hitting anything of importance. It was intensely
interesting to fans like myself who are neophytes to Dianetics, but
to the many more experienced people in the room, it was a little
tiring. I enjoyed every minute of it, however, and I am positive
that many others did. This continued till after 11, when everyone
concerned decided that if the next part of the program were to be
held, we’d all better clear out. The whole group dispersed, and
then re-gathered,with quite a few fen who had not attended the
previous lecture, at the GUILD Theatre, where there was a special
stfnal preview of DESTINATION MOON.”
P. 23 talks about how Bob got sick suddenly, and that he thought it was
dianetic session related. But it’s what Harry said that’s interesting, note
how he makes the ‘file clerk’ sound like an entirely
separate person or thing than Bob, which makes it seem that Harry
knew that Hubbard actually thought the “reactive mind” was composed
of entities. (see Philip K. Dick story a little later on here).
“The second night we stayed at Mountain Home, Idaho. Harry was

planning to audit Heisner. While we were starting to eat our dinner,
I suddenly developed a terrific sinus attack. Harry said it was my
file clerk wanting attention so it could be audited instead
of Charles.Since Chas had priority, I had to grin and bear it. While
at the cafe, I had to ask for a hot towel to hold against my face, the
attack was so bad. Get this: I have never had any trouble with my
sinus in my life, outside of the occasional clogging of head colds,
and such. I have never experienced any pain remotely as severe
as I did at this time, Now, draw your own conclusions about
Dianetics being dangerous or not. […] Somewhere, in the middle
of a Helios or Vom, my sinus trouble was forgotten, and therefore
vanished.[…] The third night was spent in Burgoyne, Idaho,
where I was given a thorough auditing. Lots of things were
found out, but it seems like I have few engrams, but scads of
locks. “
One of the other things discussed in that story was the deciding of
where the next convention would be held and by who. Harry B. Moore
won the vote, and the next one would be held in New Orleans.
Now James Blish shows up to challenge Red Boggs, the first fanzine
attacker of Dianetics.
James Blish goes after Boggs for what he said in Science Fiction
Newsletter #16, which Boggs then reprints in a different fanzine
called Spacewarp, the September 1950 issue, where Boggs discusses
Blish’s letter in his “File 13” column – which he makes a point of noting
is the “13th” installment.
Spacewarp September 1950, column File 13, #13 by Red Boggs.
DIANETICS — FAD OR SCIENCE?

James Blish submits the following rebuttal to my
remarks in Science Fiction News Letter (July 1950)
concerning dianetics. If you read SFNL — and you
should, because it has a lot more in it besides my
column — you may remember I accused aSF editor John
W. Campbell of publishing Hubbard’s “Dianetics” article
in order to produce a Sensation “by adopting the
Reader’s Digest method — seeking the verdict of the
uninformed public before submitting the work to
psychology experts for the ‘ruthless criticism and cross-
checking that is the very life-blood of science.'” I
concluded by remarking that the possibility of “a hack
writer’s ‘new science,’ presented full-blown to the world
in a two-bit pulp, will revolutionize psychotherapy,” is a
wild dream.
Here is Jim’s rebuttal:
“Your comment on Campbell’s publication of

Hubbard’s dianetics article has some limitations
about which your readers should know. It is; first of
all, the comment of a man who has not read
Hubbard’s book(Dianetics, Hermitage House, N. Y.,
$4). Secondly, it is the comment of a man who lives
in Minneapolis and who has hence been unable to
run any kind of check upon Hubbard’s, Campbell’s,
and Winter’s claims for dianetics. Third, it uses
push-button terms which do not reflect the actual
situation.
“Point (1) I leave to your innate honesty. If it moves

you to go and get the book and read it, if only to
give the chance to say you have too read it, it will
have accomplished its purpose.
“(2) Admittedly it is most difficult to check many of

the claims made by the dianetics boys; they are
being very cagey about the question of formal
evidence, despite their talk about rigid examination
of the claims. I think it germane to note, however,
that I first tackled Hubbard’s book for laughs, from
the point of view of a dogmatic, classical
Freudian; that since that time I have managed,
despite considerable evasive action on the part of
the dianetics people, to check some of their most
extravagant claims, as well as some of their minor
ones; and that thus far the claims check with the
facts. My checking includes, as might be
expected, practice of dianetic therapy upon myself,
my wife, and friends. It also includes, however,
specific checks of clinical evidence from good
sources unconnected with Hubbard, Winter or
Campbell. (Details on request.) Did you attempt to
make any such checks?
“(3) Your description of Hubbard as a ‘hack

writer’ and of aSF as a ‘two-bit pulp magazine’
brings up the question of the reputation of the
parties involved. As a question, it is not asked very
well, and so pre-determines a bad answer. Hubbard
is inarguably a hack writer, especially these days,
but if the claims made for dianetics check all the
way out to the end, he is also an original thinker of
staggering gifts. I do not yet make the latter claim
for Hubbard, but I observe that these two
categories are not mutually exclusive, and that no
one can rule out the latter without examining
critically and intensively what Hubbard says he has
accomplished. As for aSF, it is to be sure a
magazine costing 25¢, printed on something rather
unlike pulp paper, and containing stories
something like those printed in less toney pulp
magazines. It also has an audience rated as the
most intelligent and the most technically
knowledgeable of any general magazine in this
country — by which I mean to exclude only actual
technical magazines and the literary quarterlies —
surely the most remarkable audience ever
commanded by a mass magazine. Whether or not
an audience which greets articles on the
mechanisms of electronic computers with interest
is a bad introduction to dianetics is not, after all, a
very open question. When you observe,
furthermore, that the article was deliberately
delayed pending the publication of the book, which
contained a great deal of material aimed directly at
specialists in the field of psychotherapy, the
analogy with Reader’s Digest practice breaks down
with great rapidity. (There is, I will add, still some
justice in the analogy; I object to it only as a
quarter-truth, with the qualification that there were
serious, considerable motives behind Campbell’s
and Hubbard’s proceeding as they did.)
“If the question of reputation is to enter into our

discussion, then we can’t stop at labeling the
reputation of Hubbard and aSF, however. We have
to ask: what is the reputation of Campbell? of Dr.
Joseph A. Winter? of Hermitage House? of Nancy
Roodenberg? What is the reputation of the
psychosomatic clinic of New York’s Presbyterian
Medical Center, which vouches for a specific,
spectacular success for dianetic therapy? of the
two oculists who have reported with amazement
that they have had to revise their patients’ glasses
formulae upwards? (One of my own checks.)
“Moreover, we have to ask: just how pertinent is
this whole question of reputation. The reaction of
an established authority to any teetotally
revolutionary discipline is historically
predictable. The reputation, for instance, of Dr.
Winter really proves nothing, no matter how good it
is (and it’s plenty damned good.) The reputation of
Dr. Frederick Wertham, also damned good, is also
no guarantee, whether he’s for or agin dianetics
(he’s violently agin.)
“The question is, DOES IT WORK? If it does, I don’t

care whether Hubbard is Christ or Barrabas. And
I’m irritated by your prejudging an idea by the
reputation of the man who advance it. Why not
check first? Not the reputations, that’s worthless.
Check the idea.”
Which ends Jim Blish’s remarks.
Admittedly, my remarks in the SFNL column were those

of one who has not read Hubbard’s book, and for that
matter read Hubbard’s aSF article with much mental
confusion. But that fact, I think, merely points up my
whole argument: that Hubbard’s “new science” has
been given to the uninformed public rather than to the
scientists. Granted that aSF has an intelligent,
technically trained faction in its audience. It also has a
plethora of readers like me — moderately intelligent,
technically untrained guys, whose wide-eyed
acceptance of such a “science” (which is clearly but
perhaps not correctly labeled “world-shaking”) is
the same sort of half-witted “fad” as General Semantics
degenerated into. The spectacle of a bunch of
fuggheaded juveniles loudly mouthing dianetical catch-
phrases can do LRH’s idea no good.
Dianetics has two strikes against it already: it has been
immoderately publicized in a “two-bit pulp” — a term I
used deliberately in the original article, not to mirror my
own thoughts, but to show how a lot of non-stf-reading
scientists will and do regard aSF — and it has been
proposed by a man who has absolutely no standing in
psychological or psychiatric fields at all, and is, in their
eyes, merely a “hack writer of pseudo-science.” That
Hubbard’s livelihood is based, in part, on pulp writing
cannot be helped, of course, and I agree that it bears no
direct relation to his ability as a thinker. But since this
one fact — who it was that formulated dianetics — is
unalterable, I see no reason for making his “science”
endure the added onus of pulp presentation and a “fad”
status among brainless juveniles. No reason, that is,
except one of publicity. Of course, publicity of the sort
Campbell has given dianetics may help the “new
science” just as much as it helped aSF. But is enough
good to come from that publicity to outweigh the above-
mentioned bad points?
My reaction to reports so far concerning the “success”

of dianetics is merely “So what?” Unless testimony is
once again, after so long, considered an infallible
source of psychological information, then we’ll have to
discount most of the present reports on dianetical
“successes.” Experimental investigation is necessary to
establish dianetics on a scientific basis, and this will be
done by scientists who know what they are about, and
not by dewy-eyed amateurs who rush to LASFS or ESFA
meetings to report their “successes in the same
irresponsible way that Shaverites report their occult
experiences. After all Coueism “worked,” too; it even
had some psychological basis; but I never heard of a
psychologist who believed Coueism was a universal
cure-all merely because a bunch of harebrained people
said, By god, I am getting better and better!
You’re right: the question is, does dianetics work? But it

needs a chance to prove itself. It needs the serious
attention of psychology for the next 10 or 50 years, just
as such a revolutionary “science” as psychoanalysis
did. It doesn’t need publicity among uninformed people
such as aSF readers. Is dianetics to be a cultish fad, or a
science? The way it has developed so far, I foresee ads
of the Dianetics Research Foundation occupying the
same place that Rosicrucian ads do today, while
psychology, the well-grounded science of behavior,
carried on as before. After all, psychology is now a
pretty sound science, and its successes, if not
spectacular like dianetics, are at least decisive enough
to show that it’s on the right track.
I plead innocent to “prejudging” dianetics as far as its

value is concerned. As someone points out in the
current aSF, anyone would be crazy not to want to
believe it. I hope that it is all that Hubbard claims. But I
am from Hannibal — I want to be shown. I don’t want the
anecdotes of fad-happy juveniles. I want the results of
experimental investigation, showing a correlation of
plus .80.
Is that too much to ask?
Notice how many times Boggs exhibits a completely derogatory view of

the readership of science-fiction magazines. It begs the question –
WHAT is the man doing in the field then?
Not only that, Boggs seems to have made sure that this issue of
Spacewarp carries two, count ’em TWO other attacks on Dianetics.
The first is by Rick Sneary in his column called 1958. Sneary (I’ll
restrain myself on the obvious pun to be had there) writes a long,
rambling, typo-ridden missive re: Dianetics. He admits he hasn’t
even read the book, but yet still manages to pepper his missive with
the usual – “claims too much” and that “hypnotism” is employed, and
that “others” say it is “badly written” and a new one – that “some parts
of the book doesn’t sound like Hubbard’s writings” to which he
adds that it does seem amazing “that he could conduct experiments
turn ut the large quantity of fiction he has been, and still find time to
write this book.”
Then there’s this:
EXCERPT FROM A LETTER BY A GUY WHO

WISHES TO REMAIN NAMELESS
********* ****** * ******** ** * **** **** ******* ** ********
**********
That says “everyone obediently swallows Hubbard’s crackpot Dianetics

simply because Campbell printed it in SF.” <rolling my eyes here> Okey
dokey then. Note: Ye old Nameless is named in the index as Art Rapp.
Just after this, we now see a fully fleshed out assault on Dianetics
appear in Spaceship #10 October 1950. It carries a directly critical – no
cagey “fantasy” story – article by Robert Silverberg titled Dianetics:
fact or fantasy?
p. 6 and wow, gee golly gosh! What do we see there? Why, it’s the AMA
chosen PR line! What a coincidence: “Can it be proven the human
mind is just a machine…”
It starts out saying “Your editor along with many others went
immediately head-over-heels in favor of the book.” Interesting, eh? If
this was written by Robert, then we have to consider the timing in that
right after that, immediately came Saul Diskin to help him with his nasty
Dianetic fantasy lampooning in July? It makes it look like he clearly
influenced Robert because then if we go with that this is BY the 14 year
old Robert, the first sentence is followed by this: “After a careful re-
reading, it begins to appear that Dianetics is not all that it’s reputed to
be.”
Well, that’s not too obvious, is it. Again, either Saul, Mr. critical, is who
told him he needed to re-read it, or that’s all bullshit and this is
obviously just some other kind of PR trick.
The interesting thing is there is this rather odd plea message buried in
the article. Almost as if our hidden “they” were offering Hubbard an out
or a way back – if only he would come study Dianetics their way. See
what you think.
It starts by referring back to the Rollo May article, says that ifDianetics
had offered itself as a forward stop, “one which should bear careful
examination, it probably would be gratefully received.” with the
implication that the reason it wasn’t is because “they persisted in calling
it the final step in mental science” then Robert counters all his own
criticism with the mind-jamming statement of “I’ll withhold my opinion
for a while”.
Right. After pretty much giving it.

In a later rather interesting counterpoint, Arthur Levine wrote a
response in Spaceship #17 (1951?) p. 8, excerpted: “I can see that by
initially reaching an audience of ASf readers, Hubbard may have hoped
to secure a relatively large number of scientifically-minded, intelligent
experimenters who would not be handicapped by too large a backgrund
and belief in other methods of psychotherapy.”
Meanwhile down in Kentucky –

Kentucky fanzine Dawn issue 11 November 1950 has a pretty great
article by Ken Beale (Bronx, New York) refers to Lester Del Ray having
called dianetics “a kind of streamlined hypnotism” but debunks that in
an interesting way, “Unfortunately, this doesn’t account for the fact that
the insane, who according to modern authority cannot be hypnotised
without drugs, were given Dianetic Therapy successfully.” citing editor
John Campbel’s speech at the 4th N.Y. conclave last May (1950).
That same month –

James Blish gave a favorable assessment of Dianetics in Planet
Stories November 1950: “Dianetics: A Door To The Future”. You
can read the full issue here – the Blish article starts on p. 104 of the
PDF.
It might interest you to know that James Blish also did a rather tongue-
in-cheek story lampooning the depictions of Hubbard as a “cult” leader
then saturating the press (courtesy of Austin Smith, JAMA editor and
his pitbull George Field). It was a fanzine story called The Warrior’s
Choice in Galaxy Novel #16, in mid to late 1951. He described his
character as the “red-haired man” who was one of the “Council” (p. 33)
and then directly called him Elron (p. 35).
I decided to do my own review of the story just now, and as it turns out
others characterizations of it are completely off. And I mean WAY off.
As I suspected, the character of Hubbard is positioned with Mahrt, the
opponent of the “giants” called Warriors of the Day who act omnipotent
but aren’t and how they are against Mahrt and Elron and are afraid of
“Mahrt”. That’s the first thing, now I’ll make a few notes of key points.
Xota was a totally telepathic world, all living things down to blades of
grass. Tipton was the “chosen of Mahrt” somehow transported from
Earth to Xota. Meeting the council: both men were described as
having “postures that bespoke years of command worn easily and
well.” Tipton is told that “Mahrt is the embodiment of all the forces of
mental darkness and evil.”The “Warriors of the Day” are described as
the “advancing hordes of an interstellar civilization, spreading inward
from the outermost limb of the galaxy. Unless something unguessable
can be done, they will engulf Xota as they have engulfed a thousand
other worlds.” Mahrt is actually the key enemy of these “warriors”.
Tipton and the talking giant cat have an argument, Tipton ends up on
the warriors ship where they say they invented the myth of Mahrt as
part of figuring out militarily how to defeat a totally telepathic planet. He
knew they were lying, that Mahrt was real. Connecting telepathically
with Mahrt, he teleports back to Mahrts temple.
“What about Elron?” Tipton says to the girl he meets in the temple, as to
what his standing is about Mahrt. “He has all the earmarks of a ‘suspect
everything’ personality, and from what I’ve been able to observe of his
intelligence, should be more dangerous than Yrinon and Lanja together.
I wouldn’t back him against Chrestos, I don’t think, but against the two
humans he’s a sure thing.” The girl answers that Elron is our high
priest. They go to Elron who wants Tipton put in irons and wants to kill
him in a ritual. At the ritual, Mahrt inhabits Tipton, things don’t go as
planned. Elron hoped to be the “sword” and was humiliated that Tipton
was instead.
Now here is a direct parallel to real life – the book says: “When a man
has built up an elaborate organization, founded in the hope of
perpetuating itself forever, the arrival of an event which promises to
deprive that organization of meaning within a year or so could hardly be
welcome.” This is a reference to the arrival of the first Austin Smith/
Oliver Field backed moves to destroy the HDRF.
Blish speaks of a myth system, where Hubbard as Elron is “far more a

servant of the Warriors than any other person on Xiota” which is
perhaps Blish recognizing the Hubbard then covert CIA
involvement. Then there’s an interesting discussion of the Warriors
corrupting the telepathic Xotans with the cult of Mahrt, “the evil god who
sleeps in the back of every telepathi’s brain.” The real Mahrt grants
Tipton the power of “the sleeping planetary mind” needing “never again
fear the psychic probes of the Warriors of the day.” There’s various
battling and another visit with the warriors to rescue the girl and then
the story turns and Tipton is really Mahrtand he had created
himself as a fragment, suppressed the memory and now needed to
rejoin because of the suppression of the I am We are Mahrt collective
mind. It continues, sounding like something out of an acid trip (LSD).
Then the “fist” of Mahrt struck and broke the Warriors of the day.
Long story short, the supposed railing against Hubbard as “high priest”
of the “cult of Mahrt” was actually a very, very subtle lampooning of
OTHER forces at work in regarding human potentiality, plus a collective
“God” imagery mixed in, to boot. It ends with a “new Sword” was being
forged…a Kodiak bear, to strike against the suppression of knowledge
of a “racial consciousness”. Ending with: “On Earth, a whimpering
creature stirs, and opens too-wise eyes upon the forests of the great
North. It is tiny now, but in later years it will be great; and a trail to
nowhere awaits it. -A Kodiak bear.”
That’s entirely possible to be a reference to the spiritualsubject Hubbard

was then in the process of forming in 1951, Scientology, put together
with the old Kodiak bear story Hubbard liked to tell or…it’s a reference
to something much older based in the North that I won’t go into right
now.
You can read more about how Blish’s story was resurrected and twisted
beyond recognition to be Elron Elray and the Galactic Federation by
Captain Bill Robertson (Ron’s Org, the so-called “freezone
Scientologists” currently led by Max and Erica Hauri, whom my husband
Mike McClaughry once accurately characterized as a trap for people
leaving the Church of Scientology) and a previous Stanford Research
Insitute pal of CIA remote-viewer program leader Hal Puthoff.
Someone else did quite the seriously twisted take-off from Blish’s story,
Philip K. Dick. He published The Turning Wheelin Science Fiction
Stories #2 in 1954.
The whole story is very weird, it seems to be some sort of intentional

positioning of Hubbard as a caucasian “god” with futuristic Red China.
There’s talk of sterilization of the “caucs” by one of the bards, etc. The
first mention is a religious saying: “Elron be with you.” The chinese-
styled character of the story is one of the “Bards” were at the top of a
caste system. They were “holy men who guided man to
clearness.”Refers to Elron Hu who lived in “the hideous days of the
Time of Madness.” with a VERY weird picture of the great hairy/spider
eye of Hubbard presiding over the Dinosaurs age.
Nice, sarcastically speaking.
Scientology OT levels scholars might find one of the passages

interesting because as Sung-wu, one of the Bards, starts instructing
some lowest caste Tinkerist in the way of Elron-Hu – the first two
catechisms are:
“First!” snapped Sung-wa. “Who are you?”

“Second! What are you?
And the tenth is “Clearness!” (just after Ninth, which is about death).
Which seems to be positioning that one can’t be Clear unless they die.
But those top two questions Dick incorporated in his story? Well.
In 1950, Hubbard’s Dianetics book talked about “demon circuits”. A

couple of years later, Hubbard revealed he reallymeant those were
spirits which he initially called entities or “theta bodies”. (see this post)
Later, he resurrected this as part of what he called advanced operating
levels – OT 3 for short – 1967 where he now called them body thetans.
Around two decades later, David Mayo was sent to “audit” a sick L. Ron
Hubbard in the 1980’s. The procedures developed by David Mayo are
known as New Era Dianetics for Operating Thetans – NED for OTs, or
NOTs. New questions were developed for handling the body thetans
(demons). It was said that a body thetan could consider themselves to
be any body part – a hair, lung, blood cell, etc. Therefore the new
questions were – 1. What are you? 2. Who are you? The body thetan
was then supposed to realize he was himself and leave the body. The
NOTs series of issues were written by David Mayo, not by L. Ron
Hubbard. The original OT levels were replaced with the new OT levels
for OT 4, 5, 6 and 7. (Scientology Roots Chapter 17)
Dick’s story ends with a rather thinly veiled positioning of a cult

(Dianetics) of followers worshipping a sci-fi space ship, positioned with
(Hubbard) Elron Hu.
Next –
Harry Moore’s New Orleans Sci-fi Convention – Nolacon planned for

September 1951, began putting out its own newsletters. Nolacon
Bulletin #1 March 1951 carried an article titled: Why Dianetics? which is
unfortunately incompletely preserved and cuts off at the bottom.
Harry announced: “With the increasing weight of evidence that
Dianetics works on the individual and for the group, your committee has
seen fit to schedule a symposium on the subject at your convention.”
Mentions something called ultra safe “Hurdy-Gurdy” processing.
Interjected in this time period,was our Brooklyn youngster, Robert
Silverberg. In All Our Yesterdays 31: Spaceship by Harry Warner Jr.,
Harry said that he was being helped (co-edited) with Spaceship by
another Brooklyn fan, Saul Diskin who left to go to college late in 1951.
Look at the interesting cover of this issue #12 – April 1951 The Master.
Meanwhile –
The May 1951 installment of Marvel Science Stories, contained positive

articles on dianetics from L. Ron Hubbard and Theodore Sturgeon –
Creep, Creep, Creep, go the agitators behind the scenes and then –
In what looks to be early 1951, April or May after Harry’s announcement

in March (whoever made the PDF has the date wrong because it’s
talking about Nolacon which hadn’t happened yet) ODD magazine
#9 “Duggie” and “Rich” (Richard Elsberry) in a section called Nothing
Serious by Elsberry, were all fired up and complaining about Dianetics
being at the upcoming Nolacon, They appear to be soliciting attacks
and trying to drum up anti-support. I think it’s Richard doing the tirading
about it, and he specifically refers to Harry Moore, the backer of the
convention as a “dianetics backer”. At the end Duggie adds “(((YES,
what about you? If you have any views about this question, we will be
glad to print all that space will allow for in our next issue.)))”
Parenthetically speaking –
Yea. I bet you would.
Next –
Nolacon Bulletin #2 July 1951 – index page.

It looks to me that the Austin Smith/Oliver Field duo is hard at work
trying to disrupt the scheduled symposium on Dianetics. Harry points
out that Norwescon (the Portland one that Bob Johnson
attended) “didn’t prevue their session on Dianetics”and that “It was one
of the two with the highest attendance.” Harry notes that now (since
March) he has “a dozen or so guys” that simply “WILL NOT PLAY
unless we agree to play it all their way. We can’t have even one 1-2-
hour seminar or they will stay away.” There’s more interesting points as
well, but this whole “rejection” pseudo-grass roots campaign sounds…
organized to me.
It looks to me that Hubbard or one of his friends may have become

aware of this Saul Diskin crap, because in the last issue that Diskin
co-edited #12 (came out some time beforethe July 1951 issue), there
was an article from B. Chandler “giving cautious approval to the use of
dianetics, after 23 hours of processing” and recommended to other fans
to try the discipline with care. Harry Warner noted that similar stories
about LSD had been being tested in the fanzines, which is interesting
since LSD experimentation was still Top Secret under Projects
CHATTER and BLUEBIRD then.
Oddly enough, Silverberg, or maybe we’d be more accurate saying its

Saul Diskin? had jumped right on the bandwagon in this issue,
positioning Dianeticians such as Chandler thusly: “The lunatic fringe is
here in fandom, and we’ve been forced to put up with them and laugh at
their antics,” Bob wrote. To me, this is Saul’s influence, and yet another
nail in the coffin cementing the idea that Dr. Wertham, Austin Smith,
and his pet bulldog Oliver Field are just all over the pulps and fanzines,
infiltrating them. That is exactly the kind of thing they did,
got other authors to do their dirty work to make it look more like it was
everywhere and not an organized, solicited, campaign. Dr. Wertham,
himself an Igor-type, was asked to attack Hubbard and Dianetics and
he did.
Apparently there was a new approach thought up, probably because

people weren’t quite falling for all this staged “follow the pied piper”
criticism. Spaceship #13 July 1951 p. 22 has an
interesting supposed “counterblast from a non-skeptic”.
Marion Z Bradly writes: “Ron Hubbard was a qualified s-f writer and also
a qualified scientist. Whether or not you agree with his dianetics
follery, his article was interesting and reasonable logical and his
NAME ALONE is a high drawing-card. (Or was, previous to the Engram
racket.)”
She also positions Hubbard with Rosicrucians. If you look at this

sampling of ads in fanzines from AMORC (rosicrucians) at the Havelin
Collection – They started their digitalization project in 2015 – it’s
actually pretty interesting as to Dianetics claims and especially the later
Scientology “advanced” levels.
Look at this one!

Jeesh.
To understand just how vicious and aggressive the stir-the-pot activities
were by this time from our dynamically insane duo of Smith & Field from
the AMA, with Thorvald lurking in the background like some ghoul, I bet
you don’t know what happened at that Nolacon, just before the
Dianetics segment was about to start.
Sam Moskowitz, who later alleged to the FDA that Hubbard had said
(back in 1948 – BEFORE Dianetics) that the way to make money was
to start a religion – a highly entertaining story – attended Nolacon and
wrote about it afterwards. He detailed what to me, was a beyond
obvious arrangeddisruption of the scheduled session on Dianetics.
Scaring people away would be a minimum part of that goal, is my
guess.
1951 — Nolacon I, New Orleans

Nolacon I: A Torrid Affair
by Sam Moskowitz
In the morning, after an opening address abou how the atomic age
isn’t so bad and an address by Sam Moskowitz, “A real
donnybrook developed, kindled by those who did not want to
permit a scheduled session on Dianetics to be held. It finally went
on, retaining 27 people.”
*donnybrook – a scene of uproar and disorder; a heated

argument.
Would have loved to be the fly-on-the-wall at that event, and I just

wonder what kind of “warnings” and “disagreements” they were
yelling…I just don’t have any clue what they could be.
You can see photos from the Nolacon here. I’ve pulled some out that I
think are relevant and also aren’t probably known about by Scientology
historians.
The organizer and Dianetics supporter of Nolacon, Harry B. Moore is

on the left.
Nolacon Theodore Sturgeon From the collection of Mike Resnick –

Rare pic of Forrest “Forrie” Ackerman, L Ron Hubbard’s literary
agent at Nolacon 1951 –
Nolacon 1951 – Sam Merwin, friend of L. Ron Hubbard –
After Nolacon, Sam Merwin reviewed Hubbard’s Typewriter in the
Sky and Fear in “Science Fiction Bookcase” Amazing Stories, Nov.
1951: 158-59.
Pulps and Fanzines Timeline
December 1949 issue of Astounding carried the first hint of Dianetics

(p.80). This is the exact same month Austin Smith replaced
Fishbein as editor of JAMA.
Spaceship #6 (3 December 1949), 14-year-old Robert Silverberg
from Brooklyn is very happily outing people’s real identities under
pen names One of them was L. Ron Hubbard. Note:
all Spaceship magazines that I am examining were originally
found here.
March 1950 issue carried another teaser about the upcoming artice
by Hubbard about dianetics, an intro by Campbell. (p. 4) titled: “Of
Human Memory”
April 1950 issue of announces the 16,000 word article is ready and
will come out next month (p. 132) Campbell believes it will cause
“one full-scale explosion across the country.” It says the title will be
Dianetics: An Introduction to a New Science. Perhaps overlooked by
most amidst the claims for Dianetics being laid out by Campbell is
this one “Evidence that insanity is contagious and IS NOT
HEREDITARY.” which flies straight into the teeth of eugenics
psychiatrists like Dr. Wertham and Overholser. Important: Just after
this issue came out is when Thorvald Solberg tried to draft Hubbard
into secret projects in the Office of Naval Research.
Science Fiction Newsletter #16 July 1, 1950 (found herepreviously
named Bloomington News Letter unil the April 1950 issue).
Boggs is talking about that Campbell has “resorted” to the formula
relied on by Sunday supplements—the Sensation, the Eye-opener,
then refers to “hoaxes” such as “The Aphrodite Project” following that
formula. So, he has positioned the ideas of “sensation” “eye-
openers” with “hoaxes” in the reader’s mind, and THEN –
“Campbell has produced a Sensation by adopting the READER’S
DIGEST method–… a hack writer‘s “new science,” presented full-
blown to the world in a two-bit pulp —Boggs is referring to the May
1950 issue of Astounding where Hubbard’s article Dianetics:
Evolution of a Science was published – at the same time the book
Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health came out.
Spaceship #9, July 1950. Page 12 carries an attack story disguised
as fiction by mystery man Saul Diskin called “Cancelled, a dianetic
fantasy”. Saul was born in New York City on Aug. 22, 1934, and
raised in Brooklyn, so he was only 15 when he wrote this story.
(about to turn 16). In 1951 he goes off to Vermont to go to college, at
age 17. His obituary doesn’t have one word about this writing career
of his. Saul details a rather odd story about Thomas Portune,
Dianetic Auditor who audits Dudley Farnham (who has shooting
pains in his stomach). During this “session” Saul makes it look like
Dianetics is doing straight hypnotism, installing a “canceller”. The
“incident” run is Dudley’s having read a Superman story. The
session is interrupted, meanwhile Dudley is mumbling about being
Superman, jumps out a 3 story window landing standing without
injury, with the auditor screaming out the window “Cancelled!
Cancelled!”. —practically a verbatim black propaganda idea along
the lines of what Dr. Wertham was saying about
Superman comics, about how they gave people delusions of power
and such and how DANGEROUS that is.
Interjection
character may have been. Why? Because now that Silverberg is under
Diskin’s “co” editorship influence, later on we see him supposedly do a
fully fleshed out attack on Dianetics that is titled rather similarly to
Boggs July attack. Boggs’ title: Dianetics: Fad or Science, Silverberg’
title: Dianetics: Fact or Fantasy. We also might want to note
the possibility that someone had rifled Campbell’s files (Oliver Field
perhaps) and found the December 9, 1949 letter from Hubbard with it’s
attached bogus critique of Dianetics under the pen-name Irving
Kutzman, because one part of it has a psychiatrist having a Dianetics
session for “stomach pains”. It’s a rather crazed sort of session too, on
the psychiatrists part.
Renascence, v. 1, issue 1, August 1950; Dianetics Review wih

Reservations a long article by Kenneth MacNichol pages 4-5. The
issue is dated August 1950 and yet the article specifically
editorials by JWC who also contributed a long article in a day-old
issue of the fanzine Rhodomagnetic Digest.” page 4. “Man is not a
machine; not a robot.” p. 5 “The most hopeful thing to be found
here is Hubbard’s own warning, bluntly expressed and
accepted, that dianetics is a method of procedure that, properly
conducted, yields useful results. After that, says Hubbard, let the
theory go, because it may or may not be valid. It is a starting
place. No matter if the theory is altogether false assumption if
practice works. Wih more and more data, theory can be
corrected.”Excellent advice– Let it be well remembered by all future
students of dianetics. Then, whatever dianetics may be at this
moment, the time must arrive when, sufficiently corrected—
and corrected, possibly, almost beyond recognition, both theory
and practice will be altogether sound.”
Western Star #3 August 26, 1950 Hubbard announces sure cure
for atheism then on actual article page it says: FLASH!! Ron
Hubbard says in effect: Dianetics will cure atheism and is being
adopted by many churches. Chew that one good. This little cult is
getting up steam now. Swank HDQ in Jersey and offices in NYC
$500 per month for the “master”…” And this is interesting. Hubbard’s
display in Los Angeles of a Clear – “brought a clear all the way from
Boston but the demonstration fizzled when stage-fright prevented the
girl from really performing. All she could say was that she felt better
every day since “taking the cure” however she was toally unable at
the time to demonstrate any feats of memory. But Ron was a capable
enough showman to keep most of the audience from feeling let
down.” Image positioning Saint Hubbard and the Dragon that the
Church of Scientology would later use to promote its “Bridge to
Freedom”. Image from Scientology’s Advance Magazine #53 1978.
Article ends with MONEYmotivation positioning. $$$$ % dianetics %
$$$$
October 1950 – Arthur Levine wrote responding to Red Boggs
attack/review from July 1950, his response appears in October
1950 Science Fiction Newsletter #17.
Orb, v. 2, issue 1, October? 1950, “Report from up yonder” insert by
then…… and didn’t quite know what to think of it…… It’s sorta hard
to get used to ‘living through an experience’ instead of remembering
little patches.” Then on p. 20 in where it looks like this was either
September 1 or 2 in Portland Oregon – Theodore (Ted) Sturgeon and
Forrest “Forrie” Ackerman began to speak about Dianetics. “I expect
about 250 or 275 people attended this.Unfortunately Forrie and
Ted both beat round the bush, without really hitting anything of
importance. It was intensely interesting to fans like myself who are
neophytes to Dianetics, but to the many more experienced people in
the room, it was a little tiring. I enjoyed every minute of it, however,
and I am positive that many others did. ” P. 23 talks about how
Bob got sick suddenly, and that he thought it was dianetic session
related. But it’s what Harry said that’s interesting, note how he makes
the ‘file clerk’ sound like an entirely separate person or thing than
Bob, which makes it seem that Harry knew that Hubbard actually
thought the “reactive mind” was composed of entities. (see Philip K.
Dick story a little later on here). “The second night we stayed at
Mountain Home, Idaho. Harry was planning to audit Heisner. While
we were starting to eat our dinner, I suddenly developed a terrific
sinus attack. Harry said it was my file clerk wanting attention so
it could be audited instead of Charles. Since Chas had priority, I
had to grin and bear it. While at the cafe, I had to ask for a hot towel
to hold against my face, the attack was so bad. Get this: I have never
had any trouble with my sinus in my life, outside of the occasional
clogging of head colds, and such. I have never experienced any pain
remotely as severe as I did at this time, Now, draw your own
conclusions about Dianetics being dangerous or not. […]
Somewhere, in the middle of a Helios or Vom, my sinus trouble was
forgotten, and therefore vanished.[…] The third night was spent in
Burgoyne, Idaho, where I was given a thorough auditing. Lots of
things were found out, but it seems like I have few engrams, but
scads of locks. ” One of the other things discussed in that story was
the deciding of where the next convention would be held and by
who. Harry B. Moore won the vote, and the next one would be held in
New Orleans.
Newsletter #16, which Boggs then reprints in this different fanzine.
Boggs discusses Blish’s letter in his “File 13” column – which he
makes a point of noting is the “13th” installment. Rebuttal points: “It
is; first of all, the comment of a man who has not read Hubbard’s
book…it uses push-button terms…thus far the claims check with the
facts.” Re: that Hubbard published about science-fiction in pulps “It
also has an audience rated as the most intelligent and the most
technically knowledgeable of any general magazine in this country”.
Then these two: The reaction of an established authority to any
teetotally revolutionary discipline is historically predictable…The
reputation…really proves nothing…The reputation of Dr. Frederick
Wertham, also damned good, is also no guarantee, whether he’s for
or agin dianetics (he’s violently agin.)” Finishes with the line “does it
work…check the idea not the reputaion”. Boggs has a cow, disses
his own audience in the process.“given to the uninformed
public rather than to the scientists….a bunch of fuggheaded
juveniles loudly mouthing dianetical catch-phrases…a “fad” status
among brainless juveniles“. With that kind of atitude one might ask
– WHAT is this man doing in the field then? Then he goes right to the
Rollo May positioning.“After all Coueism “worked,” too; it even had
some psychological basis; but I never heard of a psychologist who
believed Coueism was a universal cure-all merely because a bunch
of harebrained people said, By god, I am getting better and
better!” Rollo May had said: “People can be cured of symptoms by all
kinds of means–by…Coue autosuggestion…Which was positioned
with the bone-pointing practices of primitives, etc. Transference and
autosuggestion “cures” are easy enough to achieve, but no
reputable therapist considers them true cures.” Then he again
positions Hubbard as: “a man who has absolutely no standing in
psychological or psychiatric fields at all…merely a “hack writer of
pseudo-science.,,,added onus of pulp presentation”. Boggs seems to
have made sure that this issue of Spacewarp carries
two other attacks on Dianetics. The first is by Rick Sneary in his
column called 1958. Snearywrites a long, rambling, typo-ridden
missive re: Dianetics. He admits he hasn’t even read the book, but
yet still manages to pepper his missive with the usual – “claims too
much” and that “hypnotism” is employed, and that “others” say it
is “badly written” and a new one – that “some parts of the book
doesn’t sound like Hubbard’s writings” to which he adds that it
does seem amazing “that he could conduct experiments turn out the
large quantity of fiction he has been, and still find time to write this
book.” Then there’s this: EXCERPT FROM A LETTER BY A GUY
WHO WISHES TO REMAIN NAMELESS (Nameless is named in the
index as Art Rapp) That says “everyone obediently swallows
Hubbard’s crackpot Dianetics simply because Campbell printed it in
SF.”
Interjection
For those who get excited about that “it works” line Blish was
using. Psychiatrists using barbaric ECT do the same thing. In 2003,
assessing the effectiveness of ECT in a series of depressed Israeli
patients, Bernard (“Benny”) Lerer (1948–), director of the Biological
Laboratory of Hadassah University Hospital in Ein Karem, Israel, said to
a journalist from the newspaper Haaretz, “Have you ever asked yourself
how it is that a treatment with such a terrible stigma, a treatment that
the public is afraid of and is said to be primitive and unhelpful—has,
despite all this, survived into the 21st century, and not in obscure little
places but in the world’s most advanced medical centers? The answer
is simple. Because it works.”
Spaceship #10 October 1950. A fully fleshed out assault on Dianetics

appears, directly critical – no cagey “fantasy” story this time – article
by Robert Silverberg titled Dianetics: fact or fantasy? p. 6 “Can it
be proven the human mind is just a machine…” It starts out
saying “Your editor along with many others went immediately head-
over-heels in favor of the book.” If this was written by Robert, then we
have to consider the timing in that right after that, immediately came
Saul Diskin to help him with his nasty Dianetic fantasy lampooning in
July. It makes it look like he clearly influenced Robert because then if
we go with that this is BY the 14 year old Robert, the first sentence is
followed by this: “After a careful re-reading, it begins to appear that
Dianetics is not all that it’s reputed to be.” There is a rather odd plea
message buried in the article. Almost as if our hidden “they” were
offering Hubbard an out or a way back – if only he would come study
Dianetics their way. See what you think. It starts by referring back to
the Rollo May article, says that if Dianetics had offered itself as a
forward stop, “one which should bear careful examination, it probably
would be gratefully received.” with the implication that the reason it
wasn’t is because “they persisted in calling it the final step in mental
science” then Robert counters all his own criticism with the mind-
jamming statement of “I’ll withhold my opinion for a while”. After
pretty much giving it.
Planet Stories November 1950: “Dianetics: A Door To The Future”.
James Blish gave a favorable assessment of Dianetics – the Blish
article starts on p. 104 of the PDF.
article by Ken Beale (Bronx, New York) refers to Lester Del Ray
having called dianetics “a kind of streamlined hypnotism”
but debunks that in an interesting way, “Unfortunately, this doesn’t
account for the fact that the insane, who according to modern
authority cannot be hypnotised without drugs, were given Dianetic
Therapy successfully.” citing editor John Campbel’s speech at the 4th
N.Y. conclave last May (1950).
Spaceship #17 (1951?) Arthur Levine wrote a response in p. 8,
excerpted: “I can see that by initially reaching an audience of ASf
readers, Hubbard may have hoped to secure a relatively large
number of scientifically-minded, intelligent experimenters who would
not be handicapped by too large a backgrund and belief in other
methods of psychotherapy.”
Nolacon Bulletin #1 March 1951 Harry Moore’s New Orleans Sci-fi
Convention – Nolacon planned for September 1951, began putting
out its own newsletters. Carried an article titled: Why
Dianetics? which is unfortunately incompletely preserved and cuts off
at the bottom. Harry announced: “With the increasing weight of
evidence that Dianetics works on the individual and for the group,
your committee has seen fit to schedule a symposium on the
subject at your convention.” Mentions something called ultra safe
“Hurdy-Gurdy” processing.
Spaceship issue #12 – April 1951 The Master. In All Our Yesterdays
31: Spaceship by Harry Warner Jr., Harry said that he was being
helped (co-edited) with Spaceship by another Brooklyn fan, Saul
Diskin who left to go to college late in 1951.
Marvel Science Stories May 1951 contained positive articles on
dianetics from L. Ron Hubbard and Theodore Sturgeon –
ODD magazine #9 In what looks to be early 1951, April or May after
Harry’s announcement in March (whoever made the PDF has the
date wrong because it’s talking about Nolacon which hadn’t
happened yet) Creep, Creep, Creep, go the agitators behind the
scenes and then – “Duggie” and “Rich” (Richard Elsberry) in a
section called Nothing Serious by Elsberry, were all fired up and
complaining about Dianetics being at the upcoming Nolacon, They
appear to be soliciting attacks and trying to drum up anti-support. I
think it’s Richard doing the tirading about it, and he specifically refers
to Harry Moore, the backer of the convention as a “dianetics backer”.
At the end Duggie adds “(((YES, what about you? If you have any
views about this question, we will be glad to print all that space will
allow for in our next issue.)))”
Spaceship #12 – It looks to me that Hubbard or one of his friends
may have become aware of this Saul Diskin crap, because in the
last issue that Diskin co-edited #12 (came out some
time before the July 1951 issue), there was an article from B.
Chandler “giving cautious approval to the use of dianetics, after 23
hours of processing” and recommended to other fans to try the
discipline with care. Harry Warner noted that similar stories about
LSD had been being tested in the fanzines, which is interesting since
LSD experimentation was still Top Secret under Projects CHATTER
and BLUEBIRD then. Silverberg, or maybe we’d be more accurate
saying its Saul Diskin? had jumped right on the bandwagon in this
issue, positioning Dianeticians such as Chandler thusly: “The lunatic
fringe is here in fandom, and we’ve been forced to put up with them
and laugh at their antics,” Bob wrote. To me, this is Saul’s influence,
and yet another nail in the coffin cementing the idea that Dr.
Wertham, Austin Smith, and his pet bulldog Oliver Field are just all
over the pulps and fanzines, infiltrating them. That is exactly the kind
of thing they did, got other authors to do their dirty work to make it
look more like it was everywhere and not an organized, solicited,
campaign. Dr. Wertham, himself an Igor-type, was asked to attack
Hubbard and Dianetics and he did.
Nolacon Bulletin #2 July 1951 It looks to me that the Austin
Smith/Oliver Field duo is hard at work trying to disrupt the scheduled
symposium on Dianetics. Harry points out that Norwescon (the
Portland one that Bob Johnson attended) “didn’t prevue their session
on Dianetics” and that “It was one of the two with the highest
attendance.” Harry notes that now (since March) he has “a dozen or
so guys” that simply “WILL NOT PLAY unless we agree to play it all
their way. We can’t have even one 1-2-hour seminar or they will stay
away.” There’s more interesting points as well, but this whole
“rejection” pseudo-grass roots campaign sounds…organized to me.
Spaceship #13 July 1951 Apparently there was a new approach
thought up, probably because people weren’t quite falling for all this
staged “follow the pied piper” criticism of Boggs, Silverberg/Diskin et
al. p. 22 has an interesting supposed “counterblast from a non-
skeptic”. Marion Z Bradly writes: “Ron Hubbard was a qualified s-f
writer and also a qualified scientist. Whether or not you agree with
his dianetics follery, his article was interesting and reasonable logical
and his NAME ALONE is a high drawing-card. (Or was, previous to
the Engram racket.)” She also positions Hubbard with Rosicrucians.
If you look at this sampling of ads in fanzines from AMORC
(rosicrucians) at the Havelin Collection – They started their
digitalization project in 2015 – it’s actually pretty interesting as to
Dianetics claims and especially the later Scientology “advanced”
levels.
Interjection –

guess.
Nolacon I: A Torrid Affair September 1-3 1951 by Sam Moskowitz

Nolacon I, New Orleans. “In the morning, after an opening address
abou how the atomic age isn’t so bad and an address by Sam
Moskowitz, “A real donnybrook developed, kindled by those
who did not want to permit a scheduled session on Dianetics to be
held. It finally went on, retaining 27 people.”. You can see photos
from the Nolacon here. I’ve pulled some out that I think are relevant
and also aren’t probably known about by Scientology historians.
Photos of Harry B. Moore, Theodore Sturgeon, Forrest “Forrie”
Ackerman, L Ron Hubbard’s literary agent, Sam Merwin, friend of L.
Ron Hubbard
“Science Fiction Bookcase” Amazing Stories, Nov. 1951: 158-59.
Sky and Fear.
The Warrior’s Choice in Galaxy Novel #16, in mid to late 1951 James
Blish also did a rather tongue-in-cheek story lampooning the
depictions of Hubbard as a “cult” leader then saturating the press
(courtesy of Austin Smith, JAMA editor and his pitbull George Field).
It was a fanzine story called The Warrior’s Choice in Galaxy Novel
#16, in mid to late 1951. He described his character as the “red-
haired man” who was one of the “Council” (p. 33) and then directly
called him Elron (p. 35). I decided to do my own review of the story
just now, and as it turns out others characterizations of it are
completely off. And I mean WAY off. As I suspected, the character of
Hubbard is positioned with Mahrt, the opponent of the “giants” called
Warriors of the Day who act omnipotent but aren’t and how they are
against Mahrt and Elron and are afraid of “Mahrt”. That’s the first
thing, now I’ll make a few notes of key points. Xota was a totally
telepathic world, all living things down to blades of grass. Tipton was
the “chosen of Mahrt” somehow transported from Earth to Xota.
Meeting the council: both men were described as having “postures
that bespoke years of command worn easily and well.” Tipton is told
that “Mahrt is the embodiment of all the forces of mental darkness
and evil.” The “Warriors of the Day” are described as the “advancing
hordes of an interstellar civilization, spreading inward from the
outermost limb of the galaxy. Unless something unguessable can be
done, they will engulf Xota as they have engulfed a thousand other
worlds.” Mahrt is actually the key enemy of these “warriors”. Tipton
and the talking giant cat have an argument, Tipton ends up on the
warriors ship where they say they inventedthe myth of Mahrt as part
of figuring out militarily how to defeat a totally telepathic planet. He
with Mahrt, he teleports back to Mahrts temple. “What about Elron?”
Tipton says to the girl he meets in the temple, as to what his standing
is about Mahrt. “He has all the earmarks of a ‘suspect everything’
personality, and from what I’ve been able to observe of his
intelligence, should be more dangerous than Yrinon and Lanja
together. I wouldn’t back him against Chrestos, I don’t think, but
against the two humans he’s a sure thing.” The girl answers
that Elron is our high priest. They go to Elron who wants Tipton put
in irons and wants to kill him in a ritual. At the ritual, Mahrt inhabits
Tipton, things don’t go as planned. Elron hoped to be the “sword” and
was humiliated that Tipton was instead. Now here is a direct parallel
to real life – the book says: “When a man has built up an elaborate
organization, founded in the hope of perpetuating itself forever,
the arrival of an event which promises to deprive that
organization of meaning within a year or so could hardly be
Oliver Field backed moves to destroy the HDRF. Blish speaks of a
myth system, where Hubbard as Elron is “far more a servant of the
Warriors than any other person on Xiota” which is perhaps Blish
recognizing the Hubbard then covert CIA involvement. Then
there’s an interesting discussion of the Warriors corrupting the
telepathic Xotans with the cult of Mahrt, “the evil god who sleeps in
the back of every telepathi’s brain.” The real Mahrt grants Tipton the
power of “the sleeping planetary mind” needing “never again fear the
psychic probes of the Warriors of the day.” There’s various battling
and another visit with the warriors to rescue the girl and then the
story turns and Tipton is really Mahrt and he had created himself as
a fragment, suppressed the memory and now needed to rejoin
because of the suppression of the I am We are Mahrt collective mind.
It continues, sounding like something out of an acid trip (LSD). Then
the “fist” of Mahrt struck and broke the Warriors of the day. Long
story short, the supposed railing against Hubbard as “high priest” of
the “cult of Mahrt” was actually a very, very subtle lampooning of
OTHER forces at work in regarding human potentiality, plus a
collective “God” imagery mixed in, to boot. It ends with a “new
Sword” was being forged…a Kodiak bear, to strike against the
suppression of knowledge of a “racial consciousness”. Ending
with: “On Earth, a whimpering creature stirs, and opens too-wise
eyes upon the forests of the great North. It is tiny now, but in later
years it will be great; and a trail to nowhere awaits it. -A Kodiak
bear.” That’s entirely possible to be a reference to the spiritualsubject
Hubbard was then in the process of forming in 1951, Scientology, put
together with the old Kodiak bear story Hubbard liked to tell or…it’s a
reference to something much older based in the North that I won’t go
into right now. You can read more about how Blish’s story was
resurrected and twisted beyond recognition to be Elron Elray and
the Galactic Federation by Captain Bill Robertson (Ron’s Org, the so-
called “freezone Scientologists” currently led by Max and Erica Hauri,
whom my husband Mike McClaughry once accurately characterized
as a trap for people leaving the Church of Scientology) and a
previous Stanford Research Insitute pal of CIA remote-viewer
program leader Hal Puthoff.
Science Fiction Stories #2 in 1954. The Turning WheelPhilip K. Dick
did quite the seriously twisted take-off from Blish’s story.The whole
story is very weird, it seems to be some sort of intentional positioning
of Hubbard as a caucasian “god” with futuristic Red China. There’s
talk of sterilization of the “caucs” by one of the bards, etc. The first
mention is a religious saying: “Elron be with you.” The chinese-styled
character of the story is one of the “Bards” were at the top of a caste
system. They were “holy men who guided man to clearness.” Refers
to Elron Hu who lived in “the hideous days of the Time of
Madness.” with a VERY weird picture of the great hairy/spider eye of
Hubbard presiding over the Dinosaurs age.Scientology OT levels
scholars might find one of the passages interesting because as
Sung-wu, one of the Bards, starts instructing some lowest caste
Tinkerist in the way of Elron-Hu – the first two catechisms are: “First!”
snapped Sung-wa. “Who are you?”
“Second! What are you? And the tenth is “Clearness!” (just after
Ninth, which is about death). Which seems to be positioning that one
can’t be Clear unless they die.In 1950, Hubbard’s Dianetics book
talked about “demon circuits”. A couple of years later, Hubbard
revealed he really meant those were spirits which he initially called
entities or “theta bodies”. (see this post) Later, he resurrected this as
part of what he called advanced operating levels – OT 3 for short –
1967 where he now called them body thetans. Around two decades
later, David Mayo was sent to “audit” a sick L. Ron Hubbard in the
1980’s. The procedures developed by David Mayo are known as
New Era Dianetics for Operating Thetans – NED for OTs, or
(demons). It was said that a body thetan could consider themselves
to be any body part – a hair, lung, blood cell, etc. Therefore the new
questions were – 1. What are you? 2. Who are you?The body
thetan was then supposed to realize he was himself and leave the
body. The NOTs series of issues were written by David Mayo, not by
L. Ron Hubbard. The original OT levels were replaced with the new
OT levels for OT 4, 5, 6 and 7. (Scientology Roots Chapter 17) —
Dick’s story ends with a rather thinly veiled positioning image of a cult
(Dianetics) of followers worshipping a sci-fi space ship, positioned
with (Hubbard) Elron Hu.
Back to the major media

attacks now –
This is what we have.
trying to view man as a machine.” “Books like this do harm…
grandiose promises…oversimplification of human psychological
problems.”
Behind-the-scenes attack — President of American Psychiatric
The Nation: August 5, 1950, page 131: Cure For All Ills; unfavorable
book review of “Dianetics”, by Milton Sapirstein (plain
text here) Punchline: “The real and, to me, inexcusable danger in
dianetics lies in its conception of the amoral, detached, 100 per cent
efficient mechanical man.”
Hubbard answers, Rollo May answers Hubbard. Rollo dissembles on
his “man as a machine” view and then – ADDS the other chosen
Punchline: “Dianetics first appeared in the magazine
Astounding Science Fictionand it is in this magazine that you can
learn, if you wish, about Mr. Hubbard and his work.”
Letters August 14, 1950, TIME Magazine, several letters, one
example: Dianetics: Believe It or Not LEE PARMAN, ROBERT
HARLOW taking on the “cult” idea presented in Time July 24 1950
article; Hubbard responds: “Sir: Thank you for your quite accurate
description of dianetics . . .Our only regret is that you . . . mistook the
publisher’s synopsis in the book to be the opinion of the author. Los
Angeles, while giving dianetics an excellent reception, is not entirely
informed as to the science. Secondly, you would seem to make me
over-evaluate dianetics in my own opinion. In 50 years a valid
opinion as to what dianetics is doing or can do for the whole society
may be expressed: I doubt anyone would be foolish enough to
express such a wild enthusiasm about his own work, and I do not …
L. RON HUBBARD Elizabeth, N.J.”
The New Republic, August 14, 1950 Scathing book review by Martin
Gumpert; Punchlines: “L. Ron Hubbard… science-fiction writer”.
Fredric Schuman protests, editors respond: “While Dr. Schuman is a
distinguished authority on political science, we do not feel that on
issues involving psychiatry he is entitled to any more respect than
any other layman. His suggestion that no one should write about
dianetics without having experienced it seems to us like saying that
no one can be an authority on cyanide of potassium unless he has
eaten some.”
Newsweek August 21, 1950 Punchlines: “successful author
of scientific fiction.”
NY TImes September 9, 1950 Psychologists act against Dianetics by
Lucy Freeman (text here) “In explaining the action of the council, Dr.
E. Lowell Kelly, a member of it and of the board of directors”.
Postgraduate Medicine September 1950 Contributing editor Dr.
Morris Fishbein (former editor of the Journal of the American
Medical Association; JAMA) called Dianetics Poor Man’s
Psychoanalysis; Punchlines: “He is an engineer, explorer, and writer
of science fiction and, as such, beneath the professional
notice of practicing physicians. To most doctors, the dianetics
concept is unscientific and unworthy of discussion or review…mind-
healing cult.” (as quoted in Newsweek October 16, 1950)
American Scientist October 1950 Autumn Issue Volume 38 Number 4
Article on Page 603-609 Sacred Cows in Collision
author Yvette Gittleson; section on Dianetics titled: De Profundis Via
Dianetics; Punchlines: “mechanical-brainanalogy is reflected at its
worst in a best-selling horror called Dianetics. […] Dianetics made its
debut in Astounding Science Fiction, which is where the reviewer
should leave it because that is where astounding science
fiction belongs.” Other items of interest: “In the first two
months following publication, about 20,000 copies of Dianetics were
sold, without benefit of advertising (in the conventional sense).
During this period, book review editors associated with serious
publications gave it a wide berth. On July 2, the New York Times
broke the spell with a three column review by Dr. Rollo May.”
Tests & Poison September 18, 1950, TIME Magazine, basically
repeate of July 24, 1950 article. Punchlines: “concocted by science-
fiction Writer L. Ron Hubbard”. disses Fred Schuman (August 6
1950 letter to NY TImes; letter to New Reublic 14 August 1950) as
“Williams College’s cause-chasing Professor Frederick L. Schuman”
Now we will blend the two attack timelines together.
Main MEDIA Timeline

December 1949 issue of Astounding carried the first hint of Dianetics
(p.80). This is the exact same month Austin Smith replaced
Fishbein as editor of JAMA.
Spaceship #6 (3 December 1949), 14-year-old Robert Silverberg
from Brooklyn is very happily outing people’s real identities under
pen names One of them was L. Ron Hubbard. Note:
all Spaceship magazines that I am examining were originally
found here.
March 1950 issue carried another teaser about the upcoming artice
by Hubbard about dianetics, an intro by Campbell. (p. 4) titled: “Of
Human Memory”
April 1950 issue of announces the 16,000 word article is ready and
will come out next month (p. 132) Campbell believes it will cause
“one full-scale explosion across the country.” It says the title will be
Dianetics: An Introduction to a New Science. Perhaps overlooked by
most amidst the claims for Dianetics being laid out by Campbell is
this one “Evidence that insanity is contagious and IS NOT
HEREDITARY.” which flies straight into the teeth of eugenics
psychiatrists like Dr. Wertham and Overholser. Important: Just after
this issue came out is when Thorvald Solberg tried to draft Hubbard
into secret projects in the Office of Naval Research.
Bookseller’s Association convention, New York (Harvard)
psychiatrist Fredric Wertham denounces Dianetics as “neither a
good book nor a hoax,” but a “harmful mixture of science
and science fiction”. His papers also mention this. (reference
originally found here) This duo split kind of attack is repeated in two
pulp/fanzine attacks. Boggs: Dianetics: Fad or Science, Silverberg:
Dianetics: Fact or Fantasy.
Science Fiction Newsletter #16 July 1, 1950 (found herepreviously
named Bloomington News Letter unil the April 1950 issue).
Boggs is talking about that Campbell has “resorted” to the formula
relied on by Sunday supplements—the Sensation, the Eye-opener,
then refers to “hoaxes” such as “The Aphrodite Project” following that
formula. So, he has positioned the ideas of “sensation” “eye-
openers” with “hoaxes” in the reader’s mind, and THEN –
“Campbell has produced a Sensation by adopting the READER’S
DIGEST method–… a hack writer‘s “new science,” presented full-
blown to the world in a two-bit pulp —Boggs is referring to the May
1950 issue of Astounding where Hubbard’s article Dianetics:
Evolution of a Science was published – at the same time the book
Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health came out.
Rollo May (this site has wrong date) Punchlines: “the absurdity of
trying to view man as a machine.” “Books like this do harm…
grandiose promises…oversimplification of human psychological
problems.”
Spaceship #9, July 1950. Page 12 carries an attack story disguised
as fiction by mystery man Saul Diskin called “Cancelled, a dianetic
fantasy”. Saul was born in New York City on Aug. 22, 1934, and
raised in Brooklyn, so he was only 15 when he wrote this story.
(about to turn 16). In 1951 he goes off to Vermont to go to college, at
age 17. His obituary doesn’t have one word about this writing career
of his. Saul details a rather odd story about Thomas Portune,
Dianetic Auditor who audits Dudley Farnham (who has shooting
pains in his stomach). During this “session” Saul makes it look like
Dianetics is doing straight hypnotism, installing a “canceller”. The
“incident” run is Dudley’s having read a Superman story. The
session is interrupted, meanwhile Dudley is mumbling about being
Superman, jumps out a 3 story window landing standing without
injury, with the auditor screaming out the window “Cancelled!
Cancelled!”. —practically a verbatim black propaganda idea along
the lines of what Dr. Wertham was saying about
Superman comics, about how they gave people delusions of power
and such and how DANGEROUS that is.
Interjection
character may have been. Why? Because now that Silverberg is under
Diskin’s “co” editorship influence, later on we see him supposedly do a
fully fleshed out attack on Dianetics that is titled rather similarly to
Boggs July attack. Boggs’ title: Dianetics: Fad or Science, Silverberg’
title: Dianetics: Fact or Fantasy. We also might want to note
the possibility that someone had rifled Campbell’s files (Oliver Field
perhaps) and found the December 9, 1949 letter from Hubbard with it’s
attached bogus critique of Dianetics under the pen-name Irving
Kutzman, because one part of it has a psychiatrist having a Dianetics
session for “stomach pains”. It’s a rather crazed sort of session too, on
the psychiatrists part.

Behind-the-scenes attack –President of American Psychiatric
Renascence, v. 1, issue 1, August 1950; Dianetics Review wih
Reservations a long article by Kenneth MacNichol pages 4-5. The
issue is dated August 1950 and yet the article specifically
editorials by JWC who also contributed a long article in a day-old
issue of the fanzine Rhodomagnetic Digest.” page 4. “Man is not a
machine; not a robot.” p. 5 “The most hopeful thing to be found
here is Hubbard’s own warning, bluntly expressed and
accepted, that dianetics is a method of procedure that, properly
conducted, yields useful results. After that, says Hubbard, let the
theory go, because it may or may not be valid. It is a starting
place. No matter if the theory is altogether false assumption if
practice works. Wih more and more data, theory can be
corrected.”Excellent advice– Let it be well remembered by all future
students of dianetics. Then, whatever dianetics may be at this
moment, the time must arrive when, sufficiently corrected—
and corrected, possibly, almost beyond recognition, both theory
and practice will be altogether sound.”
The Nation: August 5, 1950, page 131: Cure For All Ills; unfavorable
book review of “Dianetics”, by Milton Sapirstein (plain
text here) Punchline: “The real and, to me, inexcusable danger in
dianetics lies in its conception of the amoral, detached, 100 per cent
efficient mechanical man.”
Hubbard answers, Rollo May answers Hubbard. Rollo dissembles on
his “man as a machine” view and then – ADDS the other chosen
Punchline: “Dianetics first appeared in the magazine
Astounding Science Fictionand it is in this magazine that you can
learn, if you wish, about Mr. Hubbard and his work.” Adds a new
punchline: “People can be cured of symptoms by all kinds of means–
by…Coue autosuggestion…Which was positioned with the bone-
pointing practices of primitives, etc. Transference and
autosuggestion “cures” are easy enough to achieve, but no
reputable therapist considers them true cures.
Letters August 14, 1950, TIME Magazine, several letters, one
example: Dianetics: Believe It or Not LEE PARMAN, ROBERT
HARLOW taking on the “cult” idea presented in Time July 24 1950
article; Hubbard responds: “Sir: Thank you for your quite accurate
description of dianetics . . .Our only regret is that you . . . mistook the
publisher’s synopsis in the book to be the opinion of the author. Los
Angeles, while giving dianetics an excellent reception, is not entirely
informed as to the science. Secondly, you would seem to make me
over-evaluate dianetics in my own opinion. In 50 years a valid
opinion as to what dianetics is doing or can do for the whole society
may be expressed: I doubt anyone would be foolish enough to
express such a wild enthusiasm about his own work, and I do not …
L. RON HUBBARD Elizabeth, N.J.”
The New Republic, August 14, 1950 Scathing book review by Martin
Gumpert; Punchlines: “L. Ron Hubbard… science-fiction writer”.
Fredric Schuman protests, editors respond: “While Dr. Schuman is a
distinguished authority on political science, we do not feel that on
issues involving psychiatry he is entitled to any more respect than
any other layman. His suggestion that no one should write about
dianetics without having experienced it seems to us like saying that
no one can be an authority on cyanide of potassium unless he has
eaten some.”
Newsweek August 21, 1950 Punchlines: “successful author
of scientific fiction.”
Western Star #3 August 26, 1950 Hubbard announces sure cure
for atheism then on actual article page it says: FLASH!! Ron
Hubbard says in effect: Dianetics will cure atheism and is being
adopted by many churches. Chew that one good. This little cult is
getting up steam now. Swank HDQ in Jersey and offices in NYC
$500 per month for the “master”…” And this is interesting. Hubbard’s
display in Los Angeles of a Clear – “brought a clear all the way from
Boston but the demonstration fizzled when stage-fright prevented the
girl from really performing. All she could say was that she felt better
every day since “taking the cure” however she was toally unable at
the time to demonstrate any feats of memory. But Ron was a capable
enough showman to keep most of the audience from feeling let
down.” Image positioning Saint Hubbard and the Dragon that the
Church of Scientology would later use to promote its “Bridge to
Freedom”. Image from Scientology’s Advance Magazine #53 1978.
Article ends with MONEYmotivation positioning. $$$$ % dianetics %
$$$$
NY TImes September 9, 1950 Psychologists act against Dianetics by
Lucy Freeman (text here) “In explaining the action of the council, Dr.
E. Lowell Kelly, a member of it and of the board of directors”.
Postgraduate Medicine September 1950 Contributing editor Dr.
Morris Fishbein (former editor of the Journal of the American
Medical Association; JAMA) called Dianetics Poor Man’s
Psychoanalysis; Punchlines: “He is an engineer, explorer, and writer
of science fiction and, as such, beneath the professional
notice of practicing physicians. To most doctors, the dianetics
concept is unscientific and unworthy of discussion or review…mind-
healing cult.” (as quoted in Newsweek October 16, 1950)
Newsletter #16, which Boggs then reprints in this different fanzine.
Boggs discusses Blish’s letter in his “File 13” column – which he
makes a point of noting is the “13th” installment. Rebuttal points: “It
is; first of all, the comment of a man who has not read Hubbard’s
book…it uses push-button terms…thus far the claims check with the
facts.” Re: that Hubbard published about science-fiction in pulps “It
also has an audience rated as the most intelligent and the most
technically knowledgeable of any general magazine in this country”.
Then these two: The reaction of an established authority to any
teetotally revolutionary discipline is historically predictable…The
reputation…really proves nothing…The reputation of Dr. Frederick
Wertham, also damned good, is also no guarantee, whether he’s for
or agin dianetics (he’s violently agin.)” Finishes with the line “does it
work…check the idea not the reputaion”. Boggs has a cow, disses
his own audience in the process.“given to the uninformed
public rather than to the scientists….a bunch of fuggheaded
juveniles loudly mouthing dianetical catch-phrases…a “fad” status
among brainless juveniles“. With that kind of atitude one might ask
– WHAT is this man doing in the field then? Then he goes right to the
Rollo May positioning.“After all Coueism “worked,” too; it even had
some psychological basis; but I never heard of a psychologist who
believed Coueism was a universal cure-all merely because a bunch
of harebrained people said, By god, I am getting better and
better!” —Rollo May had said: “People can be cured of symptoms by
all kinds of means–by…Coue autosuggestion…Which was
positioned with the bone-pointing practices of primitives, etc.
Transference and autosuggestion “cures” are easy enough to
achieve, but no reputable therapist considers them true cures.”
—-Then Boggs again positions Hubbard as: “a man who has
absolutely no standing in psychological or psychiatric fields at all…
merely a “hack writer of pseudo-science.,,,added onus
of pulp presentation”. Boggs seems to have made sure that this
issue of Spacewarp carries twoother attacks on Dianetics. The first is
by Rick Sneary in his column called 1958. Snearywrites a long,
rambling, typo-ridden missive re: Dianetics. He admits he hasn’t
even read the book, but yet still manages to pepper his missive with
the usual – “claims too much” and that “hypnotism” is employed, and
that “others” say it is “badly written” and a new one – that “some
parts of the book doesn’t sound like Hubbard’s writings” to
which he adds that it does seem amazing “that he could conduct
experiments turn out the large quantity of fiction he has been, and
still find time to write this book.” Then there’s this: EXCERPT FROM
A LETTER BY A GUY WHO WISHES TO REMAIN NAMELESS
(Nameless is named in the index as Art Rapp) That says “everyone
obediently swallows Hubbard’s crackpot Dianetics simply because
Campbell printed it in SF.”
Interjection
For those who get excited about that “it works” line Blish was
using. Psychiatrists using barbaric ECT do the same thing. In 2003,
assessing the effectiveness of ECT in a series of depressed Israeli
patients, Bernard (“Benny”) Lerer (1948–), director of the Biological
Laboratory of Hadassah University Hospital in Ein Karem, Israel, said to
a journalist from the newspaper Haaretz, “Have you ever asked yourself
how it is that a treatment with such a terrible stigma, a treatment that
the public is afraid of and is said to be primitive and unhelpful—has,
despite all this, survived into the 21st century, and not in obscure little
places but in the world’s most advanced medical centers? The answer
is simple. Because it works.”
Tests & Poison September 18, 1950, TIME Magazine, basically
repeat of July 24, 1950 article. Punchlines: “concocted by science-
fiction Writer L. Ron Hubbard”. disses Fred Schuman (August 6
1950 letter to NY TImes; letter to New Reublic 14 August 1950) as
“Williams College’s cause-chasing Professor Frederick L. Schuman”
Spaceship #10 October 1950. A fully fleshed out assault on Dianetics
appears, directly critical – no cagey “fantasy” story this time – article
by Robert Silverberg titled Dianetics: fact or fantasy? p. 6 “Can it
be proven the human mind is just a machine…” It starts out
saying “Your editor along with many others went immediately head-
over-heels in favor of the book.” If this was written by Robert, then we
have to consider the timing in that right after that, immediately came
Saul Diskin to help him with his nasty Dianetic fantasy lampooning in
July. It makes it look like he clearly influenced Robert because then if
we go with that this is BY the 14 year old Robert, the first sentence is
followed by this: “After a careful re-reading, it begins to appear that
Dianetics is not all that it’s reputed to be.” There is a rather odd plea
message buried in the article. Almost as if our hidden “they” were
offering Hubbard an out or a way back – if only he would come study
Dianetics their way. See what you think. It starts by referring back to
the Rollo May article, says that if Dianetics had offered itself as a
forward stop, “one which should bear careful examination, it probably
would be gratefully received.” with the implication that the reason it
wasn’t is because “they persisted in calling it the final step in mental
science” then Robert counters all his own criticism with the mind-
jamming statement of “I’ll withhold my opinion for a while”. After
pretty much giving it.
American Scientist October 1950 Autumn Issue Volume 38 Number 4
Article on Page 603-609 Sacred Cows in Collision
author Yvette Gittleson; section on Dianetics titled: De Profundis Via
Dianetics; Punchlines: “mechanical-brainanalogy is reflected at its
worst in a best-selling horror called Dianetics. […] Dianetics made its
debut in Astounding Science Fiction, which is where the reviewer
should leave it because that is where astounding science
fiction belongs.” Other items of interest: “In the first two months
following publication, about 20,000 copies of Dianetics were sold,
without benefit of advertising (in the conventional sense). During this
period, book review editors associated with serious publications gave
it a wide berth. On July 2, the New York Times broke the spell with a
three column review by Dr. Rollo May.”
October 1950 – Arthur Levine wrote responding to Red Boggs
attack/review from July 1950, his response appears in October
1950 Science Fiction Newsletter #17.
Orb, v. 2, issue 1, October? 1950, “Report from up yonder” insert by
then…… and didn’t quite know what to think of it…… It’s sorta hard
to get used to ‘living through an experience’ instead of remembering
little patches.” Then on p. 20 in where it looks like this was either
September 1 or 2 in Portland Oregon – Theodore (Ted) Sturgeon and
Forrest “Forrie” Ackerman began to speak about Dianetics. “I expect
about 250 or 275 people attended this.Unfortunately Forrie and
Ted both beat round the bush, without really hitting anything of
importance. It was intensely interesting to fans like myself who are
neophytes to Dianetics, but to the many more experienced people in
the room, it was a little tiring. I enjoyed every minute of it, however,
and I am positive that many others did. ” P. 23 talks about how
Bob got sick suddenly, and that he thought it was dianetic session
related. But it’s what Harry said that’s interesting, note how he makes
the ‘file clerk’ sound like an entirely separate person or thing than
Bob, which makes it seem that Harry knew that Hubbard actually
thought the “reactive mind” was composed of entities. (see Philip K.
Dick story a little later on here). “The second night we stayed at
Mountain Home, Idaho. Harry was planning to audit Heisner. While
we were starting to eat our dinner, I suddenly developed a terrific
sinus attack. Harry said it was my file clerk wanting attention so
it could be audited instead of Charles. Since Chas had priority, I
had to grin and bear it. While at the cafe, I had to ask for a hot towel
to hold against my face, the attack was so bad. Get this: I have never
had any trouble with my sinus in my life, outside of the occasional
clogging of head colds, and such. I have never experienced any pain
remotely as severe as I did at this time, Now, draw your own
conclusions about Dianetics being dangerous or not. […]
Somewhere, in the middle of a Helios or Vom, my sinus trouble was
forgotten, and therefore vanished.[…] The third night was spent in
Burgoyne, Idaho, where I was given a thorough auditing. Lots of
things were found out, but it seems like I have few engrams, but
scads of locks. ” One of the other things discussed in that story was
the deciding of where the next convention would be held and by
who. Harry B. Moore won the vote, and the next one would be held in
New Orleans.
Planet Stories November 1950: “Dianetics: A Door To The Future”.
James Blish gave a favorable assessment of Dianetics – the Blish
article starts on p. 104 of the PDF.
article by Ken Beale (Bronx, New York) refers to Lester Del Ray
having called dianetics “a kind of streamlined hypnotism”
but debunks that in an interesting way, “Unfortunately, this doesn’t
account for the fact that the insane, who according to modern
authority cannot be hypnotised without drugs, were given Dianetic
Therapy successfully.” citing editor John Campbel’s speech at the 4th
N.Y. conclave last May (1950).
1951 January 13 – Letter to the Editor of Jama by a Camarillo State
Hospital ghoul Dr. Samuel J. Ravitch. —Points: cult (uses 4 times)…
Science Fiction Magazine….. the staying power of chiropractic…
little scientific background to support it….first psychotic
breakdown occurred during such “auditing.” …dangers inherent
in such amateurish “auditing” …devotees of cults…fanatics…
religious fervor…exploitation of testimonials…dianeticized…
religious zeal…the good old chiropractic way…nonsensical
tomfoolery. – Samuel J. Ravitch, M.D. Box A, Camarillo,
Calif.” (JAMA; January 13, 1951, Vol 145, No. 2)—- Note: the article
listing for this journal pulls this one letter out as a separate listingjust
to highlight it!)
Spaceship #17 (1951?) Arthur Levine wrote a response in p. 8,
excerpted: “I can see that by initially reaching an audience of ASf
readers, Hubbard may have hoped to secure a relatively large
number of scientifically-minded, intelligent experimenters who would
not be handicapped by too large a background and belief in other
methods of psychotherapy.”
Nolacon Bulletin #1 March 1951 Harry Moore’s New Orleans Sci-fi
Convention – Nolacon planned for September 1951, began putting
out its own newsletters. Carried an article titled: Why
Dianetics? which is unfortunately incompletely preserved and cuts off
at the bottom. Harry announced: “With the increasing weight of
evidence that Dianetics works on the individual and for the group,
your committee has seen fit to schedule a symposium on the
subject at your convention.” Mentions something called ultra safe
“Hurdy-Gurdy” processing.
Spaceship issue #12 – April 1951 The Master. In All Our Yesterdays
31: Spaceship by Harry Warner Jr., Harry said that he was being
helped (co-edited) with Spaceship by another Brooklyn fan, Saul
Diskin who left to go to college late in 1951.
Marvel Science Stories May 1951 contained positive articles on
dianetics from L. Ron Hubbard and Theodore Sturgeon –
1951 May 1 – release of supposed April 15 – FORGERY

“letter” from Hubbard to Sara —May 1, 1951 titled: “Letter indicates
Dianetics founder, baby fled to Cuba”. also see (Exhibit 5 Leo
Bartemeier Council on Mental Health AMA files – article: Dianetics
Chief, Ill in Cuba, Defies Wife(Folder #4 on p. 5.) Points: hopelessly
insane…paranoid schizophrenic
ODD magazine #9 In what looks to be early 1951, April or May after
Harry’s announcement in March (whoever made the PDF has the
date wrong because it’s talking about Nolacon which hadn’t
happened yet) Creep, Creep, Creep, go the agitators behind the
scenes and then – “Duggie” and “Rich” (Richard Elsberry) in a
section called Nothing Serious by Elsberry, were all fired up and
complaining about Dianetics being at the upcoming Nolacon, They
appear to be soliciting attacks and trying to drum up anti-support. I
think it’s Richard doing the tirading about it, and he specifically refers
to Harry Moore, the backer of the convention as a “dianetics backer”.
At the end Duggie adds “(((YES, what about you? If you have any
views about this question, we will be glad to print all that space will
allow for in our next issue.)))”
Spaceship #12 – It looks to me that Hubbard or one of his friends
may have become aware of this Saul Diskin crap, because in the
last issue that Diskin co-edited #12 (came out some
time before the July 1951 issue), there was an article from B.
Chandler “giving cautious approval to the use of dianetics, after 23
hours of processing” and recommended to other fans to try the
discipline with care. Harry Warner noted that similar stories about
LSD had been being tested in the fanzines, which is interesting since
LSD experimentation was still Top Secret under Projects CHATTER
and BLUEBIRD then. Silverberg, or maybe we’d be more accurate
saying its Saul Diskin? had jumped right on the bandwagon in this
issue, positioning Dianeticians such as Chandler thusly: “The lunatic
fringe is here in fandom, and we’ve been forced to put up with them
and laugh at their antics,” Bob wrote. To me, this is Saul’s influence,
and yet another nail in the coffin cementing the idea that Dr.
Wertham, Austin Smith, and his pet bulldog Oliver Field are just all
over the pulps and fanzines, infiltrating them. That is exactly the kind
of thing they did, got other authors to do their dirty work to make it
look more like it was everywhere and not an organized, solicited,
campaign. Dr. Wertham, himself an Igor-type, was asked to attack
Hubbard and Dianetics and he did.
Nolacon Bulletin #2 July 1951 It looks to me that the Austin
Smith/Oliver Field duo is hard at work trying to disrupt the scheduled
symposium on Dianetics. Harry points out that Norwescon (the
Portland one that Bob Johnson attended) “didn’t prevue their session
on Dianetics” and that “It was one of the two with the highest
attendance.” Harry notes that now (since March) he has “a dozen or
so guys” that simply “WILL NOT PLAY unless we agree to play it all
their way. We can’t have even one 1-2-hour seminar or they will stay
away.” There’s more interesting points as well, but this whole
“rejection” pseudo-grass roots campaign sounds…organized to me.
Spaceship #13 July 1951 Apparently there was a new approach
thought up, probably because people weren’t quite falling for all this
staged “follow the pied piper” criticism of Boggs, Silverberg/Diskin et
al. p. 22 has an interesting supposed “counterblast from a non-
skeptic”. Marion Z Bradly writes: “Ron Hubbard was a qualified s-f
writer and also a qualified scientist. Whether or not you agree with
his dianetics follery, his article was interesting and reasonable logical
and his NAME ALONE is a high drawing-card. (Or was, previous to
the Engram racket.)” She also positions Hubbard with Rosicrucians.
If you look at this sampling of ads in fanzines from AMORC
(rosicrucians) at the Havelin Collection – They started their
digitalization project in 2015 – it’s actually pretty interesting as to
Dianetics claims and especially the later Scientology “advanced”
levels.
Interjection –

guess.
Nolacon I: A Torrid Affair September 1-3 1951 by Sam Moskowitz

Nolacon I, New Orleans. “In the morning, after an opening address
abou how the atomic age isn’t so bad and an address by Sam
Moskowitz, “A real donnybrook developed, kindled by those
who did not want to permit a scheduled session on Dianetics to be
held. It finally went on, retaining 27 people.”. You can see photos
from the Nolacon here. I’ve pulled some out that I think are relevant
and also aren’t probably known about by Scientology historians.
Photos of Harry B. Moore, Theodore Sturgeon, Forrest “Forrie”
Ackerman, L Ron Hubbard’s literary agent, Sam Merwin, friend of L.
Ron Hubbard
“Science Fiction Bookcase” Amazing Stories, Nov. 1951: 158-59.
Sky and Fear.
The Warrior’s Choice in Galaxy Novel #16, in mid to late 1951 James
Blish also did a rather tongue-in-cheek story lampooning the
depictions of Hubbard as a “cult” leader then saturating the press
(courtesy of Austin Smith, JAMA editor and his pitbull George Field).
It was a fanzine story called The Warrior’s Choice in Galaxy Novel
#16, in mid to late 1951. He described his character as the “red-
haired man” who was one of the “Council” (p. 33) and then directly
called him Elron (p. 35). I decided to do my own review of the story
just now, and as it turns out others characterizations of it are
completely off. And I mean WAY off. As I suspected, the character of
Hubbard is positioned with Mahrt, the opponent of the “giants” called
Warriors of the Day who act omnipotent but aren’t and how they are
against Mahrt and Elron and are afraid of “Mahrt”. That’s the first
thing, now I’ll make a few notes of key points. Xota was a totally
telepathic world, all living things down to blades of grass. Tipton was
the “chosen of Mahrt” somehow transported from Earth to Xota.
Meeting the council: both men were described as having “postures
that bespoke years of command worn easily and well.” Tipton is told
that “Mahrt is the embodiment of all the forces of mental darkness
and evil.” The “Warriors of the Day” are described as the “advancing
hordes of an interstellar civilization, spreading inward from the
outermost limb of the galaxy. Unless something unguessable can be
done, they will engulf Xota as they have engulfed a thousand other
worlds.” Mahrt is actually the key enemy of these “warriors”. Tipton
and the talking giant cat have an argument, Tipton ends up on the
warriors ship where they say they inventedthe myth of Mahrt as part
of figuring out militarily how to defeat a totally telepathic planet. He
with Mahrt, he teleports back to Mahrts temple. “What about Elron?”
Tipton says to the girl he meets in the temple, as to what his standing
is about Mahrt. “He has all the earmarks of a ‘suspect everything’
personality, and from what I’ve been able to observe of his
intelligence, should be more dangerous than Yrinon and Lanja
together. I wouldn’t back him against Chrestos, I don’t think, but
against the two humans he’s a sure thing.” The girl answers
that Elron is our high priest. They go to Elron who wants Tipton put
in irons and wants to kill him in a ritual. At the ritual, Mahrt inhabits
Tipton, things don’t go as planned. Elron hoped to be the “sword” and
was humiliated that Tipton was instead. Now here is a direct parallel
to real life – the book says: “When a man has built up an elaborate
organization, founded in the hope of perpetuating itself forever,
the arrival of an event which promises to deprive that
organization of meaning within a year or so could hardly be
Oliver Field backed moves to destroy the HDRF. Blish speaks of a
myth system, where Hubbard as Elron is “far more a servant of the
Warriors than any other person on Xiota” which is perhaps Blish
recognizing the Hubbard then covert CIA involvement. Then
there’s an interesting discussion of the Warriors corrupting the
telepathic Xotans with the cult of Mahrt, “the evil god who sleeps in
the back of every telepathi’s brain.” The real Mahrt grants Tipton the
power of “the sleeping planetary mind” needing “never again fear the
psychic probes of the Warriors of the day.” There’s various battling
and another visit with the warriors to rescue the girl and then the
story turns and Tipton is really Mahrt and he had created himself as
a fragment, suppressed the memory and now needed to rejoin
because of the suppression of the I am We are Mahrt collective mind.
It continues, sounding like something out of an acid trip (LSD). Then
the “fist” of Mahrt struck and broke the Warriors of the day. Long
story short, the supposed railing against Hubbard as “high priest” of
the “cult of Mahrt” was actually a very, very subtle lampooning of
OTHER forces at work in regarding human potentiality, plus a
collective “God” imagery mixed in, to boot. It ends with a “new
Sword” was being forged…a Kodiak bear, to strike against the
suppression of knowledge of a “racial consciousness”. Ending
with: “On Earth, a whimpering creature stirs, and opens too-wise
eyes upon the forests of the great North. It is tiny now, but in later
years it will be great; and a trail to nowhere awaits it. -A Kodiak
bear.” That’s entirely possible to be a reference to the spiritualsubject
Hubbard was then in the process of forming in 1951, Scientology, put
together with the old Kodiak bear story Hubbard liked to tell or…it’s a
reference to something much older based in the North that I won’t go
into right now. You can read more about how Blish’s story was
resurrected and twisted beyond recognition to be Elron Elray and
the Galactic Federation by Captain Bill Robertson (Ron’s Org, the so-
called “freezone Scientologists” currently led by Max and Erica Hauri,
whom my husband Mike McClaughry once accurately characterized
as a trap for people leaving the Church of Scientology) and a
previous Stanford Research Insitute pal of CIA remote-viewer
program leader Hal Puthoff.
Science Fiction Stories #2 in 1954. The Turning WheelPhilip K. Dick
did quite the seriously twisted take-off from Blish’s story.The whole
story is very weird, it seems to be some sort of intentional positioning
of Hubbard as a caucasian “god” with futuristic Red China. There’s
talk of sterilization of the “caucs” by one of the bards, etc. The first
mention is a religious saying: “Elron be with you.” The chinese-styled
character of the story is one of the “Bards” were at the top of a caste
system. They were “holy men who guided man to clearness.” Refers
to Elron Hu who lived in “the hideous days of the Time of
Madness.” with a VERY weird picture of the great hairy/spider eye of
Hubbard presiding over the Dinosaurs age.Scientology OT levels
scholars might find one of the passages interesting because as
Sung-wu, one of the Bards, starts instructing some lowest caste
Tinkerist in the way of Elron-Hu – the first two catechisms are: “First!”
snapped Sung-wa. “Who are you?”
“Second! What are you? And the tenth is “Clearness!” (just after
Ninth, which is about death). Which seems to be positioning that one
can’t be Clear unless they die.In 1950, Hubbard’s Dianetics book
talked about “demon circuits”. A couple of years later, Hubbard
revealed he really meant those were spirits which he initially called
entities or “theta bodies”. (see this post) Later, he resurrected this as
part of what he called advanced operating levels – OT 3 for short –
1967 where he now called them body thetans. Around two decades
later, David Mayo was sent to “audit” a sick L. Ron Hubbard in the
1980’s. The procedures developed by David Mayo are known as
New Era Dianetics for Operating Thetans – NED for OTs, or
(demons). It was said that a body thetan could consider themselves
to be any body part – a hair, lung, blood cell, etc. Therefore the new
questions were – 1. What are you? 2. Who are you?The body
thetan was then supposed to realize he was himself and leave the
body. The NOTs series of issues were written by David Mayo, not by
L. Ron Hubbard. The original OT levels were replaced with the new
OT levels for OT 4, 5, 6 and 7. (Scientology Roots Chapter 17) —
Dick’s story ends with a rather thinly veiled positioning image of a cult
(Dianetics) of followers worshipping a sci-fi space ship, positioned
with (Hubbard) Elron Hu.
And there you have it.
Before we do our final Thorvald/Austin/Oliver Black PR campaign

analysis,
I had promised earlier that I would bring together all the timeline entries
so we’re going to do that now,
plus adding just about every other item of significance from the main
article.
Master Timeline
Introduction to first (earliest) entries:
Of Two Minds – Two Beings.
Here and there in history, few and far between, there have been men
and women who did start going in the right direction and they were
always viciously attacked or at the very least marginalized and/or forced
OFF that particular course. I’ll probably write more in-depth on this one
day, but here’s an example. If you take a look at this post of mine, you’ll
see an absolutely amazing description from the 1800’s by a man named
– Dr. George Calvin Pitzer. He was born 1835 and died 1909 in Los
Angeles. He helped found the American Medical College. That was
one of the schools that was destroyed in Flexner’s rampage of hate
against such things.
1898 – George C. Pitzer wrote a book called Suggestion – this is within

the time period where the British had been “investigating” telepathy and
other abilities through the Cecil’s-formed (spy family since the time of
Queen Elizabeth) Society for Psychical Research. A school was formed
around Pitzer’s experiences with what he called the ‘subjective’ mind,
called The St. Louis School of Suggestive Therapeutics and Medical
Electricity.—what is his definition of suggestion? “…in the treatment
of disease, we mean the presentation of ideas to the mind of the
patient…”—You can clearly see the DRUGS clash and especially –
COMPETITION TO BRITISH OPIUM TRADE – on p. 26 where Pitzer
addresses attackers of hypnotism: “They know that opium and
morphine, chloral and cocaine are ruining, actually killing their
hundreds every year; yet, while they can tell us of no deaths nor other
disastrous results coming directly from the legitimate use of
hypnotism, they keep on dosing their patients with chloral and
morphine, and warn us against hypnotism as a dangerous
thing.” See Why China article for a history of British (and Vatican)
slavemasters utter perfidy in dominating the opium trade. Pitzer
defines hypnosis: “Hypnosis is the state in which the subjective mind
is uppermost, and the objective mind is partially or totally in
abeyance—drowsy or sound asleep.“ — You will note that
what Hubbard later tripped over is that there is no need to put
anyone to “sleep” to access the other “mind” or being. Now THAT is
very scary to slavemasters because it’s hard to attack as being
hypnosis – which is why they hypocritcally tried so hard to do exactly
that – accuse Dianetics of being hypnosis. I have had Dianetics and I
was never “asleep” in any form whatsoever. Closing one’s eyes
doesn’t mean you are asleep.—Pitzer’s definition of
“unconscious” or “subjective mind” that isn’t unconscious — “The
subjective mind is a distinct entity. It occupies the whole human body.”
as opposed to the “objective” or “awake” mind”—Did you know
that union-of-the-two was actually the original point of hypnosis back
then? Of course, as usual, coming from the arrogant I’m-better-than-
you-and-won’t-even-acknowledge-you-exist mentality, that didn’t always
come out quite like how some people planned. But that union though,
that was a very real desire.====Some of what Pitzer wrote is downright
amazing in its prescience. He walks right along the line of what I have
just been telling you and that would not do in the hands of the
“commoners”, at all – from the slavemasters perspective. I highly
suggest you look over that section of my post because contained in
what he was presenting, even though “off” with the idea of needing
sleep, lay the real reason he was targeted. He was veering
dangerously close to the truth that has been suppressed for
centuries=====
1900 – Pitzer moved his school to Los Angeles, California in 1900 –The
LA Times ad linked to there, notes that: Suggestion, without
antagonizing them, supersedes Christian Science, Mental Science,
Divine Science, Metaphysical Healing, Magnetic Healing, and all other
mental or faith-cure methods of healing disease.
1903 –OF TWO MINDS –Fredric Myers, British Society of Psychical

Research book summing up 25 years of study—-…Is there for us also
any possibility of a like resurrection into reality and day? Is there for us
any sleep so deep that waking from it after the likeness of perfect man
we shall be satisfied; and shall see face to face; and shall know even as
also we are known? (The Human Personality and Its Survival of Bodily
Death by Frederic Myers Volume I – 1903) —No. It is not SLEEP or
some drugged up unaware state that is needed. That much I’ll say for
the moment. Just like Hubbard, Robertson, Walter and I imagine a host
of others throughout history, watch British Society of Psychical
Research man, Fredric Myers, do the exact same flinch, the exact
same running way to a more “comfortable theory.” —First, let me show
you how he recognizes there is someone else there. From Fredric
Myers 700+ pages book set published in February 1903 –
note: Beneath is a reference to what Fredric Myers called the subliminal
mind, what some call today the subconscious mind.”That some guess
of a more continuous consciousness, of an identity unmoved and stable
beneath the tossing of the psychic storm, must needs have been
suggested by all those strange interruptions?” (The Human Personality
and Its Survival of Bodily Death by Frederic Myers Volume I) An
identity, ie: a PERSON. One who is UNMOVED and stable – despite
everything you do to it. I think that’s beautiful. A truly magnificent being
to stay so true to their “job”, their selves, all this time. Wouldn’t you say?
Enough to make some people feel they might not quite be living up
to their end of the bargain.— Here’s Myers talking about the
‘subliminal’ self, versus some other self, you understand. “The
subliminal (or ultra-marginal) mental life is sufficiently complex and
continuous to justify us in speaking of a subliminal Self. ‘ (The Human
Personality and Its Survival of Bodily Death by Frederic Myers Volume
I )— Now watch him flinch and run away from that truth – and
invent the same wrong-headed theory about MULTIPLE beings. He
starts pushing (fact-slipping) that this other ‘self’ is some kind ‘complex’
of lives – aka demons. “…each man is essentially a spirit,
controlling an organism which is itself a complex of
lower and smaller lives.…the man of genius …effects a successful co-
operation of an unusually large number of elements of his personality —
reaching a stage of integration slightly in advance of our own. (The
Human Personality and Its Survival of Bodily Death by Frederic Myers –
Volume II)—-Notice that now instead of there being another self? Or
person? It’s an organism. And…it’s a COMPLEX of LOWER – see the
arrogant attitude – and SMALLER – more arrogance – lives.
1906 – AMA – So where does this special Bureau of Investigation come

in? It had been formed before the Flexner rape-and-pillage of American
medicine, by…a Brit. Why am I not surprised. Well, anyway, it was
formed in 1906, under the name “Propaganda Department”, headed by
Arthur J. Cramp, MD. “The department prepared abstracts of
government reports on the chemical composition of nostrums seized in
interstate commerce.” (JAMA article) —What the heck
are nostrums? 1) a medicine, especially one that is not considered
effective, prepared by an unqualified person OR 2) a pet scheme or
favorite remedy, especially one for bringing about some social or
political reform or improvement. Clearly they started out meaning the
first one, but later years brought increased activity to the department,
whose name was changed to the Bureau of Investigation in
1925. Then the bureau added other forms of “quackery” to its
investigations.Example of an actual quack investigation by Oliver Field
in 1954. —Right from the beginning that’s one of the main things that
the JAMA was used for – sort of a WHO IS IN and WHO IS OUT
game. As soon as Cramp was hired on as an editor of the Journal of the
American Medical Association, he began contributing regular pieces
about quackery to it….Cramp believed in what he once called “public
education through publicity” (Cramp 1920, 788), and he believed that
“the best that the medical profession can do in protecting the public is to
turn the light on the methods of the faddist and the quack, so that his
ignorance or fraud becomes apparent” (Cramp 1927b, 727–728). This
was the mission of the Propaganda for Reform Department, which
became the Bureau of Investigation in 1925 and the Department of
Investigation in 1958 (Hafner et al. 1992, viii). (JAMA article)
1905-1910 In the early half of the 20th century, a coup was organized
on the medical research facilities, hospitals and universities. The
Rockefeller family, ye ole step-n-fetch-its of the actual slavemasters,
sponsored research and donated sums to universities and medical
schools which had drug based research. Establishments and
research which were were not drug based were refused funding and
soon dissolved in favor of the lucrative pharmaceutical industry. In 1939
a “Drug Trust” alliance was formed by the Rockefeller empire and the
German chemical company I.G. Farben (Bayer). After World War II, I.G.
Farben was dismantled but later emerged as separate corporations
within the alliance. Since WWII, the pharmaceutical industry has
steadily netted increasing profits to become the world’s second largest
manufacturing industry; after the arms industry. Abraham Flexner was
empowered to investigate the quality of medical education in all 161
medical schools that existed in 1910. He helped destroy the credibility
and funding sources for nearly all schools using non-drug based
medicine. 161 medical schools dwindled down to 81 by 1919 and
medical graduates declined from 5,747 to 2,658. “Overcrowding” of the
profession became the public AMA theme for the “opportunities of those
already in the profession to acquire a livelihood.” said one AMA
President at the time.— The AMA also practiced severe
discrimination against black medical schools and black doctors. They
did not apologize for this for over 150 years, until July 2008. (Exploring
the AMA’s History of Discrimination, 2008) […] you find that in 1910, the
American Medical Association commissioned a report of all medical
schools. They were very interested in lowering the number of
physicians. They wanted to raise the professional stature of physicians,
and they wanted to do that by exclusion. They commissioned Abraham
Flexner to go to every medical school in the U.S. and Canada and
make an assessment — basically which medical schools should and
should not be encouraged to continue. When Flexner did this, he
deemed every black medical school substandard and recommended
they all be closed, except for two, Howard and Meharry.And he also
went beyond that to stipulate that black physicians should only treat
black patients, that black physicians should have their roles curtailed.
And he warned that an essentially untrained Negro bearing an MD label
is dangerous. So he looked on all black physicians with a jaundiced
eye. His recommendations were prophetic. All the black schools except
for Howard and Meharry closed — they could not attract funding any
longer because of the damning indictment of them. And black
physicians were indeed kept from specialties like surgery. They were
kept from research.—In general, schools and doctors were asked if they
would (or did) practice “modern scientific medicine” – translation- Did
they use DRUGS.
1909 – Slavemasters rampage of hate against medical methods that

challenge their “supremacy” – The Flexner report trashes one of the
schools that George Pitzer was a professor at. Flexner graded
American [the school Pitzer helped found] along with several other
Missouri medical schools as “utterly wretched” following his visit in
1909.– American Medical College, Barnes Medical College, and
National University of Arts and Sciences Collection—You can read the
Flexner report here – Missouri starts on page 269. Judging from its
review of American Medical College (Eclectic) as “utterly wretched” on
p. 276, you’ll see that “eclectic” clearly wasn’t part of the future planned
program. Flexner’s report didn’t exactly rate Pitzer’s Suggestion
school directly, but from what I understand, was his way of having it
be beneath rating. You can at least see it mentioned in the list of
Missouri schools evaluated though, in this Report of the Missouri
Medical Association July 1911 to June 1912, just after the Flexner
report came out in 1910. It mentions Pitzers school on p. 34.—Note that
Pitzer had actually moved to Los Angeles, California in 1900, so that’s
interesting that they’re even still talking about it.
1914 – WWI – just before WWI, Fredric Wertham spent quite a bit of
time in England taking medical courses at King’s College, London
University. He liked to read Fabian Societywritings and Karl Marx in his
spare time and worked wth the British on treating soldiers “mentally
scarred” from battle. (shell shock) Interestingly enough, he would have
run into Dr. Winfred Overholser during this time period, because that’s
exactly what HE was doing during WWI. Overholser was in
France “treating soldiers mentally scarred in battle…as Lieutenant in
the Neuro-psychiatric Section of the U.S. Army Medical Corps from
February 1918 to June 1919…” Both Overholser and Wertham would
have also become well aquainted with British psychiatrist (called
alienists sometimes back then) John Rawlings Rees who was brought
into the British Army to treat soldiers suffering from shell shock. They
called it battle neurosis when the soldiers did not want to kill and be
killed. Notice the later corollary to diagnosing that man schizophrenic
because he didn’t want to kill any more people. (The German man we
talked about earlier) –What were they doing with these supposedly
insane soldiers? They were using abreactive therapy on the soldiers
who had developed “battle neurosis”. (Freud Encyclopaedia edited by
Edward Erwin) —They also used electric shock on the soldiers to “cure”
their lack of desire to kill other men, women and children. They attached
electrodes to the ‘patients’ body and then delivered electric shocks of
up to 20,000 volts for one second each, repeated ten to twenty times
daily. (Madhouse: A Tragic Tale of Megalomania and Modern Medicine
by Andrew T. Scull) — The Shaping of Psychiatry by War by John
Rawlings Reese, 1945: In World War I the British army had a
“consulting psychologist” and a number of neurologists. Many of them,
in fact, were psychiatrists. They were brought into the army’s machinery
in response to the critical situation created by the wave of battle
neurosis at first called “shell shock.” … Doctor Thomas Salmon came
over to England in 1917… The main concern of psychiatrists in the last
war was with treatment and they were very successful in treating battle
neurosis just behind the lines and in tackling the more resistant cases in
base hospitals. …the best results with the war neuroses are obtained
when they have active treatment. “Psychosurgery” in the shape
of abreaction followed by simple re-education should as a rule
precede a period of rest under narcosis. [That euphemistic description
is hiding that means they DRUGGED them into a coma] There is,
however, no question that the general method of abreaction followed
by sedation is applicable to many cases in civilian life, particularly in
psychosomatic conditions, and it is well worth further experiment. That
means, psychotherapy WITH DRUGS and “shock” therapies. Exactly
what Wertham would be a major proponent of later on, as was Dr.
Overholser.
1916 – LEO BARTEMEIER later head of AMA Council on Mental Health

— What was Leo Bartemeier’s masters dissertation at the Catholic
University of America? It was titled: Doctrine of Pleasure-Pain and
Learning. (Catholic University Bulletin Volumes 21-22; 1916) Note: In
Freudian psychoanalysis, the pleasure principle (German: Lustprinzip)
is the instinctive seeking of pleasure and avoiding of pain. Right on cue
with ye ole Jesuits goals.
1920 Tavistock – Cementing the British connection to these two here,

after WWI, my husband’s The Reckoning chapter Down the Mental
Health Rabbit hole, documents that in 1920 John Rees and pals formed
the Tavistock Institute of Medical Psychology (aka Tavistock Clinic). The
plan was that the treatment used on soldiers was going to be used on
society – social psychiatry was born. 3, 75, 76 And, just as in 1954 when
Wertham would use as his infiltration point of children as a publicly
“acceptable” victim for the “evils of comics”, according to John Rawlings
Rees it was child psychiatry that they started with at the Tavistock
Clinic. A think of the poor childrenroutine, you understand. —It should
be kept very clear in your mind that this BRITISH plan was
literally the blueprint for what both Wertham and Overholser would later
champion in the U.S.
1920’s – Wertham background as detailed in the 1954 Senate Hearings

(p. 80) 1922-29 Psychiatrist at Adolf Meyer Phipps Psychiatric Clinic,
Johns Hopkins Hospital and University. 1926-28 chief resident
psychiatrist, Johns Hopkins Hospital.1926-29 assistant in charge of the
Menal Hygiene clinic, Johns Hopkins Hospital, taught psychiatry,
psychotherapy and brain anatomy at Johns Hopkins Medical School.
Do you know what the fact that he was in those positions at that
time means? It means Wertham was involved with training
the ghoulish Dr. Donald Ewen Cameron, who was an
absolute monster after this. Cameron left London for Baltimore,
Maryland, in 1926, to become assistantpsychiatrist at the Phipps
Clinic at Johns Hopkins Hospital…. Continuing his climb through the
academic ranks, he became an instructor in psychiatry there within two
years, holding a Henderson Research Scholarship. In Baltimore
Cameron worked under Adolf Meyer, perhaps his greatest influence… a
pragmatist who worked to improve the lot of mental patients, using any
approach that seemed to him sensible and practical. (I Swear By
Apollo; Gillmor p. 7-9)
1920’s – The AMA Therapy and Research Division or Therapeutical

Research as it was called back in the 1920’s, had to do with MONEY
for: “…the Trustees’ make an appropriation each year. This
appropriation is used forinvestigations and laboratory research in
the actions of drugs and pharmaceutical products. The results are
published is various medical journals…” Under “therapy and research”
comes all manner of horrific things. Anywhere from electro-shock and
insulin shock therapies to lobotomies and “thought reform” experiments
to electromagnetic field manipulation and genetic
engineering which when combined with drugs it then qualifies as
“research”. So that’s bad enough all by itself – this Therapy and
Research division. —So what is this Council on Pharmacy and
Chemistry? It was formed in 1905 to evaluate DRUGS and “various
medicinal preparations”. On February 23, 1957 they decided to be more
blunt about it and renamed the thing: The Council on Drugs. The
original founding rules noted that articles and research about new
drugs etc. would be submitted to the JAMA as the determination
point. Powerful position. You can just imagine how that selection
process of who gets highlighted and who doesn’t, went. Want public
promotion of your drug? 1. Gimme some scratch. 2. DO WE LIKE
YOU? cuz if we don’t…you’re outta here. — Real scientific.
It looks scientific, but that’s not what goes on behind-the-scenes. Items
1 and 2 above must be A-ok or it ain’t appearing in JAMA. —You see,
that Council had to accept the “new article” – as they also called the
drug or chemical. So this means, when all those nasty drugs like
Metrazol, Thorazine, etc. etc. came out? These guys had chosen
to accept it, then they promoted it, and then they get PAID for doing so.
One way or another. Here’s an example of new drugs “accepted” in
1955. There was a LOT of money involved in what the JAMA editor did.
I mean literally mountains of it.
1924 – Dr. Morris Fishbein becomes editor of JAMA from 1924 to

December 1949, when he appointed Austin E. Smith, his protege’ since
1940, to replace him.
1920’s and 1930’s – Germany – many people diagnosed

“schizophrenic” weren’t but were sterilized anyway. One example was a
man who objected to his role in WWI and had decided he wouldn’t
agree with killing others anymore. Though cogent, no signs whatsoever
of any mental problems, he was still diagnosed schizophrenic by the
institute and sterilized against his will. –Wertham explains what
Kraepelin meant by dementia praecox/schizophrenia. In World
Within(p.18) Fredric was quite clear in his support of labelling people
schizophrenic but it is what he said that Kraepelin meant by that, that is
particularly chilling.He said that schizophrenia does NOT mean split
personality, that Kraepelin was referring to a “coming-apart of special
psychological reactions” and that it’s called schizophrenia because “the
division of the most various psychic functions is one of its most
important attributes.” Here’s the key part – he says it means a “definitely
pathological emotional withdrawal from the environment with a
progressive blunting of the personality.” To illustrate just how chilling
this is, if we take the example of the man who objected to his role in
WWI and had decided he wouldn’t agree with killing others anymore
– you see just exactly what people like Wertham, Kraepelin, etc. meant
by “environment”. They mean rebelling against THEIR SOCIETY, not
agreeing to do THEIR AGENDA. And even though the man had no
signs whatsoever of any mental problems? He is classified as
schizophrenic because he disagrees with the slavemasters and their
war-mongering agenda. Now we know what is REALLY going on with
this damn “schizophrenic” label.
1930’s – Overholser and Wertham parallel paths – Dr. Winfred

Overholser was appointed director of the Division for the Examination of
Prisoners of the Massachusetts Department of Mental Diseases from
1925 to 1930. He was commissioner of the Massachusetts Department
of Mental Diseases, 1934-1936, where he helped enact the Briggs
Law which “provided for the prompt recognition of defendants who
should be in hospitals, thus preventing trial of mentally ill persons.”
(Overholser, Briggs Law 1935). He was removed by Governor James
M. Curley for abuses in the hospitals being exposed. Instead of being
prosecuted, in 1937 he was rewarded with an even bigger position as
superintendent of the government-run Saint Elizabeth’s Hospital,
Washington, D.C., where he remained until 1962. (Overholser Papers)
—Following directly in Overholser’s footsteps of work on forensic
psychiatry and helping get psychiatry into the U.S. court systems, the
1954 Senate Hearings (p. 80) show that from 1932-52 Wertham was
the senior psychiatrist of the New York City Department of Hospitals,
and that right away upon that appointment, he organized and became
director of the Psychiatric Clinic of the Court of General Sessions in
New York. The first clinic of its kind in the United States, where
he examined prisoners regarding competency for standing trial. At
the same time, from 1933-36 he was made the assistant to the director
of Bellevue Hospital; in charge of prison ward; in charge of children’s
psychiatric ward; in charge of alcoholic ward. —Along this “forensic
psychiatry” interest that Overholser and Wertham shared, it should be
noted that after WWII, Overholser would be backed to use the case
of Ezra Pound to get psychiatry fully into the American justice system,
allowing the “mentally unfit to stand trial” defense to be a valid one
which resulted in Pound getting out of treason charges. Pound was
given a private room at St Elizabeth’s and according to some, was
treated like royalty by the psychiatrist. It is now widely considered that
Overholser’s conclusions on Pound’s mental state were not only
wrong, but deliberately so. In yet another example of the
Overholser/Wertham duo, sometimes “looking” opposed, other times
not, Fredric played “bad cop” in this case and was quite vocal in his
supposed criticism of the Ezra Pound case findings.
1930’s through 2019 – AMA Blocking cancer and other disease

treatments – they do this to attack and stop any DISRUPTION of their
agenda, the portion of that agenda that deals with “planned” release of
DRUGS and TREATMENTS in such a way as to maximize profits and
control. You see where JAMA fits into that and what they do to stop or
control the speed of both research and cures. Now for some examples
of who Austin and Oliver will call “quack” – people who offer ANY way
of alleviating cancer and other life-threatening diseases that are not
controllable. — Example #1 – 1958 Dr. Min Chiu Li, the man who used
methotrexate – chemotherapy, in other words. After the first two
patients went into remission using Li’s treatment, they were presented
at NCI Grand Rounds at the Clinical Center. The subject of the rounds
was “the spontaneous regression of cancer”. Li was told that if he
persisted in using his radical treatment, he would be fired. He persisted,
he was fired.FOURTEEN YEARS later, when they had created the
monopolized drug patents off of HIS research, they gave Dr. Li the
Lasker prize.How many people died who didn’t have to because of that
delay? Too many. Example #2 –I believe it was a Japanese scientist
who actually perfected chemotherapy based on the large molecule
targeting system idea. What that means is this. The cancer cells have
big “mouths” or holes that they suck up nutrition from. Bigger than
normal cells. This scientist created a large molecule poison or
chemotherapy that only the cancer cells could “eat” with their big
hogging “mouths”. He had something like a 98 percent success rate on
brain tumor patients, one of the hardest to cure. The tumors shrunk
dramatically because they were literally being starved. More than
TWENTY YEARS later, they’re still dragging their feet on this type of
chemotherapy. Here’s another example article. How many people died
who didn’t have to because of that still ongoingdelay? Probably tens
of thousands of people at least. How much money is being poured into
their coffers from the current inferior form of chemotherapy? Billions and
Billions of dollars. WHY are they dragging their feet? In favor of even
MORE expensive genetic engineering – gene “therapy”, that’s
why. Example #3 — Lorenzo’s oil. Lorenzo had Adrenoleukodystrophy
– a rare genetic (inherited) disorder characterized by the breakdown or
loss of the myelin sheath surrounding nerve cells in the brain and
progressive dysfunction of the adrenal gland. Think of it like an electric
wire whose protective rubber or plastic sheathing is being destroyed.
You get unprotected “current” spilling out, not arriving at full strength
where it should while also spreading where it shouldn’t. But what was
breaking down the sheathing? Why was the body doing this? That was
the question that Lorenzo’s parents set themselves the task to figure
out, to save their son’s life. They studied all the available medical data
themselves and at one particular low point for the father, he gets told in
a dream what the problem is. He figures it out, then contacted over 100
firms around the world until they find an elderly British chemist, Don
Suddaby, willing distill the proper formula. The oil, erucic acid, proves
successful in normalizing the accumulation of the very long chain fatty
acids in the brain that had been causing their son’s steady
decline. Lorenzo’s Oil is a combination of a 4:1 mix of oleic acid (olive
oil) and that erucic acid. They found a kind of cure that slowed down
the disease and even restored some of Lorenzo’s body-damage. An oil.
A natural oil – not some patented drug. They were understandably
excited to share their find that was restoring their son to them. What
happened? The very same kinds of people, like Oliver Field, Austin
Smith of the AMA and the FDA not only tried to stop them from
researching it in the first place, they refused to help them and even
when they found Lorenzo’s Oil – refused to approve it!. Those that
sucked up to the Great Gods of the AMA and FDA, were just as bad,
as this scene from the Lorenzo’s Oil movie shows. There’s an
absolutely wonderful part of this scene @2:31 where the father was told
he was arrogant for thinking he could do better than the “doctors”, and
he passionately explains the actual real meaning of the word. It’s from
the Latin Arrogare – To claim for oneself. Lorenzo’s father says that
yes, he IS arrogant because: “I claim the RIGHT to fight for my kids life,
and no doctor […] has the RIGHT to stop me from asking questions
which might help me save him!” Hear, Hear. The FDA refused to
approve it for… what is it now? THIRTY FIVE years. Even as late as
2013 the foundation that distributed the oil was still trying to get FDA
approval for mass distribution etc., and today even though they are still
disributing it, the FDA won’t let them even ship it to anyone but a
physician. And in the meantime in 2018? The FDA is GRANTING the
big business engineered gene-therapy company Bluebird
BIO Breakthrough Therapyapproval designation for Lenti-D™ testing of
gene therapy for the disease Lorenzo had. What do they call this
study? Starbeam. What can we expect the price tag for this to be? We
can use the price tag for Bluebird Bio is currently charging. $1.8 million
dollars PER PATIENT. Think I’m kidding? Read this June 2019 article.
Bluebird’s CEO tries to justify this out-of-reach for
EVERYONE BUT THE RICHprice tag, by saying: “the one-time
treatment is a game changer for patients, giving them a “lifelong
benefit”” Think that’s the only one? It’s not. Spark
Therapeutics’ Luxturnagene therapy treatment for a hereditary eye
disease is running about $425,000—per eye! Novartis’ cancer cell
therapy, Kymriah, runs $475,000! Their ever-so generous solution to
this extraordinarily high price tag? A five year payment plan. Yea. Great.
I’ll take three. Do you know what they’re USING to do this gene therapy
study on Lorenzo’s disease? The HIV virus. “For the gene therapy, the
children had their own stem cells harvested from their blood rather than
bone marrow. Then, scientists used a unique tool to infuse the cells in a
lab with the healthy ABCD1 gene: a lentivirus made from a disabled
form of HIV. The lentivirus acts as a “vector,” carrying and inserting the
healthy gene into the stem cell DNA. “These vectors are kind of like
living medicines,” said Dr. David Williams, the chief scientific officer at
Boston Children’s Hospital and the senior author of the study. Once in
the body, these altered blood stem cells constantly regenerate to keep
treating the patient’s disease. The advantage of using disabled
HIV over other viral carriers is that HIV actually delivers the healthy
gene more safely, without apparently altering any neighboring DNA,
Williams told Live Science.” An ENGINEERED virus works better to
deliver ENGINEERED genes? Gee. Who woulda thunk it. Seems a bit
dangerous to be using the HIV virus at all, if you ask me. So, now you
know what the AMA and its attack dogs primary function is – to
protect the slavemasters plan, their power, and their fortunes – and of
course, THEIR health.
1932 – Wertham, over 11 years later, suddenly chose to bring up the

mescaline psychosis “biographical” method in a study published July
1932 titled: Inconstancy of the Formal Structure of the Personality –
Experimental Study of the Infleunce of Mescaline on the Rorschach
test; together with Manfred Blueler. THAT was the “first study on the
effects of mescaline” published in the U.S. “Behind every twisted
thought lies a twisted molecule.” (1994 interview, psychiatrist Leo
Hollister
quoted a line by Ralph Gerard from the 1950’s, saying it was the moral
for all of biological psychiatry.) See where DRUGSfits into this plan?
Note that Wertham is discussing the breakdown of personality using
mescaline, ergo trying to twist thought by introducing a “twisted
molecule” – mescaline. —The really scary-weird coinciding thing, to
me, is that within 2 years of his return from that rats nest in Munich, he
published a paper on mescaline, the very drug the Nazis would later
experiment with on prisoners in Dachau. Fredric already knew a LOT
about mescaline from having been at the Munich Institute in 1921
working directly with Kraepelin, Wertham’s hero. He most certainly
would have heard of Kurt Beringer’s mescaline study going on at
Kraepelin’s old stomping grounds, the Heidelberg University psychiatric
clinic. Beringer ran a programmed series of mescaline experiments that
ran for several years utilizing over sixty mostly male doctors or medical
students, and using doses of 200mg on up to even 600
mg. Beringer described the effects of mescaline in detail in the 1927
“The MescalineIntoxication” (Der Meskalinrausch) which established the
groundwork for the experimental psychosis.
1933-36 Per his own words and submitted C.V. to the Senate Hearing –
Wertham was made the assistant to the director of Bellevue Hospital; in
charge of prison ward; in charge of children’s psychiatric ward; in
charge of alcoholic ward. That means that Lauretta was working
and learning under himwhen she was made a director of the children’s
inpatient ward at Bellevue in 1934. Under Wertham, Bender merrily
began her brutal treatments of children, starting with insulin shock
therapy that she was particularly fond of doing to those diagnosed as
“childhood schizophrenia”, which today we call autism. Lauretta
herself had to repeat third-grade 3 times in her home town of
Butte,Montana, perhaps lending clarity to the source of her truly insane
treatment of other slow children. They would administer massive doses
of insulin to induce a coma in the children, six days a week for one-two
months usually, but in some cases Wertham and Bender did much
longer courses, years in fact. Before or during the coma, seizures
sometimes occurred. Children would toss, roll about, moan, and twitch
spasmodically, even vomit. Some of these children died from this
“therapy”. This is DEATH therapy, and just as the child was coming out
of it, finding out he isn’t dead, vulnerable, scared out of their minds, and
desperate for any kindness, there would be the twin Doctors of Death,
Wertham and Bender, ready to deliver their “lessons” they called
psychotherapy. When Overholser and others led the way in shifting
from insulin and metrazol shock to ECT in the early 1940’s, Bender
administered ECT to the children, maintaining that it was safe and
effective in “eliciting more appropriate behavior from children.” By the
mid-1950s, Bender estimated that more than 500 children at Bellevue
had received ECT, typically daily for a period of 20 days. When LSD,
other hallucinogenics and Thorazine came out, she used those too on
her victims.
1935 – Leo Bartemeier’s masters – Ugo Cerletti was “called” – meaning

by Pope Pius XI – and was appointed to Chair of the Department of
Mental and Neurological Diseases at the University of Rome and
director of its mental patient clinic. The University of Rome has always
been under the direct control of the Popes. Lucio Bini was Ugo’s
assistant. Short story – Ugo Cerletti was the Roman Catholic inventor of
Electro Convulsive Therapy. Ugo used electroshock to provoke epileptic
fits in animals. Many of the animals died. Schizophrenic epileptics
seemed less schizophrenic after an epileptic fit. Cerletti thought
producing convulsions in humans by electro shock, might be useful as a
treatment for schizophrenia. (Later in time that idea was proven wrong.)
1935 – Morris Fishbein took over for Cramp as JAMA editor in 1935.
1935 – The Rees plan was well begun. In 1934 William Sargant was
committed to a mental hospital. Lord Moran encouraged Sargant to take
up psychiatry, so in 1935, William Sargant (another ghoulish monster
psychiatrist) went to work at Maudsley Hospital, where he worked along
with psychiatrist John Rawlings Rees. Sargant used abreactive
therapy in conjunction with drugs and electroshock, just like John
Rees was doing during World War I.
1936-39- Wertham is director of the Mental Hygiene Clinic of Bellevue

Hospital. (1954 Senate hearings p. 80) 1936 happens to be the exact
same year that Dr. Sakel moved to New York and promoted the use of
insulin coma treatment in US psychiatric hospitals. Wertham is listed in
the encyclopedia as doing pioneering work combing insulin with
psychotherapy. It so happens that Wertham’s one-time student and
junior psychiatrist Ewen Cameron billed himself as the first
psychiatrist in North America to use insulin coma therapy on
schizophrenic patients in March of 1936 – according to Cameron and
Worcester State Hospital in Massachusetts year-end report. Meanwhile,
immediately upon becoming superintendent of St. Elizabeths,
Wertham’s tandem partner Dr. Overholser instituted insulin shock
therapy which promised “50 percent remissions”. (it was a lie, by 1941
the results were so abysmal he had to stop). Perhaps a more graphic
example of just what that “pioneering” by Cameron, Wertham and
Overholser was really about is in order. In each type of shock therapy,
the patient was induced into a state of shock/coma and then brought
back to consciousness. When slowly brought out of the insulin coma
with glucose injections, they said that “his or her personality would be
temporarily “readjusted” (what a euphemism) and Doctors would then
discuss problems with the patient in an attempt to “banish his
delusions”. That’s what they called this good heart-to-
heart psychotherapy. Remember what we learned that Therapy and
Research Division of the AMA did? It gave MONEY
for: “ investigations and laboratory research in the actions of drugs and
pharmaceutical products.” Like insulin shock therapy. So what
Wertham and Bender were doing to these children (and adults, for that
matter) was AMA-backed and at this time the Director would have been
Morris Fishbein (whom L. Ron Hubbard likes to call “Fishcake”) This
whole procedure (including using other similar shock or coma-inducing
procedures) has a nick name – DEATH “therapy” – otherwise known as
the core demonic belief of Catholicism. “The baptized one ‘dies’ to all
sin and is ‘reborn’ in Christ. Aka artificially brought mentally
to amentia (retardation). They would all do this to soldiers returned from
the war with “shell shock” who weren’t recovering fast enough (meaning
wanting to go kill some more)
1937 – Leo Bartemeier’s masters – It was that same man, Pope Pius
XI, Pacelli’s (Pius XII) mentor, who said that there is a Spiritual Battle
for the minds of men (Pius XI) —for the evil we must combat is at its
origin primarily an evil of the spiritual order. From this polluted
source the monstrous emanations of the communistic system flow
with satanic logic.– Pope Pius XI DIVINI REDEMPTORIS (On Atheistic
Communism) 19 March 1937 —Another way of saying “spiritual” is
mental – in the sense of you are talking about the unseen realm of Man.
His thoughts, his heart, his mind, so to speak. What this Pope is
saying is that is what he wants the focus on. The MINDS of man. His
DECISIONS. Which also happens to be the realm of (and the reason
for) propaganda in the first place. Jesuits (and the top Catholic leaders)
are ALL about messing with people’s minds. That’s their real
goal actually.—…[The Jesuit Society] it seeks to rival the Divinity in
its knowledge of the human heart. From the contemplation of this
pious work, we will turn to the famous Constitutions of the Society. The
Institute of the Jesuits is contained in fifteen distinct works; the book of
the Constitutions being the groundwork of the system: strongly, deeply
built; with a knowledge of mental architecture unsurpassed, except
in the Spiritual Exercises of the same cunning Builder. Subsequent
Rules, Decrees, Canons, &c., are stated to have ‘resulted from the spirit
of the Institute, which they are intended to uphold and enforce. The
Novitiatewritten in 1846 by former ‘novice’ Jesuit Andrew Steinmetz
1938 April – Leo Bartemeier’s masters – It was Pius XI, with Pacelli
right by his side, that gave the world ECT as a “cure” for and a solidarity
with using it on people labeled“schizophrenic”. In April 1938, Ugo
Cerletti first used ECT on a human patient, diagnosed as schizophrenic.
Ugo used a patient he had previously experimented on at Mombello
Asylum – his name was Enrico. Ferdinando Accornero was one of the
students observing and he provides an eyewitness account. That same
year (with Pius XII’s approval) our man Leo Bartemeier here,
became the first Catholic training analyst (in that period analysis was
not in favor in many Catholic clerical circles, and Catholicism was not in
particularly good order with the analysts).
1939-52 — Wertham is Consulting psychiatrist, Triboro Hospital, New

York City; 1939-1952 Director, Psychiatric Services and Mental Hygiene
Clinic, Queens General Hospital. (1954 Senate hearings p. 80)
Wertham had a fight with his boss at Bellevue and gets transferred to
Queens General Hospital Mental Hygiene Clinic. At first, Wertham
appeared rather demoralized and forlorn. He wrote to his Phipps Clinic
mentor Dr. Meyer: “I am longing for a position where I could use my
gradually acquired facility for organizing, teaching and research and
clinical work…give up psychiatry altogether.” (Under the Strain of Color,
Mendes) Ah, but never fear. George White is about to show up literally
almost right on top of him, plus, he would soon hire and strike up a
friendship with child psychiatrist Hilde L. Mosse, who was a character
unto herself. —A couple of years later, a 2015 NY
Times article indirectly spills the beans about what Wertham would have
been doing with psychiatric patients at Queens General. The article is
talking about how in October 1941, the Times had reported on
the opening of several new buildings at Hillside Hospital in Queens
(today called Zucker Hillside Hospital). As was the wont in those days,
hospitals that used insulin treatments referred to themselves as having
“pioneered” that and other shock treatments. “The hospital has
pioneered in the use of insulin and metrazol, and also in the electric
shock treatment, which has proved useful in shortening the average
stay of patients,” the article read.
1939 – George Hunter White right on top of Wertham’s location –

George’s FBI file (p. 1) details his addresses in New York starting in
1937 through 1941. One of his address is in Queens, the one for 1939-
40 that says 65th Avenue Forest Hills New York. — That’s practically
a hop, skip and a jump from where Wertham was. See Wikipedias list of
hospitals addresses for the hospitals Wertham was at—Notes: Shortly
after the Hip Sing Tong bust in December of 1937, George found
himself promoted to the Federal Bureau of Narcotics (the FBN) New
York City office – a ‘plum’ job.Gee. You know, right where Wertham is.
1939 – Wertham’s papers show that he had two folders categorized
under “Research files” on the topic of marijuanastarting in 1939 and
going well into the 1970’s. Dr. Fishbein/Harry Anslinger/George Hunter
White/Truth Drug committee – I would surmise this had to have been
related to Harry Anslinger’s Federal Narcotics Bureau/Treasury
Department crusade to get revenue from marijuana by taxing it, starting
in 1937. That was NOT an innocent situation, see George Hunter
White: The Early Years.—Morris Fishbein, JAMA editor, was helping out
Anslinger with this CONTROL OF DRUGS game. “The problems of
greatest menace in the United States seem to be the rise in the use of
Indian hemp (marihuana) with inadequate control laws, and the
oversupply of narcotic drugs available in the Far East threatens to
inundate the western world.” (Dr. Fishbein’s JAMA editorial of 23
January titled: Opium Traffic in the United States 1937 – as quoted
in Hearings on TAXATION OF MARIHUANA H.R. 6385) —Fishbein also
specifically positions marijuana as an equal menace to opium –-
Please be aware that as is now medically well-known, Marijuana helps
with pain from cancer, with Glaucoma, and a number of other things.
That was being suppressed by Fishbein and Anslinger. —contrast that
with the fact that Fishbein approves of the medical use of marijuana in
psychotherapy in his editorial, as evidenced by his representative, Dr.
Woodward at the hearings: I know of none. That use, by the way, was
recognized by John Stuart Mill in his work on psychology, where
he referred to the ability of Cannabis or Indian hemp to revive old
memories, and psychoanalysis depends on revivification of
hidden memories.”George White’s boss Anslinger went even further in
this crusade he was tasked to do. He wrote an article for the American
Magazine in July of 1937. [marijuana is] …as dangerous as a coiled
rattlesnake.How many murders, suicides, robberies, criminal assaults,
holdups, burglaries, and deeds of maniacal insanity it causes each year,
especially among the young, can be only conjectured. …No one knows,
when he places a marijuana cigarette to his lips, whether he will
become a philosopher, a joyous reveler in a musical heaven, a mad
insensate, a calm philosopher, or a murderer. … They were not told
that addicts may often develop a delirious rage during which they are
temporarily and violently insane; that this insanity may take the form of
a desire for self-destruction or a persecution complex to be satisfied
only by the commission of some heinous crime.– Marijuana: Assassin
of YouthThe American Magazine Volume 124, July 1937—I’m sure
that you recognize the exact same grandstanding and even along
the exact same lines that Wertham did regarding comic books
later. This connection between Anslinger, George White, and Wertham
and comics goes even further though. In my George White article I
document how George White spins this whole tale of capturing an
alleged Chinese Opium-trafficer who George portrayed right exactly on
the same lines as the comic image of Chinese pioneered in March of
1937 (Detective comics). George said his imaginary bustee was
a: “wrinkled, cadaverous Tong man with a drooping white mustache.”
My point being that these people USED comics to suit their agenda,
whatever it was, and changed towards them for the same reason. —
What could George and Fredric be doing together? Unclear. But
what is clear, is that within a few years that Truth Drug committee is
going to get going, and Wertham is kind of an authority on mescaline
and apparently also marijuana.
1940 February – A graduate of the Queens University Faculty of

Medicine in Kingston, Ontario, Dr. Smith joined the A.M.A. staff after
completing his residency, becoming the organization’s director of
therapy and research. After writing “The Drugs You Use,” (Revere,
1948,) a practical guide to the proper use of drugs, he was made editor
of the organization’s journal in 1949. (NY Times 1993 obituary) —Prior
to being JAMA editor he was the Secretary for the Council on Pharmacy
and Chemistry American Medical Association. (Science 20 Aug 1943)
—He was also the Director of the Division of Therapy and
Research, appointed apparently in February 1940 just as World War II
was getting going. Convenient, considering things like the Truth Drug
Committee were going to start up “researching” in a little over two years
later.
1940 April 2 — You probably don’t know that Oxygen pressures were
also being experimented with by the US Navyrevealing that pressure at
four atmospheres could be a treatment for Schizophrenia because it
mimicked the effects of insulin shock therapy (NY Times 2 April 1940)
1940 June 18 – Dr. Rees gave his address entreating his fellow
psychiatrists and psychologists) to be a “fifth columnist”
and infiltrate novels (which included comics) and other sources of
fiction read by Joe Average. What does one do to infiltrate?
One pretends to be supportive of something. Right exactly at this time –
John Rawlings Rees and his Tavistock Clinic boys are taking over
psychiatry in the British Army in World War II. (The Reckoning M.
McClaughry; The British Way V. McClaughry) and on 18 June 1940 is
when John Rees gives an Address to the Annual Meeting of the
National Council for Mental Hygiene where he asks for everyone (like
Wertham) to be “fifth columnists”. Let us all, therefore, very secretly
be “fifth columnists”[…]long termplanning …the right kind of
propaganda.” fifth column – a group of secret supporters of an enemy
that engage in espionage, sabotage, and other subversive activities
within the borders of a nation. —Rees also had said: we have done
much to infiltrate…a number of professions. …the two most difficult
are law and medicine.
1940 October- Dr. Rees address published in Mental Health magazine,

Vol. 1 No. 4.
1941 – Right on cue, just one year later, together with Reginald S.
Lourie, M.D., Lauretta Bender published an article in the American
Journal of Orthopsychiatry XI titled “The Effect of Comic Books on the
Ideaology of Children” discussing the therapeutic effects of comics on
children. (reprinted in Alter Ego #87 & #88) and… Voila!
1941 June 28 – less than six months before Pearl Harbor, Roosevelt
signed the Executive Order creating the Office of Scientific Research
and Development (OSRD), with Vannevar Bush as Director, personally
responsible to the traitorous President Roosevelt. As Director of OSRD,
Bush was given “final responsibility for the entire program of civilian
scientific research and development, not only in the fields of
instrumentalities of warfare, but also in all fields of military
medicine.” The NDRC, itself transferred intact from the Council of
National Defense to the new OSRD…and a new Committee
on Medical Research (CMR) was established. —- Both Overholser
and Harry Stack Sullivan were known for their secretive human
experiments they did in the name of “mental healing. Overholser as
Superintendent at Saint Elizabeths Hospital and Harry Stack Sullivan as
the leading psychiatrist at Chestnut Lodge (an extremely creepy
place). They were hiding what they were doing to people under this
military “medical research” and “personnel selection”.
1941 December – Report on the Office of Censorship (WWII) shows

that Byron Price, a newspaperman, was made the Director of
Censorship in December 1941 under the newly created Office of
Censorship. On of their main target is comics, and there’s Loretta
Bender right in position. (see 1942)
1942 January – The Writers’ War Board was created January 1942 in
New York City. The President was Rex Stout. It was already secretly
controlled by the British of course, but it looked like it was independent.
Stout was even one of the people that the BSC spy organization used
to help legitimize their front group called “Friends of Democracy”, he
was even made its President (NY Times article Nov. 1942) but Stout
was also involved in sponsoring the BSC’s founded in 1941 Fight for
Freedom front group that had a membership of practically the Who’s
Who in intelligence. So, his Writers War Board was
a completely controlled INTELLIGENCE operation. The outer story was
that the WWB was staffed by “volunteers” committed to the creation of
anti-fascist, pro-American culture, but in reality it would soon receive
both funding (pay) and direction from the OWI via Mr. Sherwood (you
can watch him dissemble about it and leave out the British
intelligence connection to the Senate in 1944 here) . Sherwood made
sure that Stout’s writers would weave images and stories in various
comics and fanzines for civilians and servicemen, all designed to fuel a
hatred of “fascism”. Some obvious examples can be found here. An
interesting side note is that by 1943, Robert Rosen was shown as the
Chairman of the War Writer’s Board or WWB. (Variety 1943) I don’t
know what that was about, but another Variety article showed just how
much power this Board actually wielded, including on Hollywood,
uilizing a “five bombs” rating for ignorance, indifference or
shortsighedness against a film called “Mission to Moscow”. Teachers in
Illinois were even directed to instruct students not to watch the film.
1942 – Shortly after her article appeared, in 1942 DC comics hired Dr.
Bender to head their Editorial Advisory Board. Well, that’s about perfect,
right? Infiltration complete. For the next 10+ years, her name could be
seen in virtually every DC comic. But, don’t forget the timing here,
because we’re right in the middle of World War II and what was the
forerunner to the OSS (itself predecessor to the CIA) the COI or
Coordinator of Information was planned to be split into two
organizations. The Office of War Information, the OWI – which was led
by a totally British controlled Round Table man Elmer Davis handled all
media propaganda, and the OSS, the spy organization, also led by a
totally British and Vatican controlled man – William Donovan. Both of
which were covertly controlled by the British Security
Coordination – a spy organization established to make sure
American got in and stayed in the war the British Round Table men
wanted fought.
1942 – The C.V. that Wertham prepared for the 1954 Senate Hearings
(p. 80) specifically mentions: Psychiatric consultant to the Chief
Censor of the United States Treasury Department. That is NOT in
his LOC papers listing. Odd, don’t you think? So that tells
us when Wertham would have been doing this AND that it was during
WWII. This ties directly to the War Writers Board and the Office of War
Information (OWI) because in 1942 the Advertising Research
Foundation released a study that determined that the comics
section of the newspaper was the most read section of the paper by
adults (excluding the advertisements). A later study, performed by the
Market Research Company of America found that roughly half of the
U.S. population (about 70 million Americans), read comic
books. (Tales from the CodeSergi 2012) Although the author I took the
above from fails to realize the connection of all this to the Writers War
board, the outlet the OWI used to change ALL comics content (and
fanzines, and a whole lot else), it’s still a great history of the
surrounding events, so I am going to excerpt it directly – In response,
the Bureau of Intelligence (the predecessor to today’s FBI and
successor to much of the CPI) created a series of intelligence reports
analyzing the content of comics at the time for use by the Office of War
Information (the OWI). The OWI did not like what they saw in these
intelligence reports. First, two thirds of the comics surveyed had nothing
to do with the war effort and the ones that did were not concerned with
fighting or winning the war and the themes of the books were
inconsistent with the goals of the OWI. As Richard L. Graham states in
his book, Government Issue, Comics for the People, 1940s-
2000s: Perhaps it was the comics’ portrayal of the enemy during this
time that was most troubling to the OWI. The Bureau of Intelligence
observed that mainstream comic strips at the time had no trouble using
exaggerated physical stereotypes, depicting Nazis as Teutonic buffoons
and the Japanese as blood-drooling torturers. While these
characterizations of the enemy as “the other” provided an impetus for
hatred and stirred strong emotional reactions at home and abroad, they
were often accompanied by portrayals o( the enemy as lazy and posing
little threat. The OWl felt these depictions were too simplistic and
misleading and could lead to overconfidence (although this didn’t
necessarily stop the OWl from using similar depictions in its own
materials). As a result, the OWI created their own media division to
distribute comics that would promote its own messages about civilian
sacrifice and the importance of the war effort. This division also assisted
other agencies to get their messages out. These organizations
included: the Department of the Treasury, the Federal Security Agency,
and the branches of the United States Military. Government comics
were re-born.—Interesting, eh? You might also want to peruse this
article, it gives some great historic examples about how wartime
censorship actually continued after WWII, covertly. It was called by
President Eisenhower “News Management”. —Overall, I think I’m
beginning to see another reason for keeping Wertham’s files
“locked” unil 2010. (Tilley, Seducing the Innocent 2012)
1942 April — Wertham joined the WWII effort in what was called the
Fourth Registration, often called the “Old Man’s Draft,” because it
registered men who were 45 to 64 years old at the time. The men had
to fill out an extensive questionnaire allegedly just to collect information
on the industrial capacity and skills of these older men, not to draft
them. And what was one of Wertham’s skills from 1932? Working
with personality-changing, psychosis inducing drugs like
mescaline. Twisting thought. —Overholser was “consultant” to the
Office of Scientific Research and Development, the OSRD, where he
would head up the truth drug committee that was coordinated under
Chadwell’s Division 19 together with the OSS (precursor to the CIA)
psychological assessment unit. At the same time, Overholser was also
CHAIRMAN of the National Research Council’s Committee on
Neuropsychiatry which worked to secure military status for civilian
occupational therapists. He chaired the first meeting, the Conference on
Occupational Therapy on 15 May 1942, barely 2 weeks after Fredric’s
draft questionnaire had been submitted. (Army WWII Medical history)
—I think it’s a good possibility that Fredric helped out the OSS Truth
Drug Committee in some way, and perhaps even with the Manhattan
Project testing of the drug chosen in the end, a variant of
marijuana. But what did they try first? Mescaline.And only six
months after Wertham had done his draft documents.——And
another reason for keeping Wertham’s files “locked” unil 2010.
(Tilley, Seducing the Innocent 2012) I don’t blame the Library of
Congress for that, they had to have been ordered to keep these files
unavailable.
1942 – June OWI created. The OWI would take a keen interest in
comics and fanzines because they offered a cover (intelligence cover)
means of spreading propaganda to a HUGE audience. Nearly half of all
U.S. servicemen were regular comic and fanzine readers. Comics were
also uncensored, so propagandists could use levels of violence, racism,
and sexuality to create totally racist propaganda against the “enemies”
in WWII. And because its comics, hey, “we” (the U.S. government) don’t
look like we did it. Perfect deniability.
1942 October – At the request of the Psychological Warfare Branch of

N.I.S, Division 19, of the NDRC (which now came under the OSRD) a
committee was “activated” to investigate the feasibility of using drugs in
the interrogation of Prisoners of War, that was just the
“acceptable” shore story. Responsibility for the facilitation of the
Committee’s efforts was transferred from N.I.S. to the Office of
Research and Development of the OSS on January 1, 1943. —This
was the truth drug committee headed by Overholser.— In this
postabout the activities about the British Security Coordination – I go
into quite a bit of detail about this Committee, tracking down details and
photos of every single member of it. I highly suggest you peruse it. But
who else was “over” this, and quite secretly too, was Division
19. Division 19, formed in June 1940, was a highly
secretive combined OSS and National Defense Research
Committee (OS-RDB) organization headed by the equally little
known Dr. H. Marshall Chadwell. The now newly re-named Division
19’s first project was the ‘special weapons project’ which included
obtaining and field testing drugs like LSD, concentrated marijuana, etc.,
but it also included the “Mafia Plan” or Operation Underworld – both of
which were headed by Chadwell recruit and now OSS man George
Hunter White. Why any of that is relevant is because of the first end
result of that infamous Truth Drug Committee – testing on
Manhattan Project personnel. (see 1943 September 25 entry of ACIM
timeline)
1943 — Fifth Column – and right in the middle of WWII – Wertham’s c.v.
as given to the Senate in 1954 — 1943-1951 President of the
Association for the Advancement of Psychotherapy; co-editor of the
American Journal of Psychotherapy. Why was this done right in the
middle of World War II? It was created to advance methods of
psychotherapy among members of the medical professionand to
familiarize members with progress in the field. JAMA August 1943 #122
p. 1267 Wertham Psychoanalysis and the scientific method— Why the
“medical” profession? Fifth column action, infiltrating the fields of
medicine – “Therapy” with Drugs is to be made the only
real acceptable form of psychotherapy.
1944 – WWII – Leo Bartemeier became the president of the American

Psychoanalytic Association 1944 -1945 (Leo’s papers) Reminder: It
was that same man, Pope Pius XI, Pacelli’s (Pius XII) mentor, who said
that there is a Spiritual Battle for the minds of men (Pius XI) —for the
evil we must combat is at its origin primarily an evil of the spiritual
order. From this polluted source the monstrous emanations of the
communistic system flow with satanic logic.– Pope Pius XI DIVINI
REDEMPTORIS (On Atheistic Communism) 19 March 1937 —Another
way of saying “spiritual” is mental – in the sense of you are talking
about the unseen realm of Man. His thoughts, his heart, his mind, so to
speak. What this Pope is saying is that is what he wants the focus on.
The MINDS of man. His DECISIONS. Which also happens to be the
realm of (and the reason for) propaganda in the first place. Jesuits (and
the top Catholic leaders) are ALL about messing with people’s
minds. That’s their real goal actually.—…[The Jesuit Society] it seeks
to rival the Divinity in its knowledge of the human heart. …with a
knowledge of mental architecture unsurpassed… The
Novitiate written in 1846 by former ‘novice’ Jesuit Andrew Steinmetz
1944 February and November — Thorvald Solberg was working on the

Manhattan project with Leslie Groves, joining the Tolman Committee in
November 1944. Tolman – as in Richard C. Tolman. “…in February
1944, he learned something of Abelson’s work on thermal diffusion at
Philadelphia. Of all the officers in the bureau at that time, Solberg
probably was the only one who had been exposed to any details
about the Manhattan project. Mills and Solberg joined the Tolman
committee early in November 1944 for a series of interviews with
scientists and engineers from all parts of the Manhattan
project. (Nuclear Navy 1946-1962 Richard G. Hewlett and Francis
Duncan; archived here.) Solberg was appointed as a deputy member by
Major General Leslie R. Groves himself. To do what? Admiral Solberg
had been a deputy member of the “Tolman Committee”, appointed by
Major General Leslie R. Groves in the fall of 1944, almost a year before
the “Trinity Test” of the atomic bomb at Alamogordo, New Mexico, to
investigate further technical developments in atomic energy for both
civilian and military purposes. This committee, under the chairmanship
of Mr. R. C. Tolman, had studied many suggestions from personnel
connected with the atomic energy projects concerning “the use of
nuclear energy for power and the use of radioactive by-products
for scientific, medical, and industrial purposes.” (An Administrative
History of the Bureau of Ships during World War II, Volume IV.)
1944 – Byron Price’s Office of Censorship had the FBI investigate John
W. Campbell’s Astounding Science-Fictionmagazine because of the
story Deadline by Cleve Cartmill, that it had in its March issue. Why?
Because it had a detailed description of an atomic bomb (Berger) and
they were worried that the then top secret Manhattan Project had a
“leak”.
1945 April 14 – I think it bears mentioning that given Wertham’s

involvement with the Office of Censorship during WWII, I think that he
became big-headed about the power he could wield through it as
“consultant”. In fact, one of the targets during the War was one of
Wertham’s later favorite targets to villify – Superman. But, it’s what it
was censored on (a connection the author fails to note), it was about
atom-smashing aka the highly top secret Manhattan Project was in a
comic! Even fiction was censored. A typical incident occurred on April
14, 1945, when the “Superman” comic strip published in most daily
newspapers showed the Man of Steel in a university physics lab, where
an evil professor told him, “The strange object before you is the
cyclotron-popularly known as an ‘atom smasher.’ Are you still prepared
to face this test, Mr. Superman?” When the Man of Steel accepted the
professor’s challenge, the assembled guests shouted in horror, “No,
Superman, wait! Even you can’t do it!”(“Superman,” Washington
Post, April 14, 1945, B7) The Office of Censorship complained to the
syndicate that distributed the comic strip, and the Superman plot was
promptly rewritten to eliminate any future reference to atom
smashing.
1945 April 21 – WWII – a commission of American “experts” arrived to

Europe to study the reasons for the large number of psychiatric
casualties turning up in the various area commands. Bartemeier was
elected head of the commission, which included Karl Menninger,
Lawrence Kubie, John Romano and John Whitehorn. (Leo’s papers)
The commission had intended to proceed in pairs or individually to
different active fronts but the collapse of German resistance mitigated
against such a plan. Instead, they basically hung out with the British
neuropsychiatrists at the 130th General Hospital. They would have
worked very closely with John Rawlings Rees, Eric Trist, and others
of the British Tavistock group. For some reason, in their after report they
made a big deal of what, to me, was their successful misleading of
patients that they saw. Misleading them as to that because they
were civilians, they were no danger to them. That’s about the biggest lie
you could possibly imagine when it comes to these guys, and what they
gloated about is the infiltration aspect they got away with – my
assessment of what they’re saying. See for yourself – Being civilians
facilitated the obtaining of information from some patients. It also
enabled us to identify ourselves very readily with either privates or
officers . . . because we were not, in fact, in any one of these positions
ourselves . . . We were not under any compulsion or obligation to find
ways of getting men back to duty. It was our function only to study the
conditions without the necessity of serving any utilitarian purpose by
which Army doctors are always bound and constrained. (Office of
Medical History; CHAPTER IV: European Theater of Operations) The
four men – Karl Menninger, being the brother of William
Menninger and the lovely man (extreme sarcasm) who instructed in
1942 about Child Sexual Abuse Being Good For Their Mental Health.—
John Romano – also Jesuit trained (at Marquette) was one of the
founding members of the Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry,
later part of its Committee on Medical Education together with Karl
Menninger and others. (GAP Report #8 April 1949) If you can believe
the hypocrisy, this guy actually wrote an article on medical ethics not
long before he died. In 1945, Romano was offered and accepted the
Chair of Psychiatry at the University of Rochester Medical School
(established 1920) until 1971; he was a founding member of the
National Institute of Mental Health—John Whitehorn, having just
gotten done helping out Dr. Overholser with the Truth Drug Committee
1942-44 (later moving on to being part of the board of the CIA front
group for MKULTRA experiments, the Society for the Investigation of
Human Ecology in 1957; Marks, Manchurian Candidate)—Lawrence
Kubie, also having just gotten done helping out Dr. Overholser with the
Truth Drug Committee 1942-44 (he also shows up mixed up
with Cybernetics in 1953).“On October 31, 1942, at the request or the
Psychological Warfare Branch of N.I.S., the National Research Council
activated a committee to investigate the feasibility of using drugs in the
interrogation of Prisoners of War. Responsibility for the facilitation of the
Committee’s efforts was transferred from N.I.S. to the Office of
Research and Development of the OSS, the precursor to the CIA, on 1
January 1943. The original committee consisted of Dr. Winfred
Overholser (chairman), Prof. of Psychiatry at George Wash. U. and
Director of St. Elizabeth’s Hospital, Wash., D.C.;Dr. John Clare
Whitehorn, Prof. of Psychiatry at Johns Hopkins;Dr. Edward A.
Strecker, [name misspelled as Stricker] Prof. of Psychiat. at U. Pa.;Dr.
Lawrence S. Kubie, Assoc. in Neurol. at the Nurological Institute
N.Y.C.(McClaughry, V., British Security Coordination Compendium
II: The Party Boys; Aug. 2014) Look who else was later added to the
committee – Karl Menninger’s brother William. Those Menningers, they
sure get around. Almost as much as Overholser. —Col. R.D.
Halloran of the Surgeon General’s Office, Director of and implemented
the new Neuropsychiatry Division in August 1942. Dr. Winfred
Overholser presented a bronze plaque in memory of him at the Walter
Reed Army Medical Center, in 1954, crediting Colonel Halloran with
establishing the groundwork for the Army’s present-day psychiatric
program. He died at his desk November 10 1943, William C.
Menninger replaced him.Mentioned in connection with “shell shock”
and Fear studies in Popular Science, August 1943.(click to enlarge) —
Important Note – it just so happens that the Tavistock boys, right at the
time of the Truth Drug committee shifting under the OSS, were there in
the U.S. doing “tours” of American Hospitals. Note that particularly John
Rees, and Dr. Hargreaves were the poster-boys for these happy (I’m
being sarcastic) little gatherings. —-What were these “psychiatric
casualties” Bartemeier is the pied piper leading them all to examine?
You can actually see it starting to be advertised in that Popular
Mechanic magazine above, but it was just exactly as as what happened
in WWI – People that didn’t want to kill for them any more. Can’t
have that, right? (these people are cowards, they never fight their own
wars directly and are veryvindictive against people won’t fight for them).
Only this time, instead of calling it shell shock, or battle neurosis – know
what Bartemeier and friends would call it now? Combat Exhaustion. —
Just exactly how did they end up on this mission? Well, they kind of
elected themselves, in a manner of speaking. Two of those four men
(besides Bartemeier) were on the Committee on Neuropsychiatry of the
National Research Council – formed in October 1940. Guess who
headed it? Dr. Overholser. Yep. That’s right, That gives us our
Overholser tie-in to the AMA through Bartemeier. The other
members were Drs. Franklin G. Ebaugh, Foster Kennedy, Adolf Meyer,
Tracy Putnam and Harry Steckel (who was also on the Truth Drug
committee) John Whitehorn and I believe Romano as well. However, by
the time this little mission was formed in 1945, Overholser’s committee
was actually under the new OSRD. see 1941 June 28 entry.
1945 August 15 – That same article points out something very

important, that the Office of Censorship was CLOSED on, the day after
the Japanese surrender after having nuclear bombs dropped on their
heads. (verified in Report on Office of Censorship p. 17,18) Thus,
Wertham’s consultancy also ended.
1945 September 2 — World War II officially ends
1945 – Classifying documents. Scientists involved with the [Manhattan]

project, nonetheless, advocated for more openness and freedom of
research, and project contractors pushed for the Army to declassify
reports relating to their wartime work. As a result, Groves in early
November 1945 asked Richard C. Tolman, a Caltech chemist and
scientific adviser to Groves, to draft a declassification policy. Tolman
assembled a committee composed of Robert Bacher, Ernest O.
Lawrence, J. Robert Oppenheimer, Frank Spedding, Harold Urey, and
John Ruhoff. (Smyth and Tolman Committee Reports) What was one of
the major results? Something us researchers still have to deal with even
now. CLASSIFIED redacted documents. In its report, the Tolman
Committee concluded that “in the interest of national welfare it might
seem that nearly all information should be released at once.” But
national welfare had to be considered in light of national security. Still,
“it is not the conviction of the [Tolman] Committee that the concealment
of scientific information can in any long term contribute to the national
security of the United States.” […] Thus, the Tolman Committee
concluded that secrecy could be justified for reasons of national
security and then only if “there is a likelihood of war within the next
five or ten years.” Applying this general philosophy to the question of
secrecy in medical research, it recommended that “all reports on
medical research and all health studies” be immediately
declassified except for those reports that contained information
independently classified in the interest of short-term national
security. While the Tolman Committee report generally advocated
openness, it also set the precedent for keeping declassification
guides secret. (Smyth and Tolman Committee Reports) OK, so let me
get this straight. Documents from CHATTER, BLUEBIRD etc. etc
are still redacted and it’s what…70 years later? So, by these rules,
apparently every decade for the last 70 years someone used the
excuse to not declassify them fully because WAR was expected within
“the next five or ten years”. Ergo, apparently WAR is still expected
(more like planned) even now?
1945/56 Winter – Literally as soon as WWII was over, per Senate

testimony Fredric Wertham started an investigation into comics in
the winter of 1945/46, helped by a “group of associates”. (listen to him
say that live at around 5:57) He said it was a “sober, painstaking,
laborious study.” (8:02 in the live testimony) Carol Tilley’s scholarly
article kind of shoots that all to hell and gone, because it turns out he
literally just made things up in this study of his.
1946 January 17, 22 and 24 – Operation Crossroads. The mission of

Joint Task Force One was publicly announced by its Commander on 24
January, when Vice Admiral Blandy told the Senate Committee on
Atomic Energy: “The mission of Joint Task Force One is primarily
to determine the effects of the atomic bomb upon naval vessels in
order to gain information of value to the national defense.” He also
announced that the atomic bomb tests had been assigned the code
name Operation Crossroads. …He then instructed Admiral Solberg to
prepare an administrative order setting up a special section in the
bureau to handle Crossroads work. This order, dated 22 January, set
up Code 180, the Crossroads Section; and on the same day
Admiral Solberg was designated as head of the section and
Captain Kniskern as his senior assistant. A number of officers took up
duties in the section immediately, and others were added as rapidly as
they could be freed from current duties. (An Administrative History of
the Bureau of Ships during World War II, Volume IV.)
1946 – Office of Naval Research (ONR) established “to plan, foster and
encourage scientific research.” The Chief of Naval Research
is the senior military officer in charge of scientific research in the United
States Navy. ONE of its divisions was Psychological research. All of
ONR’s scientific work is performed under its Research Group made up
of seven operating units- the Earth, Material, Physical, Mathematical,
Biological, Psychological and Naval Sciences Divisions.(November
1956 Navy magazine p.16 of PDF) Note: The above is followed by
rather overly innocent descriptions of each one. Under Biological and
Psychological we’ve got just a world of secret projects going on there.
1946 April 13 – It was Pius XII who initiated the covert intelligence
operation against America’s youth under the guise of “anti-
communism”. By April 13, 1946, it was announced – the Vatican had
officially entered the American Student political fray. This change in
church policy was heralded by Father John Courtney Murray, a
leading Jesuit and the religion editor of the prominent Catholic
journal America. “To wrest the initiative from those who have for
their goal the destruction of Christian civilization.” (Pius XII and
John Courtney Murray, “Operation University,” America, issue 75 April
13, 1946, 34-35;
You can read Operation University here.) — It was Pius XII
that heralded the infiltration of America’s universities
for mind control purposes – 1946.—“What the Holy See wants in
confronting the Soviet threat is an ‘Operation University…the intellectual
penetration of the university milieu—the winning of the universities,
professors and students, for the ideas that underlie peace and Christian
world order.” “Pius XII wants the Catholic international student
movement to be a strong ally in the mission upon which he has focused
the eyes of the universal church.”
1946 May – Bartemeier helped establish THE group for the

“Advancement of Psychiatry” (the Society for Biological Psychiatry
was also formed this year in January). If you try to look up what that
Group is, you get vague statements like this: “GAP was founded in May
1946 by a group of young psychiatrists who had served in World War
II.” But really, all 5 of these men who Overholser had approved going to
Europe, were right there in the beginning together with William C.
Menninger. ====William Menninger wrote: ” the founding group
was seeking a way in which American psychiatry could give more
forceful leadership, both medically and socially.” GAP’s later
formulated way of doing this, or one way, was to deliberately target and
discuss “controversial” psycho-social issues, evident in the 1950
Committee on Social Issues’ Report “The Social Responsibility of
Psychiatry, A Statement of Orientation” published out of New York.
THEY WANTED MORE EMPHASIS ON DRUGS. That’s what that is
really about. Here’s an example of a report coming out of New York.
The thing practically reads like a manifesto of what John Rawlings Rees
and the British wanted to see happen. BUT if we look earlier, we see
that GAP’s very first report was by the Committee on Therapy on the
subject of “promiscuous and indiscriminate use of electro-shock
therapy.” (Menninger, Notices and Bulletins. Psychosomatic
medicine Vol. 10 #1, January 1948) Look whose name is on the
Committee of Therapy – why, it’s George Raines! He’s still listed on it
in that January 1950 Report #8 —- Part of Sherman’s summary
document that we opened this Oliver Field section with verifies Omar
Garrison’s quoting of a letter from Theodore Wiprud to Austin E. Smith
evincing George N. Rainessupposed attitude towards Hubbard and
Dianetics.(Vol 4 of 18 p. 242 ) Notice that it says: “Captain George N.
Raines Navl Medical Center, Bethesda, Maryland knew both Winter and
Hubbard as “phonies.”.” And oh look! Who else is on that committee
with George? Why, it’s Lawrence Kubie of Leo Bertemeier’s special
little WWII team, who also was on the original Truth Drug committee
with Overholser. And Daniel Blaine, the President of the APA, was also
part of the Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry, on the same
Committee on Therapy that George N. Raines and Lawrence Kubie
were on. See Menninger, Notices and Bulletins. Psychosomatic
medicine Vol. 10 #1, January 1948 and January 1950 Report #8 —-
Such a small world. All right there in 1950, the same year that they all
wanted to kidnap Hubbard and his research to be just as out of view as
George Raines and Charles Savage Project CHATTER work.As you
now know, Wikipedia’s description of the 1946 founders as
“psychiatrists who had served in WWII” is quite the blandly euphemistic
way to describe who some of these people were and who they hired
and associated with. —-As another example, take Gardner Murphy,
the Director of Research at the Menninger Foundation. He was
chosen by Elmo Roper to be part of a secret “troika” – group of 3 –
psychologists to perform psychological warfare just before the COI
became the OSS – the precursor to the CIA. So that would have been
in 1942 approximately during WWII. Before WWII (also during and
after) Gardner Murphy was very active in telepathy researchfor the
ASPR (American Society of Psychical Research) You can have a look
at what that was all about in the relevant section of my library article
on William Dudley Pelley who was part of the “spiritual” propaganda
campaign the British were running back then. Gardner is also featured
in my Evil Twins #1 post about Ashtar, Galactic Federation, UFO-ology
as Religion – Scientology and Unification Church where Britisher
Anthony Brooke was helping proselytize Americans into believing that
Reverend Moon was connected with alien intelligences from Ashtar
command. Yep, it’s really that kooky. (I suggest you read the whole
thing) Here’s an example telepathy experiment Gardner was involved
with in 1937 –“Before leaving on a search for a missing plane near the
North Pole, arctic explorer and friend Sir Hubert Wilkins agreed to help
Sherman with an experiment in mind-to-mind communication. Each day
at a pre-arranged time, Wilkins attempted to send thoughts of what
had transpired that day to Sherman 3400 miles away in New York City.
Sherman recorded his impressions and immediately mailed the
transcripts to Gardner Murphy, head of the parapsychology
department at Columbia university, who registered and filed them.
When later compared to a diary Wilkins had kept, Sherman’s
impressions proved to be 70% accurate.” The full story is told in the
book Sherman and Wilkins co-authored, Thoughts Through
Space [Creative Age Press,1942]. – Harold
Sherman chronology. Gardner was also involved with essentially
supporting all these weird spin-off organizations to help the CIA spread
LSD among American youth – a subversion operation not an
“awakening” as so many dupes liked to think it was. This was while he
was working at the Menninger Foundation, which he started working at
in 1952, and as part of this “Group for the Advancement of
Psychiatry.”—-BIO – From 1952, he worked as director of research for
the Menninger Foundation in Topeka, Kansas. He was elected to the
presidency of the American Psychological Association in 1944. He
subsequently served as the President of the British Society for
Psychical Research in 1949 (which he had joined in 1917), and
was Director of the Parapsychology Foundation in 1951. Again, as
noted earlier, Karl Menninger, being the brother of William
Menninger and the lovely man (extreme sarcasm) who instructed
about Child Sexual Abuse Being Good For Their Mental Health – Proof
1946 – William Menninger and his good friend Leo Bartemeier go to

work work to try and take over the American Psychoanalytic
Society (founded in 1911) and turn it more “psychiatric” (which means
DRUGS) going on about how psychiatry is the “parent” or senior of the
psychoanalysts — doing John Rees’s work with a vengeance, I see.—
Leo had just been the President of that same Society from 1944-45.
(Leo’s papers)
1946 July 26 — The most destructive part of the blast was the cloud of
radioactive water. U.S. Army Photographic Signal Corps On July 26,
1946, the U.S. military tried a new type of nuclear test. A joint
Army/Navy task force had suspended a nuclear device, oddly named
Helen of Bikini, 90 feet below the surface of the water, in the middle of
Bikini Atoll, one of the isolated rings of coral and land that make up the
Marshall Islands. Arrayed around the 21-kiloton bomb were dozens of
target ships. When Helen of Bikini exploded, it created a giant,
underwater bubble of hot gas. In seconds, the bubble hit the seafloor,
where it blasted a crater 30 feet deep and at least 1,800 feet wide. At
the same time, the surface of lagoon erupted into a giant column of
water, two million tons of it, which shot more than 5,000 feet into
the air, over an area a half-mile wide. In the seconds after the blast hit
the surface, a cloud of radioactive condensation unfurled across the
lagoon, hiding the column of water shooting upwards. At the top, a
mushroom cloud of gas bloomed against the sky. That first underwater
test, the Baker event, instilled new awe for the power of the bomb. The
Navy had believed that many of the target ships could survive the blast,
be decontaminated, and sail out of the lagoon. But within two weeks,
Navy leaders had to admit that the ships were so soaked in radiation
that they couldn’t be saved, and the Marshall Islands became a
graveyard for irradiated vessels. After that, even in the years that the
United States and the Soviet Union regularly tested nuclear bombs,
only a few were ever underwater. (Atlas Obscura article from 2016) -
The “Navy” actually being Thorvald Solberg.
1946 October—Bartemeier’s commission men submitted a paper in

October 1946: Combat Exhaustion to the Journal of Nervous and
Mental Disease. (pps.104, 358–389; 489–
525. https://doi.org/10.1097/00005053-194610000-00002)
1947 – the OSS became the CIA, and the newly named intelligence
agency was authorized for propaganda including psychological
operations for which it immediately began recruiting psychologists to
spread the belief, promoted by the CIA within America’s borders, that –
…the Communist regimes in the Soviet Union and China had invented
secret, sophisticated mind control techniques, although the agency
knew the contention was unfounded (McCoy, 2006, p.34). They used
this false idea both to gain funding from Congress but also to generate
approval within the DOD for human experimentation projects along
these very lines.
1947 – The office of Naval Research had founded its “Psychological

Sciences” research program becoming the first extramural research
program of the DOD – the Department of Defense. “Within two years of
its initiation of the ONR research program, the Navy doled out 117
contracts at 58 universities under its newly founded Psychological
Sciences research program (Page, 1954). In the first five years of the
post-war period, the ONR provided $2million per year, or $16 million in
estimated equivalent [21 million in 2019 dollars], establishing this office
as the greatest single source of funding for psychological
research until the founding of the National Science Foundation (NSF)
in 1950 (Darley, 1957).” (2008 paper by psychologist Frank Summers.

Secret History of Dianetics 1950 - L. Ron Hubbard and Thorvald Solberg - The McClaughry's Blog 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Secret History of Dianetics 1950 - L. Ron Hubbard and Thorvald Solberg - The McClaughry's Blog 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Secret History of

~ Published December 2, 2019 ~

Dedicated to my honey, for our 35th Wedding Anniversary.

It is ONLY THAT BEINGwho

Did L. Ron Hubbard ever recognise or even acknowledge the

One thing first.

L. Ron Hubbard had actually incorporated an organization in New

This shows his intention to form an organization around his engram

How I discovered this man Solberg and his connection to L. Ron

These are pieces from 3 different lectures spanning a 4-year period –

The Genus of Dianetics and Scientology 31 December 1960

a very high-ranking officer, a very very very high-ranking

Ok. So it’s an ADMIRAL from the Office of Naval Research.

And there we have it.

As Hubbard put it:

this officer from the Office of Naval Research…This

Well, we’ll get to that.

In the lead up to when Solberg goes to London, Captain Charles A.

Something called The Technical Section of the London Naval Attache

Reference: [NAVY REVIEWED 13-Mar-2007: DECLASSIFIED IN

Captain T.A. Solberg became head of Technical Section, Naval

Solberg was relieved 27 February 1944 and returned to the United

Whatever he was up to in 1942 got him promoted to the rank of Rear

His biggest priority?

He was working on the

You know, the creation of the nuclear bomb project.

Early in the war he had distinguished himself as a liaison officer

Solberg was appointed as a deputy member by Major General Leslie R.

Admiral Solberg had been a deputy member of the “Tolman

The lead-up to the Tolman committee –

Scientists involved with the [Manhattan] project, nonetheless,

OK, so let me get this straight.

Documents from CHATTER, BLUEBIRD etc. etc are stillredacted and

I wonder what war that would be…

…The division of special weapons was tied to General Groves

17, 22 and 24 January 1946 – Operation Crossroads.

The mission of Joint Task Force One was publicly announced by

Around the middle of January, the Commander, Joint Task Force

On 17 January, Admiral Cochrane appointed Admiral

He then instructed Admiral Solberg to prepare an administrative

When Helen of Bikini exploded, it created a giant, underwater

Look at what his son John Buren said:

John Buren grew up in Montgomery County, the son of a career

And geez Louise. Thorvald and his “scientists” couldn’t even do a

Yep. That’s what happened.

A little background first, using one of my research timelines.

As discussed earlier, the Office of Naval Research (ONR) had been

All of ONR’s scientific work is performed under its Research Group

Note: The above is followed by rather overly innocent descriptions of

1947 – The office of Naval Research had founded its “Psychological

“During its tenth year, the Psychological Sciences Division of

That also included SECRET projects.

John G. Darley, “Psychology and the Office of Naval Research: A

Psychologists, such as McGill University’s Donald Hebb, whose

What kind of secret projects?

Ok, so on to other documentation about CHATTER that I found –

Project CHATTER – Biological and Psychological Weapons.

In the above, Black Vault’s founder had received an answer to an FOIA

94TH CONGRESS, 2d Session SENATE REPORT No. 94-755;

This is what it said –

Project CHATTER was a Navy program that began in the fall of

So, it’s a continuation of the OSS truth drug committee which

The navy became interested in mescaline as an interrogation